RFL Gard 8000

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GARD 8000 SYSTEM
NOTICE
The information in this manual is proprietary and confidential to RFL Electronics Inc. Any
reproduction or distribution of this manual, in whole or part, is expressly prohibited, unless written
permission is given by RFL Electronics Inc.
This manual has been compiled and checked for accuracy. The information in this manual does not
constitute a warranty of performance. RFL Electronics Inc. reserves the right to revise this manual and
make changes to its contents from time to time. We assume no liability for losses incurred as a result
of out-of-date or incorrect information contained in this manual.
Publication Number MC8000SYS

Printed In U.S.A.
Revised July 25, 2006 RFL Electronics Inc.
GARD 8000 SYS RFL Electronics Inc.

July 25, 2006 i 973.334.3100
WARRANTY
Except where noted, all RFL Electronics Inc. products come with a one-year warranty from date of delivery for
replacement of any part, which fails during normal operation. RFL will repair or, at its option, replace components that
prove to be defective at no cost to the Customer. All equipment returned to RFL Electronics Inc. must have an RMA
(Return Material Authorization) number, obtained by calling the RFL Customer Service Department. A defective part
should be returned to the factory, shipping charges prepaid, for repair or replacement FOB Boonton, N.J.
RFL Electronics Inc. is not responsible for warranty of peripherals, such as printers and external computers. The warranty
for such devices is as stated by the original equipment manufacturer. If you have purchased peripheral equipment not
manufactured by RFL, follow the written instructions supplied with that equipment for warranty information and how to
obtain service.
WARRANTY STATEMENT
RFL Electronics Inc. products are warranted against defects in material and workmanship for one year from the date of
shipment. During the warranty period, RFL will repair or, at its option, replace components that prove to be defective at no
cost to the customer, except the one-way shipping cost of the failed assembly to the RFL Customer Service facility in
Boonton, New Jersey.
This warranty does not apply if the equipment has been damaged by accident, neglect, misuse, or causes other than
performed or authorized by RFL Electronics Inc.
This warranty specifically excludes damage incurred in shipment to or from RFL. In the event an item is received in
damaged condition, the carrier should be notified immediately. All claims for such damage should be filed with the carrier.
NOTE
If you do not intend to use the product immediately, it is recommended that it be opened immediately after receiving and
inspected for proper operation and signs of impact damage.
This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties, whether expressed, implied or statutory, including but not limited to implied
warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. In no event shall RFL be liable, whether in contract, in
tort, or on any other basis, for any damages sustained by the customer or any other person arising from or related to loss of
use, failure or interruption in the operation of any products, or delay in maintenance or for incidental, consequential,
indirect, or special damages or liabilities, or for loss of revenue, loss of business, or other financial loss arising out of or in
connection with the sale, lease, maintenance, use, performance, failure, or interruption of the products.
Related Documentation:
GARD 8000 System Emulator:
When this CD is installed on your PC it will simulate a complete GARD System. Installation and
operation instructions are included on the CD which can be ordered from RFL Electronics or
downloaded from the RFL website at www.rflelect.com
The Emulator is shipped from the factory on one CD labeled SW8KEMUL0000001.
RFL Electronics Inc.

353 Powerville Road
Boonton Township, NJ 07005-9151
USA

July 25, 2006 ii 973.334.3100
CAUTION
FOR YOUR SAFETY
THE INSTALLATION, OPERATION, AND
MAINTENANCE OF THIS EQUIPMENT
SHOULD ONLY BE PERFORMED
BY QUALIFIED PERSONS.
WARNING:
The equipment described in this manual
contains high voltage. Exercise due care
during operation and servicing. Read the
safety summary on the reverse of this page.

July 25, 2006 iii 973.334.3100
SAFETY SUMMARY
The following safety precautions must be observed at all times during operation,
service, and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions, or
with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual, violates safety standards of design,
manufacture, and intended use of this product. RFL Electronics Inc. assumes no
liability for failure to comply with these requirements.
DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS

GROUND THE CHASSIS
OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT
The chassis must be grounded to reduce shock
hazard and allow the equipment to perform Because of the danger of introducing additional
properly. Equipment supplied with three-wire ac hazards, do not install substitute parts or make
power cables must be plugged into an approved unauthorized modifications to the equipment. The
three-contact electric outlet. All other equipment product may be returned to RFL for service and
is provided with a rear-panel protective earth repair, to ensure that all safety features are
terminal, which must be connected to a proper maintained.
electrical ground by suitable cabling. Refer to the
!
wiring diagram for the chassis or cabinet for the
location of the protective earth terminal. READ THE MANUAL
DO NOT OPERATE IN AN Operators should read this manual before
EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE attempting to use the equipment, to learn how to
OR IN WET OR DAMP AREAS use it properly and safely. Service personnel must
be properly trained and have the proper tools and
Do not operate the product in the presence of equipment before attempting to make adjustments
flammable gases or fumes, or in any area that is or repairs.
wet or damp. Operating any electrical equipment
under these conditions can result in a definite Service personnel must recognize that whenever
safety hazard. work is being done on the product, there is a
potential electrical shock hazard and appropriate
protection measures must be taken. Electrical
KEEP AWAY FROM
shock can result in serious injury, because it can
LIVE CIRCUITS cause unconsciousness, cardiac arrest, and brain
damage.
Operating personnel should never remove
covers. Component replacement and internal
Throughout this manual, warnings appear before
adjustments must be done by qualified service
procedures that are potentially dangerous, and
personnel. Before attempting any work inside the
cautions appear before procedures that may result
product, disconnect it from the power source and
in equipment damage if not performed properly.
discharge the circuit by temporarily grounding it.
The instructions contained in these warnings and
This will remove any dangerous voltages that
cautions must be followed exactly.
may still be present after power is removed.

July 25, 2006 iv 973.334.3100
WARNING!
ON INITIAL INSTALLATION, ENSURE THAT ALL MODULES ARE FULLY
SEATED INTO CONNECTORS BEFORE POWERING ON UNIT.
CAUTION
THE GARD 8000 CONTAINS STATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES. PERSONS
WORKING ON THIS EQUIPMENT MUST OBSERVE ELECTRO STATIC
DISCHARGE (ESD) PRECAUTIONS BEFORE REMOVING THE FRONT COVER
OR WORKING ON THE REAR OF THE CHASSIS. AS A MINIMUM YOU MUST
DO THE FOLLOWING: USE ANTI-STATIC DEVICES SUCH AS WRIST STRAPS
AND FLOOR MATS, AND LEAVE MODULES IN THEIR ANTI-STATIC BAGS
UNTIL THEY ARE READY TO BE INSTALLED.
WARNING!
YOUR GARD 8000 TERMINAL MAY BE EQUIPPED WITH FIBER OPTIC
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULES THAT HAVE FIBER OPTIC EMITTER HEADS.
FIBER OPTIC EMITTER HEADS USE A LASER LIGHT SOURCE THAT
PRODUCE INVISIBLE RADIATION. FIBER OPTIC COMMUNICATION
SYSTEMS ARE INHERENTLY SAFE IN NORMAL OPERATION BECAUSE ALL
RADIATION IS CONTAINED IN THE SYSTEM. IT IS POSSIBLE DURING
MAINTENANCE TO EXPOSE THE RADIATION BY REMOVING OR BREAKING
THE FIBER. STARING DIRECTLY INTO THE LIGHT BEAM MAY RESULT IN
PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE AND/OR BLINDNESS. NEVER LOOK DIRECTLY
INTO THE LIGHT BEAM AND BE CAREFUL NOT TO SHINE THE LIGHT
AGAINST ANY REFLECTIVE SURFACE.
THE LASER SOURCE IS A CLASS I LASER PRODUCT WHICH COMPLIES

WITH APPLICABLE FDA, OSHA AND ANSI STANDARDS.

July 25, 2006 v 973.334.3100
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS ........................................................................................................................................................ vi
TABLE OF FIGURES ............................................................................................................................................................ ix
TABLE OF TABLES............................................................................................................................................................. xv
Section 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION .............................................................................................................................. 1-1
Section 2. APPLICATIONS.................................................................................................................................................. 2-1

2.1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 FEATURES................................................................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3 GARD 8000 ARCHITECTURE ................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.4 GARD 8000 BASE SYSTEM................................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.5 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES ....................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.6 SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDING (SOE).................................................................................... 2-20
2.7 INPUT/OUTPUT MODULES .................................................................................................................................. 2-20
2.8 TELEPROTECTION SYSTEM................................................................................................................................ 2-21
2.9 DISTANCE PROTECTION TERMINAL ................................................................................................................ 2-22
2.10 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION........................................................................................................ 2-23
2.11 POWER LINE CARRIER....................................................................................................................................... 2-23
2.12 AUX COMMUNICATIONS CHANNEL .............................................................................................................. 2-24
2.13 REMOTE SERVICE CHANNEL ........................................................................................................................... 2-26
Section 3. TECHNICAL DATA ........................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 DISTANCE PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................... 3-7
3.5 POWER LINE CARRIER SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................... 3-8
Section 4. INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING...................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 INTRODUCTION....................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 UNPACKING ............................................................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.3 MOUNTING ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.4 VENTILATION .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.5 CONNECTIONS......................................................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.6 COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES........................................................................................................................ 4-13
Section 5. SYSTEM USER INTERFACE ............................................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1 WEB SERVER............................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 DETERMINING THE VERSION OF INTERNET EXPLORER ON YOUR PC...................................................... 5-5
5.3 GARD 8000 IP ADDRESSES .................................................................................................................................... 5-6
5.4 FRONT PANEL OF SYSTEM DISPLAY WITH TPS MODULE .......................................................................... 5-23
5.5 PDA........................................................................................................................................................................... 5-23
5.6 HOW TO ACCESS THE GARD 8000 LOGIN PAGE ............................................................................................ 5-24
5.7 CHASSIS CONFIGURATION STATUS PAGE ..................................................................................................... 5-24
5.8 HOW TO CONFIGURE A PC TO CONNECT TO THE GARD8000 RS-232 PORT WITH WINDOWS XP OR
2000................................................................................................................................................................................. 5-28
Section 6. MODULE DESCRIPTIONS................................................................................................................................ 6-1

6.1 CONTROLLER MODULE......................................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2 DISPLAY WITH TPS MODULE............................................................................................................................. 6-11
6.3 DIGITAL TPS MODULE......................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.4 AUDIO TONE TPS MODULE................................................................................................................................. 6-16
6.5 POWER LINE CARRIER MODULES .................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.6 SYSTEM I/O MODULES......................................................................................................................................... 6-26
6.7 DISCRETE I/O BASE MODULE AND I/O MODULES ........................................................................................ 6-32
July 25, 2006 vi 973.334.3100
6.8 COMMS I/O BASE MODULE AND COMMS MODULES ................................................................................... 6-37
6.9 POWER SUPPLY MODULE ................................................................................................................................... 6-41
6.10 MIDPLANE ............................................................................................................................................................ 6-45
6.11 CURRENT LIMIT MODULE ................................................................................................................................ 6-45
Section 7. CHASSIS CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ........................................................................................................ 7-1

7.1 MODULE SETTINGS ................................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.2 SYSTEM LABELS AND TRIGGERS ..................................................................................................................... 7-64
7.3 ALARM CONFIGURATION................................................................................................................................... 7-81
7.4 FILE OPERATIONS................................................................................................................................................. 7-85
7.5 SYSTEM LOGIC CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................................... 7-91
Section 8. SYSTEM LOGIC .................................................................................................................................................8-1

8.1 LOGIC OVERVIEW .................................................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 LOGIC GATES........................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.3 LOGIC CONFIGURATION ....................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.4 DEFAULT TPS LOGIC............................................................................................................................................ 8-14
8.5 DEFAULT TPS & DISTANCE LOGIC ................................................................................................................... 8-16
8.6 LOGIC DESIGN RESERVED I/O ........................................................................................................................... 8-20
Section 9. TELEPROTECTION ........................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 TELEPROTECTION OVERVIEW ............................................................................................................................ 9-1
9.2 TELEPROTECTION APPLICATIONS ..................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.3 TELEPROTECTION SETTINGS............................................................................................................................... 9-5
Section 10. POWER LINE CARRIER................................................................................................................................ 10-1

10.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 FSK OPERATION .................................................................................................................................................. 10-2
10.3 ON-OFF OPERATION ........................................................................................................................................... 10-5
10.4 SETTING THE TX CARRIER FREQUENCY RANGE........................................................................................ 10-8
10.5 TX LEVEL METER CALIBRATION.................................................................................................................... 10-9
10.6 REFLECTED POWER METER CALIBRATION ............................................................................................... 10-10
Section 11. TESTS AND DIAGNOSTICS ......................................................................................................................... 11-1

11.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2 INPUT MODULE TEST......................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.3 OUTPUT MODULE TEST..................................................................................................................................... 11-6
11.4 COMMUNICATIONS MODULES...................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.5 AUDIO TONE MODULE TEST .......................................................................................................................... 11-39
11.6 PLC MODULE TEST ........................................................................................................................................... 11-44
11.7 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL RELAY TEST....................................................................................................... 11-49
Section 12. AUDIO TONE ................................................................................................................................................. 12-1
Section 13. DISTANCE RELAY ........................................................................................................................................ 13-1

13.1 DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 GENERAL OVERVIEW ........................................................................................................................................ 13-1
13.3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................................................. 13-2
13.4 STANDARDS AND TYPE TESTS........................................................................................................................ 13-6
13.5 CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................................................ 13-8
13.6 DISTANCE RELAY SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................... 13-16
13.7 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION ....................................................................................................................... 13-53
13.8 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS REPORTS AND FAULT RECORDING................................................................ 13-132
Continued………

July 25, 2006 vii 973.334.3100
Section 14. Current Differential Relay ................................................................................................................................ 14-1
14.1 OVERVIEW............................................................................................................................................................ 14-1
14.2 CONFIGURATION ................................................................................................................................................ 14-2
14.3 RELAY SETTINGS.............................................................................................................................................. 14-12
14.4 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL RELAY STATUS ................................................................................................. 14-30
14.5 APPLICATIONS................................................................................................................................................... 14-43
14.6 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS AND OSCILLOGRAPHY ........................................................................................ 14-65
Section 15. INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................. 15-1

July 25, 2006 viii 973.334.3100
TABLE OF FIGURES
Figure 2-1. GARD 8000 3U Chassis Front and Rear View................................................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-2. GARD 8000 6U Chassis Front and Rear View................................................................................................... 2-3
Figure 2-3. GARD 8000 Conceptual design ......................................................................................................................... 2-6
Figure 2-4. Front and Rear of 3U Chassis ............................................................................................................................ 2-8
Figure 2-5. GARD 8000 DC Connection diagram, 3U Distance Relay Plus Teleprotection System ................................... 2-9
Figure 2-6. Alarm configurations ........................................................................................................................................ 2-11
Figure 2-7. Antenna............................................................................................................................................................ 2-12
Figure 2-8. Programmable LEDs ........................................................................................................................................ 2-14
Figure 2-9. Default Configuration for GARD 8000 with Distance Relay........................................................................... 2-15
Figure 2-10. Communication interface................................................................................................................................ 2-17
Figure 2-11. Typical GARD 8000 Aux Communication Channel Application .................................................................. 2-25
Figure 2-12. Remote Access Service Channels (Maximum Complexity Example)............................................................ 2-26
Figure 4-1. Mounting dimensions for GARD 8000 3U chassis ............................................................................................ 4-3
Figure 4-2. Mounting dimensions for GARD 8000 6U Chassis............................................................................................ 4-3
Figure 4-3. Power Supply I/O Module (Teleprotection Commissioning) ........................................................................... 4-14
Figure 4-4. GARD 8000 Controller Module (Teleprotection Commissioning) .................................................................. 4-14
Figure 4-5. Power Supply I/O Module (Audio-Tone Commissioning)............................................................................... 4-27
Figure 4-6. GARD 8000 Controller Module (Audio-Tone Commissioning) ...................................................................... 4-27
Figure 4-7. PLC Analog Module Test Points ...................................................................................................................... 4-42
Figure 5-1. GARD 8000 Log-In Page ................................................................................................................................... 5-1

Figure 5-2. Front View Of 6U Chassis showing locations of RJ-45 and RS-232 ports ........................................................ 5-2
Figure 5-3. Rear View Of 6U Chassis showing location of RJ-45 (or Fiber Optic) and RS-232 ports ................................. 5-3
Figure 5-4. Front view of 3U chassis showing locations of RJ-45 and RS-232 ports ........................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-5. Rear view of 3U chassis showing location of RJ-45 (or Fiber Optic) and RS-232 ports.................................... 5-4
Figure 5-6. Configuring a PC using Windows XP or 2000 ................................................................................................... 5-6
Figure 5-7. Local Area Connections Properties .................................................................................................................... 5-7
Figure 5-8. Internet Protocol Properties/Alternate Configuration ......................................................................................... 5-8
Figure 5-9. Internet protocol properties/IP Address .............................................................................................................. 5-9
Figure 5-10. Configuring PC for Windows 95/98/ME........................................................................................................ 5-10
Figure 5-11. Network .......................................................................................................................................................... 5-10
Figure 5-12. Select Network Component Type................................................................................................................... 5-11
Figure 5-13. Select Network Client window ....................................................................................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-14. Select Network Component Type dialog box ................................................................................................. 5-12
Figure 5-15. Select Network Protocol window ................................................................................................................... 5-13
Figure 5-16. TCP/IP Properties window ............................................................................................................................. 5-13
Figure 5-17. Administrator Login ....................................................................................................................................... 5-16
Figure 5-18. Access Administrations Page.......................................................................................................................... 5-17
Figure 5-19. Main Web Page (3U Chassis shown) ............................................................................................................. 5-18
Figure 5-20. TCP/IP Address setup (Sheet 1 of 2) .............................................................................................................. 5-19
Figure 5-21. Communication Overview (Typical) .............................................................................................................. 5-22
Figure 5-22. Typical Chassis Configuration Status page for 3U chassis............................................................................. 5-25
Figure 5-23. Typical Chassis Configuration Status page for 6U chassis............................................................................. 5-26
Figure 6-1. Module Placement In GARD 8000 3U Chassis.................................................................................................. 6-2

Figure 6-2. Module Placement In GARD 8000 6U Chassis.................................................................................................. 6-3
Figure 6-3. Controls and indicators locator drawing for Controller module ......................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-4. Chassis Configuration Status web page for 6U Chassis With Redundancy...................................................... 6-10
Figure 6-5. Controls and indicators locator drawing for Display With TPS module .......................................................... 6-12
Figure 6-6. Controls and indicators locator drawing for Digital TPS module..................................................................... 6-15
Figure 6-7. Controls and indicators locator drawing for Audio Tone TPS module............................................................. 6-17
Figure 6-8. PLC Digital Module ......................................................................................................................................... 6-19
Figure 6-9. PLC Analog Module Top View........................................................................................................................ 6-22
Figure 6-10. PLC Analog Module Panel View ................................................................................................................... 6-23
Figure 6-11. Power Amp Section of PLC Analog Module.................................................................................................. 6-23
July 25, 2006 ix 973.334.3100
Figure 6-12. GARD 8000 6U System I/O modules , rear panel views................................................................................ 6-27
Figure 6-13. GARD 8000 6U System I/O module, board view showing jumper locations ................................................ 6-28
Figure 6-14. GARD 8000 3U System I/O modules , rear panel views................................................................................ 6-29
Figure 6-15. GARD 8000 3U System I/O module, board view showing jumper locations ................................................ 6-30
Figure 6-16. Component side of Input Unit (500805)......................................................................................................... 6-32
Figure 6-17. Top and Rear views of Discrete I/O Base module.......................................................................................... 6-33
Figure 6-18. Top and Rear views of Discrete I/O Base module.......................................................................................... 6-34
Figure 6-19. Component side of Relay Output Unit (500815) ............................................................................................ 6-35
Figure 6-20. Top and Rear view of Discrete I/O Base module ........................................................................................... 6-36
Figure 6-21. Top and Front views of Comms I/O Base module.......................................................................................... 6-39
Figure 6-22. Panel views of various types of Comms I/O modules available ..................................................................... 6-40
Figure 6-23. Power Supply I/O module, rear panel view .................................................................................................... 6-43
Figure 6-24. Current Limit I/O Module terminal block connections................................................................................... 6-46
Figure 7-1. Chassis Configuration Settings web page for 3U chassis ................................................................................... 7-1
Figure 7-2. Chassis Configuration Settings web page for 6U Chassis With Redundancy .................................................... 7-2
Figure 7-3. Input Card in slot #2 Rear Left web page ........................................................................................................... 7-3
Figure 7-4. Chassis Configuration Settings web page........................................................................................................... 7-5
Figure 7-5. Relay Output Card in slot #4 Rear Left web page .............................................................................................. 7-6
Figure 7-6. Chassis Configuration Settings web page........................................................................................................... 7-8
Figure 7-7. Communications System Configuration web page............................................................................................. 7-9
Figure 7-8. Chassis Configuration Settings web page......................................................................................................... 7-12
Figure 7-9. Teleprotection Channel Configuration at slot #1 Front web page .................................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-10. Teleprotection Channel Configuration at slot #1 Front web page .................................................................. 7-14
Figure 7-11. TPS Channel 1 slot #1 Front web page........................................................................................................... 7-15
Figure 7-12. Chassis Configuration Settings web page....................................................................................................... 7-18
Figure 7-13. Communications System Configuration web page......................................................................................... 7-19
Figure 7-14. Communications Time Slot Configuration web page..................................................................................... 7-20
Figure 7-15. Async Comms Configuration ......................................................................................................................... 7-21
Figure 7-16. Async Comms Channel Settings..................................................................................................................... 7-21
Figure 7-17. Async Comms Channel Settings..................................................................................................................... 7-23
Figure 7-18. Async Comms Status web page...................................................................................................................... 7-24
Figure 7-19. Communications Time Slot Configuration web page for Async Comms Module ......................................... 7-25
Figure 7-21. Audio Tone Configuration Web page............................................................................................................. 7-27
Figure 7-22. Audio Tone General Settings Web page......................................................................................................... 7-28
Figure 7-23. Audio Tone Channel 1 Settings Web page ..................................................................................................... 7-31
Figure 7-24. Audio Tone Status Web page ......................................................................................................................... 7-35
Figure 7-25. Audio Tone, General Status Web page........................................................................................................... 7-36
Figure 7-26. Audio Tone, Channel Status Web page .......................................................................................................... 7-39
Figure 7-27. Audio Tone, Modem Status Web page ........................................................................................................... 7-43
Figure 7-29. Power Line Carrier Configuration Web page ................................................................................................. 7-48
Figure 7-30. Power Line Carrier General Settings Web page ............................................................................................. 7-49
Figure 7-31. Power Line Carrier Checkback Settings (on-off only) Web page (page 1 of 2) ............................................. 7-53
Figure 7-32. PLC Status Web page ..................................................................................................................................... 7-58
Figure 7-33. PLC General Status Web page........................................................................................................................ 7-59
Figure 7-34. PLC Counter Values Web page ...................................................................................................................... 7-62
Figure 7-35. Chassis Configuration Status web page.......................................................................................................... 7-64
Figure 7-36. System Labels and Time web page................................................................................................................. 7-65
Figure 7-38. LED Logic Assignments web page................................................................................................................. 7-68
Figure 7-39. Input Card in slot#2 Rear Left web page ........................................................................................................ 7-70
Figure 7-41. Sequence of Events Configuration web page ................................................................................................. 7-72
Figure 7-42. System Counters web page ............................................................................................................................. 7-75
Figure 7-44. Logic Bit Labels web page ............................................................................................................................. 7-77

July 25, 2006 x 973.334.3100
Figure 7-46. Edit HMI Labels web page ............................................................................................................................. 7-80
Figure 7-48. Alarm Configurations web page ..................................................................................................................... 7-82
Figure 7-49. File Operations web page ............................................................................................................................... 7-85
Figure 7-50. Send File to GARD 8000 web page................................................................................................................ 7-86
Figure 7-51. Send File to GARD 8000 web page................................................................................................................ 7-87
Figure 7-52. System Logic Configuration web page........................................................................................................... 7-91
Figure 7-53. Input Mapping web page (Typical)................................................................................................................. 7-92
Figure 7-54. Input Mapping web page (Typical)................................................................................................................. 7-93
Figure 7-56. Output Mapping web page (Typical).............................................................................................................. 7-95
Figure 7-58. Option Settings web page (Typical) ............................................................................................................... 7-97
Figure 7-60. Timer Settings web page (Typical)............................................................................................................... 7-100
Figure 8-1. Two input AND gate .......................................................................................................................................... 8-1

Figure 8-2. Three input AND gate ........................................................................................................................................ 8-2
Figure 8-3. Two Input OR gate ............................................................................................................................................. 8-2
Figure 8-4. Three Input OR gate ........................................................................................................................................... 8-3
Figure 8-5. XOR gate ............................................................................................................................................................ 8-3
Figure 8-6. Inverter gate........................................................................................................................................................ 8-4
Figure 8-7. Latch ................................................................................................................................................................... 8-5
Figure 8-8. Toggle Gate ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-6
Figure 8-9. Timer .................................................................................................................................................................. 8-7
Figure 8-10. Buffer................................................................................................................................................................ 8-8
Figure 8-11. System Logic Configuration web page............................................................................................................. 8-9
Figure 8-12. Input Mapping web page ................................................................................................................................ 8-10
Figure 8-13. Output Mapping web page.............................................................................................................................. 8-11
Figure 8-14. Option Settings web page ............................................................................................................................... 8-12
Figure 8-15. System Timer Setting web page ..................................................................................................................... 8-13
Figure 9-1. Permissive Underreaching Transfer Trip............................................................................................................ 9-2

Figure 9-2. Permissive Overerreaching Transfer Trip........................................................................................................... 9-2
Figure 9-3. Direct Transfer Trip............................................................................................................................................ 9-3
Figure 9-4. Directional Comparison Blocking ...................................................................................................................... 9-4
Figure 9-5. Directional Comparison Unblocking .................................................................................................................. 9-5
Figure 10-1. GARD 8000 PLC FSK Block Diagram .......................................................................................................... 10-3
Figure 10-2. GARD 8000 PLC On/Off Block Diagram...................................................................................................... 10-6
Figure 10-3. Schematic, GARD 8000 PLC Analog Module, Sheet 1 of 4 ........................................................................ 10-13
Figure 10-4. Default Logic, GARD 8000 On-Off PLC..................................................................................................... 10-21
Figure 10-5. Default Logic, GARD 8000 FSK PLC ......................................................................................................... 10-23
Figure 11-1. System Testing web page ............................................................................................................................... 11-1

Figure 11 2. Input Card web page ....................................................................................................................................... 11-2
Figure 11-3. Output Module web page................................................................................................................................ 11-6
Figure 11-4. Digital Interface web page............................................................................................................................ 11-11
Figure 11-5. Manual Loopback ......................................................................................................................................... 11-14
Figure 11-6. Local Loopback ............................................................................................................................................ 11-15
Figure 11-7. Remote Loopback......................................................................................................................................... 11-16
Figure 11-8. C37.94 Web page ......................................................................................................................................... 11-18
Figure 11-9. Local Loopback ............................................................................................................................................ 11-20
Figure 11-10. Manual Loopback ....................................................................................................................................... 11-21
Figure 11-11. G.703 web page .......................................................................................................................................... 11-23
Figure 11-14. Long Haul Fiber web page.......................................................................................................................... 11-28
July 25, 2006 xi 973.334.3100
Figure 11-15. Local Loopback .......................................................................................................................................... 11-30
Figure 11-18. T1/E1 Web page ......................................................................................................................................... 11-35
Figure 11-21. Audio Tone Protection Test Web page....................................................................................................... 11-39
Figure 11-22. System Testing web page with PLC Module (typical) ............................................................................... 11-44
Figure 11-23. PLC Module Testing web page .................................................................................................................. 11-45
Figure 11-24. System Testing web page with Current Diff Relay (typical) ...................................................................... 11-49
Figure 11-25. Current Diff Relay Testing web page ........................................................................................................ 11-50
Figure 12-1. Audio Tone Logic Block Diagram, Single 1 2 3 4 ......................................................................................... 12-3
Figure 12-2. Audio Tone Logic Block Diagram, ................................................................................................................ 12-5
Figure 12-5. Audio Tone Logic Block Diagram, Simple .................................................................................................. 12-11
Figure 13-1. Three Phase Operating Times......................................................................................................................... 13-4

Figure 13-2. Two Phase Operating Times........................................................................................................................... 13-4
Figure 13-3. Single Phase Operating Times........................................................................................................................ 13-5
Figure 13-4. Front and Rear views of 3U chassis with Distance Relay (Typical)............................................................... 13-9
Figure 13-5. External connections for the 3U chassis ......................................................................................................... 13-9
Figure 13-6. Input Mapping web page .............................................................................................................................. 13-10
Figure 13-7. Output Mapping web page............................................................................................................................ 13-11
Figure 13-8. Distance relay rear connections .................................................................................................................... 13-11
Figure 13-9. AC Schematic for GARD 8000 Distance Protection .................................................................................... 13-12
Figure 13-10. Distance Relay Inputs, schematic diagram ................................................................................................. 13-13
Figure 13-11. Distance Relay Outputs, schematic diagram............................................................................................... 13-14
Figure 13-12. Mho Phase-Ground Characteristic (I)......................................................................................................... 13-55
Figure 13-13. Mho Phase-Ground Characteristic (II)........................................................................................................ 13-56
Figure 13-14. Phase-Phase Mho Characteristic (I)............................................................................................................ 13-57
Figure 13-15. Quadrilateral Characteristic (I) ................................................................................................................... 13-59
Figure 13-16. Quadrilateral Characteristic (II).................................................................................................................. 13-60
Figure 13-17. Directional Unit .......................................................................................................................................... 13-61
Figure 13-18. Resistive Blinder......................................................................................................................................... 13-62
Figure 13-19. AG Distance Element Operational Logic ................................................................................................... 13-64
Figure 13-20. AB Distance Element Operational Logic ................................................................................................... 13-65
Figure 13-21. Close-Into-Fault Block Diagram ................................................................................................................ 13-67
Figure 13-22. Stub Bus Protection .................................................................................................................................... 13-68
Figure 13-23. Load Encroachment Characteristic ............................................................................................................. 13-68
Figure 13-24. Out-Of-Step Unit ........................................................................................................................................ 13-70
Figure 13-25. Stepped Distance ........................................................................................................................................ 13-73
Figure 13-26. Zone 1 Extension ........................................................................................................................................ 13-75
Figure 13-27. Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)......................................................................................................................... 13-76
Figure 13-28. Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip (PUTT) ........................................................................................... 13-76
Figure 13-29. PUTT .......................................................................................................................................................... 13-77
Figure 13-30. Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) ............................................................................................. 13-78
Figure 13-31. Permissive Overreach ................................................................................................................................. 13-79
Figure 13-32. Directional Comparison Blocking With Directional Carrier Tx................................................................. 13-80
Figure 13-33. Directional Comparison Blocking .............................................................................................................. 13-81
Figure 13-34. Directional Comparison Unblocking .......................................................................................................... 13-82
Figure 13-35. Directional Comparison Unblocking Diagram ........................................................................................... 13-83
Figure 13-36. Transient Block Logic ................................................................................................................................ 13-84
Figure 13-37. Transient Block Logic ................................................................................................................................ 13-84
Figure 13-38. Transient Block Logic Diagram ................................................................................................................. 13-84
Figure 13-39. Weak Infeed Logic ..................................................................................................................................... 13-86
Figure 13-40. Open breaker detector................................................................................................................................. 13-88
Figure 13-41. Loss-of-Potential Block .............................................................................................................................. 13-89
July 25, 2006 xii 973.334.3100
Figure 13-42. Minimum Operating Time for time overcurrent curve ............................................................................... 13-92
Figure 13-43. Minimum Operating Time when set Fixed Time exceeds curve time delay at 1.5 x pick-up..................... 13-92
Figure 13-44. ANSI Moderately Inverse........................................................................................................................... 13-93
Figure 13-45. ANSI Inverse .............................................................................................................................................. 13-94
Figure 13-46. ANSI Very Inverse ..................................................................................................................................... 13-95
Figure 13-47. ANSI Extremely Inverse............................................................................................................................. 13-96
Figure 13-48. ANSI Short time ......................................................................................................................................... 13-97
Figure 13-49. Inverse (IEC) .............................................................................................................................................. 13-98
Figure 13-50. IEC Very Inverse ........................................................................................................................................ 13-99
Figure 13-51. IEC Extremely Inverse.............................................................................................................................. 13-100
Figure 13-52. IEC Long Inverse...................................................................................................................................... 13-101
Figure 13-53. IEC short inverse ...................................................................................................................................... 13-102
Figure 13-54. IEEE Moderately Inverse.......................................................................................................................... 13-103
Figure 13-55. IEEE Very Inverse.................................................................................................................................... 13-104
Figure 13-56. IEEE Extremely Inverse ........................................................................................................................... 13-105
Figure 13-57. RI Inverse ................................................................................................................................................. 13-106
Figure 13-58. Vector diagram for the phase directional unit........................................................................................... 13-109
Figure 13-59. Application example................................................................................................................................. 13-109
Figure 13-60. Ground directional characteristic with voltage polarization ..................................................................... 13-110
Figure 13-61. Block Diagram for Phase Undervoltage units........................................................................................... 13-113
Figure 13-62. Block Diagram for Phase Overvoltage units............................................................................................. 13-114
Figure 13-63. Rate of change of frequency ..................................................................................................................... 13-116
Figure 13-64. Thermal time constant .............................................................................................................................. 13-120
Figure 13-65. Thermal image characteristic time curves ................................................................................................ 13-121
Figure 13-66. Distance Module Trip Logic..................................................................................................................... 13-122
Figure 13-67. Reclose Initiate Logic ............................................................................................................................... 13-124
Figure 13-68. Reclosing Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 13-125
Figure 13-69. Recloser lock-out operation ...................................................................................................................... 13-126
Figure 13-70. Recloser lock-out operation ...................................................................................................................... 13-127
Figure 13-71. Distance Measured Values........................................................................................................................ 13-132
Figure 13-72. Distance Metering..................................................................................................................................... 13-133
Figure 13-73. Distance Protection Unit Status ................................................................................................................ 13-134
Figure 13-74. Distance Recloser Status........................................................................................................................... 13-135
Figure 13-75. Distance Status at last trip......................................................................................................................... 13-136
Figure 13-76. Distance SOE screen................................................................................................................................. 13-137
Figure 13-77. Distance SOE detail screen....................................................................................................................... 13-138
Figure 13-78. Distance Fault Record.............................................................................................................................. 13-139
Figure 13-79. Distance Fault Record Details (Part 1 of 3) .............................................................................................. 13-140
Figure 13-80. Phase selector ........................................................................................................................................... 13-145
Figure 14-1 Front and Rear view of 3U chassis with Current Diff Module (Typical) ....................................................... 14-3
Figure 14-2. Current Differential Rear Connections ........................................................................................................... 14-4
Figure 14-3. AC/DC Schematic for GARD 8000 Differential Relay (Typical) .................................................................. 14-4
Figure 14-4 File Operations, Current Diff.......................................................................................................................... 14-5
Figure 14-5 Send File to GARD 8000, Current Diff .......................................................................................................... 14-5
Figure 14-6. Home Page..................................................................................................................................................... 14-6
Figure 14-7 System Logic Configuration........................................................................................................................... 14-6
Figure 14-8. Input Mapping Webpage ................................................................................................................................ 14-7
Figure 14-9. Output Mapping Webpage.............................................................................................................................. 14-8
Figure 14-10. Current Differential Inputs, Schematic Diagram .......................................................................................... 14-9
Figure 14-11. Current Differential Outputs, Schematic Diagram...................................................................................... 14-10
Figure 14-12. Current Differential Relay Configuration ................................................................................................... 14-12
Figure 14-13. Current Differential Relay General Settings............................................................................................... 14-13
Figure 14-14. Current Differential Relay Comms Settings ............................................................................................... 14-16
Figure 14-15. Current Differential Relay Primary Settings............................................................................................... 14-17
Figure 14-16. Current Differential Relay Backup Settings ............................................................................................... 14-21
Figure 14-17. Current Differential Relay SOE Settings.................................................................................................... 14-25
Figure 14-18. Current Differential Relay Oscillography Settings ..................................................................................... 14-28

July 25, 2006 xiii 973.334.3100
Figure 14-19. Current Differential Relay Status................................................................................................................ 14-30
Figure 14-20. Current Differential Relay General Status webpage................................................................................... 14-31
Figure 14-21. Current Differential Relay Phase Status webpage ...................................................................................... 14-34
Figure 14-22. Current Differential Relay Communications Status webpage .................................................................... 14-36
Figure 14-23. Current Differential Relay Transferred Status Bits webpage...................................................................... 14-38
Figure 14-24. Current Differential Metering and Status webpage .................................................................................... 14-39
Figure 14-25. Current Differential Relay Last Trip webpage ........................................................................................... 14-40
Figure 14-26. Current Differential Relay Last Trip webpage ........................................................................................... 14-41
Figure 14-27. Retrieving Oscillography Records webpage............................................................................................... 14-42
Figure 14-28 Operate Level Slope Characteristic ............................................................................................................. 14-45
Figure 14-29 USA Moderately Inverse TOC Characteristic ............................................................................................ 14-49
Figure 14-30 USA Inverse TOC Characteristic................................................................................................................ 14-50
Figure 14-31 USA Very Inverse TOC Characteristic....................................................................................................... 14-51
Figure 14-32 USA Extremely Inverse TOC Characteristic .............................................................................................. 14-52
Figure 14-33 IEC Standard Type A TOC Characteristic.................................................................................................. 14-53
Figure 14-34 IEC Standard Type B TOC Characteristic.................................................................................................. 14-54
Figure 14-35 IEC Standard Type C TOC Character ........................................................................................................ 14-55
Figure 14-36 Recloser Block Logic ................................................................................................................................. 14-62
Figure 14-37 Three Pole Tripping Logic.......................................................................................................................... 14-63
Figure 14-38 Single Pole Tripping Logic......................................................................................................................... 14-64

July 25, 2006 xiv 973.334.3100
TABLE OF TABLES
Table 2-1. Remote Access IP Addresses ............................................................................................................................. 2-26
Table 3-1. Fiber data ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-4
Table 4-1. TB1 Terminal Assignments ................................................................................................................................. 4-7

Table 4-2. RS-449/X.21/V.35 Interface Connections ........................................................................................................... 4-8
Table 4-3. RS-449/X.21/V.35 Interface Connections ........................................................................................................... 4-8
Table 4-4. RS-232 Async Comms Interface Connections..................................................................................................... 4-9
Table 4-5. G.703 Interface Connections................................................................................................................................ 4-9
Table 4-6. T1/E1 Interface Connections................................................................................................................................ 4-9
Table 4-7. Comms modules mating connectors ................................................................................................................. 4-10
Table 4-8. GARD 8000 modules, general information ....................................................................................................... 4-12
Table 4-9. Front Port Ethernet LED’s ................................................................................................................................. 4-17
Table 5-1. Port priority.......................................................................................................................................................... 5-5

Table 5-2. Front Ethernet port LEDs................................................................................................................................... 5-14
Table 5-3. Rear Ethernet port LEDs.................................................................................................................................... 5-15
Table 5-4. Ethernet cables ................................................................................................................................................... 5-15
Table 6-1. GARD 8000 System Modules.............................................................................................................................. 6-1

Table 6-2. Controls and indicators for the GARD 8000 Controller Module ......................................................................... 6-6
Table 6-3. Web Page, Controller Card, Status Color Codes.................................................................................................. 6-9
Table 6-4. Controls and indicators for the GARD 8000 Display With TPS Module .......................................................... 6-13
Table 6-5. Jumper Settings for the GARD 8000 Digital TPS Module ................................................................................ 6-14
Table 6-6. Jumper Settings and Switch Function for the GARD 8000 Audio Tone TPS Module ...................................... 6-16
Table 6-7. Terminal Board Pinouts ..................................................................................................................................... 6-16
Table 6-8. PLC Analog Module Assembly Part Numbers. ................................................................................................. 6-18
Table 6-9. Jumper Settings and Switch Function for the GARD 8000 PLC Digital Module.............................................. 6-20
Table 6-10. Jumper Settings and Control Settings for the GARD 8000 PLC Analog Module. .......................................... 6-24
Table 6-11. Jumpers required on GARD 8000 System I/O module .................................................................................... 6-31
Table 6-12. Characteristics of GARD 8000 Long Haul Fiber Units ................................................................................... 6-38
Table 6-13. Characteristics of GARD 8000 Short Haul Module (C37.94) ......................................................................... 6-38
Table 6-14. GARD Power Supply Modules, General Information ..................................................................................... 6-41
Table 6-15. GARD 8000 Power Supply Specifications ...................................................................................................... 6-42
Table 6-16. Current Limiter Assemblies ............................................................................................................................. 6-45
Table 7-1. Timeslot Baud Rate............................................................................................................................................ 7-22

Table 7-2. Character Formats .............................................................................................................................................. 7-22
Table 7-3. Recommended Security Timer Settings............................................................................................................ 7-34
Table 7-4. Bit Error Rate Threshold Settings ..................................................................................................................... 7-83
Table 8-1. Truth table for Two Input AND gate ................................................................................................................... 8-1
Table 8-2. Truth table for Three Input AND gate ................................................................................................................. 8-2
Table 8-3. Truth table for Two Input OR gate ...................................................................................................................... 8-2
Table 8-4. Truth table for Three Input OR gate..................................................................................................................... 8-3
Table 8-5. Truth table for XOR gate ..................................................................................................................................... 8-3
Table 8-6. Truth table for NOT gate ..................................................................................................................................... 8-4
Table 8-7. Input Mapping.................................................................................................................................................... 8-14
Table 8-8. Output Mapping ................................................................................................................................................. 8-14
Table 8-9. Option Settings................................................................................................................................................... 8-15
Table 8-10. Default Logic Timers ....................................................................................................................................... 8-15
Table 8-11. Input Mapping.................................................................................................................................................. 8-16
Table 8-12. Output Mapping ............................................................................................................................................... 8-17
Table 8-13. Option Settings................................................................................................................................................. 8-18
Table 8-14. Default Logic Timers ....................................................................................................................................... 8-19
July 25, 2006 xv 973.334.3100
Table 8-15. HMI Bit Assignment........................................................................................................................................ 8-20
Table 8-16. SOE Triggers Bit Assignment......................................................................................................................... 8-20
Table 8-17. Logic Bit Assignment ..................................................................................................................................... 8-21
Table 10-1. 2F Trip Transport Delay and Channel Spacing................................................................................................ 10-4

Table 10-2. 3F Trip Transport Delay and Channel Spacing................................................................................................ 10-4
Table 10-3. On/Off Block Transport Delay and Channel Spacing...................................................................................... 10-7
Table 10-4. Jumper Settings For Tx Filter .......................................................................................................................... 10-8
Table 10-5. Common RPM test values.............................................................................................................................. 10-11
Table 12-1. Audio Tone Logic Block Diagrams ................................................................................................................. 12-1
Table 13-1. MHO Characteristic ....................................................................................................................................... 13-54

Table 13-2. MHO Characteristic Table Definitions .......................................................................................................... 13-54
Table 13-3. Mho Phase-Ground Characteristic Definitions .............................................................................................. 13-56
Table 13-4. Phase-Phase Mho Characteristic Definitions ................................................................................................. 13-57
Table 13-5. Quadrilateral Characteristics.......................................................................................................................... 13-58
Table 13-6. Quadrilateral Characteristics Definitions ....................................................................................................... 13-58
Table 13-7. Directional Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 13-61
Table 13-8. Directional Unit Definitions........................................................................................................................... 13-61
Table 13-9. Resistive Limiter Characteristic..................................................................................................................... 13-63
Table 13-10. Resistive Limiter Characteristic Definitions ................................................................................................ 13-63
Table 13-11. Supervision Elements................................................................................................................................... 13-66
Table 13-12. Supervision Elements Definitions................................................................................................................ 13-66
Table 13-13. Phase Directional Measurement................................................................................................................. 13-108
Table 13-14. Angular Compensation .............................................................................................................................. 13-118
Table 13-15. Oscillographic Record................................................................................................................................ 13-143
Table 14-1 Maximum Number of Oscillography Records ............................................................................................... 14-66

July 25, 2006 xvi 973.334.3100
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
When revisions are made to the GARD 8000 System Instruction Manual, the entire section where revisions were
made is replaced. For the edition of this manual dated July 25, 2006, the sections are dated as follows:
Front Matter July 25, 2006
Section 1 March, 2006
Section 2 July 25, 2006
Section 3 May 15, 2006
Section 4 May 15, 2006
Section 5 April 28, 2006
Section 7 March 1, 2006
Section 8 January 10, 2006
Section 12 September 19, 2005
Section 14 July 25, 2006 (New Issue)
Section 15 July 25, 2006 (New Issue)

July 25, 2006 xvii 973.334.3100
REVISION RECORD
Rev. Description Date Approval
5-9-05 New Document Release 5-9-05 CS
7-14-05 Revised Sections 0, 2, 6, 7 and 10 in accordance with email 7-14-05 CS

dated 7-6-05 as follows: Added revisions in release #5,
including redundancy, revisions to E1/T1 web pages, and
aux communications channel.
7-29-05 Revised Sections 0, 4, 6, 7, and Added Section 11 (Audio 7-29-05 CS

Tone Logic Block Diagrams) in accordance with email
dated 7-6-05 as follows: Added audio tone board, including
remote interrogation function.
9-19-05 Revised Sections 0, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, Added new Section 10 9-26-05 CS

(Power Line Carrier), and moved existing Sections 10 and
11 up by one section number, in accordance with email
dated 8-29-05 as follows: Added power line carrier modules.
Incorporated Errata Sheet No. MC8000SYS-001, dated 8-

30-05 (Also refer to CAR# C8000-0046 dated 8-17-05).
11-8-05 Revised Section 5 with new screen captures and PDA site 11-8-05 TG
map. Minor revision to Section 10.
Reflects 6.1 Release.
1-10-06 Service Channel info added, BER added. 1-13-06 TG

Updates to Section 2, 5, 7, 10 (new test procedures) and 11.
Reflects 6.2 Release.
7-25-06 Update manual as per ECO 8000-096/100 for PLC changes. 7-25-06 TG
Add commissioning procedures to section 4.
Move PLC commissioning from section 10 to section 4.
Section 4 now reads “Installation and Commissioning.”
Add RS232 Async Comms Module information and Current
Limit Board. Minor updates to Section 2, 3 and 11. Add
sections 13, 14, and 15. Section 13 is an updated Distance
Relay Manual and Section 14 is a first release of the Current
Diff. Module.
Section 15 is an Index. Reflects 6.4 Release.

July 25, 2006 xviii 973.334.3100
Product Information
SECTION 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION

Please go to the next page for the following Product Information Sheets:
GARD 8000 System
GARD 8000 Teleprotection Channel
GARD 8000 Programmable Single Function PLC
GARD 8000 Distance Relay
GARD 8000 Current Differential Module
IEC 61850 Ethernet Tripping Module

July 25, 2006 1-1 973.334.3100
Product Information
This page intentionally left

blank

July 25, 2006 1-2 973.334.3100
GARD 8000
Protective Relay and
Communications System
System Features
• One product for all your teleprotection and line protection • Efficient use of your communications channel; up to 12 x
needs 64 kbps per fiber or connection
• Proven, high-speed, secure and reliable synchronous com- • Up to 10 communication interfaces in one 6U device; use
munications for redundant communication paths or to different remote
terminals
• Use as a stand-alone teleprotection channel, line differen-
tial protection, distance relay, Power Line Carrier, or com- • A wide range of communication interfaces to choose from:
bine them in one device • T1/E1
• RS-449, 56 -768 kbps
• Use 6U version for up to 8 functions, 3U version for up to 3
• X.21, 64-768 kbps
functions
• V.35, 64-768 kbps
• Selectable redundancy for power supply, main processor,
• G.703, co-directional, 64 kbps
functional modules and comms interfaces
• ANSI C37.94 fiber
• Customized programmable logic for your specific applica- • Fiber, multi-mode or single-mode; up to 100 km
tion saves commissioning time and eliminates complex • Audio Tone, 2 wire or 4 wire
configuration • Power Line Carrier; ON/OFF or FSK selectable
• Straight-forward web browser user interface for settings and
• GARD 8000 supports DNP3 Level 2 with point mapping
diagnostics; no proprietary application program required
• Supports IEC 61850
• Optional, built-in GPS receiver provides accurate time tags,
• 10 Year Warranty
independently from any station clock

July 2005 2006
February 1 RFL GARD
GARD 80008000
Sys
System Description System protection redundancy can be improved by the
GARD 8000 System. Not only can additional channels
The GARD 8000 Global Architecture Relaying Device is a easily be made available but the built-in hardware redun-
revolutionary product platform that provides the user with a dancy will provide a higher degree of dependability than two
fully programmable system that can be used for all separate protection systems. In addition, external relay-to-
teleprotection and line protection needs. teleprotection wiring is eliminated, minimizing the risk of
faulty connections or interference affecting the protection
The system uses fully programmable logic and settings system.
that can be uploaded or downloaded using the built-in
TCPIP (electrical or optical) or RS-232 interface. Hardware Redundancy
Communicating with the system is done with either a
laptop PC using a Web Browser, or with a hand-held PDA The telecommincations industry has very stringent require-
that communicates with the GARD 8000 via a built-in ments for redundancy. The principle of “no single point of
secure infrared port. The GARD 8000 has a built-in web failure” is adopted. With the increased demands on the
server that contains all of the user settings, no special or power system, hardware redundancy in the protection
proprietary software is required to access the product. A device provides an added level of insurance. The GARD
most unique feature is that the user manual and customer 8000 can be equipped with redundant power supplies,
system and application drawings are stored in the GARD redundant main processors, redundant input/outputs,
8000 in Adobe pdf format and are easily accessible from redundant functional modules and redundant communica-
the GARD 8000 web browser. tion interfaces providing an unequaled safe-guard against
equipment failures.
The GARD 8000 is available in a 3U chassis (5.25") which
can support up to two additional teleprotection or protective
relay function modules, or a 6U chassis (10.50") which can
support up to eight teleprotection or protective relay
function modules. Redundant controller and power supplies
are available as options for applications where ultra reliable
systems are required.
Protection System
Proper performance of the Protection System requires a
functioning communication link and teleprotection device.
While protective relays are commonly duplicated for in-
creased redundancy, this is not always the case for the
communications channel. Limited availability of external
communication links, or the cost of adding a second
Figure 2. Hardware Redundancy
channel compromises power system protection redundancy.
Economical Use of Your

Communication Link
With the exponential growth of data communications, the use
of a dedicated fiber for a single channel, low-speed data, might
no longer be justified. The GARD 8000 system uses the
communication channel efficiently and can provide up to 768
kbps on one link (twelve 64 kbps channels).
The GARD 8000 System offers interfaces for dedicated fiber

and direct connection to T1/E1 or SONET/SDH muliplexers.
Figure 1. Protection System

July 2005 2006
February 2 GARD 80008000
RFL GARD Sys
For applications where no digital channels are available, the You may also achieve redundancy by using one interface
audio tone interfaces can be used for 2-wire or 4-wire FSK with multiple channels when digital media is available. Or,
communications. In addition, GARD 8000 can be equipped use one digital communications interface for more data
with an integral Power Line Carrier, selectable for ON/OFF or demanding protections such as current differential and a
FSK operation. second, independent, analog channel for distance pilot and/
or transfer trip functions.
The GARD 8000 System provides 24 channels, each
carrying 64 kbps data. These channels can be assigned to
any communications interface and operate redundantly or
independently.
The GARD 8000 System is easily customized to meet the

redundancy requirements for a specific application. A
functional module can be selected to operate indepen-
dently, using its own communications interface and input/
output modules. Or, several functional modules can use the
same communication interfaces and input/output modules.
Even though providing this extended flexibility and function-

ality, the GARD 8000 System is designed based on proven
teleprotection and relaying principles. There is no compro-
mise on speed, security or dependability. Typical transfer Figure 4. Alternative Redundant Configuration
trip speeds over digital channels are 5 ms, using the most
secure mode.
Optimize Existing Fiber
Applications
Dedicated fiber links can be routed via the GARD 8000
System making up to 11 additional 64 kbps channels
available on the existing optical fiber. These channels can
be used for proven, secure and dependable transfer trip;
high speed pilot communications; current differential and/or
distance protections.
Figure 3. Parallel, Redundant Configuration
Functional Redundancy
It has been shown that redundancy is increased by built-in
redundant modules, operating in parallel. A typical, coven-
tional, protection system would consist of a Main 1 pilot
protection scheme and a Main 2 pilot or non-pilot scheme.
Industry papers have suggested that the improvement of

unavailability for a dual channel pilot scheme as compared Figure 5. Dedicated Fiber Application
to a single channel is in the order of 30%. Adding a channel
to a Main 2 non-pilot relay improves availability even more.
No change to the existing scheme is required. A protection
The GARD 8000 offers full flexibility to use multiple com- relay using low-speed RS-232 communication or current
munication interfaces for Main 1 and Main 2 relay protec- differential relays using 64 kbps will still have the use of a
tions. Both protections can communicate over both chan- functionally dedicated point-to-point connection.
nels or they can use separate channels.
July 2005 2006
February 3 RFL
GARDGARD
80008000
Sys
Cost-Effective Channel
Redundancy
The cost for external communication channels is high and it
might be difficult to justify the use of an additional fiber pair
or installation of additional communication devices for
protective relaying. By use of the pass-through capability in
GARD 8000, full channel redundancy can easily be achieved
on a single fiber pair that has an alternative path between the
relay devices.
Multiplexer Pass-Through
Channel
The GARD 8000 has 12 built in communications channels
that can be used for Teleprotection and other Protection
applications. These communications channels can also be
used with external devices that require a communications
or pilot channel to operate. This allows the GARD 8000
Teleprotection channel to also be used as a substation Figure 7. Pass-through functionality
multiplexer that other protective relays can be interfaced
with.
Architecture
The GARD 8000 can be configured with 56/64kb channels
with RS-449, G.703, and C37.94 fiber optic interfaces. The
The GARD 8000 system can be equipped with up to eight
unit can also be configured with a dual RS-232 communica-
functional modules in the 6U chassis and three in the 3U
tions channel for Mirrored Bit relaying or other slow speed
chassis.
devices. Figure 6. shows a RFL 9300 current differential
relay and a Mirrored Bit relay communicating over a GARD • Full featured teleprotection channel
8000 Teleprotection channel configured with two relaying • High speed current differential line protection, charge
communication interfaces. comparison
• High speed pilot or stepped distance protection
• ON/OFF and FSK Power Line Carrier
• Breaker module for dual breaker applications
All modules independently provide full functionality and can

be freely combined to suit your application.
Figure 6. GARD 8000 Used as Multiplexer
The GARD 8000 System can pass the data from one channel
on one communications interface directly to another channel
on another communications interface. The maximum through-
delay for this operation is less than 250 microseconds. Data
communication remains synchronous during the pass-
through process and can be used for current differential relay
channels and teleprotection channels as well as other Figure 8. 6U Front View (example configuration)
relaying channels.

July 2005 2006
RFL GARD Sys
Figure 11. 3U Rear View (example configuration)
User Interface
Protection system reliability may be compromised by in-
creased complexity of protection devices. While these
protection devices offer added flexibility they also increase the
Figure 9. 6U Rear View (example configuration) risk for errors. Complicated settings, configurations and
interconnections all combine to having an undesirable effect
A Truly Modular System on protection system security and dependability.
The GARD 8000 is a modular system and functional modules
The GARD 8000 System is designed with ease-of-use in
can be added at any time as needed. This facilitates gradual
mind. While high functionality and great detail is provided, it is
refurbishment. For instance, the teleprotection channel device
not necessary to make field configurations, if not desired. The
can be replaced with GARD 8000 using existing relays for pilot
web browser User Interface makes interaction with the device
protection. At some later time a protection module can be
highly intuitive and handling greatly simplified.
added to replace or complement the existing relays. Or,
communications modules can be added as more external
channels become available. Front Panel LEDs
Two rows of ten multi-colored LEDs provides basic event
The functional modules are truly individual devices. They all information. The LED operation is fully configurable and
need access to the power supply and the HMI/main processor labels can be changed to suit the application. Custom
modules but there is no direct communication between func- configuration and labeling can be factory-made by RFL
tional modules. This makes it easy to change the functionality without extra charge. Any field modifications required are
of the GARD 8000 as required without having to change the simply made by use of the browser interface.
entire system.
Front Panel Display
Any of the functional modules can be removed at any time
(even without powering off the system) without affecting the An optional front panel display is available for metering,
other functional modules. targets and settings. The front panel is making use of a
standard PDA (Personal Digital Assistant) running a web
A functional module can be located anywhere within a chassis, browser application.
with the exception of the 3 fixed slots required for the HMI/main
processor boards. In this way, a system can contain any combina-
tion of functions, with selectable redundancy.
Input and output boards are also freely selectable, and an

additional board is easily installed in the field if extra contacts
are required.
The modular flexibility extends to the communications mod-

ules that may be selected to operate independently or redun-
dantly.
Figure 10. 3U Front View (example configuration) Figure 12. GARD 8000 Front Panel LEDs (6U)
July 2005 2006
February 5 RFL
GARDGARD
80008000
Sys
The GARD 8000 front panel has two infrared ports when the For off-line preparation of settings and configuration files, a
PDA is supplied permanently mounted on the front. One small application program “emulating” a GARD 8000
communicates with the front PDA and the other is available System can reside on the PC or local server. Archiving and
for any external PDA the user may carry. Communication documentation of settings and configuration is made
may be established with any Palm OS PDA via its browser simple as these are stored in standard text files.
application.
Figure 13. GARD 8000 3U Front Panel
Figure 15. Web Browser User Interface
Figure 16. Ethernet Connector
Input and Output Modules

Figure 14. Front Display/PDA*
The GARD 8000 System is configured with a selectable
*Typical PDA is shown. PDA supplied as part of the GARD 8000 System is
subject to change.
number of input and output modules on the rear part of the
chassis. Each communication interface comes with 1 input
module with 6 opto-isolated inputs or 1 output module.
Web Browser User Interface Solid-state outputs, relay outputs and additional inputs are
mounted in sets of 6, with 2 sets on each board occupying
All interaction with the GARD 8000 System is made by the 1 slot. The following combinations are available for mount-
use of a standard web browser. The web server reside in
ing in the up to 10 rear slots (6U) or 4 rear slots (3U):
the device; no special application software is required on
• 1 communication interface/6 inputs
the PC.
• 1 communication interface/6 outputs
• 6 inputs/6 inputs
A PC is connected to the front TCP/IP port with a standard
RJ45 connector. Alternatively, the front (or rear) RS-232 port • 6 inputs/6 relay outputs
can be used but will not provide the same “lightning-fast” • 6 inputs/6 solid state outputs
response. • 6 solid state outputs/6 solid state outputs
• 6 solid state outputs/6 relay outputs
Web browser technology provides a much higher level of • 6 relay outputs/6 relay outputs
ease-of-use as compared to the conventional “menu-driven”
operation. It is fast and simple to view device status, access All relay output contacts are Form A (NO) or Form B (NC)
diagnostic and test functions and to change settings. With jumper selectable. A simple setting for an inverter logic gate
the same operations as a standard web site, navigation is provides inversion for each input and output. Each input and
intuitive and eliminates the need to study written instruc- output has a timer associated with it that has settings for
tions. If needed, the instruction manual, that also resides in both pick-up delay (input debounce, output security) and
the device, is simply accessed by the HELP function. drop-out delay (pulse-stretch).
July 2005 2006
RFL GARD Sys
Inputs and outputs can be inverted in the system logic and System to keep accurate time tags but other protective
debounce, and drop-out delay timer settings can be applied. devices also have access to a dc-powered, substation
hardened, time source that is independent from any
The GARD 8000 Power Supply is provided with Form C alarm centralized GPS system.
contacts for power supply failure and system failure alarm.
Optically Isolated Inputs

Quantity: 6 per module
Input Voltage Jumper Selectable: 24/48/125/250 Vdc
Operation Range:
24 Volts: 19 to 36 Vdc
Input Current: 1.5 mA minimum
Minimum Pulse Width: 0.03 ms, additional debounce time
set in the logic Figure 17. GPS Antenna
Solid-State Outputs
Teleprotection System
Output Current: Maximum 1 A continuous, 2 A for 1 minute, Based on the RFL 9745 teleprotection channel, the GARD
or 10 A for 100 msec 8000 Teleprotection System carries relaying communica-
Open-Circuit Voltage: 300 Vdc maximum tions to the next level.
Pick-up Time: 0 msec
The Teleprotection System is emulating RFL 9745’s
Relay Output flexible, customized programmable logic, but provides a
Quantity: 6 per module higher degree of ease-of-use. Selection of pre-programmed
Relay Pick-up Time: 4 msec schemes for blocking, unblocking, permissive and transfer
Output Current Rating: 6 A continuous trip operations is simply done by a setting.
Surge: 30 A for 200 msec
The GARD 8000 System is customized to provide the
Alarm Relays number of channels, type and number of channel inter-
Quantity: 2 faces, inputs and outputs and redundancy to meet your
Contacts: SPDT (Form C) application needs. Features include:
Output Current: 100 mA 300 Vdc resistive load • Pre-configured permissive, blocking, unblocking and
transfer trip scemes
Terminal Connections • 4 to 32 commands per digital interface
Screw terminals for ring lugs with wire up to AWG #10. • Operating time is 5 ms for digital channel and from 9 ms
for analog channel
GPS Module • 2 or 4 commands per analog channel interface
Accurate time stamping is essential for evaluation of • Redundant (hot/standby) operation with digital/analog or
protection system operations, especially following a major digital/digital channel interfaces
system disturbance.
The substation may be equipped with a GPS central clock Distance Protection
that can be connected to the GARD 8000 IRIG-B port. The distance protection module in the GARD 8000 System
When a central clock is not available the GARD 8000 can has 4 measuring zones, each configurable to forward or
have its own, built-in GPS receiver. This module is supplied reverse.
with a small antenna to be mounted outside to receive the
GPS signal. The distance protection can operate as stepped distance
with instantaneous operation from Zone 1 with Zone 2 and
When the GARD 8000 is equipped with the internal GPS Zone 3 time-delayed. It can alternatively be applied in a
receiver, the IRIG-B port can be used to supply IRIG-B to pilot scheme, selectable to permissive, unblocking or
other devices. This enables not only the GARD 8000 blocking.

July 2005 2006
February 7 RFL
GARDGARD
80008000
Sys
It may use the same communications channel interface as
the current differential relay and/or teleprotection system, or
Dual Breaker Applications
a separate communications interface. Features include:
• 4 Zones, all reversible

• Phase-phase and phase-ground mho
• Selectable quadrilateral characteristic
• POTT, DCUB or DCB pilot schemes
• High-set and inverse time overcurrent elements
• Breaker failure protection
• Redosing and sync check
• Under- and overvoltage elements Figure 18. Breaker and a half and Ring Bus Application
• Frequency elements
• Accurate Fault Locator A distance line protection operates on the total line current,
• Digital fault records directly in COMTRADE format summed from two ct’s in breaker and a half or ring bus
• Optional single pole trip logic applications. However, the breaker failure relay and other
breaker related protection elements need to use the
The Distance Protection module in the GARD 8000 System individual current inputs from the current transformers.
can provide back-up for the current differential protection, in
case of channel failure. It can also operate in parallel with The GARD 8000 System therefore complements the
the current differential providing an independent different distance line protection with independent Breaker Modules
measuring principle. Or, it can be used as a stand-alone for these additional functions. The Breaker Module includes
non-pilot or pilot distance protection. breaker failure relay, recloser and sync check, overcurrent,
voltage and frequency elements.
Current Differential Protection
The GARD 8000 System logic makes it easy to combine
A current differential protection module can be integrated in the protection modules as required by the application.
the GARD 8000 System. Using one 64 kbps channel, the
current differential relay can use the same communication
link as the teleprotection system module, or it can have its
separate channel interface.
Duplicating the highly successful RFL 9300 measuring prin-

ciple with its high speed operation, the GARD 8000 current
differential protection provides added flexibility and enhanced
functionality:
• Extended fault recording and oscillography with larger dy-

namic range and more digital signals
• Fault records directly in COMTRADE allows evaluation by
Figure 19. GARD 8000 Distance Protection for a Breaker
use of any standard reader
and a half application
• While still extremely simple to set, extended setting ranges
are made available for increased system fault current coor-
dination For a breaker and a half application, a GARD 8000 System
• Transient block logic for added security at external fault can include two Distance relays, one for each line, and
clearing with ct errors three independent Breaker modules, one for each breaker.
• Adjusts for different ct ratios by setting
• High speed trip; ½ cycle minimum, 1 cycle typical Power Line Carrier
• Is completely unaffected by channel delay errors up to
+/- 4 ms, as may be caused by asymmetric transmit and The Power Line Carrier (PLC) module in the GARD 8000
receive channels System implements the functionality of the RFL 9785 ON/
• Two- or three-terminal versions OFF PLC and the RFL 9780 FSK PLC, all in one device.
• Hot/stand-by redundant channel operation FSK or ON/OFF operation is selectable and the DSP based
• Optional single pole trip logic transmitter and receiver allows full frequency programmability
in the range 30 to 535 kHz.
July 2005 2006
RFL GARD Sys
The setting options include:
• Selectable FSK or ON/OFF operation
• Transmit frequency 30 to 535 kHz
• Programmable receive bandwidth and frequency shift
• Adjustable logic timers
• Unblock, blocking, permissive, transfer trip or phase com-
parison applications
Power Line Carrier features include:

• Channel monitoring
• Built-in check-back function; set for periodic check and/or
remotely activated
• Extensive Sequence of Event Reporting
• Local or remote interrogation Figure 21. GARD 8000 teleprotection between two
• Built-in reflected power measurement IEC 61850 substations
Ethernet Tripping Module The GARD 8000 provides the link between two IEC 61850
(IEC 61850 compliant) substations over any communication media. The sending
GARD 8000 retrieves GOOSE messages from the
The GARD 8000 System can be provided with an Ethernet substation LAN, puts it on a communication link to a
Tripping Module. IEC 61850 substation automation provides remote GARD 8000, that puts it on its substation LAN.
a LAN (Local Area Network) in the substation where trip
messages are passed between the devices via GOOSE
messages on a TCP/IP network.
Figure 20. IEC 61850 Substation

Figure 22. GARD 8000 Teleprotection between an
IEC 61850 substation and a conventional substation
The GOOSE is routed to perform trip functions of circuit
breakers but a shortcoming with the network is that there is
Generally, a new IEC 61850 substation needs to interact
no easy means to transfer a GOOSE message to a remote
with a conventional substation at remote line ends. In this
location if the Ethernet network does not encompass the
case, the GARD 8000 retrieves GOOSE messages for
two substations. The GARD 8000 Ethernet tripping module
transfer trip or pilot relaying operations from the IEC 61850
solves this dilemma, by retrieving GOOSE messages from
substation LAN, transports them over any communication
the LAN and transporting them over any of its communica-
link and the remote, receiving GARD 8000 performs normal
tion interfaces. The communication interface can be of any
teleprotection operations such as tripping of breakers and
type supported by GARD 8000; digital, fiber, audio-tone
pilot relaying signaling.
and/or PLC.

July 2005 2006
February 9 RFL
GARDGARD
80008000
Sys
In addition, in case pilot relaying and teleprotection need to High Capacity Status Transfer
be performed over an Ethernet network between two
conventional substations, a GARD 8000 at each line end Module
can send GOOSE messages over the network for The GARD 8000 standard Teleprotection System supports
intertripping. up to eight high-speed functions in one 64 kbps channel.
For telemetry applications, there is often a need to
transport a higher number of status points, but
transmission time is less critical than for teleprotection
signaling. To complement the teleprotection systems, a
high capacity status module is available. This module
supports up to 96 status bits over a 64 kbps channel. End-
to-end delay is 7-12 ms, depending on the security count
used.
The high capacity status transfer module can be added as

an optional front mounted module, or be supplied instead
Figure 23. GARD 8000 Teleprotection over of the standard teleprotection system on the Base
an Ethernet Network TPS/Display board.
EXAMPLES OF GARD 8000 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Current Differential Relay Module T1/E1 Interface Module

C37.94 Primary Communications RS-232 ASYNC Module
C37.94 Back-up 56/64kb Multi-Protocol Port
Power Switches
Back-up Power Input
Primary Power Input
DNP/MODBUS Input
PLC Module for GPS Input

DCB Application
IRIG-B Input
Distance Relay Module
TCPIP Port
Input/Output Modules
Figure 24. GARD 8000 with Distance Module with Powerline Carrier Interface and
Current Differential Relay with Primary and Back-Up Communications
Distance Relay
Audio-Tone Pott Communications
for Distance Relay 56/64kb Multi-Protocol Port
IRIG-B Port
Primary and Back-up Power
TCPIP Port Inputs
GPS Antenna Input
RS-232 Interface
DNP/MODBUS Input Current Differential Module
Input/Output Module
Figure 25. GARD 8000 with Current Differential Module with Digital Communications and a
Distance Module with Audio-Tone Communications
July 2005 2006
RFL GARD Sys
GARD 8000
3U System Dimensions
Figure 26. Rack or Cabinet Mounting (3U) Figure 27. Panel Mounting (3U)
Figure 28. Rack or cabinet Mounting (6U) Figure 29. Panel Mounting (6U)

July 2005 2006
February 11 RFL
GARDGARD
80008000
Sys
July 2005 12 GARD 8000 Sys
GARD 8000
Teleprotection Channel
System Features Teleprotection Features

• One product for all your digital, analog, and IEC 61850 • Digital system comes standard with 32 functions for
teleprotection needs tripping applications
• User defined logic and alarms for your specific applica- • Teleprotection system can support up to 120 transfer trip
tions functions
• Straight forward web browser user interface for settings • 4 Channels available on Audio Teleprotection Module
and diagnostics; no proprietary application program • IEC 61850 tripping LAN module option
required
• System can accommodate multiple teleprotection
• Optional, built-in GPS receiver provides accurate time schemes in one chassis
tags • Analog and digital systems can be mixed in one chassis
• Complete address and checkback testing
• 1+1, 2+2 and other redundant back-up schemes are
• DNP3, Level 2 compliant easily supported
• Full system redundancy option available • 96 bit high capacity 56/64kbps status transfer module
• Optional pass-through 56/64kbs or 19.2kbs Mirrored Bit option
multiplexer relaying channels • Complete range of digital and fiber optic interfaces
• Additional plug-in protection modules such as RFL including C37.94
Distance Relays that can be used with the GARD 8000 • Remote interogation of far end with analog and digital
Teleprotection System systems
• 10 Year Warranty

July 20052006
February 1 RFL GARD 8000 TPC
System Description The GARD 8000 can have up to twelve communications
interfaces which allow the product to be used over all
The GARD 8000 Teleprotection channel is a revolutionary communications media available. The following digital
product platform that provides the user with a fully program- interfaces are available for the GARD 8000.
mable system that can be used for Direct Transfer Trip,
Permissive Transfer Trip, Blocking, and Unblocking applica- • RS-449/X.21/V.35 (DB37 connector), this multi-protocol
tions. The product is unique in that the same platform is interface is standard with all systems (Analog and Digital)
used for analogue, digital, and IEC 61850 LAN tripping • G.703 (DB15 connector)
applications. The base system is the digital platform that • T1/E1 (DB15 connector)
can be used to transmit and receive up to 32 functions in • E1 (BNC connector 50/75 Ohm
groups of 8. Each block of 8 commands is transmitted over • C37.94 short haul fiber, 820nm LED (ST connector),
a 56/64kbs data channel, these data channels can be any provides up to 12 channels for teleprotection functions
of the supported digital interfaces. In essence the user is • 1300nm LED SM/MM (ST connector)
provided a teleprotection channel that has four • 1300nm LASER SM (ST connector)
conventional 8-function teleprotection systems built-in • 1550nm LASER SM (ST connector)
for the price of one. • IEC 61850 TCPIP interface
Based on the RFL 9745 Teleprotection channel, the GARD A GARD 8000 can be configured with many functional
8000 Teleprotection system carries relaying communica- teleprotection modules, each with their own communica-
tions to the next level. The system uses fully program- tions interfaces, an example of this is shown in Figure 1.
mable logic and settings that can be uploaded or down- These communication channels can be configured for
loaded using the built-in TCPIP (electrical or optical) or RS- primary and back-up communications channels. For
232 interface. Communicating with the system is done with example 8 digital teleprotection commands from Functional
either a laptop PC using Web Browser, or, with a hand-held Module #1 can be transmitted over communications
PDA that communicates with the GARD 8000 with a built-in interface A via direct fiber optic link, and another 8 digital
secure infrared port. The GARD 8000 has a built-in web teleprotection commands from Functional Module #2 can
server that contains all of the user settings. No special or be transmitted over communications interface B over a
proprietary software is required to access the product. A digital microwave. This configuration capability also allows
most unique feature is that the user manual and customer a user to consolidate the number of teleprotection boxes
system and application drawings are stored in the GARD used for an application. A primary and a back-up scheme
8000 in Adobe pdf format and are easily accessible from can be configured with one GARD 8000, each of the
the GARD 8000 web browser. protection schemes can be configured with back-up
communications channels and also redundant power
The GARD 8000 is available in a 3U chassis (5.25") which supplies and processors. This configuration will have a
can support up to two additional analog or digital telepro- higher overall MTBF than two separate conventional
tection function modules, or a 6U chassis (10.50") which protection channels and will cost less.
can support up to eight analog or digital teleprotection
function modules. Other GARD 8000 communications or
protection modules can be used in the chassis if desired.
Redundant controller and power supplies are available as
options for applications where ultra reliable systems are
required.
Applications
The GARD 8000 Teleprotection communications interface
can be configured for audio, digital, fiber optic, or Ethernet
LAN per the IEC 61850 standard. It is well suited for stan-
dard and non-standard pilot protection schemes such as:
• Permissive Transfer Trip
• Direct Transfer Trip
• Blocking and Unblocking
• Remedial Action schemes (96 status bits over a 56/64 kbps
channel) Figure 1. System Architecture

July 2005 2006
Diagnostics and Testing
Diagnostic information is available and easily accessible with
the GARD 8000 Teleprotection unit. RFL's diagnostic package
takes the guesswork out of power system fault analysis and
evaluating communications system performance during the
fault-clearing process. The GARD 8000 Teleprotection pro-
vides the following standard features:
• Two TCPIP ports

• Two RS-232 ports for local and remote access
• 600 Sequence-of-events records
• Internal real-time system clock
• IRIG-B Clock sync input
• Current status of all system parameters
• Diagnostic information about the remote end
• Checkback testing either locally or remotely initiated
• Automatic checkback and addressing
• Channel propagation delay measured and reported
Figure 3. System of Events Details
Programmability
Logic functions can be changed or fine-tuned remotely
through the GARD 8000 Teleprotection unit's TCPIP or RS-
232 ports.
User Programmable Logic Functions

Change timer values, logic states and logic functions without
ever removing a module or opening the chassis.
User Programmable Inputs and Outputs

The 3-rack GARD 8000 System unit has 8 I/O slots in the
back to house a number of communications or discrete I/O
modules. All logic mapping to the inputs, outputs and
communications is fully programmable to meet specific
customer requirements.
Create your own alarm conditions

Figure 2. Sequence of Events Log The GARD 8000 Teleprotection unit can be programmed to
any alarm configuration desired using the outputs on the
Sequence of Events I/O modules.
Figure 2 shows the Sequence of Events directory, listing the
Every GARD 8000 Teleprotection unit is supplied pre-
record number, date, time, trigger label, status and color
programmed with either default operating logic or custom
indicator. Figure 3 shows the details from event record #1.
logic. It should be noted that it is standard practice for RFL
to provide system programming with every unit at no
charge. Figure 4 shows the parameter settings for Channel
4 of the audio-tone version.

July 2005 2006
60-Hz Rejection
A received tone at -30 dBm will not be affected by a 50 Hz
or 60 Hz signal as great as 40 Vrms with optional 50/60 Hz
blocking filter.
Amplitude Stability
The Transmit level will vary by no more than ±1 dB.
Spurious Output
All harmonics and spurious outputs are at least 40 dB
lower than the carrier.
Transmitter Stability
The transmitter frequency is stable within 0.02 percent over
the full range of temperature and input power variations.
Trip Boost
Amplitude: Adjustable from zero to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.
Duration: Adjustable from zero to 30 seconds in .5ms steps.
Figure 4. Channel Parameter Settings Input and Output Impedance

600 Ohms
System Specifications Digital Teleprotection

Audio Teleprotection Each Digital TPS Engine can transfer up to 32 functions.
These functions are broken down into 4 different function
The GARD 8000 audio tone teleprotection module provides blocks. Each can be configured independently, and sent
four FSK transmitters/receivers. All transceivers are over the communications bus to the communications
bidirectional and can be programmed for any operating interface of choice. Each block can have up to 8 functions,
frequency or bandwidth between 300 and 4,000 Hz. Chan- however, depending on the cummunications interface, the
nel one can be set to operate as a modem channel. This number of functions will vary.
channel provides a communication link to the remote
terminal for remote interrogation. Figure 5. shows a GARD 8000 with the four standard fun-
ction blocks configured with four different communications
Audio Interface Configurations interfaces.
Single Two-Wire Terminals
Single Four-Wire Terminals
Recommended Channel Frequencies

Range: 300 Hz to 4000 Hz
Resolution: 1Hz
Transmit Level
Adjustable from -40 dBm +10 dBm in 0.25 dB steps
Receiver Sensitivity
Minimum Input Level: -40 dBm
Maximum Input Level: 0 dBm
Receiver Dynamic Range

(referenced to center point)
-17 dB to + 11 dB
Adjacent Channel Rejection

Figure 5. GARD 8000 System Diagram
40 dB
Specifications are subject to change without notice

July 2005 2006
Fiber Optic Communications Isolation
The GARD 8000 Teleprotection unit's RS-232 ports (front
Fiber Optic Communications Interfaces and System Gains and rear panel) are isolated from circuit common and
are as follows: chassis ground to a surge withstand level of 500 Vdc.
Input Power Requirements (EN 60834-1)
Receiver System
Wavelength & Fiber Type Connector Output
Sensitivity
48/125V Rated 48/125 Vdc or 120 Vac
Emitter Type Type Level Gain
Range 38-150 Vdc or 96-132 Vac
1300nm LED Singlemode ST -17 dBm -39 dBm 21 dB Burden <100W
1300nm Laser Singlemode ST 0 dBm -39 dBm 39 dB 250V Rated 250 Vdc or 220 Vac
1550nm Laser Singlemode ST -3 dBm -39 dBm 36 dB Range 200-300 Vdc or 200-240 Va
C37.94 MM ST -19dBm -32dBm 13dB Burden <100W
Power Supply
A single or redundant power supply can be provided
Real Time Clock
depending on the reliability of the application. For example
IRIG-B a DTT application for a higher voltage level line may demand
The GARD 8000 Teleprotection unit accepts the IRIG-B the dependability of a redundant power supply. Note:
Standard Time Code on a 1kHz modulated or unmodulated The GARD 8000 Power Supply I/O provides two Form C
carrier. Nominal signal levels are 3.3 volts peak-to-peak alarm contacts for major and minor alarms.
(± 0.5v) for a logic "1" and 1 volt peak-to-peak (± 0.2v) for a
Operate Time
logic "0". The IRIG-B input presents a 3.7k ohm impedance
Audio-Tone Units (average trip times - Dual-Tone System):
and is transformer isolated.
± 30 Hz Shift: 26.47 ms
Resolution
± 42.5 Hz Shift: 20.57 ms
1 ms
± 60 Hz Shift: 14.78 ms
Accuracy
± 75 Hz Shift: 12.65 ms
Free Running: Within 1 minute per month
± 120 Hz Shift: 11.05 ms
Under IRIG-B Control ±1ms
Reset ± 150 Hz Shift: 10.12 ms
Manual or by IRIG-B code ± 240 Hz Shift: 9.22 ms
Digital and Fiber systems: 3-5 ms depending on mode of
operation. “Operate Time” is defined as the time from the
General Specifications
receipt of a command input to the response of a solid-
Events Storage state output, less any channel propagation time.
The Sequence of Events Recorder on the main controller Pre-Trip Timer
module can store up to 600 events. Adjustable in 0.5 ms steps
TCPIP Port Trip Hold Timer
Two TCPIP ports, one on the front, one on the back. Adjustable in 0.5 ms steps
RS-232 Interrogation Ports Command Extend Timer
The GARD 8000 Teleprotection unit provides two RS-232 Adjustable in 0.5 ms steps
Ports, located on the front and rear of the chassis. The RS- Non-Volatile Storage
232 Port located on the front of the chassis has priority. All parameters relating to system operation are stored in eras-
The front of the RS-232 port is configured as a DCE Inter- able non-volatile RAM. All parameters related to event log-
face. The rear RS-232 port is configured as a DTE Interface. ging are stored in capacitor-backed RAM.
RFI Susceptibility
Number of Stop Bits: One ANSI PC37.90.2 (35 Volts/Meter)
Parity: None EN 60255-22-3 (RFI Class III)
Flow Control: XON/XOFF
Interface Dielectric Strength
All contact inputs, solid-state outputs, power supply inputs

July 2005 2006
and relay outputs meet the following specifications:
ANSI C37.90-1989 (Dielectric)
ANSI C37.90.1-1989 (SWC and Fast Transient)
EN 60255-5 (1500 Vrms Breakdown Voltage and
Impulse Withstand)
EN 60255-22-1 (SWC Class III)
EN 60255-22-2 (ESD Class III)
EN 60255-22-4 (Fast-Transient Class III)
EN 60834-1
Temperature
Operating: -20° C to +75° C (-4° F to + 167° F)
Storage: -40° C to +85° C (-40° F to +185° F)
Relative Humidity
Up to 95 percent at +40° C (+104° F), non-condensing
Warranty Statement
RFL’s standard warranty for the GARD 8000 Teleprotection
unit is 10 years from date of delivery for replacement or
repair of any part which fails during normal operation or
service.
User Interface
protection devices offer added flexibility they also increase the Figure 6. GARD 8000 Front Panel LEDs (6U)
risk for errors. Complicated settings, configurations and
interconnections all combine to having an undesirable effect
on protection system security and dependability. The GARD 8000 front panel has two infrared ports when the
PDA is supplied permanently mounted on the front. One port
The GARD 8000 System is designed with ease-of-use in communicates with the front PDA and the other is available
mind. While high functionality and great detail is provided, it is for any external PDA the user may carry. Communication
not necessary to make field configurations, if not desired. The may be established with any Palm OS PDA via its browser
web browser User Interface makes interaction with the device application.
highly intuitive and handling greatly simplified.
Front Panel LEDs

Two rows of ten multi-colored LEDs provide basic event
information. The LED operation is fully configurable and
labels can be changed to suit the application. Custom
configuration and labeling can be factory-made by RFL
without extra charge. Any field modifications required are
simply made by use of the browser interface.
Front Panel Display

An optional front panel display is available for metering,
Figure 7. GARD 8000 3U Front Panel
targets and settings. The front panel is making use of a
standard PDA (Personal Digital Assistant) running a web
browser application.

July 20052006
Figure 9. Web Browser User Interface
Figure 8. Front Display/PDA *
*Typical PDA is shown. PDA supplied as part of the GARD 8000

Teleprotection unit is subject to change.
Figure 10. Ethernet Connector
Web Browser User Interface Input and Output Modules

All interaction with the GARD 8000 System is made by the The GARD 8000 System is configured with a selectable
use of a standard web browser. The web pages reside in number of input and output modules on the rear part of the
the device; no special application software is required on chassis. Each communication interface comes with 1 input
the PC. module with 6 opto-isolated inputs or 1 output module.
Solid-state outputs, relay outputs and additional inputs are
Web browser technology provides a much higher level of mounted in sets of 6, with 2 sets on each board occupying
ease-of-use as compared to the conventional “menu-driven” 1 slot. The following combinations are available for mount-
operation. It is fast and simple to view device status, access ing in the up to 10 rear slots (6U) or 4 rear slots (3U):
diagnostic and test functions and to change settings. • 1 communication interface/6 inputs
Emulating the operations of a standard web site, navigation • 1 communication interface/6 outputs
is intuitive and eliminates the need to study written instruc- • 6 inputs/6 inputs
tions. If preferred, the instruction manual, that also resides in • 6 inputs/6 relay outputs
the device, is simply accessed by the HELP function. • 6 inputs/6 solid state outputs
• 6 solid state outputs/6 solid state outputs
For off-line preparation of settings and configuration files, a • 6 solid state outputs/6 relay outputs
small application program “emulating” a GARD 8000
• 6 relay outputs/6 relay outputs
System, which is available free of charge, can reside on the
PC or local server.
All relay output contacts are Form A (NO) or Form B (NC)
A PC is connected to the front TCP/IP port with a standard jumper selectable. A simple setting for an inverter logic gate
connector. Alternatively, the front (or rear) RS-232 port can provides inversion for each input and output. Each input and
be used, but will not provide the same “lightning-fast” output has a timer associated with it that has settings for
response. both pick-up delay (input debounce, output security) and
drop-out delay (pulse-stretch).

July 2005 2006
Optically Isolated Inputs The GOOSE message is routed to perform trip functions of
Quantity: 6 per module circuit breakers, but a shortcoming with the network is that
Input Voltage Jumper Selectable: 24/48/125/250 Vdc there is no easy means to transfer a GOOSE message to a
Operation Range: remote location if the Ethernet network does not encom-
24 Volts: 19 to 36 Vdc, Nominal Input pass the two substations. The GARD 8000 Ethernet trip-
48 Volts: 37 to 68 Vdc ping module solves this dilemma, by retrieving GOOSE
125 Volts: 94 to 150 Vdc messages from the LAN and transporting them over any of
250 Volts: 189 to 300 Vdc its communication interfaces. The communication interface
Input Current: 1.5 mA minimum can be of any type supported by GARD 8000; digital, fiber,
Minimum Pulse Width: audio-tone and/or PLC.
0.03 ms, additional debounce time set in the logic
Solid-State Outputs
Output Current: Maximum 1 A continuous, 2 A for
1 minute, or 10 A for 100 msec
Open-Circuit Voltage: 300 Vdc maximum
Pick-up Time: 0 msec
Relay Output
Relay Pick-up Time: 4 msec
Output Current Rating: 6 A continuous
Alarm Relays Figure 12. GARD 8000 teleprotection between two

Quantity: 2 IEC 61850 substations
Contacts: SPDT (Form C)
Output Current: 100 mA 300 Vdc resistive load The GARD 8000 provides the link between two IEC 61850
substations over any communication media. The sending
Terminal Connections GARD 8000 retrieves GOOSE messages from the substa-
Screw terminals for ring lugs with wire up to AWG #10. tion LAN, puts it on a communication link to a remote
GARD 8000 that puts it on its substation LAN.
Ethernet Tripping Module
(IEC 61850 compliant)
The GARD 8000 System can be provided with an Ethernet
Tripping Module. IEC 61850 substation automation provides
a LAN (Local Area Network) in the substation where trip
messages are passed between the devices via GOOSE
messages on a TCP/IP network.
Figure 13. GARD 8000 Teleprotection between an

IEC 61850 substation and a conventional substation
Generally, a new IEC 61850 substation needs to interact

with a conventional substation at remote line ends. In this
Figure 11. IEC 61850 Substation case, the GARD 8000 retrieves GOOSE messages for
transfer trip or pilot relaying operations from the IEC 61850
July 2005 2006
substation LAN, transports them over any communication The GARD 8000 can be configured with 56/64kb channels
link and the remote, receiving GARD 8000 performs normal with RS-449, G.703, and C37.94 fiber optic interfaces. The
teleprotection operations such as tripping of breakers and unit can also be configured with a dual RS-232 communica-
pilot relaying signaling. tions channel for Mirrored Bit relaying or other slow speed
devices. Figure 15 shows a RFL 9300 current differential
In addition, in case pilot relaying and teleprotection need to relay and a Mirrored Bit relay communicating over a GARD
be performed over an Ethernet network between two 8000 Teleprotection channel configured with two relaying
conventional substations, a GARD 8000 at each line end communication interfaces.
can send GOOSE messages over the network for
intertripping.
Figure 15. GARD 8000 Used as a Multiplexer
Figure 14. GARD 8000 Teleprotection over an Ethernet GPS Module

Network Accurate time stamping is essential for evaluation of
protection system operations, especially following a major
High Capacity Status Transfer system disturbance.
Module The substation may be equipped with a GPS central clock
that can be connected to the GARD 8000 IRIG-B port.
The GARD 8000 standard Teleprotection System supports When a central clock is not available, the GARD 8000 can
up to eight high-speed functions in one 64 kbps channel.
have its own, built-in GPS receiver. This module is supplied
For telemetry applications, there is often a need to trans-
with a small antenna to be mounted outside to receive the
port a higher number of status points, but transmission
GPS signal.
time is less critical than for teleprotection signaling. To
complement the teleprotection systems, a high capacity
When the GARD 8000 is equipped with the internal GPS
status module is available. This module supports up to 96
receiver, the IRIG-B port can be used to supply IRIG-B to
status bits over a 64 kbps channel. End-to-end delay is 7-
other devices. This enables not only the GARD 8000
12 ms, depending on the security count used.
System to keep accurate time tags but other protective
devices also have access to a dc-powered, substation
The high capacity status transfer module can be added as
hardened, time source that is independent from any
an optional front mounted module, or be supplied instead of
the standard teleprotection system on the Base TPS/ centralized GPS system.
Display board.
Multiplexer Pass-Through
Channel
The GARD 8000 has 12 built in communications channels
that can be used for Teleprotection and other Protection
applications. These communications channels can also be
used with external devices that require a communications
or pilot channel to operate. This allows the GARD 8000
Teleprotection channel to also be used as a substation
multiplexer that other protective relays can be interfaced Figure 16. GPS Antenna
with.
July 2005 2006
RS-232 Serial User Interface

RS-449 Digital Teleprotection Interface Ethernet Status LED
T1/E1 Digital Teleprotection TCPIP User Interface

Interface Multiprotocol Digital I/O
(V.35, RS-449, X.21)
Primary & Back-up
power feeds
DNP/MODBUS
User Interface
IRIG-B Input
GPS Input
Distance Relay
Input/Outputs (Groups of 6)
Input/Outputs
Figure 17. Rear View 6U GARD 8000 Digital Protection System

with (4) Digital Interfaces
4-Function Audio Tone Protection Module

TCPIP Interface
Multiprotocol Digital I/O
IRIG-B Input Ethernet Status LED
(V.35, RS-449, X.21)
GPS Input
RS-232 Serial User

Interface Input/Output Modules Primary & Back-up Power
Input
DNP/MODBUS Interface
Figure 18. Rear View 3U GARD 8000 Dual Analog Protection System.

July 2005 2006
GARD 8000

July 2005 2006
July 2005 12 GARD 8000 TPC
GARD 8000
Programmable
Single Function PLC
System Features Single Function PLC Features

• Remote access via Ethernet, RS485, RS232 • Single or dual PLC systems in one chassis available
• Easy to program via integrated HTML Web Pages • One product for all ON/OFF and FSK PLC applications
• Optional integrated 4-zone distance protective relay • Up to four ON/OFF or FSK can be supplied in one
• Supports IEC 61850 chassis
• User defined logic and alarms for your specific • One filter
applications • Built-in skewed hybrid
• Automatic setup for commissioning
• Straight forward web browser user interface for settings
and diagnostics; no proprietary application program • Integrated Reflected Power Meter
required • Full system redundancy option
• Optional built-in GPS receiver provides accurate time • 10W, 50W, and 100W Power Options
tags • Built-in Check-back with remote initiate capabilities
• DNP3, Level 2 compliant standard
• Full system redundancy option available • Complies to latest ANSI C93.5-1997 Single Function PLC
Standard
• Additional plug-in protection modules such as audio-tone
teleprotection and distance relay modules can be used • Complete address and Check-back testing
with the GARD 8000 Single Function PLC System • 10 Year Warranty

July 2005
April 2006 1 GARD 8000 SF PLC
System Description Output Impedance: 50 Ohms
The GARD 8000 Single Function PLC channel is a product

Frequency Stability: +/- 10 Hz
that can be programmed as Frequency-Shift Keyed (FSK)
power line carrier system or as an amplitude-modulated External Keying Inputs: (4) Carrier Start, Stop, Reserve
ON/OFF powerline carrier transmitter/receiver terminal. Signal Key, and Check Back Test Initiate. All inputs pro-
grammable active high or low to operate at the following
The unit is designed for pilot protection relaying applica- nominal voltage levels: 5 Volt Logic Level, 48 Vdc,
tions, requiring high-speed reliable communications. The 125Vdc, 250 Vdc. Active inputs are recorded in SOE
GARD 8000 PLC can be programmed for On/Off type files and their status displayed on the optional front PDA.
directional comparison blocking (DCB), or Frequency Shift,
type direct transfer trip, (DTT) Unblocking (DCU), or either Receiver
single, or dual phase comparison applications. Frequency programmable: Programmable from 30 to
The extensive sequence of events and diagnostic features 500 kHz in 125 Hz increments, without hardware changes.
provide information for the GARD 8000 and integrated PLC
modules.The chassis is available in both a 3U version Receiver Level: On command, the receiver sensitivity will
which can support one PLC system, or a 6U version which self adjust to the incoming signal strength. The receiver
can support up to two PLC systems. gain will then be fixed.
In the smaller 3U version, a PLC system and a plug-in 4- Receiver Input Impedance: Terminated mode, 50 or 75
Zone distance relay module is supported eliminating the Ohm Unterminated mode, > 30 K-Ohm.
need for a conventional PLC and distance relay. The 6U
version can support two PLC systems and two distance Dynamic Range: >40dB
relays with full redundancy to simplify applications even
further.
Receiver Bandwidth, Channel Spacing and Channel
Other GARD 8000 function modules such as an analog Delay Times: Receiver bandwidth is user selectable from
teleprotection module and current differential relay module the following table, without hardware changes. The
can also be used in the chassis if desired. Redundant channel times are inclusive of GARD 8000 System.
controller and power supplies are available as options.
On/Off Carrier Operation

Description
On/Off Powerline Carrier is normally used in a “Block-
ing” type protection application. In this application the
transmitter is normally off, and is turned on by a protec-
tive device. The blocking signal is sent to a remote sta-
tion, via the transmission line, to prevent undesirable
tripping for circuits that are not affected by the system
fault. The Blocking signal needs to be sent, and received Receiver Outputs: The receiver provides the following
with a minimum of delay to prevent tripping out healthy outputs:
circuits, and causing unnecessary system disturbances. • (4) Block received
On/Off Powerline Carrier applications, are almost always • (1) Transmitter Fail / Hardware Alarm
bi-directional, and send, and receive the same RF fre- • (1) Checkback fail alarm
quency at both terminals. • (1) Checkback test in progress
• Guard output status
Transmitter • Checkback initiate status
Frequency programmable: Frequency programmable • High percent reflected power alarm
from 30 to 500 kHz in 125 Hz increments, without hard- • Logic alarm
ware changes.
Automatic Checkback Operation: The PLC system is
Output Power: Programmable for 1 watt, 3 watt, or 10 supplied with an internal automatic carrier checkback
watt levels. Output power is displayed on optional front program. The checkback code structure, and program-
PDA and is remotely accessible. Front panel test points ming is compatible with the existing RFL 9785, and pre-
are available for transmitter output power level measure- vious Model 6785P series checkback systems. The
ments. The unit is available with 50W and 100W options checkback can also be manually initiated from either end.
in external 3RU chassis.

July
April2005
2006 2 GARD 8000 SF PLC
This system consists of two modes, normal and hard Output Impedance: 50 Ohms
carrier. In normal mode, a code is on-off modulated onto
the powerline and a response code is returned at full or Frequency Stability: +/- 10 Hz
reduced power by the receiving station. In hard carrier,
instead of a response code, the receiving station re- Receiver
sponds by turning on its carrier at full or reduced power Receiver Input Filter: A receiver input filter program-
for a programmed period of time. mable from 30 to 500 kHz, in 1 kHz increments, is pro-
vided to remove excess energy at the receiver input.
The filter has a 4 kHz bandwidth.
FSK Carrier Operation
Frequency programmable: Programmable from 30 to
Description 500 kHz. in 125 Hz increments, without hardware changes.
Frequency shift power line carrier is normally used in a
“Unblocking” or “Permissive” type protection application. Receiver Level: The receiver sensitivity self adjusts to
In this application the transmitter is continuously send- the incoming signal strength. The actual signal level is
ing a “Guard” signal, via the transmission line to the re- available for display on the optional front mounted PDA,
mote terminal. Reception of the guard signal provides remotely via TCP/IP or RS-232 interface or on a local
both continuous channel, and equipment monitoring. The laptop, The level can be selectively displayed in either
receipt of a valid guard signal prevents high speed trip- dBm, (+/- 20 dB range), or mv.
ping at the remote terminal. The transmitter is keyed to
the Unblock or Trip frequency by a protective device. Receiver Sensitivity: Minimum = 5 mVrms, Maximum =
The trip signal is sent to a remote station, via the trans- >25 Vrms
mission line, to enable tripping for circuits that are af-
fected by the system fault. The tripping signal needs to Receiver Input Impedance: Terminated mode, 50 or 75
be sent, and received with a minimum of delay to “per- Ohm Unterminated mode, > 30 K-Ohm.
mit” high speed tripping of transmission line circuit break-
ers to limit equipment damage, and minimize any system Dynamic Range: >40dB
disturbances. These permissive trip type applications are
usually bi-directional, and send, and receive different Receiver Bandwidth, Channel Spacing and Channel
guard, and trip frequencies between terminals. Delay Times: Receiver bandwidth is user selectable from
the following table, without hardware changes. The
Transmitter channel times are inclusive of GARD 8000 System.
Frequency programmable: Frequency programmable
for either 2F, or 3F operation, from 30 to 500 kHz in 125
Hz increments, without hardware changes. Output fre-
quency settings will be available on optional front
mounted PDA.
Frequency Shift : Standard frequency shifts of +/- 100

Hz +/- 250 Hz, and +/- 500 Hz will be available. Three –
frequency operation shall be capable of providing 250
Hz shift from the center (Guard) frequency for permis- No Test Equipment Needed
sive relaying protection channels, and 100 Hz shift from
the center frequency (Guard) for direct transfer trip Transmit and Receive Levels Measured
(breaker failure) applications. The Transmit and Receive Levels are measured and
can be accessed remotely. If the receive level drops
Output Power: User programmable for the following below a preset value an alarm will activate.
power output levels:
• 1W guard /1W trip Reflected Power Measured
• 1W guard /10W trip The power reflected due to mismatch of the power line
• 3W guard /10W trip coupling equipment is measured every second and avail-
• 10W guard /10W trip able when requested. A threshold can be entered by
• Optional 50W guard /50W trip available the user, beyond which an alarm condition is generated.
• Optional 100W guard /100W trip available

July 2005
Trans Hybrid Loss Measured Programmability
The trans-hybrid attenuation value is also available to
the system. The amount of the transmitter leaking back
into the receiver will be measured. This attenuation in- Logic functions can be changed or fine-tuned remotely through
cludes the affect of any receive filter. This feature elimi- the GARD 8000 Single Function PLC unit's TCPIP or RS-
nates the need for frequency selective voltmeters to 232 ports.
perform routine carrier maintenance testing.
User Programmable Logic Functions
Change timer values, logic states and logic functions without
ever removing a module or opening the chassis.
Diagnostics and Testing
User Programmable Inputs and Outputs
Diagnostic information is available and easily accessible with The smaller 3U version of the GARD 8000 when configured
the GARD 8000 Single Function PLC unit. RFL's diagnostic with the single Function PLC module has two I/O slots avail-
package takes the guesswork out of power system fault analy- able. Each I/O can accept communications or up to two dis-
sis and evaluating communications system performance dur- crete input / output modules. All logic mapping to the in-
ing the fault-clearing process. The GARD 8000 Single Func- puts, outputs and communications is fully programmable to
tion PLC provides the following standard features: meet specific customer requirements.
• Two ethernet TCP/IP ports and two RS-232 ports for local Create your own alarm conditions
and remote access The GARD 8000 Single Function PLC unit can be programmed
• 512 Sequence-of-events records to any alarm configuration desired using the outputs on the I/
• Remote access to transmit/receive and reflected power O modules.
levels
• Internal real-time system clock Programming
• Optional built-in GPS receiver
• IRIG-B Clock sync input The GARD 8000 Single Function PLC unit is programmed
• Current status of all system parameters to use a standard web browser (e.g. MicroSoft Internet
• Diagnostic information about the remote end Explorer™ on a PC. All programming levels available
• Checkback testing either locally or remotely initiated over the RS-232 or TCP/IP interface are password-pro-
• Automatic checkback and addressing tected.
Sequence of Events Every GARD 8000 Single Function PLC unit is supplied
Figure 1 shows the Sequence of Events directory, listing the pre-programmed with either default operating logic or
record number, date, time, trigger label, status and color in- custom logic. It should be noted that it is standard prac-
dicator. tice for RFL to provide system programming with every
unit at no charge.
Real Time Clock

IRIG-B
The GARD 8000 Single Function PLC unit accepts the IRIG-
B Standard Time Code on a 1kHz modulated or unmodulated
carrier. Nominal signal levels are 3.3 volts peak-to-peak (±
0.5v) for a logic "1" and 1 volt peak-to-peak (± 0.2v) for a logic
"0". The IRIG-B input presents a 3.7k ohm impedance and is
transformer isolated. An optional integrated GPS receiver is
available.
Resolution 1 ms
Accuracy
Free Running: Within 1 minute per month
Under IRIG-B Control ±1msecs
Reset
Figure 1. Sequence of Events Log Manual or by IRIG-B code
July
April2005
2006 4 GARD 8000 SF PLC
Remote Access and rear panel) are isolated from circuit common and chassis
ground to a surge withstand level of 500 Vdc.
Events Storage RS-232 Interrogation Ports
The Sequence of Events Recorder on the main controller mod- The GARD 8000 Single Function PLC unit provides two RS-
ule can store up to 512 events. After this limit is reached, 232 Ports, located on the front and rear of the chassis. The
older events are overwritten. The Events Log keeps a running front RS-232 port has priority and is configured as a DCE
tally of the number of times each function, input, output and interface. The rear RS-232 port is configured as a DTE inter-
alarm is active along with the time and date the event oc- face.
curred. Up to 1,000,000 counts can be stored for each item.
Data Rates
Ethernet TCP/IP Port 300 bps, 1200 bps, 2400 bps, 9600 bps or 19.2 Kbps.
Two ethernet TCP/IP ports, located on the front and rear of Communication Parameters:
the chassis, for remote interrogation. Number of Data Bits: Eight
Number of Stop Bits: One
Isolation Parity: None
The GARD 8000 Single Function PLC unit's RS-232 ports (front Flow Control: XON/XOFF
Figure 2. GARD 8000 50 Watt Configuration
The GARD 8000 Single Function PLC can be configured for either 50 or 100 Watt RF power outputs. The RFL model
9508 RF power amplifier is rated for 50 Watt PEP and is the standard amplifier used for single sideband applications.
Two amplifiers are required for 100 Watt applications. A 6U GARD 8000 can also be configured with 50 and 100 Watt
applications.
Trip Hold Timer

General Specifications Adjustable in 0.5 ms steps
Displayed Level Accuracy Command Extend Timer

The levels displayed on the front panel and through Adjustable in 0.5 ms steps
remote access will be within 1 dB of the actual values.
Non-Volatile Storage
Pre-Trip Timer All parameters relating to system operation are stored
Adjustable in 0.5 ms steps in electric erasable non-volatile RAM.
Specifications subject to change without notice

July
April2005
2006 5 GARD 8000 SF PLC
All parameters related to event logging are stored in User Interface
capacitor-backed non-volatile RAM.
Protection system reliability may be compromised by increased
RFI Susceptibility complexity of protection devices. While these protection de-
ANSI C37.90.2 (35 Volts/Meter) vices offer added flexibility they also increase the risk for errors.
EN 60255-22-3 (RFI Class III) Complicated settings, configurations and interconnections all
combine to having an undesirable effect on protection system
Interface Dielectric Strength security and dependability.
All contact inputs, solid-state outputs, power supply in-
puts and relay outputs meet the following specifications: The GARD 8000 System is designed with ease-of-use in mind.
ANSI C37.90-1989 (Dielectric) While high functionality and great detail is provided, it is not
ANSI C37.90.1-1989 (SWC and Fast Transient) necessary to make field configurations, if not desired. The web
EN 60255-5 (1500 Vrms Breakdown Voltage and browser User Interface makes interaction with the device highly
Impulse Withstand) intuitive and handling greatly simplified.
EN 60255-22-1 (SWC Class III)
EN 60255-22-2 (ESD Class III) Front Panel LEDs
Two rows of ten multi-colored LEDs provides basic event infor-
EN 60834-1
mation. The LED operation is fully configurable and labels can
be changed to suit the application. Custom configuration and
Input Power Requirements (per IEC 834-1)
labeling can be factory-made by RFL without extra charge.
48/125V Rated 48/125 Vdc or 120 Vac
Any field modifications required are simply made by use of the
Range 38-150 Vdc or 96-132 Vac
browser interface.
Burden <100W
250V Rated 250 Vdc or 220 Vac
Range 200-300 Vdc or 200-240 Vac Front Panel Display
Burden <100W An optional front panel display is available for metering, tar-
gets and settings. The front panel is making use of a standard
Power Supply PDA (Personal Digital Assistant) running a web browser appli-
A single or redundant power supply can be provided cation.
depending on the reliability of the application. For ex-
ample a DTT application for a higher voltage level line
may demand the dependability of a redundant power
supply. When a redundant supply is used, only one sup-
ply carries the load.
The GARD 8000 Power Supply is provided with Form C
alarm contacts for power supply failure and system fail-
ure alarm.
Temperature
Operating: -20° C to +75° C (-4° F to + 167° F)
Relative Humidity
Warranty Statement
RFL’s standard warranty for the GARD 8000 Single Func-
tion PLC unit is 10 years from date of delivery for re- Figure 3 . GARD 8000 Front Panel LED's (6U)
placement or repair of any part which fails during normal
The GARD 8000 front panel has two infrared ports when the
operation or service.
PDA is supplied permanently mounted on the front. One com-
municates with the front PDA and the other is available for any
Ordering Information
external PDA the user may carry. Communication may be
The GARD 8000 Single Function PLC unit ordering in- established with any Palm OS PDA via its browser applica-
formation can be found on pages 10 and 11. tion.
July 2005
RS-232 port can be used but will not provide the same
“lightning-fast” response, as the ethernet port.
Web browser technology provides a much higher level of

ease-of-use as compared to the conventional “menu-
driven” operation. It is fast and simple to view device sta-
tus, access diagnostic and test functions and to change
settings. Emulating the operations of a standard web site,
navigation is intuitive and eliminates the need to study
Figure 4. GARD 8000 System (3U) written instructions. If needed, the instruction manual, that
also resides in the device, is simply accessed by the HELP
function.
For off-line preparation of settings and configuration files,

a small application program “emulating” a GARD 8000
System can reside on the PC or local server. Archiving
and documentation of settings and configuration is made
simple as these are stored in standard text files.
Up to 8 setting groups are available. A group does not

only contain settings but all configuration, output and
input mapping and labels as well. Input contacts and/or
HMI commands can be used for group switching.
Figure 5. Front Display/PDA*

*Typical PDA is shown. PDA supplied as part of the GARD 8000 System is
subject to change.
Web Browser User Interface

protection devices offer added flexibility they also in-
crease the risk for errors. Complicated settings, con-
figurations and interconnections all combine to having
an undesirable effect on protection system security and Figure 6. Web Browser User Interface
dependability.
The GARD 8000 System is designed with ease-of-use

in mind. While high functionality and great detail is pro-
vided, it is not necessary to make field configurations, if
not desired. The Web Browser User Interface makes in-
teraction with the device highly intuitive and handling
greatly simplified. Figure 7. Ethernet Connector
All interaction with the GARD 8000 System is made by
the use of a standard web browser. The web pages re- Input and Output Modules
side in the device; no special application software is re-
quired on the PC. The GARD 8000 System is configured with a selectable num-
ber of input and output modules on the rear part of the chas-
A PC is connected to the front Ethernet TCP/IP port with sis. Each communication interface contains 1 input module
a standard connector. Alternatively, the front (or rear) with 6 opto-isolated inputs or 1 output module.
July 2005
Solid-state outputs, relay outputs and additional inputs are Input Voltage Jumper Selectable: 24/48/125/250 Vdc
mounted in sets of 6, with 2 sets on each board occupying 1 Operation Range:
slot. The following combinations are available. Ten rear slots 24 Volts: 19 to 36 Vdc, Nominal Input
are available in the 6U version and 4 rear slots are available 48 Volts: 37 to 68 Vdc
in the 3U version: 125 Volts: 94 to 150 Vdc
• 1 communication interface/6 inputs 250 Volts: 189 to 300 Vdc
• 1 communication interface/6 outputs Input Current: 1.5 mA minimum
• 6 inputs/6 inputs Minimum Pulse Width:
• 6 inputs/6 relay outputs 0.03 ms, additional debounce time set in the logic
Solid-State Outputs
• 6 inputs/6 solid state outputs
• 6 solid state outputs/6 solid state outputs
Output Current:
• 6 solid state outputs/6 relay outputs
Maximum 1 A continuous, 2 A for
• 6 relay outputs/6 relay outputs
1 minute, or 10 A for 100 msec
All output contacts are Form A (NO) or Form B (NC) jumper Pick-up Time: 0 msec
selectable. A simple setting for an inverter logic gate will pro- Relay Output
vide inversion for each input and output. Each input and out- Quantity: 6 per module
put has a timer associated with it that has settings for both Relay Pick-up Time: 4 msec
pick-up delay (input debounce, output security) and drop-out Output Current Rating: 6 A continuous
delay (pulse-stretch). Surge: 30 A for 200 msec
Alarm Relays
Optically Isolated Inputs Quantity: 2
Quantity: 6 per module Contacts: SPDT (Form C)
Output Current: 100 mA 300 Vdc resistive load
Figure 8. Front View 3U GARD 8000 with panel removed

July 2005

C37.94 Primary Communications
RS-232 ASYNC Module
Power Switches
Back-up Power Input
Primary Power Input
DNP/MODBUS Input
GPS Input
PLC Module for
DCB Application
IRIG-B Input

TCPIP Port
Figure 9. Rear View 6U GARD 8000 with Distance Module with Powerline Carrier
Interface and Current Differential Relay with Primary and Back-Up Communications
Status Input/Output
Module PLC Module
56/64kb Multi-Protocol Port
IRIG-B Port Primary and Backup

Power Input
TCPIP Port
GPS Antenna
RS 232 Interface
DNP/MODBUS Input Optional Distance Relay

Output Module
Figure 10. Rear View 3U GARD 8000 with PLC Module, Distance Relay,
and Input/Output Module

July 2005
GARD 8000
Single Function PLC

July
April2005
2006 10 GARD 8000 SF PLC
NOTES

July 2005
July 2005 12 GARD 8000 SF PLC
GARD 8000
Distance Relay
Benefits and Features of the GARD 8000 Distance Relay:
• Plug-in Line Distance Protection in the GARD 8000 Pro- • 4 Zones, all 4 reversible
tective Relay and Communications System • Phase-phase and phase-ground mho characteristic
• Use as a stand-alone Line Distance Relay or as a • Selectable quadrilateral characteristic
communications independent back-up for a GARD
• Built-in logic for permissive (PUTT, POTT, DCUB)
8000 Current Differential Protection Module
and blocking (DCB) pilot schemes
• Stepped Distance Protection or Distance Pilot Pro-
tection using the GARD 8000 System's communi- • Out-of-step block and trip
cation interfaces which include audiotone, digital, fi- • Loss-of-potential block
ber optic, or Power Line Carrier • High-set and inverse time overcurrent elements
• Eliminates the need for external teleprotection chan- • Breaker failure protection
nel devices for pilot communications • Reclosing and synch check
• Eliminates relay-to-teleprotection wiring
• Under- and overvoltage elements
• Simplifies pilot protection system commissioning and
• Under-, over-, and rate-of-change frequency elements
configuration
• 3U or 6U chassis depending on number of functional • Accurate Fault Locator
modules included • Digital fault records directly in COMTRADE
• Dual breaker application by combining the distance • Optional Single Pole Trip Logic
relay with breaker modules • 10 Year Warranty

July 2005
March 2006 1 RFL GARD 8000 Distance Relay
System Description The mho characteristic is polarized by the positive sequence
voltage of the corresponding phase providing a dynamic charac-
The Distance Protection Module in the GARD 8000 System is teristic that expands with the source impedance.
a full-featured Line Distance Relay with all protection func-
tions required for a complete line protection terminal. It can be The quadrilateral phase-ground elements are polarized with
used as a stand-alone Main protection, to provide channel in- the negative sequence current of the corresponding phase.
dependent back-up for the current differential protection, or This provides load compensation of the reactive limiting line
which will 'tilt' according to the direction and amount of load
operate in parallel with the Current Differential Module, provid-
flow, eliminating underreach and overreach of Zone 1 ground
ing an independent, different, measuring principle.
distance elements.
The Distance Protection Module has four measuring zones, Quadrilateral characteristic is available for all zones.
where all zones can be set Forward or Reverse. A Reverse
Zone 4 is used in pilot schemes and/or as a back-up zone
for bus faults behind the relay.
The Distance Protection Module can operate as a channel

independent stepped distance relay or applied in a pilot scheme,
selectable to permissive, unblocking or blocking. Weak infeed
and transient block logic is included. The Distance Relay
Module may use any communications interface in the GARD
8000 System. The channel interface can be dedicated to the
Distance Relay or be shared with a Teleprotection System
and/or a integrated Current Differential Protection Module.
Figure 2. Distance Protection Characteristic
Operating Times
The GARD 8000 Distance Relay is using 32 samples for
distance measurement. The following curves show Zone 1
operating times for SIR (Source to Line Impedance Ratio)
Figure 1. Distance Module Functional Diagram of 0.1, 1 and 10 for different fault types. ( A System fre-
quency of 60 Hz and solid state outputs were used for all
Protection Features tests).
The Distance Protection in the GARD 8000 System resides on

a plug-in module with its own input transfomers and protection
processor. The protection function is independent from other func-
tional modules in the system and uses the GARD 8000 platform's
power supply, inputs, outputs, communicatoins interfaces, HMI
and logic processor.
Distance Protection
The GARD 8000 Distance Protection Module provides 4 dis-
tance zones with separate measuring elements for all types
of faults.
Phase and ground elements have individual timer settings for

each zone. Figure 3. Phase-Phase Fault Operating Times

July 2005
Phase-phase and phase-ground supervision are individually
set. This enables higher sensitivity for ground faults while
security is increased for phase-phase and three-phase faults
by setting the supervision element above load current.
Overvoltage and Undervoltage Elements

The GARD 8000 Distance protection provides overvoltage and
undervoltage elements for each phase. Operation can be en-
abled on a single phase or three phase basis. Individual set-
ting thresholds and timers are available for overvoltage and
undervoltage operation.
Figure 4. Three Phase Fault Operating Times

Out-of-Step Blocking
The GARD 8000 Distance Protection has an Out-of-Step De-
tector that will block operation of any distance zone accord-
ing to setting. The Out-of-Step Characteristic has settable
blinders and timer that enables fine tuning to actual system
conditions. The Out-of-Step detector can also be set to per-
form Out-of-Step tripping, with the selection of trip on the Way
Out or Way In.
Figure 5. Single Phase to Ground Fault Operating Times
Overcurrent Elements
The GARD 8000 Distance Protection Module includes a large
number of overcurrent elements for back-up.
Instantaneous phase, ground and negative sequence elements

can be set to provide independent high-speed tripping for clos-
ing faults.
Phase, ground and negtive sequence time overcurrent elements Figure 6. Out-of-Step Detector
provide back-up with any of the built-in pre-defined inverse time
characteristics. All standard IEC and ANSI curves are available Load Encroachment
and 'User curves' with other characteristics can be supplied on The GARD 8000 Distance Protection has dynamic mho char-
request. acteristic which will expand with the source impedance. As it
is not possible to control the resistive reach of the dynamic
All current elements can be selected to be torque controlled mho, there is a risk that the characteristic will fall into the
by directional elements (67). The ground directional element load impedance on long, heavily loaded lines. To prevent this,
can be set to Zero or Negative Sequence polarizing. a load encroachment characteristic is provided. The charac-
teristic has individual setting for forward and reverse load,
Overcurrent Supervision of Distance Elements which enables fine tuning for the actual application. Gener-
All distance elements are supervised with settable overcurrent ally, maximum forward and reverse load differ and the block-
elements. Forward-looking and reverse-looking zones have ing zones should not be larger than necessary for the appli-
individual current element settings which ensure security when cation. The load encroachment characteristic provides block-
ing zones that will prevent an expanding mho characteristic
a reverse zone is used as part of a pilot scheme operation.
from operation within the set zone.

July 2005
Frequency Elements and Load Shed Functions
The GARD 8000 Distance Protection Module includes a num-
ber of frequency elements:
• 81M overfrequency, 3 steps
• 81m underfrequency, 3 steps
• 81D rate-of-change of frequency, 3 steps
The ability to freely combine these frequency measuring ele-

ments with undervoltage and overvoltage elements, and out-of-
step detection allows implementation of flexible load shedding
schemes tailored to the application.
Load shed commands are easily sent to multiple breaker

Figure 7. Load Enchroachment Characteristic groups by use of the flexible output configuration and/or com-
munications channels for local and remote breaker opera-
tion.
Loss-of-Load Trip
The Loss-of-load trip logic provides high-speed trip from an The number of output modules and communications inter-
overreaching Zone 2 element in case the remote breaker trips. faces included in one GARD 8000 system is order specific.
Detecting the loss-of-load in one or two phases activates the
permission to trip after a set time from Zone 2 operation. Recloser
The GARD 8000 Distance Protection Module has an inte-
Close-into-Fault Operation grated recloser.
When line side potentials are used, the close-into-fault logic will
provide instantaneous trip in case a fault is detected following The reclose intiate function is set for each Zone as well as for
the breaker closing. The close-into-fault logic asserts when the time-delayed and instantaneous overcurrent trips.
positive sequence voltage is below 50 V and the positive se-
quence current exceeds the set value. A settable 2nd harmonic Each reclose attempt has an individual dead-timer setting.
restraint is applied to the current measurement. Counters and Reset timers are also included.
When the positive sequence voltage exceeds 50 V, polariz- When the Single Pole Trip Option is included in the GARD
ing voltage is available for the distance elements and the close- 8000 Distance Protection Module, additional reclosing modes
into-fault logic will initiate instantaneous trip from the over- are available.
reaching Zone 2 or Zone 3 elements.
Synch Check
Fault Locator Each of the three reclosing attempts can be supervised by the
The GARD 8000 Distance Protection Module includes an internal sync check function, according to setting.
accurate fault locator based on an algorithm with load com-
pensation. The distance may be expressed either in miles (or The Synch Check unit compares the voltage magnitudes, phase
kilometers) or as a percentage of line length. and/or angles on both sides of the breaker. Each of these three
conditions has their own threshold setting and ENABLE/DIS-
Loss-of-Potential (Fuse Fail) Detector ABLE setting. If set to DISABLE, the condition is not checked
A secure Loss-of-Potential Detector is provided in the GARD as part of the sync check criteria.
8000 Distance Protection Module. Operation is based on low
phase voltage, presence of current in the same phase and no Voltage Check
fault present. The supervision by a fault detector ensures that For the synch check unit to allow energizing of a dead line or
the Detector will not operate during a fault condition. dead bus, a voltage check element is included. The setting
options are:
• HLHB - Hot Line Hot Bus (synch check only)
The logic will detect any type of loss-of-potential condition;
• HLDB - Hot Line Dead Bus
one phase, two phases or all three phases, provided that the
• DLHB - Dead Line Hot Bus
load current exceeds the 0.75 A threshold required for activa-
• DLDB - Dead Line Dead Bus
tion.

July 2005
Breaker Failure Protection
The breaker failure protection has a re-trip and back-up trip
function with associated timers. When the GARD 8000 Dis-
tance Protection Module is supplied with the Single Pole Trip
Option, the breaker failure protection is provided with sepa-
rate phase and ground breaker failure timers.
Breaker Monitoring Functions

The GARD 8000 Distance Protection records the interrupting
current for each trip and accumulates it as kiloamperes
Figure 9. GARD 8000 Distance Protection for a Breaker
squared. This number is proportional to the accumulated power
and a half application
actually interrupted by the breaker.
This function has two settings: For a breaker and a half application, a GARD 8000 System
(1) Sum (kA2 ) Cumulative Value can include two Distance relays, one for each line, and three
(2) Excessive number of trips independent Breaker modules, one for each breaker.
The Cumulative Value is updated each time a breaker opening
takes place. The Distance Protection Module adds up all inter- Sequence of Event Records
rupting power for the actual breaker,and may be modified to set
an intial value by the user. This value can be reset to zero follow- The Distance Protection Module provides 100 events in addition
ing breaker maintenance. to the 600 events provided by the GARD 8000 System SOE.
Each of these 100 records give a summary of the event, includ-
The excessive number of trips function prevents an uncon- ing triggers and fault voltages and currents.
trolled sequence of openings and closings that may damage
the breaker. If the set number of operations (1 - 40) is ex- These records are accessible directly from the Distance Re-
ceeded during a 30 minute period, an alarm output signal is lay SOE page in the web browser.
generated. This signal can be used to operate a breaker lock-
Time stamp by use of IRIG-B or the optional GPS receiver
out relay.
enables 1 ms event resolution.
Dual Breaker Applications
The Distance Protection also provides 15 detailed Fault
Records to help with quick fault analysis. These fault records
give information about type of trip, distance to the fault and
pre-fault and fault currents and voltages.
Figure 8. Breaker and a half and Ring Bus applications
A distance line protection operates on the total line current,

summed from two ct’s in breaker and a half or ring bus appli-
cations. However, the breaker failure relay and other breaker
related protection elements need to use the individual current
inputs from the ct’s. The GARD 8000 System therefore
complements the distance line protection with independent
Breaker Modules for these additional functions. The Breaker
Module includes breaker failure relay, recloser and synch
check, overcurrent, voltage and frequency elements. The
GARD 8000 System logic makes it easy to combine the pro-
tection modules as required by the application. Figure 10. Sequence of Event Record
July 2005
Digital Fault Records
The Distance Protection Module has an internal Digital Fault
Recorder (DFR). All analog channels used by the distance
protection function are recorded with 32 samples per cycle.
Protection and measuring element status are available as
digital channels, facilitating comprehensive fault analysis.
The fault records are stored in standard COMTRADE format

and are retrived via the GARD 8000 System web browser
interface. Any compliant COMTRADE viewer can be used to
display the records. RFL can provide a reader on request.
The 15 seconds memory used for DFR records accomodates
from 1 to 64 records storage in non-voltile memory, depend-
ing on the set duration of the oscillographic fault record. Pre-
fault time can be set to 1 - 25 cycles and the length to 5 - 240
cycles. Additional protection modules (distance or current Figure 12. End-to-End Trip Times
differential) can provide additional DFR functions in the GARD
8000 System. Installation costs are reduced as there is no wiring required
between relay and teleprotection; all ‘wiring’ is done in logic.
Depending on the scheme, and communication media used,
end-to-end trip time improvements of 40-85% can be expected.
Power-Line Carrier Applications

The GARD 8000 can be supplied as a Distance Protection
System with built-in Power Line Carrier Module. A Distance
Relay and a Power Line Carrier can be housed in one 3U
chassis, or in the 6U chassis that also allows for redundancy
and/or added functional modules.
Combining the Distance Relay and PLC in one package elimi-

nates external wiring and delays associated with external
interfaces, providing a faster and more reliable pilot protec-
tion system.
Figure 11. Digital Fault Record
Pilot Applications
The GARD 8000 Distance Protection Module is supplied with
integrated pilot communications. The Base System has a
multi-protocol digital interface, additional communications
modules can be included as required for your application:
• More digital interfaces for redundant communications
• Direct Fiber interfaces Figure 13. Distance Relay with Power-Line Carrier
• Audio Tone
• Power Line Carrier, FSK or On/Off selectable The GARD 8000 PLC module emulates the well known RFL
• IEC 61850 compliant Ethernet tripping module 9780/9785 in one package with selectable FSK or ON/OFF
operation. All adjustments are made by use of the web browser
In addition to cost savings of 20 – 55% as compared to a user interface including settable transmit and receive frequen-
conventional distance relay with external teleprotection chan- cies; 30 kHz to 535 kHz.
nel device, the GARD 8000 offers increased pilot protection
performance. Because of the integrated pilot logic and inter- Keying inputs, trip and alarm outputs are all making use of the
face, any delays due to de-bounce timers are eliminated. GARD 8000 System’s I/O modules and/or internal logic.

July 2005
Distance Protection Specifications
AC Current Inputs Directional Overcurrent Unit
Nominal 1 or 5 A Characteristic angle 0 - 90 deg
Continuous 4 times nominal Minimum polarizing voltage 0.05 - 10.00 V
One second 100 times nominal Negative or Zero sequence ground directional polarization
Burden <0.2 VA for 5 A nominal
<0.05 VA for 1 A nominal Time Overcurrent Elements
5A nominal 0.10 - 125 A
AC Voltage Inputs 1A nominal 0.02 - 25 A
Rated voltage 120 Vac @ 60 Hz
Time Dial ANSI: 0.5 - 10.00
110 Vac @ 50 Hz
Continuous 2 times nominal IEC: 0.05 - 1.00
Burden <0.05 VA IEEE/US: 0.1 - 10
Definite time 0.05 - 300.00 sec
Frequency Moderately inverse
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz Inverse
Very inverse
Metering Accuracy Extremely inverse
Voltages +/- 0.1% (60 - 300V) Long time inverse
Currents 5A nominal +/-2 mA/0.1% (0.5-160A) Short time inverse
1A nominal +/-0.5mA/0.1% (0.1-30A)
Inverse + maximum time
Phase angle +/-0.3 deg
Power factor +/-0.001 Very inverse + maximum time
Frequency +/-0.001 Hz Extremely inverse + maximum time
Active/reactive power (5A nominal and >1A load current) User defined
0-180 deg 0.3%
+/-15 or 165 deg 0.5% active, 5% reactive Under- and Overvoltage Elements
+/-45 or 135 deg 1% active, 1% reactive Pick-up range 20.00 - 300.00 V
+/- 75 or 115 deg 5% active, 0.5% reactive Time delay 0.00 - 300.00 sec
+/-90 deg 0.3% reactive
Frequency Elements
Distance Elements Pick-up range 40.00 - 70.00 Hz
Zone 1 - 4 5A nominal 0.01 - 100 ohms Undervoltage inhibit 20 - 150 V
1A nominal 0.05 - 500 ohms Rate of change 0.5 - 10.00 Hz/s
Resistive reach 5A nominal 0.01 - 100 ohms
1A nominal 0.05 - 500 ohms Synchronism Check Elements
Voltage difference 2 - 30%
Overcurrent Supervision Elements Phase angle 5 - 80 deg
5A nominal 0.20 - 7.50 A Slip frequency 0.005 - 2.00 Hz
1A nominal 0.04 - 1.5 A
Time delay 0.05 - 300.00 s
Instantaneous/Definite Time Overcurrent Elements
Recloser
5A nominal 0.10 - 150.00 A
No of shots 1-3
1A nominal 0.02 - 30.00 A
Dead-time 0.05 - 300 s
Time delay 0.00 - 300.00 seconds
Reset time 0.05 - 300 s

July 2005
Pilot Communications Specifications
Audio Tone Interface Amplitude Stability
The GARD 8000 System can be supplied with two or four FSK The Transmit level will vary by no more than ±1 dB
audio tone transceivers. All transceivers are bi-directional and
can be programmed for any operating frequency or bandwidth Spurious Output
between 300 and 4,000 Hz. Channel one can be set to operate All harmonics and spurious outputs are at least 40 dB lower
as a modem channel. This channel provides a communication than the carrier.
link to the remote terminal for remote interrogation, setting
changes or system testing from the local terminal. Transmitter Stability
The transmitter frequency is stable within 0.02 percent over the
Displayed Level Accuracy full range of temperature and input power variations.
The levels displayed on the front panel and through remote
access will be within 1 dB of the actual values. Trip Boost
Amplitude: Adjustable from zero to +12 dB in 1 dB steps
Operate Time Duration: Adjustable from zero to 30 seconds in 0.5ms steps
Audio Tone Units (average trip times, Dual Tone System):
± 30. Hz Shift: 26.47 ms
Input and Output Impedance
± 42.5 Hz Shift: 20.57 ms
600 Ohms
± 60. Hz Shift: 14.78 ms
± 75. Hz Shift: 12.65 ms
Digital Interfaces
± 120. Hz Shift: 11.05 ms
The GARD 8000 Digital Teleprotection functionality is pro-
± 150. Hz Shift: 10.12 ms
± 240. Hz Shift: 9.22 ms vided on the main controller module at no additional cost.
Up to 32 functions of digital protection are available for use
Audio Interface Configurations over a maximum of 4 digital channels. Each of the 4 chan-
Single Two-Wire Terminals nels can be set to transmit 4 commands, 8 commands, or 7
Dual Two-Wire Terminals commands to emulate a RFL 9745 Digital Teleprotection
Single Four-Wire Terminals Channel.
Dual Four-Wire Terminals
Operate Time
Recommended Channel Frequencies 3 ms maximum in the most secure mode
Resolution: 1Hz Digital Interface Options
• T1/E1; 1.544 Mbps/2.048 Mbps for direct connection to
Transmit Level a SONET/SDH multiplexer
Adjustable from -40 dBm +10 dBm in 0.25 dB steps • RS-449; 56/64 kbps - 768 kbps for connection to a CSU/
DSU or a T1 multiplexer
Receiver Sensitivity • X.21, V.35; 64 - 768 kbps
Minimum Input Level: -40 dBm • G.703; 64 kbps
Maximum Input Level: 0 dBm • Fiber, 64 - 768 kbps
Receiver Dynamic Range (referenced to center point)

-17 dB to + 11 dB
Wavelength & Fiber Connector System Typical
Emitter Type Type Type Gain Distance
Adjacent Channel Rejection
40 dB ANSI C37.94 Multimode ST 25 dB 1 km/0.6 miles
60-Hz Rejection 1300nm LED Singlemode ST 19 dB 27 km/17 miles

A received tone at -30 dBm will not be affected by a 50 Hz or 1300nm Laser Singlemode ST 6 dB 59 km/37 miles
60 Hz signal as great as 40 Vrms with optional 50/60 Hz
1550nm Laser Singlemode ST 30 dB 90 km/56 miles
blocking filter.

July 2005
Single or Redundant Power Supply Temperature
Wide Range 48/125 Vdc or 120 Vac Operating -20° C to + 75° C (-4 F to 165 F)
Range 38 - 150 Vdc or 96 - 132 Vac Storage -40° C to +85° C (-40° F to +185° F)
250Vdc 220/250 Vdc or 220 Vac
Range 200 - 300 Vdc or 200 - 240 Vac Relative Humidity
Burden Maximum 100 W with fully populated 6U Up to 95 percent at +40° C (+104° F), non-condensing
chassis
System Ports
Terminal Connections Front Electrical TCP/IP (RJ45)
Rear Screw Terminals RS-232
Rear Electrical (RJ45) or optical TCP/IP
Inputs and Outputs RS-232
The GARD 8000 System can be configured with up to 20 input RS-485
and output modules on the rear part of the chassis. Outputs Optional network port(s): Modbus
are jumper selectable Form A or Form B, and in addition each DNP 3.0
input and output has an inverter and a timer associated with
it that has settings for both pick-up (debounce) delay and Time-Code Input
drop-out (pulse-stretch) delay. • BNC connector for IRIG-B unmodulated (logic-level) or
modulated (10 V peak-peak, maximum)
Optically Isolated Inputs • BNC connector for 1- PPS (pulse per second) reference
Quantity: Six per module input (logic-level)
Jumper selectable Input Voltage: 24/48/125/250 Vdc • Optional GPS receiver (with external antenna). With GPS
option installed the system outputs logic-level IRIG-B and
Rating No operation Operates Max Input Voltage 1-PPS signals
24 <14 >19 36
48 <28 >37 68 RFI Susceptibility
125 <70 >94 150
ANSI PC37.90.2 (35 Volts/Meter)
250 <140 >189 300
IEC 255-22-3 (RFI Class III)
Input Current Minimum 1.5 mA
Interface Dielectric Strength
Minimum Pulse Width 0.03 ms, additional debounce time
All contact inputs, solid-state outputs, power supply inputs
set with logic timer settings
and relay outputs meet the following specifications:
Solid-State Outputs ANSI C37.90-1989 (Dielectric)
Quantity Six per module ANSI C37.90.1-1989 (SWC and Fast Transient)
Output Current Maximum 1 A continuous, 2 A for EN 60255-5 (1500 Vrms Breakdown Voltage and
one minute, or 10 A for 100 msec Impulse Withstand)
Open-Circuit Voltage 300 Vdc maximum IEN 60255-22-1 (SWC Class III)
Pick-up Time 0 msec EN 60255-22-2 (ESD Class III)
Relay Outputs EN 60834-1
Quantity Six per module
Relay Pick-up Time 4 msec Warranty
Output Current Rating 6 A continuous RFL’s standard warranty for all GARD 8000 Systems is 10 years
Surge 30 A for 200 msec from date of delivery for replacement or repair of any part which
fails during normal operation or service.
Alarm Relays
Quantity Two
Contacts SPDT (Form C)
Rating 100 mA 300 Vdc resistive load

July 2005

RS-232 ASYNC Module
Power Switches
Back-up Power Input
Primary Power Input
DNP/MODBUS Input
GPS Input
PLC Module for
DCB Application
IRIG-B Input

TCPIP Port
Distance Relay
IRIG-B Port
TCPIP Port Inputs
GPS Antenna Input
RS-232 Interface
Current Differential Module
DNP/MODBUS Input
Input/Output Module
Figure 15. Rear View 3U GARD 8000 with Current Differential Module with Digital Commu-
nications and a Distance Module with Audio-Tone Communications

July 2005
GARD 8000

July 2005
July 2005 12 RFL GARD 8000 Distance Relay
GARD 8000
Current Differential Relay
Benefits and Features of the GARD 8000 Current Differential Relay:
• A complete Current Differential Protection in the GARD 8000 • High speed operation; 12 ms minimum, 18 ms typical
Protective Relay and Communications System • Phase-segregated measurement; three phase elements,
• Stand-alone or together with a GARD 8000 Distance Pro- one ground element
tection Module as communications independent back-up • A wide range of communication interfaces to choose from:
• Duplicates the highly successful RFL 9300 measuring prin- • T1/E1, electrical or fiber
• RS 449, 56 -768 kbps
ciple with added features
• X.21, 64-768 kbps
• Unaffected by up to +/- 4 ms channel asymmetry, giving a • V.35, 64-768 kbps
tolerance of 8 ms difference in transmit and receive path • G.703, co-directional, 64 kbps
delays • C37.94 fiber
• Two- or three-terminal line applications • Fiber, multi-mode or single-mode; up to 80 km
• Single or redundant communications interface
• Dual Breaker option for breaker and a half or ring bus appli-
cations • Extensive Sequence of Event Reporting
• Single Pole trip option • Digital fault records in COMTRADE; 32 samples per cycle
• Ideal for series compensated line applications • Supports DNP 3.0
• 3U or 6U chassis depending on number of functional mod- • 10 Year Warranty
ules included
March 2006 1 RFL GARD 8000 Current Differential Relay

System Description The GARD 8000 Current Differential Protection System is
suitable for series compensated lines and is inherently
The Current Differential Protection Module in the GARD 8000 phase selective, making it an excellent choice for single
System is a proven current-only, high speed line protection pole trip applications.
system. The advantages with current-only schemes are well
known: The GARD 8000 Current Differential Protection Module can
• potentials not required be complemented with an independent full Line Distance
• unaffected by CCVT transients Protection Module within the same GARD 8000 chassis for
• never overreach, never underreach full redundant Pilot Protection or as channel failure back-up
• is not affected by mutual coupling on parallel lines for the Current Differential Protection. The Distance Protec-
• unaffected by power swings tion Module provides additional protection elements such as
voltage elements, recloser and synch check.
Current Differential Protection was traditionally reserved for
short line applications due to the limitation of the required The two protection modules can be applied in pilot schemes
pilot wire. However, with the advantage of new communica- over the same communications channel, or use independent
tions technology, digital communications become increas- communications interfaces. Or, each can be provided with
ingly available for longer lines as well. an independent communications interface and use a third
as a common redundant channel.
Current Differential Relaying is unquestionably the simplest
form of line protection, requiring very few settings to be It has been shown that using independent protection
entered for the actual line. The GARD 8000 Current Differen- modules within the same chassis with redundant power
tial Protection System provides high-speed fault clearing and supplies and redundant communications interfaces provides
high sensitivity without compromising security. a higher degree of redundancy than physically separate
protection devices. A direct comparison based on compo-
The GARD 8000 Current Differential Protection System can nent failure rates between conventional, redundant Main 1
be used for two- or three-terminal lines as well as tapped and Main 2 pilot protections with redundant pilot protections
load applications. within one GARD 8000 chassis shows an increased MTBF
(Mean Time Between Failure) of a factor of 10 in favor of the
GARD 8000 hardware configuration.
Figure 1. Typical Current Differential Relay (87L) and Distance Relay (21L) Application

Protection The local current, IL will be 180 degrees out of phase with
the remote current, IR and they will be of equal magnitude.
Current Differential relaying is a method of extending the
benefits of differential protection as applied to transformers,
buses or generators to the protection of transmission lines.
Comparing current flowing into a line to the current flowing
out of the same line allows for a simple protection scheme
with high sensitivity and high speed simultaneous tripping
of both line terminals. At the same time, the differential
scheme is unaffected by external effects such as faults,
load and power swings.
The differential current can be measured with different

methods:
· Magnitude comparison
· Phase comparison
· Phasor comparison (magnitude and angle)
· Charge comparison
· Combinations of the above Figure 3. Currents for an External Fault
Regardless of the method used, all line differential relays

operate on a difference in current into the line compared to
Most digital current differential relays emulate the electro-
the current out of the line.
mechanical pilot wire relays operating principle, but more
complexity is added due to the communication medium.
For an internal fault, the current will flow into the line from
While the pilot wire relay does its comparison in real-time,
both line terminals with the polarity of the current trans-
a digital current differential relay needs to compensate for
formers as shown in Figure 2. The local current IL will be
the delay introduced by the communications channel for
practically in phase with the remote current IR. A small
transmitting the digitized current information from one line
phase difference between the two currents is caused by
terminal to the other.
different source angles at the local and remote end.
The characteristics of the communications channel need to
be taken into account both by the relay’s communications
interface design and the measuring principle used. The
communications interface has to block a corrupted data
message from being delivered to the relay and ensure that
the two relays remain synchronized to each other. Accu-
rate channel time delay measurement has to be performed
so that proper alignment of the measuring quantities can
be made. The relay’s measuring principle needs to prop-
erly handle errors introduced by any asymmetric channel
delay (different transmit and receive paths) on switched
communications networks in addition to deal with power
system issues causing false differential currents, mainly
from ct errors.
The GARD 8000 Current Differential Relay, like its prede-

cessor RFL 9300, has been designed for use with digital
Figure 2. Currents for an Internal Fault
communication media. The communications interface and
the relay operating algorithm work in synergy to provide the
optimum performance of any current differential relay
available on the market. The unique design allows for high
For an external fault, the current will flow into the line in one sensitivity and high speed operation for internal faults while
terminal and out of the other as shown in Figure 3. maintaining high security for external faults.

scalar sum becomes the effective restraint quantity and the
Measurement arithmetic sum becomes the effective operate quantity, per
The Current Differential Measuring Principle used in GARD the bias characteristic shown in Figure 6.
8000 is based on RFL's patented Charge Comparison
Measurement Principle.
Figure 4. Integration of Current Samples
To perform charge comparison, the current wave of each Figure 5. Channel Delay Compensation (external fault)
phase and residual is sampled every ½ ms. The half-cycle
area under each wave is measured by integrating current
samples between zero-crossings. For each phase and
ground, the resulting ampere-seconds area (coulombs of
charge) is stored in local memory, along with polarity and
start/finish time tags. This storage operation occurs only if
the magnitude exceeds 0.5 A rms equivalent and the half-
cycle pulse width is larger than 6 ms, but does not exceed
10 ms.
Every positive (negative for 3I0) magnitude is transmitted to

the remote terminal, along with phase identification and
some timing information related to the pulse width. When
the message is received at the remote terminal, it is
assigned a received time tag. A time interval representing
the channel delay compensation is then subtracted from
the received time tag. The adjusted received time tag is
then compared with the locally stored time tags looking for
a coincidence, or a ‘nest’. Figure 6. Bias Characteristic
A nest is achieved when the adjusted received time tag falls

between the local start and finish time tags for a given half- The bias level is an operate threshold which provides
cycle stored in memory, as illustrated in Figure 5. security in the presence of spurious operate current due to
line charging current, current transformer mismatch and
When the nesting operation is successful, the local and other errors. As shown in Figure 6, the bias level rises
remote current magnitudes (actually charges converted to sharply after the scalar sum reaches a high value. This
equivalent currents) are added to create the scalar sum provides security for unequal ct saturation during high
(sum of absolute magnitudes) and arithmetic sum (absolute current external faults. At lower currents, the bias level is
magnitude of the sum of the signed magnitudes). The much lower allowing for a high sensitivity without sacrific-
ing security.

The operating principle of the charge comparison relay is Measuring Characteristics
very similar to that of a percentage differential current
differential relay, but instead of comparing phasor quanti- Any differential relay's restraint characteristic can be
ties, the differential measurement is based on half-cycle illustrated in an Alpha (or Beta) plane as devised by
charges. The local relay receives a current value equivalent Warrington in 1962. In the Alpha plane, the complex ratio of
to the positive half-cycle charge from the remote end the remote current versus the local current (IR/IL) is plotted,
(negative for the ground subsystem). This value is com- and the restraint characteristic is formed.
pared to the corresponding half-cycle charge in the local
end. For an internal fault, they are both positive and the The Alpha current-ratio plane is a tool to analyze the
scalar and arithmetic sums are formed and compared to the response of differential relays to different power system
operating criteria. conditions and to channel asymmetry. For steady-state
condtions, the current-ratio trajectory reduces to a point.
Disregarding any errors, the steady state condition falls
along the real axis, at -1 (IR = -IL). Internal faults will plot
along the positive real axis and the restraint characteristic
should surround the stead-state point -1.
The GARD 8000 restraint characteristic forms a half circle,

around the -1 point. The restraint area extends to +/- 90
degrees, allowing for measuring errors due to ct saturation
or channel delay asymmetry. The +/- 90 degrees show that
the relay is capable of handling up to +/- 4 ms (5 ms for 50
Hz) channel delay error with maintained sensitivity and
security. This error equals 8 ms difference (10 ms for 50
Hz) between transmit and receive communication paths.
Figure 7. Operation for an Internal Fault
For an external fault, the received positive charge from the

remote end coincides with the local negative charge and the
relay restrains properly.
Figure 9. Alpha Plane Characteristic
Figure 8. Restraint for an External Fault

Input Transformers
CT saturation is always a concern for current differential
relays. In addition to the secure dual slope characteristic,
the GARD 8000 Current Differential Relay has a patented
design of the input transformers. The transformers faithfully
reproduce the current input wave forms, with any dc offset
and ct saturation by the use of a flux cancellation technique
that creates a near perfect current transformer. The input
transformer consists of a small toroidal core with a single
turn looped through its center. This single turn is an
extension of the secondary winding of the ct supplying the
phase current waveform. An active circuit cancels out the
flux in the toroidal core. This allows the toroid to handle
large dc offsets without saturating. The circuit maintains its
accuracy over a 250-ampere (rms) dynamic range. This Figure 11. Operating Times for Single Phase to Ground Faults
patented procedure prevents any dc offsets that may be
present in the current waveform from saturating the core.
Figure 12. Operating Times for Three Phase Faults
Figure 10. Response of Input Transformers Direct Transfer Trip

The GARD 8000 Current Differential Relay includes one High
Input and Output Modules Speed Direct Transfer Trip function, as well as 8 additional
logic signal transfers to the remote end. The 1 + 8 transfer trip
The GARD 8000 Current Differential Relay provides very high functions can be triggered by any input and/or logic signal in
speed tripping, combined with high sensisitivity and high the GARD 8000 System. The receiving relay routes the
security. In addition, the operating time is very constant (small signals to output contacts, and/or delivers them to the internal
difference between minimum and maximum operate times) logic for use by other protection elements, such as the
which enables shorter time settings for breaker failure relaying distance relay.
and other back-up elements, resulting in an overall faster
protection scheme. High Set Trip
The operating speed is largely independent of current magni- The Current Differential Measuring element is complemented
tude versus pick-up settings when the operating threshold is by a High Set current comparison element that will provide
exceeded by as little as 0.25 A. even faster operation for high current faults. The typical
operating time from this element is 12 ms.

Overcurrent Back-Up Protection Specifications
Functions AC Current Inputs
In case of channel failure, the Current Differential Function is Nominal 1 or 5 A
rendered in-operable. For these situations, back-up phase and Continuous 4 times nominal
ground overcurrent elements with inverse time characteristic One second 100 times nominal
can be enabled. Optionally, the GARD 8000 System can be Burden <0.2 VA for 5 A nominal
supplied with an independent Distance Line Protection <0.05 VA for 1 A nominal
Terminal.
Frequency
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Fault Recording
Metering Accuracy
In addition to the GARD 8000 System SOE, the Current
Local and Remote Currents 10mA / 3%
Differential Protection Module provides a more detailed log of
operation of the elements internal to this module. Time stamp
Current Differential Elements
by use of IRIG-B or the optional GPS receiver give 1 ms event
Bias 5A nominal 1.0 - 30.0 A
resolution.
1A nominal 0.2 - 6.0 A
The Current Differential Protection detailed event log stores up Slope 1 0-200%
to 15 events, in addition to the 600 events available in the Slope 2 0-200%
GARD 8000 Main System. Cross-over point 5A nominal 1.0 - 30 A
1A nominal 0.2 - 6.0 A
The Current Differential Protection Module has an internal High Set Trip 5A nominal 6.0 - 30.0 A
Digital Fault Recorder (DFR). 1A nominal 1.2 - 6.0 A
CT ratio 40 - 4000
All analog channels used by the Current Differential Protec-
tion function are recorded with 32 samples per cycle (40 Overcurrent Fault Detectors
samples for 50 Hz). Protection and measuring element status 5A nominal 1.0 - 30.0 A
are available as digital channels, facilitating comprehensive 1A nominal 0.2 - 6.0 A
fault analysis.
The fault records are stored in standard COMTRADE format 5A nominal 1.0 - 50.0 A
and are retrived via the GARD 8000 System web browser 1A nominal 0.2 - 10.0 A
interface. Any compliant COMTRADE viewer can be used to Time delay 0.01 - 1.00 seconds
display the records. RFL can provide an optional reader.
Time Overcurrent Elements
5A nominal 0.20 - 25.00 A
1A nominal 0.04 - 5.00 A
Time Dial 0.05 - 15.00
US Moderately inverse
Inverse
Very inverse
Extremely inverse
IEC curves Type A / Type B / Type C
Communication Interfaces
• T1/E1; 1.544 Mbps/2.084 Mbps for direct connection to
a SONET/SDH multiplexer
• RS 449; 56/64 kbps - 768 kbps for connection to a
CSU/DSU or a T1 multiplexer
• X.21, V.35; 64 - 768 kbps
• G.703; co-directional, 64 kbps
• C37.94 fiber
Figure 13. Digital Fault Record • Fiber; 64 - 768 kbps, as specified in the following table:

Wavelength & Fiber Connector System Typical Alarm Relays
Emitter Type Type Type Gain Distance Quantity Two
Contacts SPDT (Form C)
ANSI C37.94 Multimode ST 25 dB 1 km/0.6 miles Rating 100 mA 300 Vdc resistive load
1300nm LED Singlemode ST 19 dB 27 km/17 miles
Temperature
1300nm Laser Singlemode ST 6 dB 59 km/37 miles
Operating -20° C to + 75° C (-4 F to 165 F)
1550nm Laser Singlemode ST 30 dB 90 km/56 miles Storage -40° C to +85° C (-40° F to +185° F)
Relative Humidity
Power Supply System Ports
Single or Redundant Power Supply Front Electrical TCP/IP (RJ45)
Wide Range 48/125 Vdc or 120 Vac RS-232
Range 38 - 150 Vdc or 96 - 132 Vac Rear Electrical (RJ45) or optical TCP/IP
250Vdc 220/250 Vdc or 220 Vac RS-232
Range 200 - 300 Vdc or 200 - 240 Vac RS-485
Burden Maximum 100 W with fully populated 6U Optional network port(s) Modbus, DNP 3.0
chassis
Time-Code Input
Terminal Connections • BNC connector for IRIG-B unmodulated (logic-level) or
Rear Screw Terminals modulated (10 V peak-peak, maximum)
• BNC connector for 1- PPS (pulse per second) reference
Inputs and Outputs input (logic-level)
The GARD 8000 System can be configured with up to 20 • Optional GPS receiver (with external antenna). With
input and output modules on the rear part of the chassis. GPS option installed the system ourpurs logic-level
Outputs are jumper selectable Form A or Form B. In IRIG-B and 1-PPS signals
addition each input and output has an inverter and a timer
associated with it that has settings for both pick-up (de- RFI Susceptibility
bounce) delay and drop-out (pulse stretch) delay. ANSI PC37.90.2 (35 Volts/Meter)
Optically Isolated Inputs IEC 255-22-3 (RFI Class III)
Quantity Six per module Interface Dielectric Strength
Jumper selectable Input Voltage 24/48/125/250 Vdc All contact inputs, solid-state outputs, power supply inputs
Rating No operation Operates Max Input Voltage and relay outputs meet the following specifications:
24 <14 >19 36 ANSI C37.90-1989 (Dielectric)
48 <28 >37 68 ANSI C37.90.1-1989 (SWC and Fast Transient)
125 <70 >94 150 IEC 255-5 (1500 Vrms Breakdown Voltage and Impulse
250 <140 >189 300 Withstand)
Input current: minimum 1.5 mA IEC 255-22-1 (SWC Class III)
Minimum Pulse Width: 0.03 ms, additional de-bounce time IEC 255-22-2 (ESD Class III)
set with logic timer settings IEC 255-22-4 (Fast-Transient Class III)
Solid-State Outputs IEC 834-1
Output Current Maximum 1 A continuous, 2 A for Certifications
one minute, or 10 A for 100 msec ISO: The GARD 8000 System with all its functional mod-
ules is designed and manufactured using ISO 9001-2000
Open-Circuit Voltage 300 Vdc maximum
certified quality program.
Pick-up Time 0 msec
Relay Outputs
Warranty
RFL’s standard warranty for all GARD 8000 Systems is
Relay Pick-up Time 4 msec
10 years from date of delivery for replacement or repair
Output Current Rating 5 A continuous
of any part which fails during normal operation or service.
Surge 30 A for 200 msec

Figure 14. GARD 8000 Current Differential Module AC/DC Schematics


RS-232 ASYNC Module
Power Switches
Back-up Power Input
Primary Power Input
DNP/MODBUS Input
GPS Input
PLC Module for
DCB Application
IRIG-B Input

TCPIP Port
Distance Relay
IRIG-B Port
TCPIP Port Inputs
GPS Antenna Input
RS-232 Interface
Current Differential Module
DNP/MODBUS Input
Input/Output Module
Figure 16. Rear View 3U GARD 8000 with Current Differential Module with Digital Commu-
nications and a Distance Module with Audio-Tone Communications

GARD 8000

12 RFL GARD 8000 Current Differential Relay
GARD 8000
IEC 61850 Tripping Module
Specifications Communications Interfaces

• Dual 100 Base FX fiber Ethernet ports, • T1/E1 electrical or fiber
operating in parallel for IEC 61850 compliant GOOSE • RS-449, 56 - 768 kbps
messages • X.21, 64 - 728 kbps
• Each port has its own MAC and IP addresses • V.35, 64 - 728 kbps
• ST connectors • G.703, co-directional, 64 kbps
• Trip disable inputs • ANSI C37.94 fiber
• Status LEDs for port activity (TX/RX) and fiber ports • Fiber, multi-mode or single-mode; up to 100 km
enabled
• Audio-Tone, 2 wire or 4 wire
• Form factor: GARD 8000 rear module (one slot)
• Power Line Carrier, On/Off or FSK selectable
• 100 Base FX Ethernet ports
Description
The GARD 8000 System can be provided with an Ethernet Tripping Module. IEC 61850 substation automation provides a LAN
(Local Area Network) in the substation where trip messages are passed between the devices via GOOSE messages on a TCP/
IP network. The unique communications architecture of the GARD 8000 also allows IEC 61850 trip commands to be sent
between substations using conventional communication methods such as fiber optic, digital, audio-tone, and single function
power line carrier communication links.

March 2006
July 2005 1 GARD 8000
RFL IEC Sys
61850
Figure 1. IEC 61850 Substation
The GOOSE is routed to perform trip functions of circuit Figure 3. GARD 8000 Teleprotection between an
breakers but a shortcoming with the network is that there are IEC 61850 substation and a conventional substation
no easy means to transfer a GOOSE message to a remote
location if the Ethernet network does not encompass the two
Generally, a new IEC 61850 substation needs to interact with
substations. The GARD 8000 Ethernet tripping module solves
a conventional substation at remote line ends. In this case,
this dilemma, by retrieving GOOSE messages from the LAN
the GARD 8000 retrieves GOOSE messages for transfer trip
and transporting them over any of its communication
or pilot relaying operations from the IEC 61850 substation
interfaces. The communication interface can be of any type
LAN, transports them over any communication link and the
supported by GARD 8000; digital, fiber, audio-tone, and single
remote, receiving GARD 8000 performs normal teleprotection
function powerline carrier.
operations such as tripping of breakers and pilot relaying
signaling.
In case pilot relaying and teleprotection need to be performed

over an Ethernet network between two conventional
substations, a GARD 8000 at each line end can send GOOSE
messages over the network for intertripping.
Figure 2. GARD 8000 teleprotection between two

IEC 61850 substations
The GARD 8000 provides the link between two IEC 61850
substations over any communication media. The sending
GARD 8000 retrieves GOOSE messages from the substation
LAN and puts trip messages on a communication link to a
remote GARD 8000. The receiving GARD then translates the Figure 4. GARD 8000 Teleprotection over an
trip message into GOOSE to be put on its substation LAN. Ethernet Network

July 2005 2 GARD 8000 Sys
Applications
SECTION 2. APPLICATIONS
2.1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The GARD 8000 System is a complete Teleprotection and Relay Terminal for line protection and
transfer trip applications.
2.2 FEATURES
• One product for all teleprotection and line protection needs.

• High-speed, secure and reliable synchronous communications.
• Use as a stand-alone teleprotection channel, line differential protection, distance relay, Power
Line Carrier, or all functions can be combined in one device.
• Use 6Uchassis for up to eight functions, or 3U chassis for up to three functions.
• Selectable redundancy for power supply, main processor, functional modules and comms
interfaces.
• Factory customized programmable logic for specific applications saves commissioning time
and eliminates complex configurations.
• Straightforward web browser user interface for settings and diagnostics; no proprietary
application program required.
• Optional, built-in GPS receiver provides accurate time tags, independent from any station
clock.
• Efficient use of the communications channel; up to 12 x 64 kbps per fiber or connection.
• Up to 6 communication interfaces in one 6U device, up to 5 in a 3U; use for redundant
communication paths or to different remote terminals (3 terminal or T-connections).
• A wide range of communication interfaces to choose from:
o T1/E1
o RS 232 Async. Dual Channel Module
o RS 449, 56 -768 kbps
o X.21, 64-768 kbps
o V.35, 64-768 kbps
o G.703, co-directional, 64 kbps
o C37.94 fiber
o Fiber, multi-mode or single-mode; up to 80 km
o Audiotone functional module, 2 wire or 4 wire
o Power Line Carrier; ON/OFF or FSK selectable
• The communication interfaces can be freely mixed-and-matched; e.g. use a 64 kbps digital
channel as primary and a leased phone line for back-up.

July 25, 2006 2-1 (973) 334-3100
Applications
2.3 GARD 8000 ARCHITECTURE
The GARD 8000 System consists of a Base System, Interface Modules, Function Modules and
Optional Modules. The Base System is the minimum module complement that the GARD 8000 system
can have. One or more modules or module sets must be added to the base system to give it
“functionality”.
The Base System consists of the following modules:
Controller Module
Display With TPS Module*
System I/O Module
Power Supply Module
Power Supply I/O Module
* A display only Module is also available.
The Interface Modules consist of the following modules:
Input and Output Modules

Communication Modules
The following Function Modules are available and the system is equipped with these according to the
system application:
Additional TPS Module

Distance Protection Module (module set)
Current Differential Module (module set)
Digital Fault Recorder
Power Line Carrier (module set)
The following Optional Modules are available:
Second Power Supply Module

PDA (Personal Digital Assistant)
GPS (Global Positioning System)
Second Controller Module (6U chassis only)
The Base System includes one RS-449/ X.21/ V.35 digital Interface, built into the Display With TPS
module. Access is through a 37-pin connector on the Power Supply I/O module. The user must
program which one of the three types of interfaces is desired, RS-449, X.21 or V.35.
The Base System modules have fixed locations (slots) in the chassis. All Interface, Function and
Optional Modules can be located in any free slot.
Any Interface, Function or Optional Module may also be added to a GARD 8000 System in the field.
Note: All chassis illustrations are shown with the front cover removed.

July 25, 2006 2-2 (973) 334-3100
Applications
Functional Modules (Slot 3 and 4)
Single Main Controller (Slot 2)

Main Power Supply
Display with TPS (Slot 1) Spare
Redundant Power
Supply
3U Chassis Front View

Input/Output Comms (Built In)
+ +
- -
3U Chassis Rear View

Analog Input (typical)
System I/O
Figure 2-1. GARD 8000 3U Chassis Front and Rear View
Redundant Power Supply

Additional Comms
Main Power Supply Comms (Built In)
Controller Module (Slot 11) (Typical)
Redundant Controller Module (Slot 10) Input/Output System I/O (Slot 11)
S12 S13
500420
SYSTEM I/
O
1 1
C37.94 RS-449
X.21
2 2 RS-449 RS-449 V.35
X.21 X.21
V.35 V.35
3 3
4 4 R
X POWER SUPPLY 1 POWER SUPPLY 2
RS-232
5 5 + +
6 6 - -
7 7
T
8 8 X
9 9
500855 500855
10 10 500875 MINO
MAJOR
ETHERNE R
SUPPLY
SUPPLY
POWER
POWER
T
11 11
12 12 1
2
13 13 13 13 13
3
4
14 14 14 14 14
5
Functional Modules 15
16
15
16
15
16
15
16
15
16
6
RS-485
MOD
DN
BUS
P
(Slot 1 thru 9) 17
18
17
18
17
18
17
18
17
18
GP
S
19 19 19 19 19
20 20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21 21 IRIG-
B
22 22 22 22 22
CONTROL
CONTROL
DISTANCE
DISTANCE
DIS TPS
23 23 23 23 23
TPS
TPS
24 24 24 24 24 1PP
S
6U Chassis Front View 6U Chassis Rear View

Spare Analog Input (Slot 1 and 2 typical)
Figure 2-2. GARD 8000 6U Chassis Front and Rear View

July 25, 2006 2-3 (973) 334-3100
Applications
2.3.1 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE

A GARD 8000 System always includes
• Power supply, single or redundant with alarm relays and rear terminal block
• Controller module, single or redundant, with rear System I/O’s
• Display With TPS module with front System I/O’s
• Base Teleprotection comms port (RS449, X.21, V.35) located on the rear System I/O board in
the 6U chassis or on the power supply rear plate in the 3U chassis
In addition, the System is equipped with order specific communication interfaces, inputs, outputs and
functional modules.
The chassis is equipped with a motherboard ‘midplane’ and modules plug in from both front and rear.
The following modules occupy a slot in front only:

• Main HMI and Logic Processor Module (fixed location in the chassis)
• Display and base digital teleprotection module (fixed location in the chassis)
• Additional digital teleprotection module. Note that the Base System always includes one 32
function TPS but that additional teleprotection systems can be added as separate functional
modules.
The following Modules occupy a slot in rear only:

• All digital communication interfaces with 6 inputs or 6 outputs:
o T1/E1
o RS 449/X.21/V.35 56 -768 kbps
Note that one RS 449 communications interface is always included on the rear
System I/O module
o G.703, co-directional, 64 kbps
o C37.94 fiber
o Single-mode fiber; up to about 80 km
• Inputs and/or Outputs. The inputs and outputs are combined in blocks of six. Each input-output
combination occupies one rear slot. The following options are available:
o 12 opto-isolated inputs
o 6 opto-isolated inputs
o 6 inputs, 6 solid state outputs
o 6 inputs, 6 relay outputs
o 12 solid state outputs
o 6 sold state outputs
o 6 solid state outputs, 6 relay outputs
o 12 relay outputs
o 6 relay outputs
• Analog 2W/4W teleprotection system with terminals
• System I/O (fixed location in the chassis)

July 25, 2006 2-4 (973) 334-3100
Applications
The following types of modules occupy a slot in both front and rear chassis slots:
• Power Supply (fixed location in front of chassis), Power Supply I/O (fixed location at rear of
chassis)
• Distance Protection module (The processor part is in the front of chassis, and input
transformers and I/O’s use the corresponding rear slot).
• Current Differential Protection module (The processor part is in the front of chassis, and input
• Digital Fault Recorder module (The processor part is in the front of chassis, and input
• Power Line Carrier module (The processor part is in the front of chassis, and amplifiers with
terminal blocks are at the rear).
The optional GPS receiver is the only module that does not take up a module slot. It is piggy-back
mounted on the Controller Module.
2.3.2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

The GARD 8000 is built up of a number of modules that interact over three internal buses; the control
bus, the logic bus and the comms bus. The Base system always consists of one Controller Module and
one Display With TPS Module, plus one Power Supply Module. These modules have fixed locations
(slots). All other Optional and Functional Modules can be freely placed into any slot in the chassis, and
in any combination the application requires.

July 25, 2006 2-5 (973) 334-3100
Applications
Ethernet Serial IRIG SAT Front Comms Audio

I/O I/O I/O RX Panel Head Comms
Head
Ethernet
HMI LOGIC I/O
Processor Processor
IRDA
MAIN I/O
Control BUS
Logic BUS
Comms
BUS
Current Distance
Contact TPS TPS
Relay Relay
I/O
Display/TPS
Module Module
Inputs/Outputs
Contact Current I/V Comms
I/O I/O I/O Head
Figure 2-3. GARD 8000 Conceptual design
2.3.2.1 CONTROL BUS

The controller uses the Control Bus to perform all configuration and setting of Optional and Functional
Modules. Status and diagnostics information is also transported over this bus.
2.3.2.2 LOGIC BUS

The Logic controller uses binary data transported on the logic bus. Optional modules (inputs and
outputs) and Functional modules receive and deliver binary data via this bus.
2.3.2.3 COMMS BUS

There are two internal comms buses, each with 12 x 64 kbps channel slots. All comms data to be sent
to the outside world resides on these buses and are delivered to a comms head and a Functional module
as configured.

July 25, 2006 2-6 (973) 334-3100
Applications
2.3.2.4 REDUNDANCY
A Redundant mode of operation is available in the 6U-size chassis. When equipped with two
Controller Modules, a GARD system can disable a faulty Controller and transfer its functionality to the
standby module.
Regardless of whether one or two Controllers are present, only one of them controls midplane bus
traffic and is visible to the functional modules located in the GARD. Functional modules are not aware
of redundant operation in the system.
Information on the status of the redundant system is available through the system Web pages.

July 25, 2006 2-7 (973) 334-3100
Applications
2.3.3 GARD 8000 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

A GARD 8000 System can be built up with Functional Modules as required for a specific application.
The following example describes a factory default configuration of a 3U chassis consisting of the
following modules:
• Single Power Supply

• Single Main Controller
• Display with TPS Module
• Digital Interface (RS449/X.21/V.35) comms port on the rear of the PS module (included in
Base System)
• C37.94 comms module in rear Slot 1
• Distance Relay module set (One module in front Slot 3, and one module in rear Slot 3)
• 12 input module in rear Slot 2
• 12 output module (6 solid state and 6 relay out) in rear Slot 4
Display with TPS (Slot 1) Distance Relay (Slot 3)

Single Power Supply
3U Chassis Front View

Unused (Slot 4)
Unused I/O (Slot 1)
C37.94 Comms Module (Slot 1) RS-449 Digital Interface
12 Output (Slot 4)
+ +
- -
3U Chassis Rear View

12 Input (Slot 2) Single Power Supply
Distance Relay (Slot 3)
Figure 2-4. Front and Rear of 3U Chassis

July 25, 2006 2-8 (973) 334-3100
Applications
External connections are made as shown in the following dc schematic for the example system configuration.
Slot 2 Slot 2 +
+
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 -
-
PS1
In 12 In 11 In 10 In 9 In 8 In 7 In 6 In 5 In 4 In 3 In 2 In 1
Major
Alarm
Programmable Inputs and Outputs
+ +
Out 12 Out 11 Out 10 Out 9 Out 8 Out 7 Out 6 Out 5 Out 4 Out 3 Out 2 Out 1 -
-
PS2
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Minor
Alarm
Slot 4 Slot 4
Figure 2-5. GARD 8000 DC Connection diagram, 3U Distance Relay Plus Teleprotection System

July 25, 2006 2-9 973.334.3100
Applications
2.4 GARD 8000 BASE SYSTEM
The Base System consists of a chassis with Power Supply, a Controller Module and a Display With
TPS Module. While this system will provide the functionality of a digital teleprotection system, order
specific inputs and outputs need to be added.
2.4.1 POWER SUPPLY

The GARD 8000 Power Supply comes in two versions:
Wide range: 48/125 Vdc or 115 Vac
250 Vdc: 220/250 Vdc or 230 Vac
One power supply is able to take the total load of a fully populated chassis. When a redundant power
supply is included they are connected in parallel. The load is mainly carried by one of the supplies
while the other operates as stand-by. Being connected in parallel, there is no switching-over period in
case one of them fails; the load is automatically taken over by the redundant supply.
When two power supplies are used in the same chassis, each supply can use different input power
sources.
2.4.2 SYSTEM ALARM RELAYS

The power supply rear panel is provided with two system alarm relays. These are provided with both
Form A and Form B contacts as indicated on the rear panel screw terminal block. All individual
modules provide Minor and Major Alarms. A Minor Alarm is a non-critical condition, when the
module is still operational. An example of this is the failure of one of the two power supplies in the
same chassis. A Major Alarm is issued from the module for conditions that cause it to become non-
operational.
2.4.2.1 MAJOR ALARM

One of the two alarm relays is used for Major Alarms. Each module is capable of producing Minor and
Major Alarms and it is selectable whether these alarm conditions should produce a Minor and/or Major
System Alarm, and operate the output contact. The Major Alarm contacts are located on the rear of PS
1 module (Power Supply 1).
2.4.2.2 MINOR ALARM

The second of the alarm relays is used for Minor Alarms. Each module is capable of producing Minor
and Major Alarms and it is selectable whether these alarm conditions should produce a Minor and/or
Major System Alarm, and operate the output contact. The Minor Alarm contacts are located on the rear
of PS 2 module (Power Supply 2).

July 25, 2006 2-10 973.334.3100
Applications
Figure 2-6. Alarm configurations
2.4.3 CONTROLLER MODULE

The Controller Module provides two functions that are packaged on one board; the System processing
and the Logic processing. The GARD 8000 can be supplied with a Redundant Controller Module. In
this case, the Redundant Controller Module operates in stand-by mode, monitoring all traffic in and out
of the Main Controller Module and retaining a mirror image of all settings and configurations. Switch-
over takes place automatically by self-monitoring or by a user command.

July 25, 2006 2-11 973.334.3100
Applications
2.4.3.1 HMI PROCESSOR

The HMI processor provides all user communication interfaces. The main user interface is the resident
web server, accessed by a web browser on a PC via the rear or front Ethernet interface or via the front
RS-232 serial port. The HMI processor also handles the front display and any optional network
interfaces (DNP 3.0, Modbus or IEC61850).
In addition to user interfacing, the HMI processor communicates with and configures all of the other
modules in the chassis. The settings provided by the user are stored and forwarded to the functional
modules at power up. The HMI processor also retrieves status information from the modules and
presents it to the user.
2.4.3.2 LOGIC PROCESSOR

The Logic Processor functions as the brain of the system. It provides teleprotection system logic and
customized logic for coordination of all functional modules and mapping of inputs and outputs.
All functional units provide a set of binary inputs to the logic processor where they will be executed
according to the logic diagram.
2.4.4 GPS RECEIVER OPTION

When the GPS built-in receiver is included, it resides as a piggy-back module on the System I/O
Module. When the GPS receiver is present, the rear IRIG-B and 1-PPS (one pulse per second) ports on
the rear System I/O board convert from inputs to outputs. They are thus available for time
synchronization of external devices.
The GPS receiver has to be connected to an externally mounted antenna, provided as an accessory.
Figure 2-7. Antenna

July 25, 2006 2-12 973.334.3100
Applications
2.4.5 REAR SYSTEM I/O’S

The rear System I/Os are:
• TCP/IP electrical or optical HMI communications port, RJ45 connector for electrical, ST for
optical
• RS-232 and RS-485 HMI communication ports
• IRIG-B input/output with BNC connector. When used as an input, a modulated (maximum 10
V peak-peak) or un-modulated (logic-level) IRIG-B signal is accepted. When the GPS receiver
is included in the system, the IRIG-B port outputs un-modulated (logic-level) IRIG-B for
typically up to six external devices.
• 1-PPS (one pulse per second) reference input (logic-level) with BNC connector. When the GPS
receiver is included in the system, the 1-PPS port outputs (logic-level) 1-PPS for typically up to
six external devices.
• RS-449/X.21/V.35 digital teleprotection interface. This is a full-featured teleprotection
interface which can be configured to 56 kbps or n x 64kbps (n=1-12).
2.4.6 DISPLAY MODULE AND BASE DIGITAL TELEPROTECTION

SYSTEM
This board consists of two separate functions; the display unit with the logic processor and the base
digital teleprotection system.
2.4.6.1 DISPLAY UNIT

The display unit handles all HMI communications tasks. The front of the board is supplied with 20
programmable tri-colored LED’s, IrDA infrared port for PDA communication and TCP/IP and RS-232
ports for PC web browser connection.
The main user interface is a web server connected to a PC via the TCP/IP or RS-232 HMI ports. The
optional front mounted PDA with a PalmOS web browser application is also communicating with the
web server. In addition, the front IrDA port can be used to communicate with any external PDA or
PocketPC with standard web browser application.
The programmable LED’s are factory configured or customized.

July 25, 2006 2-13 973.334.3100
Applications
Figure 2-8. Programmable LEDs

July 25, 2006 2-14 973.334.3100
Applications
The default configuration for a GARD 8000 with distance relay is as follows:
LED1 In service G LED11 21 Trip R

Out-of-service R
Minor System
LED10 Alarm Y LED12 21P Trip R
Major System
Alarm R
System OK G
LED2 Rx G LED13 Zone 1 R

Rx alarm Y Zone 2 Y
LED3 Tx G LED14 Zone 3 R

Tx alarm Y Zone 4 Y
LED4 Out-of-step Y LED15 A Y
LED5 Fuse Fail Y LED16 B Y

Breaker open G
LED6 81 Load shed Y LED17 C Y
LED7 50 BF R LED18 G Y
CB monitoring
alarm Y
LED8 CIFT Y LED19 50P R

51P Y
LED9 50Q R LED20 50G R

51Q Y 51G Y
Figure 2-9. Default Configuration for GARD 8000 with Distance Relay

July 25, 2006 2-15 973.334.3100
Applications
2.4.6.2 BASE TELEPROTECTION SYSTEM (TPS)

The Base Teleprotection System provides up to 32 functions over four channels, or four 64 kbps time
slots. Up to four channels are supported via the RS-449/X.21/V.35 interface provided on the Base
System I/O and/or via any of the optional communication interfaces. Each of the four 64 kbps channels
provides 8 functions each, giving a total of 32 functions in one digital teleprotection system.
Additional teleprotection channels can be added to the Base System.

July 25, 2006 2-16 973.334.3100
Applications
2.5 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES
The Base System provides one RS-449/X.21/V.35 communication interface. Additional interfaces can
be added as required, and as space in the chassis allows. The 6U chassis can house an additional 10
communication interfaces. The 3U chassis can house an additional 4 communication interfaces.
The communication interfaces are mounted from the rear of the chassis. The comms connectors are
located on the top half of the 6U chassis or on the right side of the 3U chassis. The remaining half of
the board can be equipped with a set of six inputs, solid state outputs or relay outputs.
Figure 2-10. Communication interface

July 25, 2006 2-17 973.334.3100
Applications
The Communication System Configuration settings include:

• Line Interface. Configures type of communications of the module.
• Line rate. 56 kbps, 64 – 768 kbps depending on type per interface.
o T1 will default the Line rate at 1.544 Mbps
o E1 will default the Line rate at 2.048 Mbps
o RS-232 Async Unit, two ports independently configured using one 64 kbps timeslot per
port, or share a single timeslot running at 19.2 kbps or below
o RS-449, X.21 and V.35 can be configured with data rates of 56 kbps, 64 kbps - 768
kbps
• GARD 8000 Comms Subsystem. GARD 8000 has two 12 x 64 kbps internal comms buses and
the physical comms interface can be selected to use either of these two buses.
• GARD 8000 Clock mode. Each internal bus needs one Master timing source provided via a
comms interface.
• Timing. Timing source can be selected to be internal or loop (external). If this is configured for
internal the module will provide the communications clock. If configured for loop the module
will rely on an external clock source, a T1/E1 multiplexer or SONET/SDH system for example.
• Framing. Defines the T1 or E1 framing protocol used. The protocols are:
o T1
SF - Super Frame
ESF - Extended Super Frame
o E1
CCS - Common Channel Signaling
• Coding. Defines the T1 or E1 coding protocol used. The protocols are:
o AMI: T1/E1. Alternate Mark Inversion format represents a digital 1 as a square wave
and a digital 0 as a straight line. AMI is a bipolar format, each pulse alternates between
positive and negative polarity. Consecutive pulses of the same polarity constitute a Bi-
polar violation (BPV) and the signal is no longer valid.
o B8ZS: T1. Bipolar with 8-Zero Substitution uses intentional Bi-polar violations to
break up long strings of zeros. Any string of eight consecutive zeros is replaced with 2
intentional bi-polar violations before being transmitted.
o HDB3: E1. High Density Bipolar of Order 3. An excessive string of consecutive zeros
(>3) is replaced by a special code containing deliberate Bipolar Violations (BPV).
• Line Build Out. Line build out on T1 and E1 interfaces adjusts the output characteristics of the
interface to match impedance characteristics of the cable. This is done by selecting either the
distance between the GARD 8000 chassis and the communications equipment, selecting a
desired attenuation level in dB or matching the output impedance for coaxial or twisted pair
cables. Setting the line build out for the distance from the GARD 8000 chassis to the
communications equipment will be sufficient for most applications.
• TX/RX Clock Polarity. Defines the clock polarity of the RS-449/X.21/V.35 comms interface.
This can be set for (TX/RX):
o NORM / NORM
o NORM / INVERT
o INVERT / NORM
o INVERT / INVERT

July 25, 2006 2-18 973.334.3100
Applications
2.5.1 T1/E1 AND E1 BNC

One common board is used for T1 or E1 communications. The choice of T1 or E1 is made on the
communications configuration web page. An RJ-48C or DB-15 can be used. The E1 communications
board is also available in a version with a BNC connector, jumper selectable to 50 or 75 ohms.
While T1 uses a bandwidth of 1.584 Mbps (24 x 64 kbps channels) and E1 uses 2.084 Mbps (30 x 64
kbps channels), the GARD 8000 System uses only up to 12 of these channels, following the n x 64
kbps C37.94 standard.
2.5.2 RS-232 ASYNC

A dual auxiliary channel module intended for creating up to two asynchronous RS-232 data
connections across another GARD 8000 communications interface. The two ports can be used
completely independently at any baud rate using one 64 kbps timeslot per port. If desired, both ports
can use a single timeslot when both heads are running at 19.2 kbps or below. The data is converted
from async to sync in compliance with V.14. The synchronous data is then transmitted to the far end
using V.110 framing. The head is always seen as an Aux Channel, providing a point to point link over
a higher speed GARD link. The module has two female D-sub 9 connectors.
2.5.3 RS-449, X.21, AND V.35

One common board is used for RS-449, X.21 or V.35 communications. The connector is a type DB37,
male. The choice of protocol is made on the Communications System Configuration web page.
The communication bandwidth can be set to 56 kbps single channel or n x 64 kbps where n = 1 to 12.
Note that when n>1, i.e. more than one 64 kbps channel is used, one 64 kbps timeslot is required for
framing. For example, if two 64 kbps data channels are to be used, n needs to be set to 3. Framing is
required so that each individual channel can be identified, when more than one channel is used.
2.5.4 G.703 CO-DIRECTIONAL

The G.703 co-directional communications interface uses one 64 kbps channel. The connector is a
DB15, male.
2.5.5 C37.94 SHORT HAUL FIBER

The short-haul fiber communications interface uses ST connectors and is intended for multimode
fibers up to 1 km (0.6 miles) in length.
The communication bandwidth can be set to n x 64 kbps where n = 1 to 12. Note that when n>1, i.e.
more than one 64 kbps channel is used, one 64 kbps time slot may be required for framing. For
example, it two 64 kbps data channels are to be used, n needs to be set to 3. Framing is required so that
each individual channel can be identified, when more than one channel is used.

July 25, 2006 2-19 973.334.3100
Applications
2.5.6 FIBER INTERFACES

There are 3 versions of fiber interfaces:
• 1300 nm LED for single mode or multimode fiber; typically up to 27 km (17 miles) with single
mode fiber.
• 1300 nm LASER, typically up to 59 km (37 miles) with single mode fiber.
• 1550 nm LASER, typically up to 90 km (56 miles) with single mode fiber.
All fiber interface versions are equipped with ST connectors.
The communication bandwidth can be set to n x 64 kbps where n = 1 to 12. Note that when n>1, i.e.
more than one 64 kbps channel is used, one 64 kbps time slot is required for framing. For example, it
two 64 kbps data channels are to be used, n needs to be set to 3. Framing is required so that each
individual channel can be identified, when more than one channel is used.
2.6 SYSTEM SEQUENCE OF EVENTS RECORDING (SOE)
The GARD 8000 is supplied with a Sequence of Events Recorder (SOE). Up to 512 events are
recorded, and time stamped with a 1 ms resolution.
2.7 INPUT/OUTPUT MODULES
Inputs and outputs are selected in blocks of six. A communications board can accommodate one block.
Additional inputs and outputs are mounted on another rear board; each board can hold two sets of six,
in any combination. The block versions are:
• 6 opto-isolated inputs
• 6 solid state outputs
• 6 relay outputs
The inputs and outputs are provided with screw terminals, and have two independent terminals for
each input or output.
The 6U chassis can accommodate up to 10 boards with comms/input/outputs and a 3U chassis can
house up to 4. Note that a protection module, digital fault recorder; and Power Line Carrier module,
will each require one or more rear slots for its analog I/O’s.
2.7.1 OPTO-ISOLATED INPUTS

The inputs are arranged in groups of six electrically independent opto-couplers. A group of six is
mounted on the upper and/or lower part of a rear board in the 6U chassis or left/right side on the 3U
chassis. A communications module can accommodate one group of six inputs. Discrete I/O modules
can comprise two input groups or one input and one output group.
The inputs are polarity independent. The terminals are numbered from left to right, top to bottom in the
6U chassis. In the 3U chassis, the same type of board is mounted horizontally so marking is read from
right to left.
The inputs are jumper selectable for input voltage 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, 125 Vdc or 250 Vdc.
July 25, 2006 2-20 973.334.3100
Applications
2.7.2 SOLID STATE OUTPUTS

The solid state outputs come in groups of six electrically independent outputs. A group of six is
mounted on the upper and/or lower part of a rear board in the 6U chassis or left/right side on the 3U
chassis. A communications module can accommodate one group of six outputs. Discrete I/O modules
can comprise two solid state output groups, one solid state output group and one input group or one
solid state output group and one relay output group.
The terminals are numbered from left to right, top to bottom in the 6U chassis. In the 3U chassis, the
same type of board is mounted horizontally so marking is read from right to left.
Solid state outputs are type A (NO, normally open). Inversion can be made in the logic.
2.7.3 RELAY OUTPUTS

The relay outputs come in groups of six electrically independent outputs. A group of six is mounted on
the upper and/or lower part of a rear board in the 6U chassis or left/right side on the 3U chassis. A
communications module can accommodate one group of six relay outputs. Discrete I/O modules can
comprise two relay output groups, one relay output group and one input group or one solid state output
group and one relay output group.
The terminals are numbered from left to right, top to bottom in the 6U chassis. In the 3U chassis, the
same type of board is just mounted horizontally so marking is read from right to left.
The contacts are type A (NO, normally open) or type B (NC, normally closed). Potential inversion can
be made by jumpers; i.e. with the jumper in position INV the contact will be closed when a logical
ZERO is provided by the logic.
2.8 TELEPROTECTION SYSTEM
The Teleprotection System emulates the RFL 9745’s flexible, customized programmable logic but
provides an even higher degree of ease-of-use. Selection of pre-programmed schemes for blocking,
unblocking, permissive and transfer trip operations is simply done by a setting.
The GARD 8000 System is customized to provide the number of channels, type and number of
channel interfaces, inputs and outputs and redundancy to meet your application needs.
Features include:
• 8 to 32 functions per digital interface

• Settable input de-bounce and continuation timers
• Selectable security count
• Operating time is 5 ms for digital channel and from 9 ms for analog channel
• 2 or 4 commands per analog channel interface
• An analog channel can be used with V.29 modem for coded transfer trip
• Redundant (hot/standby) operation with digital/analog or digital/digital channel interfaces

July 25, 2006 2-21 973.334.3100
Applications
The TPS is supplied on the Display With TPS board in the Base System but additional TPS modules
can be added to the chassis. The TPS provides 8 functions per 56/64 kbps channel and any channel can
be programmed to use any communication interface. Up to 4 channels are supported giving a total of
32 functions for one single TPS. Each function is separately configured for permissive, unblocking,
blocking or transfer trip. Customized logic can also be used.
The TPS provides diagnostics as described in detail in the Teleprotection System manual.
2.9 DISTANCE PROTECTION TERMINAL
The Distance Protection Module is a full featured protection terminal. It can be used as a stand-alone
non-pilot or pilot distance protection system, or can operate in parallel with the GARD 8000 Current
Differential Protection Module providing an independent and different measuring principle.
The distance protection has 4 measuring zones, where any zone can be set forward or reverse.
The distance protection can operate as a channel independent stepped distance protection or be applied
in a pilot scheme; selectable to permissive, unblocking or blocking. It may use the same
communications channel interface as the current differential relay or a separate communications
interface.
Features include:
• 4 zones, all reversible

• Phase-phase and phase-ground mho
• Selectable phase-ground quadrilateral characteristic
• POTT, DCUB or DCB pilot schemes
• High-set and inverse time overcurrent elements
• Breaker failure protection
• Redosing and sync check
• Under- and overvoltage elements
• Accurate Fault Locator
• Digital fault records directly in COMTRADE format
• Optional single pole trip logic
• Metering
• Breaker monitoring
The distance protection contains its own functional logic but a large number of logic bits are available
for customized functions in the System Logic. Detailed description of the distance protection is found
in the Distance protection manual.

July 25, 2006 2-22 973.334.3100
Applications
2.10 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION
A Current Differential Protection Module can be integrated in the GARD 8000 System. Using one 64
kbps channel, the current differential relay can use the same communication link as the teleprotection
system module, or it can have its separate channel interface.
Duplicating the highly successful RFL 9300 measuring principle with its high speed operation, the
GARD 8000 current differential protection provides added flexibility and enhanced functionality:
• While still extremely simple to set, extended setting ranges are made available for increased
system fault current coordination
• Transient block logic for added security at external fault clearing with ct errors
• Adjusts for different ct ratios by setting
• High speed trip; ½ cycle minimum, 1 cycle typical
• Is completely unaffected by channel delay errors up to +/- 4 ms (5 ms for 50 Hz) as may be
caused by asymmetric transmit and receive channels
• Two or three-terminal versions
• Hot/stand-by redundant channel operation
• Optional single pole trip logic
All Current Differential Protection logic is contained in the functional module but a large number of
logic bits are available for customized logic in the System Logic. Detailed description of the Current
Differential Protection is found in the GARD 8000 Current Differential Protection section of this
manual.
2.11 POWER LINE CARRIER
The Power Line Carrier (PLC) module in the GARD 8000 System implements the functionality of the
RFL 9785 ON/OFF PLC and the RFL 9780 FSK PLC, all in one device. FSK or ON/OFF operation is
selectable and the DSP based transmitter and receiver allows full frequency programmability in the
range 30 to 500 kHz.
The setting options include:

1. Selectable FSK or ON/OFF operation
2. Transmit frequency 30 to 500 kHz
3. Programmable receive bandwidth and frequency shift
4. Adjustable logic timers
5. Unblock, blocking, permissive, transfer trip or phase comparison applications
Power Line Carrier features include:

• Channel monitoring
• Built-in check back function; set for periodic check and/or remotely activated
• Extensive Sequence of Event Reporting
• Built-in reflected power measurement

July 25, 2006 2-23 973.334.3100
Applications
2.12 AUX COMMUNICATIONS CHANNEL
Two GARD 8000 Systems can be configured as shown in Figure 2-11, where two units communicate
using a T1/E1 link. The typical application shows an RFL 9300 at each remote end. Each 9300 is
connected to the GARD 8000 using a 64kb/s co-directional link employing a G.703 comms module.
Refer to Figure 7-7 for the Web page that describes the required settings for this application.
The G.703 parameters that must be set for this application are as follows:
User Label
Enter in a descriptive name for the G.703 communications interface.
Line Interface
For the G.703 the Line Interface can be disabled or set to G.703. For this application set it to G.703.
Data Rate
For the G.703 the Data Rate is always set to 64kb/s.
GARD Comms Subsystem (Radio Buttons)

For the G.703 there are two Radio Buttons that can be selected, Subsystem 1 or Subsystem 2. For this
application select ?
GARD Clock Mode
For the G.703 there are three GARD Clock Mode selections, Master, Slave and Aux Channel. For this
application select Aux Channel.
Timing
The G.703 Octet Timing can be enabled or disabled. For this application the Octet Timing should be
enabled.

July 25, 2006 2-24 973.334.3100
Applications
GARD 8000 GARD 8000

T1/E1
G.703 G.703
64kb/sec 64kb/sec
Co-directional Co-directional
RFL 9300 RFL 9300
Figure 2-11. Typical GARD 8000 Aux Communication Channel Application

July 25, 2006 2-25 973.334.3100
Applications
2.13 REMOTE SERVICE CHANNEL
This feature accessible through the Ethernet connection allows access of up to 2 GARD units at remote
locations, or to 1 unit using a PLC connection. Two of the GARD units can be connected by using the
Comms Channel Boards while a third can be connected by using a PLC connection. Only PDA type
pages are feasible over a PLC link. Service Channel communications are set up using the “System
Configuration” web page, previously known as “System Labels and Time.” Note that IP addresses are
user programmable on the units rear ports, they are not programmable on the units front ports.
n.n.n.111
COM 0
192.168.1.3
GARD8000 (B) n.n.n.112 64
(n.n.n.110) COM 1 kb
192.168.1.4 /s
n.n.n.101
COM 0 192.168.1.3
n.n.n.102 GARD8000(A)
64 kb/s
COM 1 (n.n.n.100)
192.168.1.4
n.n.n.103
COM 2 192.168.1.5
S
TP
PLC
n.n.n.122
COM 1
192.168.1.4
GARD8000 (C)
n.n.n.121 COM 0
(n.n.n.120) n.n.n.131
192.168.1.3 COM 2
192.168.1.5
GARD8000 (D)
(n.n.n.130)
Figure 2-12. Remote Access Service Channels (Maximum Complexity Example)
The following table shows an example of possible IP addresses when using GARD unit ‘A’ to access
the units shown in Figure 2-12 above. See Figure 5-20 (Sheet 2 of 2) for the “System
Configuration” web page.
Table 2-1. Remote Access IP Addresses
Unit to Access IP Address ‘A’ (Rear Port) IP Address ‘A’(Front Port)
B n.n.n.101 192.168.1.3
C n.n.n.102 192.168.1.4
D n.n.n.103 192.168.1.5
July 25, 2006 2-26 973.334.3100
Applications
2.13.1 8 KB/S REMOTE SERVICE CHANNEL

1. The 8 kb/s link is currently used over the TPS channel. Remote and local TPS channels must
be set to both Disabled or set to a Comm channel. It is not valid for one channel to be set to
Disabled and one to be set for a Comm channel.
2. The TPS channel must first be assigned in the “Communication Time Slot Configuration” web
page (see Figure 7-14), before remote service can be changed from Disabled to either Comm0
or Comm1 on the “TPS Channel” web page.
3. It is not valid to use an 8 kb/s Remote Service Channel (TPS) if the Comm’s Bus on the Master
Communication Module is set to T1/E1. A 64 kb/s Remote Service Channel must be used
instead.
2.13.2 64 KB/S REMOTE SERVICE CHANNEL

1. Interface Data must be Byte-Aligned. The following Communication Modules may use the
Remote Service Channels:
6. T1/E1.
7. G.703 Co-directional. OCTET timing mode only.
8. RS-449/X.21/V.35.
Data rate > 64 kb/s.
9. C37.94 (Short Haul Fiber).
10. Long-haul Fiber.
2. Select “64k Com0” and/or “64k Com1” on the “Communication Time Slot Configuration” web
page for the desired Communication Module.
Note
IP address192.168.1.2 is reserved for PDA use.
Note
When selecting a Remote Service Channel IP address, insure that it is on the same IP sub-network as
the IP address for the GARD’s rear Ethernet port. The Remote Service Channel’s IP address must not
conflict with any IP address on the IP network.

July 25, 2006 2-27 973.334.3100
Applications

blank

July 25, 2006 2-28 973.334.3100
Technical Data
SECTION 3. TECHNICAL DATA
3.1 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
As of the date this Instruction Manual was published, the following specifications apply to the GARD
8000 module. Because all of RFL products undergo constant refinement and improvement, these
specifications are subject to change without notice.
Single or Redundant Power Supply:
Wide Range: 48/125 Vdc Or 120 Vac
Range 38 - 150 Vdc Or 96 - 132 Vac
250vdc: 220/250 Vdc Or 220 Vac
Range 200 - 300 Vdc Or 200 - 240 Vac
Burden: Maximum 100 W With Fully Populated 6U Chassis
Terminal Connections:
Rear Screw Terminals
Inputs and Outputs:
The GARD 8000 System can be configured with up to 20 input and output modules on the rear part of the
chassis. Relay outputs are jumper selectable Form A or Form B, and in addition each input and output
has an inverter and a timer associated with it that has settings for both pick-up (debounce) delay and
drop-out (pulse-stretch) delay.
Optically Isolated Inputs:
Quantity: Six per module
Jumper selectable Input Voltage: 24/48/125/250 Vdc
Rating No operation Operates Max Input Voltage
24v <14v >19v 36v
48v <28v >38v 68v
125v <70v >95v 150v
250v <140v >189v 300v
Input current: minimum 1.5 mA
Minimum Pulse Width: 0.03 ms, additional debounce time set with logic timer settings.
Solid-State Outputs:
Output Current: Maximum 1 A continuous, 2 A for one minute, or 10 A for 100 msec.
Pick-up Time: <1 msec
Relay Outputs:
Relay Pick-up Time: 4 msec
Output Current Rating: 6 A continuous

July 25, 2006 3-1 973.334.3100
Technical Data
Alarm Relays:
Quantity: Two
Contacts: SPDT (Form C)
Rating: 4 A Continuous
Temperature:
Operating: -20° C to + 70° C (-4 F to 158° F)
Relative Humidity:
System Ports:
Front RS-232 Electrical TCP/IP (RJ45)
Rear Electrical (RJ45) or optical TCP/IP

RS-232
RS-485
Optional network port(s): Modbus

DNP 3.0
EN 6061850
Time-Code Input:
BNC connector for IRIG-B unmodulated (logic-level) or modulated (10 V peak-peak, maximum)
BNC connector for 1- PPS (pulse per second) reference input (logic-level)
Optional GPS receiver (with external antenna). With GPS option installed the system outputs logic-
level IRIG-B and 1-PPS signals.
RFI Susceptibility:
ANSI PC37.90.2 (35 Volts/Meter)
IEC 255-22-3 (RFI Class III)
Interface Dielectric Strength:

All contact inputs, solid-state outputs, power supply inputs and relay outputs meet the following
specifications:
ANSI C37.90-1989 (Dielectric)

ANSI C37.90.1-1989 (SWC and Fast Transient)
EN 60255-5 (1500 Vrms Breakdown Voltage and Impulse Withstand)
IEN 60255-22-1 (SWC Class III)
EN 60255-22-2 (ESD Class III)
EN 60834-1

July 25, 2006 3-2 973.334.3100
Technical Data
3.2 COMMUNICATION INTERFACES SPECIFICATIONS
Audio Tone Interface:

The GARD 8000 System can be supplied with two or four FSK audio tone transceivers. All
transceivers are bidirectional and can be programmed for any operating frequency or bandwidth
between 300Hz and 4kHz. Channel one can be set to operate as a modem channel. This channel
provides a communication link to the remote terminal for remote interrogation, setting changes or
system testing from the local terminal.
Displayed Level Accuracy:

The levels displayed on the front panel and through remote access will be within 1 dB of the actual
values.
Operate Time:
Audio Tone Units (average trip times, Dual Tone System):
± 30 Hz Shift: 26.47 ms
± 42.5 Hz Shift: 20.57 ms
± 60 Hz Shift: 14.78 ms
± 75 Hz Shift: 12.65 ms
± 120 Hz Shift: 11.05 ms
± 150 Hz Shift: 10.12 ms
± 240 Hz Shift: 9.22 ms
Audio Interface Configurations:

Single Two-Wire Terminals
Dual Two-Wire Terminals
Single Four-Wire Terminals
Dual Four-Wire Terminals
Recommended Channel Frequencies:

Resolution: 1Hz
Transmit Level:
Adjustable from -40 dBm to +10 dBm in 0.25 dB steps
Receiver Sensitivity:
Minimum Input Level: -40 dBm
Maximum Input Level: 0 dBm
Receiver Dynamic Range (referenced to center point):

-17 dB to + 11 dB
Adjacent Channel Rejection:

40 dB

July 25, 2006 3-3 973.334.3100
Technical Data
60-Hz Rejection:
A received tone at -30 dBm will not be affected by a 50 Hz or 60 Hz signal as great as 40 Vrms with
optional 50/60 Hz blocking filter.
Amplitude Stability:
The Transmit level will vary by no more than ±1 dB.
Spurious Output:
All harmonics and spurious outputs are at least 40 dB lower than the carrier.
Transmitter Stability:
The transmitter frequency is stable within 0.02 percent over the full range of temperature and input
power variations.
Trip Boost:
Amplitude: Adjustable from zero to +12 dB in 1 dB steps.
Duration: Adjustable from zero to 30 seconds in .5ms steps.
Input and Output Impedance:

600 Ohms
Digital Teleprotection Interfaces:

The GARD 8000 Digital Teleprotection functionality is provided on the Display With TPS module. Up
to 32 functions of digital protection are available for use over a maximum of 4 digital channels. Each
of the 4 channels has 8 functions.
Operate Time:
5 ms maximum in the most secure mode
Digital Interface Options

T1/E1; 1.544 Mbps/2.048 Mbps for direct connection to a SONET/SDH multiplexer
*RS-449; 56/64 kbps - 768 kbps for connection to a CSU/DSU or a T1 multiplexer
X.21, V.35; 64 - 768 kbps
G.703; 64 kbps
Fiber, 64 - 768 kbps
* One is included in the Base System.
Table 3-1. Fiber data
Wavelength and Fiber type Connector type System gain Typical distance
emitter type
ANSI C37.94 Multimode ST 25 dB 1km/0.6 miles
1300 nm LED Single mode ST 19 dB 27km/17 miles
1300 nm Laser Single mode ST 36 dB 59 km/37 miles
1550 nm Laser Single mode ST 30 dB 90 km/56 miles

July 25, 2006 3-4 973.334.3100
Technical Data
3.3 DISTANCE PROTECTION SPECIFICATIONS
AC Current Inputs
Nominal 1 or 5 A
Continuous 4 times nominal
One second 100 times nominal
Burden <0.2 VA for 5 A nominal
<0.05 VA for 1 A nominal
AC Voltage Inputs
Rated voltage 120 Vac @ 60 Hz
110 Vac @ 50 Hz
Continuous 2 times nominal
Burden <0.05 VA
Frequency and Rotation

Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Phase rotation ABC or ACB
Metering Accuracy
Voltages +/- 0.1% (60 - 300V)
Currents 5A nominal +/-2 mA/0.1% (0.5-160A)
1A nominal +/-0.5mA/0.1% (0.1-30A)
Phase angle +/-0.3 deg
Power factor +/-0.001
Frequency +/-0.001 Hz
Active/reactive power (5A nominal and >1A load current)
0-180 deg 0.3%
+/-15 or 165 deg 0.5% active, 5% reactive
+/- 45 or 135 deg 1% active, 1% reactive
+/- 75 or 115 deg 5% active, 0.5% reactive
+/-90 deg 0.3% reactive
Distance elements
Zones 1 - 4 5A nominal 100 ohms
1A nominal 0.05 - 250 ohms
Resistive reach 2 .00 - 10.00 times reactive reach
Time delay 0.00 - 300.00 sec
Minimum operating time 1 cycle
Overcurrent supervision elements

5A nominal 0.20 - 7.50 A
1A nominal 0.04 - 1.5 A

July 25, 2006 3-5 973.334.3100
Technical Data

5A nominal 0.10 - 150.00 A
1A nominal 0.02 - 30.00 A
Time delay 0.00 - 300.00 seconds
Directional Overcurrent Unit

Characteristic angle 0 - 90 deg
Minimum polarizing voltage 0.00 - 10.00 V
Negative or Zero sequence ground directional polarization
Time Overcurrent Elements

5A nominal 0.20 - 25.00 A
1A nominal 0.04 - 5.00 A
Time Dial ANSI: 0.5 - 10.00
IEC: 0.05 - 1.00
Definite time 0.05 - 300.00 sec
ANSI Definite time
Moderately inverse
Inverse
Very inverse
Extremely inverse
Long time inverse
Short time inverse
Very inverse + maximum time
Extremely inverse + maximum time
User defined
EN (IEC) curves Definite time
Inverse
Very inverse
Extremely inverse
Long time inverse
Short time inverse
Very inverse + maximum time
Extremely inverse + maximum time
User defined

July 25, 2006 3-6 973.334.3100
Technical Data
Under- and Overvoltage Elements

Pick-up range 20.00 - 300.00 V
Time delay 0.00 - 300.00 sec
Frequency Elements
Pick-up range 40.00 - 70.00 Hz
Undervoltage inhibit 20 - 150 V
Rate of change 0.5 - 10.00 Hz/s
Synchronism Check Elements

Voltage difference 2 - 30%
Phase angle 5 - 80 deg
Slip frequency 0.005 - 2.00 Hz
Time delay 0.05 - 300.00 s
Recloser
No of shots 1-3
Dead-time 0.1 - 300 s
Reset time 0.05 - 300 s
3.4 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL SPECIFICATIONS

3.4.1 ANALOG CURRENT INPUTS
Thermal Withstand Capability:
Continuous: 20ARMS
One second: 250ARMS
Current Circuit Burden:
< 0.1 VA @ 5A
< 0.02 VA @ 1A
3.4.2 METERING DATA

The metering data is presented in units of primary ARMS and is an integer number.
Accuracy: 3% or 0.01A multiplied by the CT ratio, whichever is greater.
3.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY DATA

Oscillography data is reported in IEEE COMTRADE 1999 format.
Sample rate: (33 samples per cycle)
60Hz: 1980 samples per second
50Hz: 1650 samples per second
Range: ±200APEAK (referenced to the secondary of the CT)
Accuracy: 3% or 0.03A, whichever is greater (referenced to the secondary of the CT).

July 25, 2006 3-7 973.334.3100
Technical Data
3.5 POWER LINE CARRIER SPECIFICATIONS
Modes Of Operation:
FSK 2F or 3F Operation
On/Off Normal Checkback or Hard Carrier Checkback
Number Of Active Channels:

One
Operating Band:
30Hz to 500kHz
Channel Tuning resolution:

125 Hz
Max Transmit Power:

10W
Transmit Output Impedance:

50 Ohms (75 Ohm Skewed Hybrid Available)
Max Transmit Frequency Offset:

<10 Hz
Max Level Of Spurious Emissions:

-55dBc
Maximum Receive Input Level:

25 Vrms
Receive Dynamic Range:

>40 dB
Receive Sensitivity:
5mVrms
Receive Input Impedance:

Terminated Mode 1 50 Ohms
Terminated Mode 2 75 Ohms
Unterminated > 30 K Ohms

July 25, 2006 3-8 973.334.3100
Installation and Commissioning
SECTION 4. INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
4.1 INTRODUCTION
This section contains installation instructions for the GARD 8000, including unpacking, mounting, and
interconnection wiring. Refer to Table 4-5 for a list of modules used in the GARD 8000. Located at
the end of the Installation Section are procedures for commissioning various modules in the GARD
System.
4.2 UNPACKING
The GARD 8000 equipment may be supplied as individual chassis or may be interconnected with other
chassis or assemblies as part of a system. Paragraph 4.2.1 provides unpacking instructions for
individual chassis, and paragraph 4.2.2 provides unpacking instructions for interconnected chassis.
4.2.1 INDIVIDUAL CHASSIS

GARD 8000 terminals supplied as individual chassis are packed in their own shipping cartons:
1. Open each carton carefully to make sure the equipment is not damaged.
2. After the chassis is removed from the carton, carefully examine all packing material to make
sure no items of value are discarded.
3. Carefully remove any packing materials inserted into the chassis to hold circuit cards in place
during transit.
4. Make sure all modules are fully seated in the chassis. The machine screws securing all I/O
modules to the rear of the chassis should be fully tightened.
If you notice any signs of shipping damage, immediately notify RFL Customer Service at the phone
number at the bottom of this page. Save all the packing material and the shipping carton, in case a
damage claim needs to be filed with the shipping company that delivered the unit.

May 15, 2006 4-1 973.334.3100
4.2.2 INTERCONNECTED CHASSIS

GARD 8000 terminals ordered as part of a larger system may be interconnected with other chassis and
mounted in a relay rack or cabinet, or on shipping rails for installation into a rack or cabinet at the
customer's site. In such cases, the entire assembly is enclosed in a wood crate or delivered by air-ride
van:
1. If the equipment is crated, carefully open the crate to avoid damaging the equipment.
2. Remove the equipment from the crate and carefully examine all packing materials to make sure
no items of value are discarded.
3. Carefully remove any packing materials that were inserted into the individual chassis to hold
circuit cards in place during transit.
4. Make sure all modules are fully seated in the chassis. The machine screws securing all I/O
modules to the rear of the chassis should be fully tightened.
If you notice any signs of shipping damage, immediately notify RFL Customer Service at the phone
number at the bottom of this page. Save all the packing material and the shipping carton, in case a
damage claim needs to be filed with the shipping company that delivered the unit.
4.3 MOUNTING
After unpacking, GARD 8000 equipment must be securely mounted, following the instructions in the
following paragraphs. Procedures are provided for individual chassis, interconnected chassis installed
in racks or cabinets, and interconnected chassis mounted on shipping rails; use the procedure that suits
your equipment.
4.3.1 INDIVIDUAL CHASSIS

GARD 8000 terminals housed in individual chassis have two mounting ears (one on each side). Hole
sizes and spacings conform with EIA standards, so the GARD 8000 can be mounted in any standard
19-inch rack or cabinet. Complete mounting dimensions are shown in Figures 4-1 and 4-2.
CAUTION
ANY INSTALLATION USING AN ENCLOSED CABINET WITH A SWING-OUT
RACK MUST BE SECURELY FASTENED TO THE FLOOR. THIS WILL PREVENT
THE CABINET FROM FALLING FORWARD WHEN THE RACK IS MOVED
OUTWARD

May 15, 2006 4-2 973.334.3100
GARD 8000 1.5 in.

(3.81 cm.)
NET RS232 RESET

2.25 in 5.25 in.
5.715 cm. (13.335
cm.)
17.625 in. (44.768 cm.

18.312 in. (46.512 cm)
Figure 4-1. Mounting dimensions for GARD 8000 3U chassis
GARD 8000 1.5 in.

(3.81 cm.)
2.25 in
5.715 cm.
10.5 in.
3.0 in (26.67
7.62 cm. cm.)
2.25 in
5.715 cm.
17.625 in. (44.768 cm.

18.312 in. (46.512 cm)
Figure 4-2. Mounting dimensions for GARD 8000 6U Chassis

May 15, 2006 4-3 973.334.3100
4.3.2 INTERCONNECTED CHASSIS INSTALLED IN RACK OR CABINET

Systems mounted in racks or cabinets at the factory are to be placed in position and then bolted to the
floor or wall, as appropriate, to secure the equipment in place. The type of hardware used will depend
upon the particular surface to which the rack or cabinet is being mounted. Because of this, mounting
hardware is not supplied with the rack or cabinet.
4.3.3 INTERCONNECTED CHASSIS MOUNTED ON SHIPPING RAILS

Equipment to be installed in a rack or cabinet at the customer's site is mounted on shipping rails at the
factory. To remove the shipping rails and mount the equipment, proceed as follows:
1. Place the equipment as close to the front of the rack or cabinet as possible, with the rear panels
of the equipment facing the front of the rack or cabinet.
2. Remove all the screws securing the shipping rails to the equipment.
3. Slide the equipment into the rack or cabinet.
4. Install and tighten screws to all panels to secure the equipment in place.
4.4 VENTILATION
The specified operating temperature range for GARD 8000 equipment is -20oC to +70 oC
(-4oF to +158 oC). Operation at higher temperatures may affect system reliability and performance.
Systems installed in enclosed cabinets should be ventilated to keep the temperature inside the cabinet
within limits.
CAUTION
DURING NORMAL SYSTEM OPERATION, THE SWITCHING OF RELAY
CONTACTS CAN PRODUCE VOLTAGE SPIKES. THESE SPIKES CAN TRAVEL
DOWN THE RELAY OUTPUT LEADS AND INDUCE CURRENTS IN OTHER
LEADS. THESE INDUCED CURRENTS CAN RESULT IN FALSE TRIPS. TO
REDUCE THIS POSSIBILITY, USE A SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR FOR EACH
INPUT LEAD, AND GROUND THE SHIELD AT THE GARD 8000 CHASSIS
ONLY. AS AN ADDED PRECAUTION, DO NOT BUNDLE INPUT, OUTPUT, AND
POWER LEADS INTO THE SAME HARNESS, AND KEEP THEM AS FAR
APART AS POSSIBLE.

May 15, 2006 4-4 973.334.3100
4.5 CONNECTIONS
Electrical connections are made to each GARD 8000 chassis through the terminal blocks and
connectors on the chassis front and rear panels. The rear panel of a typical GARD 8000 terminal is
shown in Figure 4-3. Paragraphs 4.5.1 through 4.5.5 provide basic descriptions of all the connections
that must be made. Refer to the "as supplied" drawings furnished with your GARD 8000 for more
detailed descriptions of the connections that must be made to your system.
4.5.1 MAKING CONNECTIONS TO TERMINAL BLOCKS
NOTE
Before making connections to terminal blocks, check the configuration of all rear panel
modules. It is easier to configure the rear panel modules prior to connecting field wiring.
The configuration of these modules usually requires the setting of programmable jumpers
and DIP switches as described in Section 6.
The terminal blocks on the rear of the GARD 8000 chassis are conventional screw-type barrier blocks.
Wires can either be stripped or terminated in spade lugs, depending on local practice. To connect wires
to the terminal blocks, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the transparent protective cover from the rear of the chassis by loosening the mounting
screws and sliding the panel up and off of the standoffs holding it in place.
2. Using strippers, remove about 1/4 inch (10 cm) of insulation from the end of the wire to be
connected.
3. If local practice calls for lugged wires, crimp a spade lug onto the stripped end of the wire.
4. Locate the terminal to which the wire is to be connected.
Terminal numbers appear on the rear panel, directly above the terminal block.
5. Using a screwdriver, turn the screw at that position counterclockwise until the wire or lug can
be slipped underneath the screw head.
6. If the wire is lugged, slip the lug under the screw head. If lugs are not being used, use a pair of
needle-nose pliers to bend the stripped end of the wire into a hook, and slip this hook under the
screw head so that the hook surrounds the screw.
7. Using a screwdriver, turn the screw clockwise until tight to secure the wire in place.
8. Repeat steps 2 through 8 for all other wires to be connected.
9. Line up the mounting holes in the rear panel protective cover with the standoffs on the rear of
the chassis, and push in and down on the protective cover until it is secured in place. Then
tighten the mounting screws.

May 15, 2006 4-5 973.334.3100
NOTE
All relay contacts are labeled in the de-energized position.
4.5.2 ALARM AND ALERT RELAY CONNECTIONS

The GARD 8000 chassis has two SPDT (Form C) relays mounted in the Power Supply I/O module.
The terminals are labeled as shown in Figure 6-14. The Major Alarm relay terminals are on the left of
the figure and the Minor Alarm relay terminals are on the right of the figure. The contacts are rated
100mA, 300Vdc, resistive load.
WARNING
THE GARD 8000 CHASSIS MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED AS DESCRIBED
IN THE FOLLOWING PARAGRAPH BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO CONNECT
INPUT POWER. IMPROPER GROUND CONNECTIONS MAY RESULT IN
SYSTEM MALFUNCTIONS, EQUIPMENT DAMAGE, OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK.
4.5.3 CHASSIS GROUND CONNECTIONS

A protective earth stud at the lower right rear of the GARD 8000 chassis is the main ground for the
GARD 8000 terminal. This can be seen in Figures 4-3 and 4-4. Grounding is accomplished by
connecting a wire 6AWG or larger between this protective earth stud and rack ground. The grounding
wire should be kept as short and straight as possible, to keep its resistance and inductance to a
minimum.
Before attempting to make power connections, make sure the GARD 8000 terminal is equipped with a
power supply designed to operate at the available input supply voltage. This can be determined by
checking the model designator on the module handle. If an external power supply is being used, check
the markings on the external power supply. If the wrong voltage is connected to the power supply,
component damage will result.
4.5.4 FIBER OPTIC CONNECTIONS

If your GARD 8000 is equipped with Fiber Optic Modules, fiber optic connectors must be connected
to the fiber optic heads on the rear panel of the GARD 8000. Type ST series bayonet fiber optic
connectors (or their equivalent) are used with both singlemode and multimode fibers. The exact mating
connector used will depend upon the head that is installed in the fiber optic module, and the specific
optic cable being used. When connecting fiber optic cables, make sure the connectors are properly
aligned before tightening and then fully tighten them. This will help minimize losses in the connector.

May 15, 2006 4-6 973.334.3100
4.5.5 RS-449/X.21/V.35 DIGITAL INTERFACE CONNECTIONS

RS-449/X.21/V.35 digital interface connections are made to the GARD 8000 chassis via a 37-pin
connector located on the Power Supply I/O rear panel on both the 3U chassis and the 6U chassis. The
digital interface circuitry resides on the Display With TPS module and signals are routed from this
module to the Midplane. A cable harness assembly routes these signals from the Midplane to the 37-
pin connector on the rear panel of the Power Supple I/O module. The location of this connector is
shown in Figure 6-14. Wiring information for this connector is provided in Table 4-2 for Internal
Timing, and Table 4-3 for Loop Timing.
If additional RS-449/X.21/V.35 digital interface connections are needed they can be made available by
using the Comms I/O Base module with an RS-449/X.21/V.35 digital interface comms unit plugged
onto it. Each Comms I/O Base module can accommodate one additional RS-449/X.21/V.35 digital
interface comms unit.
The system typically comes pre-configured from the factory per customer specifications.
4.5.6 POWER LINE CARRIER CONNECTIONS

If your GARD 8000 is equipped with PLC Modules, connections must be made between the Tx and Rx
connectors on the PLC Analog module rear panel, and the Power Line Interface. Type BNC connectors
are used for these connections at the GARD 8000 end of the connection.
When using PLC Modules in a 3U chassis, the GARD 8000 power supply is adequate to power the full
chassis including the 10W amplifier, however, some 6U chassis installations may require an external
+/-15Vdc power supply. This connection is made to the plug-in auxiliary connector (TP1) at the rear of
the PLC Analog chassis as shown in Figure 6-10.
Terminal assignments for TB1 at the rear of the PLC Analog chassis shown in Figure 6-10 are shown
in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1. TB1 Terminal Assignments
Reference Designation Function

TB1-1 +15Vdc from external supply when required
TB1-2 -15Vdc from external supply when required
TB1-3 Ground
TB1-4 Carrier Level Indicator*
TB1-5 Not used
TB1-6 Ground
* To observe the Carrier Level, connect an external meter to TB1 pins 4 and 6. Then refer to Table 6-9
for additional information.

May 15, 2006 4-7 973.334.3100
Table 4-2. RS-449/X.21/V.35 Interface Connections

Note: This table is for GARD 8000 as DCE (Internal Timing) Timing from GARD 8000 to external equipment.
RS-449 X.21 V.35

Signal Input or Pin Signal Input or Pin Signal Input or Pin
Name Output Number Name Output Number Name Output Number
RD(A) I 6 RD(A) I 6 RD(A) I 6
RD(B) I 24 RD(B) I 24 RD(B) I 24
RT(A) O 8 RT(A) O 8 RT(A) O 8
RT(B) O 26 RT(B) O 26 RT(B) O 26
SD(A) O 4 SD(A) O 4 SD(A) O 4
SD(B) O 22 SD(B) O 22 SD(B) O 22
STT(A) O 17 STT(A) O 17
STT(B) O 35 STT(B) O 35
Signal 19 Signal 19 Signal 19
GND GND GND
Chassis 1 Chassis 1 Chassis 1
GND GND GND
Table 4-3. RS-449/X.21/V.35 Interface Connections

Note: This table is for GARD 8000 as DTE (Loop Timing) Timing from external equipment to GARD 8000.
RS-449 X.21 V.35

Signal Input or Pin Signal Input or Pin Signal Input or Pin
Name Output Number Name Output Number Name Output Number
RD(A) I 6 RD(A) I 6 RD(A) I 6
RD(B) I 24 RD(B) I 24 RD(B) I 24
RT(A) I 8 RT(A) I 8 RT(A) I 8
RT(B) I 26 RT(B) I 26 RT(B) I 26
SD(A) O 4 SD(A) O 4 SD(A) O 4
SD(B) O 22 SD(B) O 22 SD(B) O 22
ST(A) I 5 ST(A) I 5
ST(B) I 23 ST(B) I 23
Signal 19 Signal 19 Signal 19
GND GND GND
Chassis 1 Chassis 1 Chassis 1
GND GND GND

May 15, 2006 4-8 973.334.3100
Table 4-4. RS-232 Async Comms Interface Connections
Signal Input or Pin

Name Output Number
Carrier Detect O 1
Receive Data O 2
Transmit Data I 3
Data Terminal
I 4
Ready
Signal GND - 5
Data Set Ready O 6
Request to Send I 7
Clear to Send O 8
- - 9
Interface Signals Functional: CCITT Recommendation V.24
Interface Signals Electrical: CCITT Recommendation V.28
Table 4-5. G.703 Interface Connections
Signal Input or Pin

Name Output Number
Chassis GND - 1
SD(A) O 2
SD(B) O 9
RD(A) I 4
RD(B) I 11
Table 4-6. T1/E1 Interface Connections
Connector DB-15 Connector RJ45-8

Signal Input or Pin Signal Input or Pin
Name Output Number Name Output Number
Chassis
SD - O 1 6
GND
Chassis
SD + O 9 7
GND
RD - I 3 SD - O 4
RD + I 11 SD + O 5
RD + I 2
RD - I 1

May 15, 2006 4-9 973.334.3100
4.5.7 COMMS MODULES MATING CONNECTORS

Comms Modules mating connectors are given in Table 4-7.
Table 4-7. Comms modules mating connectors
Comms Module Type Assembly Number Mating connector type

RS449/X.21/V.35 500855 37-pin female
G.703 500860 15-pin female
T1/E1 500865 J1 = RJ45, and DB-15
E1 500870 J2 = 15-pin female, and BNC
C37.94 500875 TX and RX Type ST
1300nm LED 500880 TX and RX = Type ST
1300nm LASER 500885 TX and RX = Type ST
1550nm LASER 500890 TX and RX = Type ST
RS-232 Async 500945 9-pin D-sub 9 female (one per channel)

May 15, 2006 4-10 973.334.3100
4.5.8 INPUT POWER CONNECTIONS

After all other connections have been made to the GARD 8000, input power connections can be made
to the Power Supply I/O at the rear of the chassis. If only one power supply is installed at the front of
the chassis in the slot designated as “Power Supply 1”, input power connections must be made to the
terminal block labeled “Power Supply 1” at the rear of the chassis. If only one power supply is
installed at the front of the chassis in the slot designated as “Power Supply 2”, input power connections
must be made to the terminal block labeled “Power Supply 2” at the rear of the chassis. If two power
supplies are installed at the front of the chassis, input power connections must be made to the terminal
blocks labeled “Power Supply 1” and “Power Supply 2” at the rear of the chassis.
Input power connections can be either dc station battery voltage (48-125Vdc or 250Vdc) or ac voltage
(125Vac or 220Vac), depending on which power supplies are installed in the chassis. Station battery
positive goes to the “+” terminal and station battery negative goes to the “-“ terminal. Depending on
the power supplies installed in the chassis, either 48-125Vdc or 220Vdc terminal batteries can be used.
If ac input power is used, connections are made to the “+” and “-” terminals and the polarity markings
can be neglected.
Individual double pole disconnects must be installed between the building or station battery
supply and GARD power supply(ies). This must be done for both the main and back-up supply.
Refer to paragraph 6.9.2 for GARD 8000 power supply specifications.

May 15, 2006 4-11 973.334.3100
Table 4-8. GARD 8000 modules, general information
Module Description Assy. Location Of Module in GARD 8000 For Additional

Number Chassis Information see
Front or Rear Paragraph:
Power Supply 48-125V 500305 F 6.8
Power Supply 250V 500315 F 6.8
Power Supply I/O 500310 R 6.8
Controller Module (Primary) 500400 Front Slot 2 of 3U chassis 6.1
Front Slot 11 of 6U chassis
Controller Module (Backup) 500400 Front Slot 10 of 6U chassis 6.1
Display With TPS 500410 Front slot 1 of 3U chassis 6.2
Front slot 9 of 6U chassis
Midplane, 6U 500415 Center of chassis 6.9
System I/O, 6U, E1 Ethernet 500420 R 6.5
System I/O, 6U, Fiber Ethernet 500425 R 6.5
System I/O, 3U, E1 Ethernet 500430 R 6.5
System I/O, 3U, Fiber Ethernet 500435 R 6.5
PDA Interface 500440 Mounted on Rear of Front Panel
Midplane, 3U 500445 Center of chassis 6.9
GPS Interface 500450 Piggy back mounted on System I/O Module
Power Line Carrier (Digital Module) 500455 F (Requires 500930 in rear slot) 6.5.1
Additional TPS Module 500500 F 6.3
Distance Relay (set of 2) 500520 One module in Front and one module in Rear
Current Differential Relay 500525 F
Discrete I/O Base 500800 R 6.6
Input Unit 500805 Plugs onto Discrete I/O base or Comms I/O 6.6
base
SS Output Unit 500810 Plugs onto Discrete I/O base or Comms I/O 6.6
base
Relay Output Unit 500815 Plugs onto Discrete I/O base or Comms I/O 6.6
base
Audio Tone 500820 R 6.4
Comms I/O Base 500850 R 6.7
RS-449, X.21, V.35 Comms Unit 500855 Plugs onto Comms I/O base 6.7
G.703 Comms Unit 500860 Plugs onto Comms I/O base 6.7
T1/E1 100/120 Ohm Unit 500865 Plugs onto Comms I/O base 6.7
E1 75 Ohm (BNC) Unit 500870 Plugs onto Comms I/O base 6.7
C37.94 Unit 500875 Plugs onto Comms I/O base 6.7
Fiber Unit, 1300 nm LED 500880 Plugs onto Comms I/O base 6.7
Fiber Unit, 1300 nm Laser 500885 Plugs onto Comms I/O base 6.7
Fiber Unit, 1550 nm Laser 500890 Plugs onto Comms I/O base 6.7
RS-232 Async Comms Unit 500945 Plugs onto Comms I/O base 6.7
Current Differential Relay I/O 500925 R
Power Line Carrier (Analog Module) 500930 R (Requires 500455 in front slot) 6.5.2
Optional PDA F

May 15, 2006 4-12 973.334.3100
4.6 COMMISSIONING PROCEDURES
4.6.1 TELEPROTECTION COMMISSIONING

4.6.1.1 INSTALLATION AND BOOT UP
4.6.1.1.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
The following equipment is required to perform the commissioning procedure:
1. GARD 8000 System Instruction Manual (a copy can be downloaded from the GARD System)
2. PC with Internet Explorer Web browser (version 6.0.2800 or later)
3. Ethernet RJ-45 cable (a standard Cat 5 straight-trough patch cable)
4. Reference Control Drawings for all Hardware and Logic
5. Voltmeter
GARD 8000 System Hardware Placement
1. Verify factory installed Channel Card and I/O card positions for all boards installed in the
chassis according to the Control Hardware drawings.
NOTE
DURING SHIPPING, THE MODULES IN THE CHASSIS MAY BACK OUT OF
THEIR CONNECTORS. PRIOR TO BEGINNING THE STARTUP PROCEDURE,
OPEN THE FRONT DOOR, AND REMOVE AND RE-SEAT ALL FRONT PANEL
MODULES.
GARD 8000 Initial Power Up
1. Before turning the power on, verify that a correct type of Power Supply is installed in the GARD
8000 chassis and that the Power Supply matches the Station Battery power requirements.
(If the power connections are made to Power Supply 2, the Power Supply has to reside in the
first left slot, viewed from the front).
2. Confirm a proper Ground connection utilizing the protective earth stud on the Power Supply I/O.
3. Remove the Front Panel.
4. Power up the GARD 8000 chassis by applying power from station battery (early models of the
GARD 8000 did not have On/Off power switches). The LED-DS1 on the power supply should
be green.

May 15, 2006 4-13 973.334.3100
Heat Sink
+V (AC/DC)
RS-499 X.21 V.35
Test Point (+V)
1
SW1
0 1
SW2
0
-V (AC/DC) Test Point 2 Ground
POWER SUPPLY 1 POWER SUPPLY 2 Test Point (- V)
DS1
C C
NC NC
NO NO
GROUND
MAJOR MINOR
!
38-150/200-300 VDC
3 AMPS 220 W MAX.
Figure 4-3. Power Supply I/O Module (Teleprotection Commissioning)
GARD 8000 Boot Up Sequence
With the front panel open, verify that a boot up is in progress as displayed by the LEDs (DS1-DS4) on
the Controller Module.
a. During the multiple stages of the boot-up process the DS1 and DS2 indicators will change
colors (starting red, yellow and green). A Solid Green LED of DS1 indicates a final boot up
has been successfully completed.
b. The complete boot-up process will take less than 1 minute.
c. The LED DS2 indicates the status of the Front and Rear Ethernet Port. When the LED is Red,
the Ethernet cable is not connected to the Front or Rear RJ-45 Ports. If the LED is orange the
Ethernet cable is connected to the Front Port, if the LED is Green the connection is made to the
Rear Port.
d. The LED DS3 indicates a state of redundancy control. (The 3U chassis does not support
redundancy, therefore this LED under a normal condition should be solid green).
However, if this LED is Solid Orange the module has detected an on-board fault, but it
continues operating. If the LED DS3 is Red the module has detected an on-board fault
and is not functioning.
e. The LED DS4 is used for factory diagnostics only.
f. Verify the position of the Toggle Switch SW2. In the 3U chassis, SW2 should be in the
NORM position (left-front view) and not in the Disable position.
g. After a successful boot up the GARD 8000 is ready for interrogation through the front Ethernet
Port located on the DISPLAY Module.
DS-4
DS-3
DS-2 Normal-Disable
DS-1
CONTROL CONTROL
Figure 4-4. GARD 8000 Controller Module (Teleprotection Commissioning)

May 15, 2006 4-14 973.334.3100
4.6.1.2 FRONT PORT ETHERNET CONNECTION
Note: The GARD 8000 is delivered with pre-set IP addresses. The front port IP address is
factory set to 192.168.1.1 with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. The Rear port IP address is
configurable. The factory set rear port IP address is provided on a removable sticker on the
System I/O module, and is also specified in the order packing sheet for the GARD 8000
System.
The IP Address assigned to the front port is 192.168.1.1 for every GARD 8000 chassis.
DO NOT plug this port into a LAN. You cannot have more than one device with the same
address on a network. The front port is strictly for direct connection to a Laptop PC. The
Laptop should have an IP Address on the same subnet (192.168.1) as described below.
The front port has no default gateway configured, so it is not routable. This is done for
security purposes.
1. Connect a standard Cat 5 Patch Cable from the RJ-45 Ethernet port on your PC to the front
RJ-45 Ethernet port on the GARD 8000.
2. Configure the IP address of your PC as follows:
a. From a PC desktop, click Start, click Run, type ncpa.cpl, and then click OK.
b. A Network and Dial Up Connection window will appear.
c. Right click on the connection you would like to use (local area connection) to connect to
the GARD 8000, and choose Properties from the pull-down menu.
d. Scroll up/down until you can see the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” protocol listed as shown
on the following page. Ensure the checkbox next to it is checked. Then highlight it and
click on Properties.

May 15, 2006 4-15 973.334.3100
e. Select “Use the following IP address”, and type in the IP address “192.168.1.10” and
subnet mask “255.255.255.0”
f. Click on OK, and then click on the next OK button.
Note: Depending on the speed of the PC it may take a few seconds for the IP settings to take
effect. If the browser is open before the IP settings take effect, there is a chance the browser may need
to be closed and restarted again.
Now that the IP address has been successfully changed go directly to Internet Explorer, type in address
http://192.168.1.1 and access the GARD 8000 homepage.

May 15, 2006 4-16 973.334.3100
GARD 8000 Front Port Ethernet LED’s
A proper operation of the Front Ethernet Port can be monitored using the LED’s on the RJ-45
connector.
Table 4-9. Front Port Ethernet LED’s

Front Ethernet Port LED Function
• Display Link and Receive Status.
a) Solid color indicates link.
Top LED
b) Blinking color indicates Link and Ethernet
Frames being received.
Display Transmit Status
Bottom LED a) Blinking color indicates Link and Ethernet
Communicating with the GARD 8000-Administrator Login
Upon successful login to the GARD 8000 unit the following page will be displayed. Unless the
Administrator ‘Admin’ User Name and Password were changed by the IT dept. or changed at
RFL due to a special request the default Administrative User Name and Passwords are
programmed for: Admin. Both User Name and Password are case sensitive.
The ‘Admin’ user has the following administrator privileges:
1. Rear port TCP/IP address assignments.

2. Adding and removing users.
3. Assigning access levels to users.
4. Enabling and disabling users.
This feature is practical when performing local operations and other user’s (temporarily) should not be
allowed access to the unit. The user ID and user’s password remain valid, and access is simply restored
by ‘enable’.

May 15, 2006 4-17 973.334.3100
Note
There is no ‘backdoor’ for the Admin password. The default password is ‘Admin’ but when
changed, the actual password has to be used. Please contact the factory for password recovery
procedure.
Only the Admin can access the administrator page. Any number of users can be added by the
administrator, with individual access levels.
4.6.1.3 VERIFYING CHASSIS CONFIGURATION STATUS
Once a successful connection to the GARD 8000 is established, click on ‘Home’ in order to display a
current Chassis Configuration Status as shown below.
This webpage is a pictorial representation of the front and rear of the 3U chassis. The two left columns
represent the rear of the 3U chassis, and the right column represents the front of the 3U chassis. The
boxes represent actual module locations. Boxes that have text in them indicate that a module is
plugged into that slot. Boxes without text indicate a blank slot.
The Chassis Configuration Status screen shows an actual hardware configuration and the status of each
module configured in the shelf. The following colors indicate a status of each module:
• Green Normal Condition (modules configured, operating properly).

• Blue Modules disabled, Out of Service condition.
• Yellow Modules enabled, but in Minor Alarm.
• Red Modules in Major Alarm
Each of the installed modules can be configured, by clicking on a box. Selecting a module will bring
up that modules configuration settings screen.
Modules in Blue
“Disabled”

May 15, 2006 4-18 973.334.3100
Module not Configured or in Alert
Modules Fully Configured, not

in Alert or Alarm

May 15, 2006 4-19 973.334.3100
4.6.1.4 VERIFYING CHASSIS COMMUNICATION STATUS

The GARD 8000 can be configured with different Communication Interface modules. In order to
verify a status of the local chassis, each Comms module installed in the Gard 8000 system can be
‘looped back’ either by the software or using a ‘hard loopback’. Please use the following steps to
enable the software’s Local Loopback. The System Testing webpage allows testing of the INPUTS,
OUTPUTS, INTERFACE MODULES (Local and Remote Loopbacks), and SYSTEM MODULES.
1. Click on Test
2. Select ‘System Test’.
3. In System Testing, select one of the Comms Interface Modules, click on RS-449
(Note: In this example the only Comms module configured in the shelf is RS-449).
RX STATUS
ENABLE LOOPBACK

May 15, 2006 4-20 973.334.3100
4. After enabling a Local Loopback, the RX Activity should be green as depicted below.
RX STATUS
LOOPBACK STATUS
5. While a software Local Loopback is enabled, click on ‘Settings’, select Chassis Configuration
and then click on ‘Teleprotection (TPS)’.
6. In the ‘Teleprotection Channel Configuration’ click on ‘Edit’ for a channel being used.

May 15, 2006 4-21 973.334.3100
7. In ‘TPS Channel 1’, click on ‘Reset Error Counters’. This screen provides monitoring of the
TPS channel. The status page is a snapshot of the diagnostic counters and it needs to be
updated during the monitoring process.
Note: Most of the Web Pages are supported by “Help” option. Select “Help” while a
particular web page is displayed.

May 15, 2006 4-22 973.334.3100
4.6.1.5 VERIFYING INPUT/OUTPUT MAPPING
Verifying Input Mapping
Inputs can be mapped to different points in the logic. Input mapping choices are set up in the
logic setting database and are loaded in during a System Logic Database TXT upload. The
database for default logic provides a series of choices for mapping 2 input cards to various points
which are tied to 8 functions of a TPS module. Before the Gard 8000 is placed in service a
programming of Input Mapping should be verified and confirmed with the LOGIC DRAWIGS
provided with the SALES ORDER. The Input Mapping san be obtained in the ‘System Logic
Configuration’
1. Select ‘Settings’ on the Home Page

2. Select ‘System Logic Configuration’
3. Click on ‘Input Mapping’

May 15, 2006 4-23 973.334.3100
Verifying Output Mapping
Outputs can be mapped to different points in the logic. Output mapping choices are set up in
the logic database and are loaded during a System Logic Database TXT upload. The file for
default logic provides a series of choices for mapping 2 output cards to various points which
are tied to 8 functions of a TPS module. From the toolbar select ‘Settings’, ‘System Logic
Configuration’ and then ‘Output Mapping’. A screen similar to the one below will appear.
If a hardware output is mapped to NOT USED, that hardware output will not be tied to the
logic, and will not operate under any situation.
4.6.1.6 PERFORMING SOFTWARE INPUT/OUTPUT TESTING

Now that operation of the communication channel, and Input/Output Mapping have been verified, the
functionality of the ‘MAPPED’ INPUTS/OUTPUTS can be tested via the software.
1. Click on ‘System Test’ at the Test Menu.

2. In the System Test Menu select the appropriate Input Module that was configured and had its
inputs mapped.
3. Select ‘Active’ option for the Inputs selected for the testing.
4. Click on ‘Execute Test’
5. Verify that ‘Logic 1’ is being placed on the Bus for the inputs under test.
6. At the same time, go to the Output Test menu and verify ‘Logic 1’ under ‘Bus’ and ‘Field.’
7. Use an Ohm Meter to verify an operation of the appropriate outputs.
8. Set all inputs back to Normal.

May 15, 2006 4-24 973.334.3100
This ends the Commissioning Procedure

May 15, 2006 4-25 973.334.3100
4.6.2 AUDIO-TONE COMMISSIONING

4.6.2.1 INSTALLATION AND BOOT UP
4.6.2.1.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
1. GARD 8000 System Instruction Manual (a copy can be downloaded from the GARD System)
2. PC with Internet Explorer Web browser (version 6.0.2800 or later)
3. Ethernet RJ-45 cable (a standard Cat 5 straight-trough patch cable)
4. Reference Control Drawings for all Hardware and Logic
5. Voltmeter
GARD 8000 System Hardware Placement
1. Verify factory installed Channel Card and I/O card positions for all boards installed in the chassis
according to the Control Hardware drawings.
NOTE
MODULES.
GARD 8000 Initial Power Up
1. Before turning the power on, verify that a correct type of Power Supply is installed in the GARD
8000 chassis and that the Power Supply matches the Station Battery power requirements.
(If the power connections are made to Power Supply 2, the Power Supply has to reside in the first
left slot, viewed from the front).
2. Confirm a proper Ground connection utilizing the protective earth stud on the Power Supply I/O.
3. Remove the Front Panel.
4. Power up the GARD 8000 chassis by applying power from station battery (early models of the
GARD 8000 did not have ON/Off power switches). The LED-DS1 on the power supply should
be green.

May 15, 2006 4-26 973.334.3100
Heat Sink
+V (AC/DC)
RS-499 X.21 V.35
1 0 1 0 Test Point (+V)
-V (AC/DC)
SW1 SW2
Test Point 2 Ground
POWER SUPPLY 1 POWER SUPPLY 2
Test Point (- V)
DS1
C C
NC NC
NO NO
MAJOR MINOR
!
GROUND
38-150/200-300 VDC
3 AMPS 220 W MAX.
Figure 4-5. Power Supply I/O Module (Audio-Tone Commissioning)
GARD 8000 Boot Up Sequence
With the front panel open, verify that a boot up is in progress as displayed by the LEDs (DS1-DS4) on
the Controller Module.
a. During the multiple stages of the boot-up process the DS1 and DS2 indicators will change
colors (starting red, yellow and green). A Solid Green LED of DS1 indicates a final boot up
has been successfully completed.
b. The complete boot-up process will take less than 1 minute.
c. The LED DS2 indicates the status of the Front and Rear Ethernet Port. When the LED is Red,
the Ethernet cable is not connected to the Front or Rear RJ-45 Ports. If the LED is orange the
Ethernet cable is connected to the Front Port, if the LED is Green the connection is made to the
Rear Port.
d. The LED DS3 indicates a state of redundancy control. (The 3U chassis does not support
redundancy, therefore this LED under a normal condition should be solid green).
However, if this LED is Solid Orange the module has detected an on-board fault, but it
continues operating. If the LED DS3 is Red the module has detected an on-board fault
and is not functioning.
e. The LED DS4 is used for factory diagnostics only.
f. Verify the position of the Toggle Switch SW2. In the 3U chassis, SW2 should be in the
NORM position (left-front view) and not in the Disable position.
g. After a successful boot up the GARD 8000 is ready for interrogation through the front Ethernet
Port located on the DISPLAY Module.
DS-4
DS-3
DS-2 Normal-Disable
DS-1
CONTROL CONTROL
Figure 4-6. GARD 8000 Controller Module (Audio-Tone Commissioning)

May 15, 2006 4-27 973.334.3100
4.6.2.2 FRONT PORT ETHERNET CONNECTION
Note: The GARD 8000 is delivered with pre-set IP addresses. The front port IP address is factory set
to 192.168.1.1 with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. The Rear port IP address is configurable. The
factory set rear port IP address is provided on a removable sticker on the System I/O module, and is
also specified in the order packing sheet for the GARD 8000 System.
The IP Address assigned to the front port is 192.168.1.1 for every GARD 8000 chassis.
DO NOT plug this port into a LAN. You cannot have more than one device with the same
address on a network. The front port is strictly for direct connection to a Laptop PC. The
Laptop should have an IP Address on the same subnet (192.168.1) as described below. The front
port has no default gateway configured, so it is not routable. This is done for security purposes.
1. Connect a standard Cat 5 Patch Cable from the RJ-45 Ethernet port on your PC to the front
RJ-45 Ethernet port on the GARD 8000.
2. Configure the IP address of your PC as follows:
a. From a PC desktop, click Start, click Run, type ncpa.cpl, and then click OK.
b. A Network and Dial Up Connection window will appear.
c. Right click on the connection you would like to use (local area connection) to connect to
the GARD 8000, and choose Properties from the pull-down menu.
d. Scroll up/down until you can see the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” protocol listed as
shown on the following page. Ensure the checkbox next to it is checked. Then highlight
it and click on Properties.

May 15, 2006 4-28 973.334.3100
e. Select “Use the following IP address”, and type in the IP address “192.168.1.10” and
subnet mask “255.255.255.0”
f. Click on OK, and then click on the next OK button.
Note: Depending on the speed of the PC it may take a few seconds for the IP settings to take
effect. If the browser is open before the IP settings take effect, there is a chance the browser may need
to be closed and restarted again.
Now that the IP address has been successfully changed go directly to Internet Explorer, type in address
http://192.168.1.1 and access the GARD 8000 homepage.

May 15, 2006 4-29 973.334.3100
Communicating with the GARD 8000-Administrator Login
Upon successful login to the GARD 8000 unit the following page will be displayed. Unless the
Administrator ‘Admin’ User Name and Password were changed by the IT dept. or changed at
RFL due to a special request the default Administrative User Name and Passwords are
programmed for: Admin. Both User Name and Password are case sensitive.
Note
procedure.

May 15, 2006 4-30 973.334.3100
4.6.2.3 SETTING UP TIME, DATE, SYSTEM LABELS, REAR ETHERNET

PORT SETTINGS AND VERIFYING THE VOLTAGE LEVELS OF
THE INSTALLED POWER SUPPLY OR SUPPLIES
All these parameters and settings are part of the Gard8000 Controller module.
1. From the Home Page click on ‘Settings’.

2. Select ‘Chassis Configuration’
3. At Chassis Configuration web page click on ‘Controller’ module to display the ‘System Labels
and Time’ screen as shown below.
4. Verify the output voltages of installed Power Supply/Supplies. The outputs should be
approximately +18V and -18Volts. The High Voltage alarm will come up (requires
configuration of Over/Under Voltage Alarm on ‘Alarm Configuration Page’) if the output
voltage is equal to or higher than +/- 24.75V and the Low Voltage is below +/- 16.25V.
5. Click on ‘Save’ to store any changes done on this web page

May 15, 2006 4-31 973.334.3100
4.6.2.4 VERIFYING CUSTOM DESIGN AUDIO LOGIC

1. From the Home page click on ‘Settings’.
2. Select ‘File Operations’.
3. At File Operations click on ‘Save File to PC’.
4. Click on arrow pointing down and select ‘System Logic PDF (.PDF file)’.
5. Click on ‘Save’ selection and choose to SAVE or OPEN the Logic Design in PDF format.
6. After opening a PDF file the Custom Designed Audio Logic will be displayed under TITLE
located at the bottom right side of the drawing.
7. The Gard8000 downloaded Audio Logic drawing number should be compared with the
Logic number printed on the chassis label located on the mounting brackets.
4.6.2.5 VERIFYING AUDIO SYSTEM PARAMETERS

1. From the ‘Home’ page click on ‘Settings’ and select ‘Chassis Configuration’.
2. At ‘Chassis Configuration’ page click on the ‘Audio Tone’ module installed in one of the
Rear Slots.
3. At the ‘Audio Tone Configuration’ page first select the ‘General Settings’ to verify the
overall Audio System Parameters and then verify each of 4 channels operating parameters.
4. Use the Audio Configuration Page to modify the factory programmed parameters for a Local
End testing as well as future End to End normal operation.
5. For Local-End testing insure that the TX/RX Audio Tone levels and Frequencies are the
same.
Note
To change a special configuration in Channel 1 from ‘Modem’ to ‘Tripping’ or ‘Tripping’ to
‘Modem’ the programming changes have to be done at two web pages: ‘Audio Tone
Configuration’ and ‘Option Settings’. See below.
• To display the Option Settings page click on ‘Settings’, select ‘System Logic Configuration’, at
the System Logic Configuration page select ‘Option Settings’

May 15, 2006 4-32 973.334.3100
4.6.2.6 VERIFYING CHASSIS CONFIGURATION STATUS

1. Click on ‘Home’ to display ‘Chassis Configuration Status’.
2. At ‘Chassis Configuration Status’ click on ‘Audio Tone’ module.
3. At the Audio Tone Status page click on ‘General Status’
4. The ‘General Status’ page and ‘Channel Status’ page will display a current status of the local
chassis. If channel 1 is configured for a Modem the status report under Modem will display a
status of ‘Remote Channels’.
5. If the communication link to the local chassis was not established and a hard loopback or
software loopback were not enabled, all four channels will indicate a Loss of Signal as shown
in the following webpage. Also, the Front Panel LEDs will indicate a ‘Loss of Comms’
condition and a type of Alarm or Condition will be indicated on the Custom Designed Front
Panel Nameplate.

May 15, 2006 4-33 973.334.3100
4.6.2.7 TESTING A LOCAL END

1. A local loopback on the GARD8000 Audio system can be enabled either through the
software loopback or connecting jumper wires between the TX and RX terminals (for 4wire
configuration) on the Audio Comms Interface Module.
2. To enable a local loopback using the software click on the ‘Test’ menu, select ‘System Test’
and then click on the ‘Audio Tone’ module.
3. At the ‘Audio Protection Screen’ select an ‘Internal Loopback’ and then click on ‘Run Test’.
Repeat the steps in 4.6.2.6 above to verify the General Status after a software loopback is
enabled.
• A Minor Alarm indicating the software enabled is in ‘Internal Loopback’ will be displayed as
shown in the following webpage.

May 15, 2006 4-34 973.334.3100
4. At the same time verify a correct condition of the front panel LEDs. The programming of the
front panel LEDs can be viewed in the ‘LED Logic Assignments’ shown below.
5. To display the ‘LED Logic Assignments’, go to the Home page and click on ‘Settings’, select
‘System Labels and Triggers’, then select ‘LED Logic Assignments’
Note: Most of the Web Pages are supported by “Help” option. Select “Help” while a
particular web page is displayed.

May 15, 2006 4-35 973.334.3100
4.6.2.8 RESETTING SOE (SEQUENCE OF EVENTS) RECORDS

1. Before testing a local-end tripping, reset the SOE log.
2. From the Main Page, click on ‘Settings’, select ‘System Labels and Triggers’ and then select
‘SOE Triggers and Labels’.
3. Click on ‘Clear All SOE’ and then click ‘OK’ at the security window as shown on the
following webpage. A page will be displayed similar to the second webpage below.

May 15, 2006 4-36 973.334.3100
4.6.2.9 VERIFYING INPUT AND OUTPUT MAPPING

1. Before proceeding to Local Trip testing, verify the Input and Output mapping (software
connections of Trip Inputs and Trip Outputs).
2. Click on ‘Settings’, select ‘System Logic Configuration’, and click on ‘Input Mapping’ or
‘Output Mapping’ as shown below.
4.6.2.10 LOCAL-END TRIP TESTING

1. Using the Audio System Logic Design drawing perform a local end trip test while the
Gard8000 chassis is placed under local loopback.
2. Before starting the actual Trip Test, verify the status of Guard Frequencies.
3. From the Home page click on ‘Test’ and select ‘System Test’.
4. At the ‘System Testing’ menu select ‘Audio Tone’.
5. At ‘Audio Protection Test’ shown on the following page verify the current Guard frequencies
and the status of all Channels.
6. Click on ‘Test’ again and select ‘System Test’.
7. Select one of the INPUT modules configured in the system.
8. Based on the Audio Custom Logic Design Drawing change the condition of the trip inputs
configured in the system from Normal to Active and click on ‘Execute Test’ as shown on the
following page.
9. Go back to the ‘Test’ menu, select ‘System Test’, click on configured OUTPUT module and
verify a state of trip bits under the ‘Bus’ and ‘Field’ columns.
10. Click on ‘Test’ menu, select ‘System Test’, click on ‘Audio Tone’ module and verify a shift
of frequencies on the configured channels
11. Click on ‘SOE’ menu, select ‘System and Teleprotection’ and verify Sequence of Events
recorded during the local trip testing.

May 15, 2006 4-37 973.334.3100

May 15, 2006 4-38 973.334.3100

May 15, 2006 4-39 973.334.3100
4.6.2.11 END TO END TRIP TESTING

1. Connect the Comms Line with the Remote End.
2. Go to the ‘Settings Menu’, click on ‘Chassis Configuration’ and if necessary change the
parameters for End to End communication.
3. Using the Primitive Logic drawing apply voltage to the keying inputs at the Local End. On
the remote end observe that the appropriate trip outputs energize. The Trip TX and RX front
panel LEDs should illuminate for all tripped channels. Exercise all aspects of the primitive
and alarm logic observing all outputs for their correct response.
4. If desired, exercise all the steps described for a Local-End testing.
This ends the commissioning procedure

May 15, 2006 4-40 973.334.3100
4.6.3 POWER LINE CARRIER COMMISSIONING
NOTE
MODULES.
After the GARD 8000 PLC is installed and prior to being placed in service, a few basic adjustments
and measurements must be performed to ensure proper operation. The output power of the system
should be verified and adjusted if required, the output impedance of the transmitter must be adjusted to
match the actual impedance of the line, and the receiver must be adjusted for the actual receive signal
level.
This section assumes that the equipment has been installed and configured for the required application
in accordance with the preceding installation procedures. The Analog and Digital PLC modules are
hot pluggable. For servicing the Analog PLC Module an Extender Module is available from RFL.
This module will secure the PCB while allowing complete access. Part No. 500940.
4.6.3.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

1. Frequency-selective voltmeter (FSVM)
2. Potentiometer adjustment tool (or small flat-blade screwdriver)
3. 50 ohm (non-inductive) dummy load
4.6.3.1.1 SETTING THE TX LEVEL
It is advisable to verify the operation of the transmitter after installation into the system. This allows
checking the GARD 8000 PLC and line tuning equipment.

May 15, 2006 4-41 973.334.3100
4.6.3.1.2 OUTPUT POWER
The GARD 8000 PLC transmitter is specified to provide 10W into a 50 ohm load. Adjustments to the
output power are made with a 50 ohm dummy load connected. Any additional devices in the transmit
path, such as hybrids, will reduce the effective output power. This adjustment should be performed at
the rated 10W level.
1. Connect the dummy load to the TX port. The TX port location is shown in Figure 4-3.
2. Connect the FSVM across the output of the Power Amplifier test points (Red is the Power Amp
Output, and Black is Common). The test point locations are shown in Figure 4-3. Set the
FSVM to the transmitter output frequency.
3. Set the transmitter to output the full 10W level. In a 1W/10W FSK or On-Off system use either
the external trip/block input or the test pages.
4. Adjust the Power Amplifiers Gain control (R8 in Figure 4-3) to achieve 22.36 Vrms
(40 dBm).
5. Disconnect the dummy load and restore the line connection.
COMMON RECEIVE IN POWER AMP OUT COMMON

TEST POINT TEST POINT TEST POINT TEST POINT
(BLACK) (YELLOW) (RED) (BLACK)
RX TX
COARSE FINE
GND
GND
+15
CLI
-15
TB1 R19 R13 R8

AMP TX FAIL AMP IMPEDANCE AMP GAIN
ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST
Figure 4-7. PLC Analog Module Test Points

May 15, 2006 4-42 973.334.3100
4.6.3.1.3 OUTPUT IMPEDANCE
Once the GARD 8000 PLC has been connected to the line the output impedance should be adjusted to
match that of the actual line. Impedance mismatches can cause signal reflections and other undesirable
effects. The GARD 8000 PLC Power Amplifier provides an output impedance adjustment to
accommodate small variations in actual line conditions. When the load and source impedance of a
device are matched, the loaded output voltage is exactly one half of the unloaded output voltage (the
internal and external impedances form a 50% voltage divider). This fact is used to set the amplifiers
output impedance. However, the power amplifier is not able to supply twice the rated output voltage
when configured for 10 W operation. (The output impedance is simulated by active circuits in the
GARD 8000 PLC and the output compliance voltage is limited.) For this reason, the adjustment must
be made at less than 10 W output power.
1. Disconnect the dummy load from the Power Amplifier.
2. Key the transmitter.
3. Measure the amplifier output voltage using a FSVM across the (red) and (black) Test Points on
the Power Amplifier output and record the value. Refer to Figure 10-3 for the location of these
test points.
4. Connect the GARD 8000 PLC to the line.
5. While continuing to measure the amplifiers output voltage at the test points on the Power
Amplifier, adjust the Power Amplifier Impedance Adjustment (potentiometer R13 on the rear
of the chassis) to achieve 50% of the previously measured open-circuit voltage.
4.6.3.1.4 POWER AMP TX FAIL THRESHOLD ADJUSTMENT
1. Connect the FSVM to the PA OUT Test Points on the Analog Module and tune the FSVM for
the TX frequency.
2. Send Guard (In FSK) or Block (On-Off).
3. Adjust R8 on the Power Amplifier (located on the rear of the chassis) until the desired TX Fail
Threshold is shown on the FSVM.
• Note: RFL recommends setting the threshold to 1.5 dB below the Guard or Block Signal level.
4. Adjust the TX Fail Threshold pot (R19) of the Power Amplifier until the TX Fail Output turns
on.
5. Adjust the Gain pot (R8) on the Power Amplifier until the nominal TX level is shown on the
FSVM.
6. Confirm TX Fail Output is Off.

May 15, 2006 4-43 973.334.3100
4.6.3.2 HYBRID TUNING PROCEDURE

If this is a 2W system perform the following Hybrid Tuning Procedure. The purpose of tuning the
hybrid is to match the impedance of the GARD 8000 PLC system to the transmission line, thereby
minimizing reflected power. Refer to Figure 4-3.
a. On the Analog Module, verify that jumper locations J12 through J15 do not have jumpers
installed.
b. Using the FSVM, set to transmit frequency, monitor the RX IN Test Point (Yellow) and
(Ground black), on the Analog Module.
c. On the Analog Module verify that J24 is in the FSK position. Adjust S1 (Course) and R46
(Fine) for a minimum reading on the FSVM.
d. Insert jumpers J12 through J15 in increasing combinations of capacitance until a combination
of capacitance is found to give a minimum reading on the FSVM. Refer to the schematic shown
in Figures 10-3 through 10-5.
e. Remove jumper J17 and adjust L4 for fine tuning until a minimum reading on the FSVM is
achieved. If necessary insert jumpers J16, J18, J19 and J20 in increasing combinations of
inductance until a combination of inductance is found to give a minimum reading on the
FSVM. Refer to the schematic shown in Figures 10-3 through 10-5.
4.6.3.3 SETTING THE RX LEVEL

1. The Rx level commissioning should only be performed after the TX circuits at the far end are
connected to the local unit.
a. From the remote end send a guard (in 2F or 3F systems), or a block (in on/off systems).
b. Using a FSVM verify the presence of the tone at the line input of the local chassis.
2. Commission the Rx Level as follows:

a. In the PLC Module Test, web page shown in Figure 11-23, check the box next to
“Re-commission Unit”. Then click on “Run Test”.
This ends the commissioning procedure

May 15, 2006 4-44 973.334.3100
System User Interface
SECTION 5. SYSTEM USER INTERFACE
Figure 5-1. GARD 8000 Log-In Page
5.1 WEB SERVER
The GARD 8000 System is accessed via Internet Explorer web browser (version 6.0.2800 or later) on a
PC. In the future the GARD 8000 will support Netscape or Mozilla. The web server itself resides on
the system so there is no need to install any application specific software on the PC. To determine
which version of Internet Explorer your PC has, go to paragraph 5.2.
Note: When switching between multiple GARD units with the same IP address through the
front port, allow at least 20 seconds before connecting to another GARD or IP device. The PC
will retain address information in its cache.
The GARD 8000 has four User Interface communications ports; a front RJ45 port, front and rear RS-
232 ports, and a rear RJ45 electrical or optical TCP/IP port. Refer to Figures 5-2 through 5-4 for the
location of these ports. It is recommended to use the front RJ45 port for local access as this will give
much faster operation than via the RS-232 serial port. This connection is shown in Figure 5-6.
There is only one Ethernet device built into the Communications Processor, which has 2 Ethernet
connections on the GARD 8000. One is on the front (referred to as port 0), and the other is on the rear
(referred to as port 1). A Software Process monitors the Ethernet Ports to see which ones have a valid
Ethernet connection. The front port (Port 0) gets precedence over the rear port (Port 1). If nothing is
connected to Port 0, then Port 1 is active. Table 5-1 illustrates which Port is active (highlighted entry)
for the different connection scenarios.
July 25, 2006 5-1 973.334.3100
>>text continues on page 5-5<<
GARD 8000
RJ-45 RS-232
Ethernet Port Serial Port
Figure 5-2. Front View Of 6U Chassis showing locations of RJ-45 and RS-232 ports

July 25, 2006 5-2 973.334.3100
Optional System I/O Module has Fiber System I/O Module

Optic connectors instead of RJ-45
RS-232 RJ-45
Serial Port Ethernet Port
Access for Card

Ejector Tool
Status
LEDs POWER SUPPLY 1 POWER SUPPLY 2
Status LEDs
RS-232
Optical TCP/IP
Ports RX
ALARM ALERT
TX
ETHERNET
RS-485
Type ST MOD BUS
Fiber Optic DNP Ground
Connectors Lug
(bayonet)
GPS
Input From
Optional GPS
IRIG-B
1PPS
Figure 5-3. Rear View Of 6U Chassis showing location of RJ-45 (or Fiber Optic) and RS-232 ports

July 25, 2006 5-3 973.334.3100
RJ-45 RS-232
Ethernet Port Serial Port
GARD 8000
NET RS232 RESET
Figure 5-4. Front view of 3U chassis showing locations of RJ-45 and RS-232 ports
Optical TCP/IP
Ports
RX
Optional System I/O Module has Fiber
TX
Optic connectors instead of RJ-45
Input From Status

Optional GPS LEDs
IRIG-B

IPPS
ETHERNET
GPS
RS-232
RS-232 RS-485
Serial Port RJ-45
Connection Ethernet Port
Figure 5-5. Rear view of 3U chassis showing location of RJ-45 (or Fiber Optic) and RS-232 ports

July 25, 2006 5-4 973.334.3100
Table 5-1. Port priority
Port 0 (front) Port 1 (rear)

No Connection No Connection
No Connection Connection
Connection No Connection
Connection Connection
A valid Ethernet connection is one that has the Link established, and is represented by a solid light (or
blinking light) on the left led of the connector.
5.2 DETERMINING THE VERSION OF INTERNET EXPLORER ON YOUR

PC
To determine which version of Internet Explorer your PC has, start Internet Explorer and click on
Help, and then click on About Internet Explorer. A pop up window will indicate the version number
which must be 6.0.2800 or higher. If you do not have the latest version go to www.microsoft.com,
click on the “downloads” link and download “Internet Explorer 6”. After the download, double click
on the downloaded setup file and follow the instructions.
If you are using the default settings of Internet Explorer, no action is necessary.
If you are using the custom settings on Internet Explorer, go to Tools, Internet Options, Security, and
click on the “Custom” button. Then scroll down to “Binary and Script Behaviors” and click on the
“Enable” button. Then scroll down to “File Download” and click on the “Enable” button. Then scroll
down to “Scripting”, then to “Active Scripting” and click on “Enable”. “Allow META REFRESH”
must also be enabled.
This completes setting up the latest version of Internet Explorer.

July 25, 2006 5-5 973.334.3100
5.3 GARD 8000 IP ADDRESSES
GARD 8000 is delivered with pre-set IP addresses. The front port IP address is fixed, and factory set to
192.168.1.1 with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0. The rear port IP address is configurable. The factory
set rear port IP address is provided on a removable sticker on the System I/O module, and is also
specified in the order packing sheet for the GARD 8000 System.
5.3.1 FRONT ETHERNET PORT

The IP Address assigned to the front port is 192.168.1.1 for every GARD 8000 chassis. DO NOT plug
this port into a LAN. You cannot have more than one device with the same address on a network. The
front port is strictly for direct connection to a Laptop PC. The Laptop should have an IP Address on the
same subnet (192.168.1) as described below. The front port has no default gateway configured, so it is
not routable. This is done for security purposes.
5.3.1.1 CONFIGURING A PC USING WINDOWS XP OR 2000
GARD8000
Standard Cat 5 Patch Cable

Front
RJ-45 Ethernet Port RJ-45 Ethernet Port
IP Address: 192.168.1.10 IP Address: 192.168.1.1

Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Figure 5-6. Configuring a PC using Windows XP or 2000
Note: All GARD 8000 front ethernet ports are preconfigured to an IP address of 192.168.1.1 at
the factory, and cannot be changed.
The first step is to connect a standard Cat 5 Patch Cable from the RJ-45 Ethernet port on your PC to
the front RJ-45 Ethernet port on the GARD 8000 as shown in Figure 5-6.
Then configure the IP address of your PC as follows:
1. From your PC desktop, click Start, click Run, type ncpa.cpl, and then click OK.
2. A Network and Dial Up Connection window will appear.
3. Right click on the connection you would like to use (local area connection) to connect to the
GARD 8000, and choose Properties from the pull-down menu. A window similar to the one
shown in Figure 5-7 should appear.

July 25, 2006 5-6 973.334.3100
Figure 5-7. Local Area Connections Properties
4. Scroll up/down until you can see the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” protocol listed as shown
in Figure 5-7. Ensure that the checkbox next to it is checked. Then highlight it and click on
Properties.
5. A window similar to the one shown in Figure 5-8 should appear.
Note: If you do not see the “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)” protocol listed you have to install
TCP/IP on your PC. This is beyond the scope of this document. See your network administrator
for assistance.

July 25, 2006 5-7 973.334.3100
Figure 5-8. Internet Protocol Properties/Alternate Configuration
6. Select “Use the following IP address”, and type in the IP address “192.168.1.10” and subnet
mask “255.255.255.0” as shown in Figure 5-9.

July 25, 2006 5-8 973.334.3100
Figure 5-9. Internet protocol properties/IP Address
7. Click on OK, and then click on the next OK button.
8. You have now successfully changed the IP address of your PC. Now go to paragraph 5.6 for
instructions on how to access the GARD 8000.
Note: Since you have changed the IP address of your PC, you will not be able to access the
network that it was previously connected to. This includes the internet. A normal side effect of
this is that the homepage your browser is configured to open on, at startup will not load
successfully. You may ignore this and continue to the GARD 8000 homepage.
Note: Depending on the speed of your PC it may take a few seconds for the IP settings to take
effect. If you open the browser before they take effect, there is a chance you will have to close
all of the open windows of the browser and restart the browser.

July 25, 2006 5-9 973.334.3100
5.3.1.2 CONFIGURING A PC USING WINDOWS 95, 98 OR ME
GARD8000
Standard Cat 5 Patch Cable

Front

Figure 5-10. Configuring PC for Windows 95/98/ME
Note: All GARD 8000 front ethernet ports are preconfigured to an IP address of 192.168.1.1 at the
factory
The first step is to connect a standard Cat 5 Patch Cable from the RJ-45 Ethernet port on the PC to the
front RJ-45 Ethernet port on the GARD 8000 as shown in Figure 5-10.
Then configure the IP address of your PC as follows:

1. From your PC desktop click the Start button, choose Settings and then Control Panels.
2. Double-click the icon for the Network control panel. A screen similar to the one shown in
Figure 5-11 will appear:
Figure 5-11. Network

July 25, 2006 5-10 973.334.3100
In order for your computer to access the Amherst Network (and the Internet) you will need the
following three network components installed:
The Client for Microsoft Networks
An Ethernet adapter (e.g. Intel 21041 based Ethernet Controller, listed above - not to be
confused with the dial-up adapter which will have the same type of icon)
A TCP/IP protocol (If you have more than one adapter installed, your TCP/IP protocol might
be listed as pointing to a specific adapter e.g. TCP/IP -> Intel 21041 based Ethernet Controller.
Make sure it points to the Ethernet adapter you will be using to connect to the GARD 8000)
If you have these items installed already, skip to the section “Configuring the TCP/IP Component” in
Step 5. Otherwise follow the directions below.
1. If Client for Microsoft Networks does not appear among your installed network components
Click the add... Button. The select network component type dialog box will open as shown in
figure 5-12.
Figure 5-12. Select Network Component Type
2. Click the Client item to highlight it, and then click on the Add... button.

July 25, 2006 5-11 973.334.3100
3. In the Select Network Client window shown in Figure 5-13, click Microsoft in the left
column, and then Client for Microsoft Networks in the right column.
Figure 5-13. Select Network Client window
4. Click OK in the Select Network Client window to return to the Network control panel.
5. If TCP/IP does not appear among your installed network components, then click the Add...
button. The Select Network Component Type dialog box will open as shown in Figure 5-14.
Figure 5-14. Select Network Component Type dialog box
6. Click the Protocol item to highlight it and click the Add... button.
7. In the Select Network Protocol window, click Microsoft in the left column and then TCP/IP
in the right columns shown in Figure 5-15.

July 25, 2006 5-12 973.334.3100
Figure 5-15. Select Network Protocol window
8. Click OK in the Select Network Client window to return to the Network control panel.
9. In the Network control panel window, select TCP/IP and click Properties. The TCP/IP
Properties window will be displayed as shown in Figure 5-16.
In the IP Address tab select “Specify an IP address”.
Type in an IP Address of :192.168.1.10
Type in a Subnet Mask of: 255.255.255.0
Figure 5-16. TCP/IP Properties window

July 25, 2006 5-13 973.334.3100
10. Click OK to save the changes made to the TCP/IP Properties and return to the Network
control panel.
11. Click OK to close the Network control panel and save your changes. Windows may prompt
you for network driver files. These files should be on your Windows 95/98/Me CD or you
might have your *.cab files archived on your PC.
12. When Windows is finished copying any files it needs, it will tell you that you need to
restart your computer before the settings can be changed. Click Yes to restart your
computer when prompted.
13. You have now successfully changed your IP address and can go directly to Internet
Explorer and navigate to http://192.168.1.1.
Note: Since you have changed the IP address of your PC, you will not be able to access the network it
was previously connected to. This includes the internet. A normal side effect of this is that the
homepage your browser is configured to open on startup will not load successfully. You may ignore
this and continue to the GARD 8000 homepage.
Front Ethernet Port LED’s
Table 5-2. Front Ethernet port LEDs
Front Ethernet Port LED Function

Top LED • Display Link and Receive Status.
o Solid color indicates Link.
o Blinking color indicates Link and Ethernet
Bottom LED • Display Transmit Status.
o Blinking color indicates Link and Ethernet
Frames being transmitted.

July 25, 2006 5-14 973.334.3100
5.3.2 REAR ETHERNET PORT

The IP Address assigned to the rear port is configured by the user. The administrator must be plugged
into the front port to change this, since the rear port does not have an IP Address assigned to it. It can
be changed in a Web Page.
Netmask and Gateway

The administrator who assigns the IP Address will also assign these values. In most cases the subnet
mask will remain the same: 255.255.255.0.
Rear Ethernet Port LED’s

Table 5-3. Rear Ethernet port LEDs
Rear Ethernet Port – Facing Rear of

GARD8000
Right Led • Display Link and Receive Status.
o Solid color indicates Link.
o Blinking color indicates Link and
Ethernet Frames being received.
Left Led • Display Transmit Status.
o Blinking color indicates Link and
Ethernet Frames being transmitted.
5.3.3 ETHERNET CABLES

Table 5-4. Ethernet cables
Rear Ethernet Connection Normal straight-through Ethernet Cable when plugged into
a hub. The Hub provides the cross-connection so that each
transmitter communicates with the receiver of the remote
side.
Front Ethernet Connection Normal straight-through Ethernet Cable
when plugged directly into a Laptop. The Display Board
provides the cross-connection so that each transmitter
communicates with the receiver of the remote side.
5.3.4 PASSWORDS
When accessing the GARD 8000 via a web browser, the first page that shows up is the log in screen as
shown in Figure 5-17.

July 25, 2006 5-15 973.334.3100
Figure 5-17. Administrator Login
The ‘Admin’ user has the following administrator privileges:

o Rear port TCP/IP address assignments
o Adding and removing users
o Assigning access levels to users
o Enabling and disabling users.
o This feature is practical when performing local operations and other user’s temporarily
should not be allowed access to the unit. The user ID and user’s password remain valid, and
access is simply restored by ‘enable’.
procedure.

July 25, 2006 5-16 973.334.3100
Figure 5-18. Access Administrations Page
There are 10 access levels, sorted by the web pages the user is allowed to access:
all_pages
config_general
config_system
config_protection
config_comms
config_reset
test_reset
test_protection
test_comms
read-only
The default user Admin always has access to ‘all pages’ from the front port. While the ‘Admin’ can
not be removed as a user, the password can be changed and the rear port access can be restricted. There
is also a ‘Guest’ fixed user with read only access.
Each user is individually password protected. ‘Strong’ passwords with up to 16 characters may be
used.

July 25, 2006 5-17 973.334.3100
Access levels can be configured separately for each port. For instance, the rear port can be set to allow
read-only while the front port can allow setting changes.
Rear port TCP/IP address assignments

The Administrator can change the rear port IP address. While changing the address, the user needs to
be connected to the front TCP/IP port.
The address setup page is accessed from the main web page “Chassis Configuration Status’ by clicking
on ‘Controller’.
Figure 5-19. Main Web Page (3U Chassis shown)

July 25, 2006 5-18 973.334.3100
Figure 5-20. TCP/IP Address setup (Sheet 1 of 2)

July 25, 2006 5-19 973.334.3100
Figure 5-20. TCP/IP Address setup (Sheet 2 of 2)
5.3.5 REMOTE SERVICE CHANNELS

The above web page will define the Remote Service Channels; once these are defined the appropriate
Communication Channels must be configured for a connection to be established (See Figure 7-7).
The example shown has COM0 as the primary unit.
Local IP Alias for Remote Unit

This is the IP address to access the remote GARD unit, subject to the constraints of the local IP
Netmask.
Remote System Netmask

The IP Netmask of the rear Ethernet port on the remote GARD unit.
Remote System Rear IP Address

July 25, 2006 5-20 973.334.3100
This is the IP address to access the local GARD unit, subject to the constraints of the local IP Netmask.
End-Point Type
Allows a GARD unit to be designated Secondary or Primary.
Com2 is reserved for use over the PLC link.
Unused Ports
All unused ports in GARD 8000 are closed.
Firewalls and encryption

GARD 8000 does not provide any firewall or encryption. Security should be considered on the
network level.
A diagram showing the various communication options is shown on the following page.

July 25, 2006 5-21 973.334.3100
System I/O Module

on rear of GARD
DB-9 Female DB-9 Female
RS-232
RJ-45
Ethernet
Remote Access User Interface
Modem GARD Factory Settings:

DB-9 Male IP Address - Not allocated
Subnet - Not allocated
Cable :
DB-9 Female Cat5 Patch Lead
RJ-45 (Straight)
Serial RS-232
Network Connection
GARD Factory Settings:

IP Address 192.168.1.1
Subnet 255.255.255.0
PC Settings:
IP Address 192.168.1.2
Subnet 255.255.255.0
Baud rate: 9600
Data 8; Parity 0; Stop Bits 1
Enable Hardware Flow Control GARD 8000
Cable for Modem Connection RFL Electronics Inc.
9 Pin 'D' Straight Connection

May also be used to connect to
local PC using null modem
cable Front of GARD
RJ-45
DB-9 Male
RS-232
Ethernet
Serial RS-232 Local User Interface
Alternative User Interface
GARD Factory Settings:
GARD Factory Settings: IP Address 192.168.1.1
IP Address 192.168.1.1 Subnet 255.255.255.0
Subnet 255.255.255.0
DB-9 Female RJ-45 PC Settings:
PC Settings: IP Address 192.168.1.10 (typ)
IP Address 192.168.1.2 Subnet 255.255.255.0
Subnet 255.255.255.0
Baud rate: 9600 Cable :
Data 8; Parity 0; Stop Bits 1 Cat5 Patch Lead
Enable Hardware Flow Control RJ-45 (Straight)
Cable :
9 Pin 'D' Straight Connection
Figure 5-21. Communication Overview (Typical)

July 25, 2006 5-22 973.334.3100
5.4 FRONT PANEL OF SYSTEM DISPLAY WITH TPS MODULE

The GARD 8000 System is provided with 20 multicolored LED’s (yellow, green, red) and an optional
PDA. The LED’s are programmable and custom labels can be made. There is also a front LED reset
button.
5.5 PDA
5.5.1 FRONT PANEL PDA

The GARD 8000 System is provided with an optional fixed PDA on the front panel. The PDA runs a
web browser application and will read all data and settings in the system. At this time, the PDA does
not allow for setting changes.
5.5.2 EXTERNAL PDA

The GARD 8000 System will communicate via its front IrDA (Infrared) port with any external PDA
with PalmOS running a web browser application.
5.5.3 PDA SET UP

The following items need to be set up on a Palm OS PDA in order to connect it to a GARD 8000.
• Web Browser – The Eudora web browser needs to be installed. It can be installed via hot
syncing or beaming. This is free software and can be copied without limitations. It can also be
downloaded from Eudora.com.
• Bookmark – A bookmark with the Gard PDA URL must exist in Eudora. This can also be
beamed from another PDA or typed in. The URL is “192.168.1.1/cgi-
bin/pda/RflDefaultPda.htm”
• Network - The network selection of the preferences setup of the Palm must be setup as
follows:
Service = Unix
Username = leave blank
Password = -prompt-
Connection = IR to a PC/Handheld
• Under details add the following set up.

Connection Type = PPP
Idle Timeout = Never
Query DNS = Check
IP address Automatic = Check
• Under script add the following set up.

Send CR:
End:
• Start Eudora and click on the bookmark.

July 25, 2006 5-23 973.334.3100
5.5.4 PDA SITE MAP
RFL GARD 8000
LED Names
Measured Values Measured Values
Inventory
Testing Comms tests System Values
Events Log I/O tests Comms Values
TPS Values TPS Values
I/O States
Distance Relay Values TPS Block 1
Audio Tone Values TPS Block 2
PLC Values TPS Block 3
Current Differential Relay Values TPS Block 4
5.6 HOW TO ACCESS THE GARD 8000 LOGIN PAGE
1. Configure the IP Address of your PC in accordance with paragraph 5.3.1.1 or 5.3.1.2 as

applicable.
2. Connect your PC to the GARD 8000 using a Cat 5 Patch Cable to the front RJ-45 Ethernet
port.
3. Start Internet Explorer.
4. From Internet Explorer go to the Address Bar and enter the IP Address of the GARD 8000
which is 192.168.1.1, then press the Enter button.
5. The GARD 8000 Login Page will be displayed.
6. Type in the User Name and Password. The User Name and Password are both case sensitive.
Then press the Login key. This will give you access to the GARD 8000 Chassis Configuration
Status page as shown in Figure 5-21 for the 3U chassis, or Figure 5-22 for the 6U chassis.
5.7 CHASSIS CONFIGURATION STATUS PAGE
There are two Chassis Configuration Status pages, one for the 3U chassis and one for the 6U
chassis. Each of these are described on the following pages.

July 25, 2006 5-24 973.334.3100
5.7.1 CHASSIS CONFIGURATION STATUS PAGE FOR 3U CHASSIS

The Chassis Configuration Status page for the 3U chassis is shown below. This page is a pictorial
representation of the front and rear of the 3U chassis. The two left columns represent the rear of the 3U
chassis, and the right column represents the front of the 3U chassis.
The boxes represent module locations. Boxes that have text in them indicate that a module is plugged
into that slot. Boxes without text in them, indicate a blank slot.
Figure 5-22. Typical Chassis Configuration Status page for 3U chassis.

July 25, 2006 5-25 973.334.3100
5.7.2 CHASSIS CONFIGURATION STATUS PAGE FOR 6U CHASSIS

The Chassis Configuration Status page for the 6U chassis is shown in Figure 5-22. This page is a
pictorial representation of the front and rear of the 6U chassis. The two left columns represent the rear
of the 6U chassis rotated 90 degrees to the left, and the right column represents the front of the 6U
chassis rotated 90 degrees to the left. To get a true representation of the rear of the 6U chassis you
must rotate the two left columns 90 degrees to the right. To get a true representation of the front of the
6U chassis you must rotate the right column 90 degrees to the right. This was done to simplify the
creation of this web page.
The boxes represent module locations. Boxes that have text in them indicate that a module is plugged
into that slot. Boxes without text in them, indicate a blank slot.
Figure 5-23. Typical Chassis Configuration Status page for 6U chassis.

July 25, 2006 5-26 973.334.3100
5.7.3 CHASSIS CONFIGURATION STATUS PAGE GENERAL

INFORMATION
The boxes in the card slot locations can have one of five different background colors. Each background
color represents a different status condition as shown below.
Yellow = Minor alarm

Green = Normal condition
Blue = Module not configured or disabled
Red = Major alarm
Gray = Empty slot
Each of the installed modules can be configured, by clicking on a box. Selecting a module will bring
up that modules configuration settings screen.
Refer to Section 6 of the GARD 8000 Distance Relay Instruction Manual for information on how to
configure modules in a GARD 8000 Distance Relay.

July 25, 2006 5-27 973.334.3100
5.8 HOW TO CONFIGURE A PC TO CONNECT TO THE GARD8000

RS-232 PORT WITH WINDOWS XP OR 2000
GARD8000
Standard RS-232 Cable

Front RS-232

(Automatically Assigned)
Note: All GARD 8000 front RS-232 ports are preconfigured for an IP address of 192.168.1.1 at
the factory, and the IP Address assigned to the PC by the PPP connection will be
192.168.1.2.
1. Click Start, click Run, type ncpa.cpl, and then click OK.
2. Click on Create a new connection.

July 25, 2006 5-28 973.334.3100
3. Click Next.
4. Choose Set up and advanced connection, and click Next.

July 25, 2006 5-29 973.334.3100
5. Choose Connect directly to another computer, and click Next.
6. Choose Guest and click Next.

July 25, 2006 5-30 973.334.3100
7. Name the connection as you wish, and click Next.
8. Select the COM port you wish to use, and click Next.

July 25, 2006 5-31 973.334.3100
9. If you want this connection to be accessible by other users on the PC, choose Anyone’s use.
Otherwise choose My use only. Click Next.
10. Enable the option to add a shortcut to the desktop and click Next.

July 25, 2006 5-32 973.334.3100
11. Click on Properties.
12. Click on Configure…

July 25, 2006 5-33 973.334.3100
13. Change the baud rate to 9600. And click on OK.
14. On the Options tab disable the Prompt for name… option. And click on OK.
You have now properly setup the connection. Connect the RS-232 cable the front port on the GARD 8000 and
double-click the icon on the desktop to initiate the connection. Once the connection is established, navigate to
http://192.168.1.1/ with Internet Explorer.
July 25, 2006 5-34 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
SECTION 6. MODULE DESCRIPTIONS

This section discusses the major modules used in the GARD 8000 system. These modules are listed in
Table 6-1 below, which includes assembly numbers, and where to find additional information. The
Base System modules have fixed locations (slots) in the chassis and the Interface modules can be
located in any free slot. The 3U chassis has four slots numbered 1 through 4, and the 6U chassis has
eleven slots numbered 1 through 11. Refer to Figures 6-1 and 6-2 for module and slot locations.
Most rear panel modules can be removed from the chassis using an extraction tool (103977) which
threads into a threaded hole in the rear panel of the module. The tool is then pulled to extract the
module.
Table 6-1. GARD 8000 System Modules
Module Type Module Assembly Number(s) For Additional

Information Refer To
The Following
Paragraphs
Base System Module Controller Module 500400 6.1

Base System Module Display With TPS Module 500410 6.2
Additional Module Digital TPS Module 500500 6.3
Additional Module Audio Tone TPS Module 500820 6.4
Additional Module PLC Digital Module 500455 6.5 & Section 10
Additional Module PLC Analog Module 500930, 500930-1, 500930-2, 6.5 & Section 10
500930-3 500930-4, 500930-10,
500930-11, 500930-20, 500930-21,
500930-22, 500930-23, 500930-30
Base System Module System I/O Modules 500420, 500425, 500430, 500435 6.6
Interface Module Discrete I/O Base Module 500800 6.7
I/O Modules 500805, 500810, 500815 6.7
Interface Module Comms I/O Base Module 500850 6.8
Comms Modules 500855, 500860, 500865, 500870, 6.8
500875, 500880, 500885, 500890,
500890-1, 500945
Base System Modules Power Supply Module 500305, 500315 6.9
Power Supply I/O Module 500310 6.9
Base System Module Midplane 500415, 500445 6.10
>>text continues on page 6-4<<

April 1, 2006 6-1 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
Discrete I/OBase, Comms I/O Base or Audio Tone Module
1
System 2 Power Rear View
I/O Supply I/O Of 3U
Module 3 Chassis
System
Power I/O
Supply I/O Module
1 Display With TPS Module
2 Controller Module
Power Power
Supply Supply
No. 2 No. 1 3 Function Module
4 Function Module
3U
Midplane
Figure 6-1. Module Placement In GARD 8000 3U Chassis

April 1, 2006 6-2 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
RS-232
Power
Supply
I/O
ETHERNET
Rear View
Of 6U
Chassis
RS-485
MOD BUS
DNP
GPS
IRIG-B
1PPS
11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Power Power
Supply Supply
No. 2 No. 1
Redundant Controller Module
Display With TPS Module

Controller Module
6U
Midplane
Figure 6-2. Module Placement In GARD 8000 6U Chassis

April 1, 2006 6-3 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.1 CONTROLLER MODULE
The function of the Controller Module (500400) is to oversee the operation of the entire GARD 8000
system. This module interfaces the user to the system, and allows the user to configure the function
modules. The unit contains a PowerPC (PPC) that runs the web server and translates user requests into
commands to the other modules.
The Controller Module also has a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) that is used to process logic data. The
basic architecture of the GARD 8000 is extremely flexible and open-ended. Many different hardware
configurations may be put together, and each of these may be configured to perform in different ways.
This is done, by taking the logic data from various components, combining them, and then sending the
result back out to the modules.
This logic data is fed into the logic processor and sent back out using the Logic Bus. The logic
processor can combine signals (using ANDs, ORs, etc) and process them using latches or timers. This
processing is continuously performed by the DSP in real-time.
A Controller module can be installed in slots 10 or 11. In a redundant system, a Controller module is
installed in slots 10 and 11.
Refer to Figure 6-3 and Table 6-2 for the locations and functions of the controller module, controls and
indicators.

April 1, 2006 6-4 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
NORMAL DISABLE
6-3a. Top view (component side)
SW1 SW2
DS1 DS2 DS4 DS3
6-3b. Front view
Figure 6-3. Controls and indicators locator drawing for Controller module

April 1, 2006 6-5 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
Table 6-2. Controls and indicators for the GARD 8000 Controller Module
Reference Description Function

Designation
DS1 LED indicator Indicates status of System Boot as follows:
Solid Green indicates final boot completed.
(Operating system and application software is running)
Intermediate boot stages are indicated by other colors.
DS2 LED indicator For factory diagnostics only.

DS3 LED indicator Indicates state of redundancy control as follows:
Solid Green = The Controller Module is OK, and is ACTIVE.
(The module has determined that its own on-board systems are operating
correctly, and the module is currently active.)
Blinking Green = The Controller Module is OK, and is NOT ACTIVE.

(The module has determined that its own on-board systems are operating
correctly, and the module is currently inactive, but ready to take over if the
other, currently active, companion Controller Module fails or is disabled.
Solid Orange = The Controller Module is NOT OK, and is ACTIVE.

(The module has detected an on-board fault, however, it continues operating
because of other considerations. For example, when there is no other
Controller present or the other Controller is also faulty.)
Red = The Controller Module is NOT OK, and is NOT ACTIVE.

The module has detected an on-board fault and is not functional.
DS4 LED indicator For factory diagnostics only.

SW1 Push Button Switch For factory use only.
SW2 Toggle Switch Normal Mode = Normal operation
Disable Mode = Initiates a request to take the Controller Module off-line

April 1, 2006 6-6 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.1.1 REDUNDANCY CONTROL

6.1.1.1 OVERVIEW
The GARD 8000 Controller Module offers a redundant operation mode when used in a 6U chassis.
When equipped with two Controller Modules, a GARD system can disable a faulty module and
transfer its functionality to the standby unit.
The redundant-mode control elements are effectively independent of basic GARD functions and
features. Redundancy subsystems monitor the condition of the module and take part in determining
which module is active.
When only a single Controller is present in a GARD chassis, the redundancy subsystem still continues
its monitoring, however, it has no effect on the active state of the Controller. A single module cannot
be made inactive.
6.1.1.2 RULES OF OPERATION

Two GARD Controllers present in the chassis in their dedicated slots facilitate the redundant mode of
operation. Only 6U chassis offer two controller slots. Redundant mode is not possible with a 3U
chassis.
Both Controller slots are equivalent; neither has priority. An “ACTIVE” module drives or controls the
traffic within the chassis and configures other submodules. An “INACTIVE” module does not output
any signals onto mid-plane buses.
The basic rules governing swapping between the active and inactive state were designed to be as
simple as possible and to minimize disturbances to the system and prevent swapping into a faulty or
non-existent module.
• A module cannot decide by itself to become active. It can become active only if the other
Controller fails or is disabled.
• A failed module does not necessary become inactive. A swap to the other module may happen
only if the other module exists and is itself not in fault. A system with Redundancy will block a
swap into a faulty module.
• There are no levels or degrees of fault conditions within a Controller module. A faulty, disabled
or non-existent module is treated the same way, since its state is not trustworthy anymore.

April 1, 2006 6-7 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.1.1.3 IMPLEMENTATION
Each GARD Controller contains a monitoring system, which monitors vital hardware signals within
the module. The PowerPC CPU and DSP Processor monitor their own operations and interfaces.
A dedicated communications channel (“mirroring”) is used to transfer system information, such as

configuration, from the currently active to the inactive module. This allows a newly installed (and
inactive) controller to become configured and ready to take over control if required.
Dedicated signaling channels on the midplane are used to convey faults and activity states of the
Controllers to their companion modules.
The active module has full control of the system, just as if it was the only one present. The inactive
module is idling in full operational condition. All drivers of its signals to the backplane, Ethernet, etc.
are disabled.
Besides the Controller, no “slave” module (channel module or functional module) in the GARD
chassis is aware of the presence of two Controllers, nor does it know which one is active. The system
operates the same way, regardless of which Controller is active.
If an out-of-bounds condition is detected within a Controller, an on-board fault condition is set. Based
on the rules of redundant operation, the active and inactive states may be swapped between the two
Controllers.
The redundant swap is a very severe event and may momentarily affect data traffic. It occurs after a
certain delay from the onset of a fault, to prevent “flip-flopping” between the modules as the system
may experience a disturbance following a swap. It is intended to ensure continued system operation
despite a failure of the controller.

April 1, 2006 6-8 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.1.1.4 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS

LED Indicator
LED indicator DS3, located at the card edge of the module, shows the state of redundancy control of a
Controller Module. The meaning of the display is described in Table 6-2.
Mode Switch.
A request to take the Controller module off-line (inactive) is made by moving card-edge switch SW2
from “Normal” position to “Disable” position. This is equivalent to creating an on-board failure, and
will be indicated by the appropriate color of indicator DS3 (color will change from Green to Orange).
If the rules of redundant-mode operation are satisfied, the Controller will become inactive and the
other module will take over.
It is important to remember that even though the Controller will be in a failed state, it may be actually
made inactive only if a good companion module exists.
The rules of operation are designed to enforce the continuity of operation for the whole system.
Therefore, a module cannot be made inactive if the other Controller is in a fault condition or does not
exist.
Returning SW2 to the “Normal” position will clear the on-board fault condition. It does not
automatically make the module active. As per the rules of operation, the Controller Module becomes
active only if the other module fails or is disabled.
Web Page, Controller Card, Status Color Codes
Refer to Table 6-3 for the Web Page, Controller Card, status color codes. The first column in the table
indicates the background color of Controller Card slots 10 and 11in the Chassis Configuration Status
Web page, shown in Figure 6-4. The background color can be gray, green, red or yellow, and the text
color can be either black or yellow. Once the background color and text color are determined, refer to
the second column of the table to determine the status of the Controller Card modules in slots 10 and
11.
Table 6-3. Web Page, Controller Card, Status Color Codes
Slot 10 or 11 Controller Card Background Color Controller Card Status

Gray Card Not Inserted
Green Card Healthy And Active
Green With Yellow Text Card Healthy And Inactive
Yellow Card Not Healthy And Active
Red Card Not Healthy And Inactive
* Note: Text color is always black unless otherwise indicated.

April 1, 2006 6-9 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
Figure 6-4. Chassis Configuration Status web page for 6U Chassis With Redundancy

April 1, 2006 6-10 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.2 DISPLAY WITH TPS MODULE
The Display With TPS module (500410) performs the following three basic functions:
User interface
TPS (teleprotection system)
RS-449/X.21/V.35 interfacing.
The user interface consists of 20 front-panel multi-color LEDs, a pushbutton, an infrared interface, an
Ethernet port and an RS-232 port.
The LEDs provide basic GARD 8000 event information and can be configured by an operator using
the browser interface. The LED labels can be changed to suit the application. The pushbutton is a
programmable function typically used to reset the front panel LEDs.
The infrared interface is used to provide communication between a user and the GARD 8000 using the
permanently mounted or a hand held PDA using its browser application.
The Ethernet and RS-232 ports allow a user to configure the system modules. The front ports are for
temporary connection to a portable computer, while the rear ports, are intended to be permanently
connected to external equipment.
The TPS is a four-channel, eight function digital teleprotection system. Refer to Section 4 for
commissioning information and Section 9 for technical information on Teleprotection.
There is also an RS-449 / X.21 / V.35 interface on the module. There is a 37-pin connector for this
interface located on the Power Supply I/O module rear panel, at the rear of the GARD 8000 chassis.
This can be seen near the top of Figure 6-19.
The Display With TPS module is always located in slot 1 at the front of the 3U chassis and in slot 9 at
the front of the 6U chassis as shown in Figures 6-1 and 6-2.
The top and front views of the Display With TPS Module are shown in Figure 6-5. A description of
controls and indicators is given in Table 6-4.
6.2.1 OPTIONAL NO COMMS/NO TPS MODULE

An alternate module without Comms or Teleprotection features (500460). Note that when this board is
installed in the GARD chassis the digital Comms and TPS web pages will not be displayed.

April 1, 2006 6-11 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
J3
J11
J10

ETHERNET STATUS LEDs
DS21 DS1 to DS20 LED NO.1 LED NO.2 J5 SW17
6-5b. Front view J4
Figure 6-5. Controls and indicators locator drawing for Display With TPS module

April 1, 2006 6-12 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
Table 6-4. Controls and indicators for the GARD 8000 Display With TPS Module

Designation
DS1 to DS20 LED indicators Front panel multi-color LEDs (Green, Red, Orange).
The function of these LEDs is programmable by the user.
DS21 LED indicator Infrared transceiver for PDA
J4 Connector RJ-45 Ethernet port
Ethernet LED No.1 displays Link and Receive Status information as follows:
Status LEDs Solid Green indicates Link Status is OK
Blinking Green when receiving data
LED No.2 displays Transmit Status information as follows:

LED is ON (Green) when transmitting data
J5 Connector RS-232 Serial port
SW17 Push Button The pushbutton is a programmable function typically used to reset the front panel
Switch LEDs.

April 1, 2006 6-13 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.3 DIGITAL TPS MODULE
The Digital TPS module (500500) is an additional module that has the same teleprotection
functionality as the TPS section of the “Display With TPS Module” (500410), but does not have any of
the front panel indicators or connectors.
This module would be used if additional Digital Teleprotection functions are required for a particular
application, or if Digital teleprotection functions are implemented on different modules.
The additional GARD Digital TPS module consists of four teleprotection (TPS) channels. Each TPS
channel is capable of transmitting and receiving eight independent and simultaneous bi-directional
commands over a single communications interface. Each TPS channel utilizes its own addressing and
channel delay measurements. Addressing and Channel Delay measurements are sent and received with
each message. Functionality of the TPS system is dependent on logic programming. Standard default
logic is available to satisfy most applications. For applications that are not covered in one of the default
logics, custom logic can be provided by RFL.
Table 6-5. Jumper Settings for the GARD 8000 Digital TPS Module

Designation
J3 Jack For factory use only
J10 Jack For factory use only
J11 Jacks For factory use only

April 1, 2006 6-14 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
J3
J11
J10
6-6b. Front view (Note: No components are mounted to the front edge of the board)
Figure 6-6. Controls and indicators locator drawing for Digital TPS module

April 1, 2006 6-15 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.4 AUDIO TONE TPS MODULE
The Audio Tone TPS module (500820) provides four bi-directional channels of FSK audio tone
teleprotection. It is typically used on leased phone lines, copper wire, microwave channels or on audio
channels of multiplexers. The channels are programmable from 300Hz to 4kHz. Channel 1 can be
configured for protection, or as an internal modem for remote interrogation. Channels 2 through 4 are
for protection only.
Table 6-6. Jumper Settings and Switch Function for the GARD 8000 Audio Tone TPS Module

Designation
J6 2-pin Jack Installed: Watch dog timer disable, for factory use only.
Not Installed: Normal operation.
J7 3-pin Jack In position: For factory use only.
Out position: Normal operation.
J8 3-pin Jack 50: 50Hz filter to reduce line noise.
60: 60Hz filter to reduce line noise.
J11 3-pin Jack 2W: For 2-Wire operation.
4W: For 4-Wire operation.
SW1 Push-button switch Press for DSP reset. For factory use only.
TB1 Terminal board Used to connect the module to Tx and Rx as indicated in Table 6-7
Table 6-7. Terminal Board Pinouts
Pin Number Function
1, 2 2-Wire operation
1, 2 4-Wire Tx operation
3, 4 4-Wire Rx operation

April 1, 2006 6-16 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
IN
J7
60 OUT
J8
J6
50
SW1
2W
J11
4W
1 2 3 4
6-7b. Front view (See Table 6-7 for terminal assignments)
Figure 6-7. Controls and indicators locator drawing for Audio Tone TPS module

April 1, 2006 6-17 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.5 POWER LINE CARRIER MODULES
GARD 8000 Systems with Power Line Carrier (PLC) capability are equipped with a PLC module set
consisting of a Digital PLC module and an Analog PLC module. The Digital PLC module plugs into
the front of the chassis, and the Analog PLC module plugs into the rear of the chassis. The Analog
module occupies two adjacent module slots and must be situated directly behind the Digital module.
6.5.1 PLC DIGITAL MODULE

The PLC Digital module (500455) has eight LEDs and five test points on its front edge. See Table 6-8
and Figure 6-8 for the locations and descriptions of controls and indicators for this module.
6.5.2 PLC ANALOG MODULE

The PLC Analog module (500930) has a rear panel with two BNC RF connectors labeled Tx and Rx, a
fine and course control, and a six pin plug-in connector for an optional external power supply and CLI
connections. Listed below are the various configurations currently available with their appropriate dash
number. Refer to Table 6-9 and Figure 6-9 for additional information.
Table 6-8. PLC Analog Module Assembly Part Numbers.
Impedance Frequency Range PLC Channel

Assembly Number TX RX
(Ohms) (kHz) Mode
500930 50 30-392 FSK and On/Off X X
500930-1 50 390-500 FSK and On/Off X X
500930-2 75 30-392 FSK and On/Off X X
500930-3 75 390-500 FSK and On/Off X X
500930-4
50-75 30-500 FSK and On/Off X X
(External Amp)
500930-10 50 30-392 On/Off X X
500930-11 50 392-500 On/Off X X
500930-20 50 30-392 FSK and On/Off X -
500930-21 50 392-500 FSK and On/Off X -
500930-22 75 30-392 FSK and On/Off X -
500930-23 75 392-500 FSK and On/Off X -
500930-30 50-75 30-500 FSK and On/Off - X

April 1, 2006 6-18 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
TP17 J3 TP22 TP23 TP20 TP21 TP19 TP10 J8 J10
J16
J7
J13
J12
TP14 J9
TP8
TP15
SW1
TP7
TP6
TP4
TP18 J11
TP12
TP9
TP16 TP13 TP1 TP2 TP11 J4 J5 J14 J15
6-8a Top View
TP25 TP26 TP27 TP3 TP24 DS2 DS4 DS6 DS8
DS1 DS3 DS5 DS7
6-8b Front View
Figure 6-8. PLC Digital Module

April 1, 2006 6-19 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
Table 6-9. Jumper Settings and Switch Function for the GARD 8000 PLC Digital Module.

Designation
DS1 LED Indicator Green = Enabled
Amber = Disabled
Red = Tx Disabled
DS2 LED Indicator Green = No Alarms
Red = Any Alarm(s)
DS3 LED Indicator Green = Tx Shift Up
DS4 LED Indicator Green = Rx Shift Up
DS5 LED Indicator Green = Tx Center
DS6 LED Indicator Green = Rx Center
DS7 LED Indicator Green = Tx Shift Down
DS8 LED Indicator Green = Rx Shift Down
J3 4-pin Header Debug Header: For factory use only.
J4 8-pin Header For factory use only.
J8 7-pin Header PIC Programming Header: For factory use only.
J9 26-pin Header Actel Programming Header: For factory use only.
J10 3-pin Header NORM: Must always be in NORM position
TEST: For factory use only.
DEBUG: For factory use only.
J13 6-pin Header Flash Programming Header: For factory use only.
J14 3-pin Header DSP: For factory use only.
J15 3-pin Header MPU: For factory use only.
PRGM: For factory use only.
SW1 Push Button Switch For factory use only.
TP1 Test Point For factory use only.
TP3 Front Panel Test Point Line Out: In 4W Mode: Tx output to line
In 2W Mode: Tx/Rx line connection
TP4 Test Point +15V: +15V Analog Supply
TP6 Test Point +5VA: +5V Analog supply
TP7 Test Point +2.5V: +2.5V Digital supply
TP8 Test Point GND: Ground

April 1, 2006 6-20 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
Table 6-9. Continued - Jumper Settings and Switch Function for the GARD 8000 PLC Digital Module.

Designation
TP9 Test Point GND: Digital ground
TP10 Test Point GND: Digital ground
TP11 Test Point +3.3VA: 3.3V Analog supply
TP12 Test Point +1.6V: 1.6V DSP supply
TP13 Test Point -5VA: -5V Analog supply
TP14 Test Point +3.3V: +3.3V Digital supply
TP15 Test Point +5VD: +5V Digital supply
TP16 Test Point GNDA: Analog ground
TP17 Test Point GNDA: Analog ground
TP18 Test Point -15V: -15V Analog supply
TP24 Front Panel Test Point GNDA: Analog ground
TP25 Front Panel Test Point ADC IN: Analog to digital converter input
TP26 Front Panel Test Point RX: Receive level after attenuation stage
TP27 Front Panel Test Point TX OUT: Input to power amp

April 1, 2006 6-21 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
J3 J4 J35 TP7 TP10 J30 J31 J34 J33 J32
TP9
F5
F6
J25
J22
J21
J11
TP11
J24
J20
J19
J18
J17
J15
J16
J6 J5 TP8 TP5 TP4 J8 J7 R2 J9 R5 C2 J11 J28 J27 J12 J13 J14
Figure 6-9. PLC Analog Module Top View

April 1, 2006 6-22 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
COMMON RECEIVE IN POWER AMP OUT COMMON

TEST POINT TEST POINT TEST POINT TEST POINT
(BLACK) (YELLOW) (RED) (BLACK)
RX TX
COARSE FINE
GND
GND
+15
CLI
-15
TB1 R19 R13 R8

AMP TX FAIL AMP IMPEDANCE AMP GAIN
ADJUST ADJUST ADJUST
Figure 6-10. PLC Analog Module Panel View
TP3 TP1 TP6 TP2
Figure 6-11. Power Amp Section of PLC Analog Module

April 1, 2006 6-23 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
Table 6-10. Jumper Settings and Control Settings for the GARD 8000 PLC Analog Module.

Designation
C2 Trimmer Used for reflected power meter calibration. See paragraph 10.6.
capacitor
F5 Fuse Tx protection fuse, 1A, 250V, slow-blow, RFL Part No. 103473
F6 Fuse Rx protection fuse, 1A, 250V, slow-blow, RFL Part No. 103473
J3 18-pin Header Used to set Tx Filter frequency. See Table 10-4.
J12 2-pin Header Used to adjust capacitive component of balance network. See paragraph 4.6.1.3., step d.
J13 2-pin Header Used to adjust capacitive component of balance network. See paragraph 4.6.1.3 ., step d.
J16 2-pin Header Used to adjust inductive component of balance network. See paragraph 4.6.1.3., step e.
J17 2-pin Header Used to select or bypasses Inductor L4 which is fine adjustment for inductive
component of Balance Network. See paragraph 10.7.3., step e.
Install Jumper J17 to bypass L4.
Do Not Install J17 to select L4.
J21 3-pin Header Used to select 2-wire operation via Skewed Hybrid or 4-wire operation.
2W = 2-wire operation via Skewed Hybrid.
4W = 4-wire operation
J23 Tx connector BNC Connector
J24 3-pin Header FSK = FSK Operation or ON/OFF 4 –wire operation or ON/OFF 2-wire operation via
Skewed Hybrid.
ON/OFF = On/OFF 2-wire operation (shorts Tx to Rx, do not install J27 or J28).

April 1, 2006 6-24 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
Table 6-10. continued - Jumper Settings and Control Settings for the GARD 8000 PLC Analog Module.

Designation
J26 Rx connector BNC Connector
J27 2-pin Header Selects 50 Ohm termination with J27 installed and J28 uninstalled.
Max power dissipation is 2 Watts. Do not install with J24 in
ON/OFF position.
J28 2-pin Header Selects 75 Ohm termination with J28 installed and J27 uninstalled.
Max power dissipation is 1 Watt. Do not install with J24 in
ON/OFF position.
J30 3-pin Header Selects internal or external power supply via TB1 pins 1, 2 and 3 on
PLC Analog Module rear panel.
J31 3-pin Header Set J30 and J31 to INT to select internal power supply.
Set J30 and J31 to EXT to select external power supply.
J32 2-pin Header Selects one of three modes of CLI (Carrier Level Indicator) output
driver. Connect external meter to TB1 pins 4 and 6 on PLC Analog
J33 2-pin Header Module rear panel.
J34 2-pin Header Selects 0-5V with J32 installed and J33 and J34 uninstalled.
Selects 0-100uA with J33 installed and J32 and J34 uninstalled.
Selects 0-1mA with J34 installed and J32 and J33 uninstalled.
J35 3-pin Header Selects Normal operation or Test operation.
Set J35 and J36 to NOR for Normal operation.
J36 3-pin Header Set J35 and J36 to TEST for Test operation.
L4 Inductor Used for fine adjustment of inductive component of balance
network. See paragraph 10.7.3, step e.
R2 Potentiometer Used for reflected power meter calibration. See paragraph 10.6.
R5 Potentiometer Used for reflected power meter calibration. See paragraph 10.6.
S1 6-position Rotary Switch Used for coarse adjustment of resistive component of balance
network. See paragraph 10.7.3 step c, for hybrid tuning procedure.
R46 Potentiometer Used for fine adjustment of resistive component of balance network.
See paragraph 10.7.3 step c, for hybrid tuning procedure.
TP1 Test Point Power Amp Input
TP2 Test Point Power Amp Output (U1 pin 1)
TP3 Test Point Power Amp Fail
TP4 Test Point Ground
TP7 Test Point Power Amp Output To Tx Filter
TP8 Test Point Input to Tx Filter
TP9 Test Point Positive Power Supply Rail (For factory use only)
TP10 Test Point Negative Power Supply Rail (For factory use only)
TP11 Test Point In 4-wire operation, monitors Tx output to the line.
In 2-wire operation, monitors Input to the Skewed Hybrid.

April 1, 2006 6-25 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.6 SYSTEM I/O MODULES
The function of the System I/O Modules (500420, 500425, 500430, 500435) is to provide the physical
connection point between the GARD 8000 and the substation network. In addition to this, the System
I/O Module provides the following three timing functions:
Optional GPS
IRIG-B
1PPS (1 pulse per second timing signal)
An Optional GPS interface module (GPS time receiver) can be installed in the System I/O Module.
When the Optional GPS interface module is installed, its location is indicated by the dashed lines in
Figure 6-13 for the 6U module and Figure 6-15 for the 3U module. When installed, a GPS antenna
must be connected to the SMA series connector labeled “GPS” at the rear of the System I/O Module.
When the GPS option is installed, the BNC connectors labeled “IRIG-B’ and “1PPS” function as
outputs and can be used to drive equipment external to the GARD 8000. In this case the IRIG-B output
is unmodulated.
If the Optional GPS interface is not installed in the System I/O Module several jumpers must be
installed on the System I/O Module as indicated in Table 6-10. When the optional module is not
installed, the BNC connectors labeled “IRIG-B” and “1PPS” function as receive input signals from
IRIG-B equipment external to the GARD 8000. The IRIG-B input signal can be modulated or
unmodulated. A Jumper on the System I/O Module must be set by the user to indicate if the input
signal is modulated or unmodulated.
The RS-232 connector at the rear of the System I/O module allows a user to connect a PC to the
GARD 8000, using a null modem cable, at 9600 baud (no parity, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit). The RS232
port only supports Windows 2000™ and Windows XP™. Refer to paragraph 5.8 for instructions on
how to configure a PC to connect to the GARD 8000 using the RS-232 port.
The 6-pin terminal block at the rear of the System I/O module is for the MODBUS or DNP protocol.
The 6-pin connector is always installed, but the software is optional.
There are two types of 6U System I/O modules. One has an RJ45 electrical Ethernet interface
(500420), and the other has a fiber optic Ethernet interface (500425). Each of these modules can be
supplied with an optional GPS piggy-back module which plugs into the lower portion of the System
I/O Module as described above.
There are two types of 3U System I/O modules. One has an RJ45 electrical Ethernet interface
(500430), and the other has a fiber optic Ethernet interface (500435). Each of these modules can be
supplied with an optional GPS piggy-back module which plugs into the lower portion of the System
I/O Module as described above.
The 3U System I/O Module is electrically identical to the 6U System I/O Module except that it is in a
different package.

April 1, 2006 6-26 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
500420 500425
SYSTEM I/O SYSTEM I/O
RS-232 RS-232
RX
TX
ETHERNET ETHERNET
RS-485 RS-485
MOD BUS MOD BUS
DNP DNP
GPS GPS
IRIG-B IRIG-B
1PPS 1PPS
6-8a. 6U System I/O module with 6-8b. 6U System I/O module with
Electrical Ethernet connector Fiber Ethernet connectors
Figure 6-12. GARD 8000 6U System I/O modules , rear panel views

April 1, 2006 6-27 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
15 1 15 1
J8 J7
16 2 16 2
15 1 15 1
J11 J10
16 2 16 2
Figure 6-13. GARD 8000 6U System I/O module, board view showing jumper locations

April 1, 2006 6-28 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
Ethernet Status LEDs Ethernet Status LEDs
500430 500435
SYSTEM I/O SYSTEM I/O
IRIG-B IRIG-B
RX
1PPS 1PPS
TX
ETHERNET ETHERNET
GPS RS-485 GPS RS-485
MOD BUS MOD BUS
DNP DNP
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
RS-232 RS-232
6-10a. 3U System I/O module with 6-10b. 3U System I/O module

odule with
Electrical Ethernet connector Fiber Ethernet connectors
Figure 6-14. GARD 8000 3U System I/O modules , rear panel views

July 25, 2006 6-29 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
J7
1 2 J10
1 2
15 16
15 16
J8 J11
1 2 1 2
15 16 15 16
Figure 6-15. GARD 8000 3U System I/O module, board view showing jumper locations

July 25, 2006 6-30 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
Table 6-11. Jumpers required on GARD 8000 System I/O module

When optional GPS module is not installed
Jack Number (See Jumper Installed across these Function

figures 6-9 or 6-11 two terminals See figures 6-9
as applicable) or 6-11 as applicable)
J7 5-6 Must be installed
J8 11-12 Must be installed
13-14 & 15-16 IRIG-B, AGC is in the circuit
13-15 IRIG-B, AGC is bypassed
J10 1-2 Must be open
3-4 For Unmodulated IRIG-B inputs
5-6 & 7-8 For Modulated IRIG-B inputs
9-10 No IRIG-B termination
11-12 50 Ohm IRIG-B termination
13-14 600 Ohm IRIG-B termination
J11 1-2 IRIG-B shield is grounded
3-4 IRIG-B shield is isolated
5-6 Must be installed
9-10 No 1PPS termination
11-12 50 Ohm 1PPS termination
13-14 600 Ohm 1PPS termination

July 25, 2006 6-31 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.7 DISCRETE I/O BASE MODULE AND I/O MODULES
The function of the Discrete I/O Base module (500800) is to hold two I/O modules. The two I/O
modules plug onto the Discrete I/O Base using an array of connector pins on the Discrete I/O base
which plug into mating connectors on the I/O modules. The location of the I/O modules on the
Discrete I/O base is shown in Figure 6-17.
There are three types of I/O modules that can be mounted on the Discrete I/O Base as follows:
Input Unit
SS Output Unit
Relay Output Unit
6.7.1 INPUT UNIT

The Input Unit (500805) has six inputs, which can accommodate 24Vdc, 48Vdc, 125Vdc or 250Vdc.
These voltages are selectable by a user via jumpers (J12, J11, J10, J9, J8 and J7) on the Input Unit.
Figure 6-16 shows the location of these jumpers.
A voltage is selected by inserting a jumper. The Input Unit in Figure 6-16. shows 48V selected for J7
through J12. When the input unit is installed in a Discrete I/O Base module, J12 on the Input Unit
corresponds to terminals 23 and 24 on the Discrete I/O Base module, J11 on the Input Unit
corresponds to terminals 22 and 21 on the Discrete I/O Base module, and so forth. The same
correlation exists when the unit is plugged onto a Comms I/O Base module. This is shown pictorially
in Figure 6-18.
GARD 8000 INPUT UNIT
J12 J11 J10 J9 J8 J7

250V
125V
48V
24V
250V
125V
48V
24V
250V
125V
48V
24V
250V
125V
48V
24V
250V
125V
48V
24V
250V
125V
48V
24V
Figure 6-16. Component side of Input Unit (500805)

July 25, 2006 6-32 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
Connector (mates with Midplane)

Discrete I/O Base Module
Location Of I/O Module Location Of I/O Module

24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
Discrete I/O Base rear panel
Figure 6-17. Top and Rear views of Discrete I/O Base module

July 25, 2006 6-33 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions

GARD 8000 INPUT UNIT
J12 J11 J10 J9 J8 J7

J J J J J J
250V
125V
48V
24V
250V
125V
48V
24V
250V
125V
48V
24V
250V
125V
48V
24V
250V
125V
48V
24V
250V
125V
48V
24V
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
Figure 6-18. Top and Rear views of Discrete I/O Base module

July 25, 2006 6-34 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.7.2 SOLID STATE OUTPUT UNIT

The SS Output Unit (500810) has 6 solid state outputs. The contacts are always Form A (normally
opened)
6.7.3 RELAY OUTPUT UNIT

The Relay Output Unit (500815) has 6 relay outputs. The contacts can be Form A (normally opened)
or Form B (normally closed) and can be selected by the user with switches (SW1 through SW6) on the
Relay Output unit. The location of these switches is shown in Figure 6-19.
Form A outputs are selected by moving the switch UP (towards the A) and Form B outputs are selected
by moving the switch DOWN (towards the B). The Relay Output Unit shown in Figure 6-19 has all
switches in the Form A position (normally opened).
When the Relay Output Unit is installed in a Discrete I/O Base module, SW6 on the Relay Output Unit
corresponds to terminals 24 and 23 on the Discrete I/O Base module, SW5 on the Relay Output Unit
corresponds to terminals 22 and 21 on the Discrete I/O Base module, and so forth. The same
correlation exists when the unit is plugged onto a Comms I/O Base module. This is shown pictorially
in Figure 6-20.
GARD 8000 RELAY OUTPUT UNIT
K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1
A A A A A A
SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
B B B B B B
Figure 6-19. Component side of Relay Output Unit (500815)

July 25, 2006 6-35 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions

GARD 8000 RELAY OUTPUT UNIT
K6 K5 K4 K3 K2 K1
A A A A A A
SW6 SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 SW1
B B B B B B
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
Figure 6-20. Top and Rear view of Discrete I/O Base module

July 25, 2006 6-36 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.8 COMMS I/O BASE MODULE AND COMMS MODULES
The function of the Comms I/O Base module (500850) is to hold one Comms module and one I/O
module. The Comms module and the I/O module plug onto the Comms I/O Base using an array of
connector pins on the Comms I/O base which plug into mating connectors on the Comms module and
the I/O module. The location of the I/O module and the Comms module in the Comms I/O Base is
shown in Figure 6-21.
There are various types of Comms modules that can be mounted on the Comms I/O Base as follows:
Refer to Figure 6-22 for the panel views of the Comms modules.
RS-232 Async Comms Unit (Dual Auxiliary Channel Module)

RS-449, X.21, V.35 Comms Unit (Digital Interface Module)
G.703 Comms Unit
T1/E1 100/120 Ohm Unit
E1 75 Ohm (BNC) Unit
C37.94 Unit
Fiber Unit, 1300 nm LED
Fiber Unit, 1300 nm Laser
Fiber Unit, 1550 nm Laser
There are three types of I/O modules that can be mounted on the Comms I/O Base as follows:
Input Unit
SS Output Unit
Relay Output Unit
Refer to paragraphs 6.7.1, 6.7.2 and 6.7.3 for additional information on these modules.
WARNING!
YOUR GARD 8000 TERMINAL MAY BE EQUIPPED WITH COMMS MODULES
THAT HAVE FIBER OPTIC EMITTER HEADS. FIBER OPTIC EMITTER HEADS
USE A LASER LIGHT SOURCE THAT PRODUCE INVISIBLE RADIATION. FIBER
OPTIC COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS ARE INHERENTLY SAFE IN NORMAL
OPERATION BECAUSE ALL RADIATION IS CONTAINED IN THE SYSTEM. IT
IS POSSIBLE DURING MAINTENANCE TO EXPOSE THE RADIATION BY
REMOVING OR BREAKING THE FIBER. STARING DIRECTLY INTO THE
LIGHT BEAM MAY RESULT IN PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE AND/OR
BLINDNESS. NEVER LOOK DIRECTLY INTO THE LIGHT BEAM AND BE
CAREFUL NOT TO SHINE THE LIGHT AGAINST ANY REFLECTIVE SURFACE.
THE LASER SOURCE IS A CLASS I LASER PRODUCT WHICH COMPLIES

WITH APPLICABLE FDA, OSHA AND ANSI STANDARDS.

July 25, 2006 6-37 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
Table 6-12. Characteristics of GARD 8000 Long Haul Fiber Units
Assembly Type Wavelength/ Connector Receiver Peak Light Average Light Typical
Number Mode Type Sensitivity Level * Level * Distance
(3dB margin)
500880 LED 1300 nm/ ST -39 dBm -17dBm 18 mi (29 km)

Emitter/ singlemode
Detector
500885 Laser 1300 nm/ ST -39 dBm 0dBm 36.5 mi (59 km)
Emitter/ singlemode
Detector
500890 Laser 1550 nm/ ST -39 dBm -3dBm 63 mi (102 km)

Emitter/ singlemode
Detector
500890-1 Laser 1550 nm/ ST -39 dBm 0dBm TBA

Emitter/ singlemode
Detector
* Light levels are emitter outputs for fiber optic I/O modules, and detector inputs for fiber optic I/O modules.
Table 6-13. Characteristics of GARD 8000 Short Haul Module (C37.94)
Assembly Type Wavelength/ Connector Receiver Tx Level Typical

Number Mode Type Sensitivity Distance
500875 LED 820 nm/ ST -11dBm to -32dBm -11dBm to -23dBm Up to 2km
Emitter/ multimode Average into (1.2 mi.)
Detector 50um fiber
-11dBm to -19dBm
Average into
62.5um fiber

July 25, 2006 6-38 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions

Comms I/O Base Module
Location Of I/O Module
Location Of Comms Module

24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
Comms I/O Base rear panel
Figure 6-21. Top and Front views of Comms I/O Base module

July 25, 2006 6-39 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
1300nm RS-232
C37.94 1300nm 1550nm
LED ASYNC
LASER LASER
RX RX RX
CH1
Rx
TX TX
TX
Tx
CH2
AVOID AVOID
EXPOSURE EXPOSURE
INVISIBLE LASER INVISIBLE LASER

RADIATION EMITTED RAD IATION EMITTED
FROM THIS APERATURE FROM THIS APERATURE
500875
500880 500885 500890 500945
C37.94 Fiber Module Fiber Module Fiber Module RS-232

Module (1300nm LED) (1300nm Laser) (1550nm Laser) Async Module
RS- 449
X.21 500870
V.35 E1
G.703
CO -DIR
IN
J2
T1/E1
J1
OUT
500860 500865
500855
RS-449, X21, V35 G703 Module T1/E1 Interface E1, 75 Ohm

Module Module BNC Module
Figure 6-22. Panel views of various types of Comms I/O modules available

July 25, 2006 6-40 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.9 POWER SUPPLY MODULE
6.9.1 DESCRIPTION
The GARD 8000 power supply module is the power source for all logic modules in the GARD 8000
Chassis, and is available in two versions. Sixty five watts of output power is available: +18 volts, and -
18 volts @ 3.65 amperes (combined total).
The power supplies have input fusing and output overcurrent protection, and are designed to meet the
2500-Vdc Hipot, Oscillatory, and Fast-Transient tests specified in IEEE C37.90.
The supplies can accept ac or dc as detailed in the table below. The GARD 8000 can be powered with
either one or two Power Supply modules. The first power supply is inserted into any power supply slot.
The second, optional, power supply is inserted into the remaining slot. The second power supply, if
installed, provides power supply redundancy. If one power supply fails, the second supply
automatically comes on-line with no interruptions.
If you are adding modules to an existing system equipped with dual power supplies, always verify that
total power consumption does not exceed the capacity of a single supply. This will insure power
supply redundancy.
The two power supply slots are totally independent and a chassis may be configured with any
combination of supplies.
Table 6-14. GARD Power Supply Modules, General Information
Assembly Number Description Input Voltage

500305 48-125 Vdc 48-125 Vdc or 120 Vac
500315 250 Vdc 250 Vdc or 220 Vac

July 25, 2006 6-41 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.9.2 SPECIFICATIONS
As of the date this manual was published, the specifications shown in the table below apply to all
GARD 8000 power supply modules, except where indicated. Because all RFL products undergo
constant refinement and improvement, these specifications are subject to change without notice.
Table 6-15. GARD 8000 Power Supply Specifications
Power Supply→ 500305 500315
Specifications
↓
Input Voltage
48-125 Vdc or 120 Vac 250 Vdc or 220 Vac
Range
Max Output
Current: 3.65 Amps (combined total) 3.65 Amps (combined total)
+18V
-18V
Adjustments:
none none
Test Points:
TP1 +18 Volts nominal +18 Volts nominal
TP2 Common Common
TP3 -18 Volts nominal +18 Volst nominal
Indicators DS1 – Normal (Green) DS1 – Normal (Green)
Fuses
F1 Input + 4A, 250 V SLO-BLO (3AG ¼ x 1¼) Input+ 2A, 250 V SLO-BLO (3AG ¼ x 1¼)
F2 Input- 4A, 250 V SLO-BLO (3AG ¼ x 1¼) Input- 2A, 250 V SLO-BLO (3AG ¼ x 1¼)
Operating
-20oC to +70oC -20oC to +70oC
Temperature
Humidity
95% @ +40oC 95% @ +40oC
Isolation 2500 Vdc isolation from input terminals to 2500 Vdc isolation from input terminals to
ground, and input terminals to output terminals. ground, and input terminals to output terminals.

July 25, 2006 6-42 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.9.3 POWER SUPPLY I/O MODULE
RS-499 X.21 V.35
1 0 1 0
SW1 SW2
C C
NC NC
NO NO
MAJOR MINOR
!
38-150/200-300 VDC
3 AMPS 220 W MAX.
Figure 6-23. Power Supply I/O module, rear panel view
The Power Supply I/O module (500310) has the following three major functions:
Connects the internal power supplies to the external power source(s)

Provides major and minor alarm relay contacts
Provides access to the digital interface (RS-449 / X.21 / V.35)
The “+” and “-”designations on the Power Supply I/O module rear panel terminals are totally arbitrary
and the AC or “+” and “-”DC external power sources can be connected to either terminal. The major
and minor alarm relays are contained on this interface and the connections are brought out to the lower
three terminals of each terminal block as shown in the figure above. Both relays are energized under
normal operating conditions and are de-energized for an alarm or alert condition. This ensures that the
chassis will cause an alarm condition when power is lost.
The Power Supply I/O module also has a 37-pin connector for the RS-449 / X.21 / V.35 interface that
is standard with each system. Refer to Tables 4-1 and 4-2 for pin out information.

July 25, 2006 6-43 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.9.3.1 GARD SYSTEM ALARMS

There are several potential sources for alarms in the GARD 8000 system. Most alarm triggers in the
system can be masked by the user. This means that for a given alarm trigger, the user can decide to
allow the system to generate a Major Alarm, Minor Alarm, or to ignore the alarm altogether.
When the system is in a Major Alarm condition, the web page indicator becomes red and the Major
Alarm relay becomes de-energized.
The system has the following three types of alarm sources:
System Alarms
Logic Alarms
Module Alarms
System Alarms
There are two types of System Alarms as follows:
Power Supply Failure

Logic Bus Alarm.
Logic Alarms
The user can identify up to 192 trigger points in the system. The triggers can be individually
configured to generate a Major Alarm, Minor Alarm or no alarm (SOE trigger only).
Module Alarms
Each module can report a Major or Minor alarm. This information is sent over the Control Bus and is a
status condition only. The time critical alarms should be handled by the logic functions. Not all
modules generate alarms.
The criteria for a module going into Major or Minor alarm is hard-wired into the module and cannot be
changed by the user. However, how the system reacts to these alarms is controlled by the user. For
each alarm type on each module, the user can select if he wants to put the system into Major Alarm,
Minor Alarm, or to ignore the module alarm. This means that a user can configure the system to go
into a Major Alarm if one Comms I/O goes into major Alarm, and to ignore another Comms I/O
reporting a Major Alarm.
The user, programs the GARD 8000 alarms using the Alarm Configurations Webpage as described in
paragraph 7.3. The webpage is reached from the Chassis Configurations Webpage, and then by
selecting Settings, and then selecting Alarm Configurations.

July 25, 2006 6-44 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
6.10 MIDPLANE
There are two types of GARD 8000 midplanes, one for the 3U chassis (500415), and one for the 6U
chassis (500445). The midplanes are mounted in the chassis, such that, modules can be plugged in
from the front or rear of the chassis. This can be seen in Figures 6-1 and 6-2.
The midplane serves to distribute power and to interconnect all of the modules in the GARD 8000
chassis. There are three types of bussed signals that are connected to all modules, the Control bus, the
Logic bus and the Communication bus.
The Control Bus is used to configure modules and report status. The traffic on this bus is entirely
module-to-module and does not leave the chassis. No time critical data is passed over this bus.
The Logic Bus is used to transfer binary logic data between modules in the system in real-time. This
includes such information as whether an input is keyed or if an output should be energized. The data
on this bus may be brought out to the user, as with the inputs and outputs, or may remain module-to-
module.
There are two Communication Busses that are used to transfer user data to and from communications
I/Os. For example, for a relay to communicate with another relay it may send data to an RS-449
interface using a Comms Bus. This bus is not used to pass internal messages between modules in the
chassis.
In addition to these bus functions the midplane performs a number of other functions. The pins on the
connectors pass signals directly from the front module to the rear modules. Many modules connect
only to the bussed signals and do not use this feature. Others, such as relays, have dedicated I/O
modules that are installed directly behind the relay and interface with field wiring. There are also a
handful of lines that pass between adjacent modules. This may be used to allow modules to share
information or to expand the capabilities of a module. Most modules do not use this feature. There are
also a number of miscellaneous functions handled by the midplane.
6.11 CURRENT LIMIT MODULE

This optional module will limit the current output from the Station Battery when a carrier is present.
Unlike other I/O modules this module is located on the inside of the chassis. On the 3U chassis it is
located on the left hand side of the frame when viewed from the rear, next to the I/O System Module.
On the 6U chassis it is located below the Power Supply Board on the right hand frame when viewed
from the rear. For terminal block designations see the following page.
Table 6-16. Current Limiter Assemblies

Chassis Part Number Voltage
3U 106510-3 48V
3U 106510-4 125V
6U 106510-5 48V
6U 106510-6 125V

July 25, 2006 6-45 973.334.3100
Module Descriptions
Power Supply
6U Chassis Rear
3U Chassis Rear Power Supply
3U Chassis
1 +SB (48 or 125VDC) +SB (48 or 125VDC) 1

2 RLY+ RLY+ 2
3 RLY- RLY- 3
4 1 Amp 1 Amp 4
5 200 mA 200 mA 5
6 180 mA 180 mA 6
7 20 mA 20 mA 7
6U Chassis
Figure 6-24. Current Limit I/O Module terminal block connections

July 25, 2006 6-46 973.334.3100
Chassis Configuration Settings
SECTION 7. CHASSIS CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
7.1 MODULE SETTINGS
In order for the GARD chassis to function properly, the individual module configuration settings must
be entered for the Input Modules. From the toolbar select Settings, Chassis Configuration. A screen
similar to the one in Figure 7-1 will appear, showing the installed modules and their current status.
Figure 7-1. Chassis Configuration Settings web page for 3U chassis
In Figure 7-1, the background colors of the card slot locations will change according to the module
status as follows:
Yellow = Minor alarm

Blue = Module not configured or disabled
Red = Major alarm
Gray = Empty slot

May 15, 2006 7-1 973.334.3100
Figure 7-2. Chassis Configuration Settings web page for 6U Chassis With Redundancy

May 15, 2006 7-2 973.334.3100
7.1.1 INPUT MODULE SETTINGS

Selecting a module will bring up that modules configuration settings screen. Selecting the Input
module in Chassis Rear Left, Slot #2 will bring you to the web page shown in Figure 7-3. Note that
this web page has several description boxes that must be filled in, and other boxes that must be
checked. The following discussion describes how to make these selections.
Figure 7-3. Input Card in slot #2 Rear Left web page

May 15, 2006 7-3 973.334.3100
Start of Logic Range

This value can be obtained from the logic diagram and will establish which logic bit the module will
begin to place data onto the logic bus. If the value must be changed, click on Custom Logic and enter
the value in the entry box.
Description
Enter the desired description for each of the 6 inputs (Function 1 through Function 6) on the I/O
module.
Check To Enable
To enable an input to be linked to the logic bus place a check in the appropriate box by clicking on the
box.
Module Enable
Select Module Enable to save the settings and to activate the I/O module in the GARD chassis.
Module Disable
Select Module Disable to save the settings and to disable the I/O module in the GARD chassis.
Save
Select the Save button to save the module settings without changing the module enable/disable status.
7.1.2 ADDITIONAL INPUT MODULES

Repeat the steps from section 7.1.1 for the remaining Input modules in the chassis.
7.1.3 OUTPUT MODULE SETTINGS

From the toolbar select Settings, Chassis Configuration. A web page similar to the one shown in Figure
7-4 will appear, showing the installed modules and their current status.

May 15, 2006 7-4 973.334.3100
Figure 7-4. Chassis Configuration Settings web page

May 15, 2006 7-5 973.334.3100
Select the Relay Output module. A screen similar to the one below will appear.
Figure 7-5. Relay Output Card in slot #4 Rear Left web page

May 15, 2006 7-6 973.334.3100
The following discussion gives a description of the Configuration Settings for the Relay Output Card
in slot #4 Rear Left web page.
Start of Logic Range

This value can be obtained from the logic diagram and will establish which logic bit the module will
begin to place data onto the logic bus. If the value must be changed, click on Custom Logic and enter
the value in the entry box.
Description
Enter in the desired description for the 6 outputs on the I/O module.
Check To Enable
Check off any or all of the boxes to enable the outputs to be linked to the logic.
Module Enable
Select Module Enable to activate the I/O module to be active within the GARD chassis.
Module Disable
Select Module Disable to save the settings and to disable the I/O module in the GARD chassis.
Save
Select the Save button to save the module settings without changing the module enable/disable status.
Once all the entries have been made, click on the SAVE button. A screen similar to the one shown in
Figure 7-6 will appear.

May 15, 2006 7-7 973.334.3100
7.1.4 ADDITIONAL OUTPUT MODULE SETTINGS

Repeat the steps from section 7.1.1 for the remaining Output modules in the chassis.
7.1.5 COMMUNICATIONS MODULE SETTINGS

7.1.5.1 DIGITAL INTERFACE MODULE CONFIGURATION
The Digital Interface Module is the RS449/ X.21/ V.35 I/O module. This module starts out as disabled,
and can remain disabled, or any one of three protocols (RS449, X.21 or V.35) can be selected for this
interface. Select Disabled Digital Interface to configure the communications interface for the TPS
channels. A screen similar to the one in Figure 7-7 will appear.

May 15, 2006 7-8 973.334.3100
Figure 7-7. Communications System Configuration web page
Note: The Communications System Configuration displays the configuration of all

communications I/O modules in a GARD 8000 system. Figure 7-7 only refers to the Digital
Interface Module configuration in this example. Some parameters may not apply to all
modules. Those parameters that do not apply to a particular module will be blank.
Module Location
Displays the physical location in the GARD 8000 chassis of the communications interface to be
configured.
Module Type
Displays the type of communications interface to be configured.
User Label
Enter in a descriptive name for the communications interface.

May 15, 2006 7-9 973.334.3100
Line Interface
For the multi-protocol interface, select the type of communications from the pull down menu, RS-
449/V.35/X.21.
Data Rate
From the pull down menu, select the data rate for the communications interface.
Gard Comms Subsystem

The GARD 8000 has two independent communications busses referred to as communications
subsystems. This parameter allows the user to select which of the two communications busses the
digital interface uses for its transmit and receive data.
Note: Framing, coding, Line Build Out, Octet Timing, and Template do not apply to the digital
interface card.
Gard Clock Mode

From the pull down menu select the type of clock for the communications interface, Master/Slave.
Timing
From the pull down menu select the timing for the communications interface, Internal/Loop.
Framing
Farming is not utilized by the Digital Interface Module
Coding
Coding is not utilized by the Digital Interface Module
Line Build Out

Coding is not utilized by the Digital Interface Module
Tx/Rx Clock Polarity

From the pull down menu select the polarity of the Tx and Rx clock, NORM/NORM,
NORM/INVERT, INVERT/NORM, INVERT/INVERT. This is typically set to NORM/NORM. The
settings NORM/INVERT, INVERT/NORM, INVERT/INVERT are provided to work with non-
standard equipment.
Octet Timing
Octet Timing is not utilized by the Digital Interface Module
Template
Template is not utilized by the Digital Interface Module
Save
Select to enter configuration selections for the communications interface.

May 15, 2006 7-10 973.334.3100
7.1.5.2 C37.94 SHORT HAUL FIBER INTERFACE

When a C37.94 Comms Module is installed, a Configuration Web page similar to the one shown in
Figure 7.6 will be displayed. The parameters shown in paragraph 7.1.5.1 may not apply to all Comms
Modules. Those parameters that do not apply to a particular Comms Module will be blank.
7.1.5.3 G.703 DIGITAL INTERFACE

When a G.703 Digital Interface Comms Module is installed, a Configuration Web page similar to the
one shown in Figure 7.6 will be displayed. The parameters shown in paragraph 7.1.5.1 may not apply
to all Comms Modules. Those parameters that do not apply to a particular Comms Module will be
blank.
7.1.5.4 LONG HAUL FIBER OPTIC INTERFACE

When a Long Haul Fiber Comms Module is installed, a Configuration Web page similar to the one
shown in Figure 7.6 will be displayed. The parameters shown in paragraph 7.1.5.1 may not apply to all
Comms Modules. Those parameters that do not apply to a particular Comms Module will be blank.
7.1.5.5 T1/E1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE

When a T1/E1 Electrical Interface Comms Module is installed, a Configuration Web page similar to
the one shown in Figure 7.6 will be displayed. The parameters shown in paragraph 7.1.5.1 may not
apply to all Comms Modules. Those parameters that do not apply to a particular Comms Module will
be blank.
7.1.5.6 RS-232 ASYNC COMMS INTERFACE

When an Async Comms Module is installed, a Configuration Web page similar to the one shown in
Figure 7.2 will appear. As the Async Comms Module is an Auxiliary Interface, the Controlling
Communication Interface (or head) must be clicked on the Configuration Web page to access Timeslot
Configurations. Refer to Section 7.1.8.1 for Time Slot Settings. The Async Module can only be
installed in the chassis rear top locations.

May 15, 2006 7-11 973.334.3100
7.1.6 DIGITAL TELEPROTECTION CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

From the toolbar select Settings, Chassis Configuration. A web page similar to the one shown below
will appear, showing the installed modules and their current status.

May 15, 2006 7-12 973.334.3100
In the web page shown in Figure 7-8, select Teleprotection (TPS). A screen similar to the one shown
below will appear.
Figure 7-9. Teleprotection Channel Configuration at slot #1 Front web page
Channel 1/Channel 2/Channel 3/Channel 4

The GARD TPS module is capable of providing up to four 8-Function digital teleprotection channels.
Depending on the logic used, activate the appropriate teleprotection (TPS) channels by selecting TPS
from each of the four drop down menus, as applicable.

May 15, 2006 7-13 973.334.3100
TX Range
In the box provided, enter the starting bit number for the transmitters for all TPS channels
RX Range
In the box provided, enter the starting bit number for the receivers for all TPS channels.
As an example, Figure 7-10 shows a digital teleprotection module configured for one 8-Function
channel with the transmitters start bit set at 100 and the receivers start bit set at 120.
Figure 7-10. Teleprotection Channel Configuration at slot #1 Front web page
Click on the Edit button for the TPS channel you wish to configure. A screen similar to the one shown
in Figure 7-11 will appear.

May 15, 2006 7-14 973.334.3100
Figure 7-11. TPS Channel 1 slot #1 Front web page
User Label
This is where the user enters a descriptive name for the TPS channel that is being configured.
Comms Head Label

Displays the label given to the communications head associated with this TPS channel.
Time Slot
Displays the time slot this particular TPS channel will communicate on.
Channel Service
This is a status indication that the TPS channel is either Enabled and In Service, or Disabled. The
Channel Service is automatically enabled once the user selects the Comms. Head and Timeslot in the
Communications Time Slot Page and clicks on the Save button.

May 15, 2006 7-15 973.334.3100
Remote Service
Remote Service enables the “8K Remote Interrogation” feature of a TPS Channel. This is a
communication scheme between local and remote GARD 8000 controllers that runs at 8kHz, and is
only used if a dedicated 64K communication channel is not available for Remote Interrogation. The
“8K Remote Interrogation” data is transparently transmitted and received within TPS channel
messages over a single 64K communication channel. A maximum of two communication paths per
chassis are available (dedicated 64K or 8K), regardless of the number of TPS channels. You can have
one path on each of the two Comms Buses, or both paths on one of the Comms Buses. The TPS
channel must first be assigned in the “Communication Time Slot Configuration” web page before
remote service can be changed from Disabled to either Comm0 or Comm1 as shown in Figure 7-11.
Ping Pong Limit

Can be set from 1 to 31 ms. Enter the one-way channel delay threshold, which must be exceeded for
alarms to be indicated.
Tx Address
Enter the transmitter address for this TPS channel, between 0 and 255.
Minor Hardware Alert

This is a status indication of a Minor Hardware Alert. Can be either Green, indicating no alert, or Red,
indicating alert. If Red, refer to the status page for more information. Alerts are triggered by:
1. Incorrect address
2. A bad frame
3. A failed ping-pong due to:
a. Actual ping-pong value has exceeded the threshold setting
b. The remote end has not responded
c. The ping-pong has timed out.
Tx Comms Bus
This is a status indication of which Comms Bus is being utilized for Tx communication, Comms Bus 1
or Comms Bus 2.
Rx Comms Bus
This is a status indication of which Comms Bus is being utilized for Rx communication, Comms Bus 1
or Comms Bus 2.
CRC Errors Per Second

This indicates of the number of CRC errors detected in the previous second. A maximum of 2000
messages can be received per second in error. This will give the user the current condition of the
channel even if the other two counters are maxed-out. The CRC covers ONLY the 8 function bits
received in the message. It does not cover address, framing bits, ping-pong, or Remote Interrogation
bits.

May 15, 2006 7-16 973.334.3100
CRC Errored Seconds

This indicates the number of seconds in which any number of CRC errors were detected since the last
reset of this counter. This counter can max-out.
Bit Error Rate

This indicates the percentage of received bits in error compared to the total number of bits received.
This rate is an approximate value calculated from messages with CRC failures. As CRC detection
does not indicate the number of errors in a bad message, bit error rates above 1E-3 cannot be
accurately measured. This value is updated every 10 seconds based on the previous 110 seconds of
data. As there are only 7E 6 bits in 110 seconds, error rates less than 1E-6 cannot be accurately
measured.
Reset Error Counters

Click on this button to reset to zero: CRC errors per second, CRC errored seconds, and CRC
accumulated errors, for this TPS channel.
Ping Pong (ms)

Indicates the last ping pong (one-way channel delay) time in milliseconds.
Rx Address
Enter the receiver address for this TPS channel, between 0 and 255.
Major Hardware Alarm

This is a status indication, which can be either Red or Green. Currently this card does not report Major
Hardware Alarms, and therefore this indication will always be green
Tx Direction
This is a status indication, which can be either A or B. In TPS the Tx Direction is forced to transmit on
Bus B. TPS will always transmit data on the B Bus.
Rx Direction
This is a status indication, which can be either A or B. In TPS the Rx Direction is forced to receive on
Bus A. TPS will always receive data from the A Bus.
Select save to enter the changes from the TPS channel configuration page.

May 15, 2006 7-17 973.334.3100
7.1.7 TIME SLOT SETTINGS

From the toolbar select Settings>Chassis Configuration. A screen similar to the one shown below will
appear. This web page shows the installed modules and their current status.
Select the communications interface whose time slot is to be configured (RS-449). Selecting RS-449
will cause a screen similar to the one shown in Figure 7-13 to appear.

May 15, 2006 7-18 973.334.3100
Figure 7-13. Communications System Configuration web page
Select Configure Time Slots and the screen shown in Figure 7-14 will appear.

May 15, 2006 7-19 973.334.3100
Figure 7-14. Communications Time Slot Configuration web page
There are up to twelve time slots available in the GARD 8000. Pull down menu’s are provided for each
time slot listing the selections available. The time slot will be reserved for the device or channel that is
assigned to it. Multiple devices or channels cannot be assigned to the same time slot. Once all required
time slots have been configured select SAVE to complete the time slot configuration.

May 15, 2006 7-20 973.334.3100
7.1.8 ASYNC COMMS CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

From the Chassis Configuration Settings web page select “Async Comms” the following web page will
appear.
Figure 7-15. Async Comms Configuration

Select the channel to be configured; the following web page will appear.
Figure 7-16. Async Comms Channel Settings

May 15, 2006 7-21 973.334.3100
Async Comms Channel Settings Definitions:
Each channel of the Async module has its own settings page. The following is a list of the available
settings:
Baud Rate
Used to select the Asynchronous baud rate of the channel. Available options are 38400, 19200, 9600,
4800, 2400, 1200, and 600 baud.
timeslot start bit
Sets the least significant bit of the timeslot on which the data is placed. 0-7 may be chosen. Time slot
is transmitted MSB (most significant bit) first, which is bit 7. The amount of bits used is determined
automatically from the baud rate (see table below). Time slot sharing is only allowed between the two
channels of a single Async module, not between two modules. For example with 19200 baud and 4 as
the timeslot start bit, bits 4 through 7 are used for this channel.
***Users of Nokia brand multiplexers should note that Nokia documentation considers the most
significant bit as bit 1 and least significant bit as bit 8. So in the above example using bits 4 through
7, Nokia configuration should be bits 1 through 4 or a bitmask of 11110000.
Table 7-1. Timeslot Baud Rate

Baud Rate Bits per
(bps) timeslot
38400 8
19200 4
9600 2
4800 1
2400 1
1200 1
600 1
bits per char (incl. start and stop)
Sets the number of bits per character, including start, data, parity, and stop bits. 9, 10, and 11 are the
available options. Some of the popular character formats are described below:
Table 7-2. Character Formats

Data bits Parity Stop bits bits per character
8 None 1 10
8 Even 1 11
8 Space 1 11
7 Even 1 10
7 None 1 9

May 15, 2006 7-22 973.334.3100
Input bit rate tolerance: -2.5% to +1%

Output bit rate tolerance: Start, data, parity bits
Nominal: ± 0.01%
Stop bit
Normal stop bit (Nominal): ± 0.01%
Reduced length stop bit: (Nominal -12.5%) ± 0.01%
Use DTR
Selects whether or not the DTR (Data Terminal Ready) input pin should be used to initiate the V.110
transmit framing pattern. For example if a 3-wire cable is being used select no, since DTR is not
supported.
Use RTS
Selects whether or not the RTS (Request to Send) input pin should be used to initiate data transfer. For
example if a 3-wire cable is being used select no, since RTS is not supported.
Click on Home to get to the Chassis Configuration Status web page. Then click on Async Comms, a
web page similar to the one shown below will appear.
Figure 7-17. Async Comms Channel Settings
Click on General Status to get to the Async Comms Status web page as shown on the following page.

May 15, 2006 7-23 973.334.3100
Figure 7-18. Async Comms Status web page

May 15, 2006 7-24 973.334.3100
7.1.8.1 TIME SLOT SETTINGS FOR ASYNC COMMS MODULE

From the Configuration web page select the Communications Interface that is controlling the Async
Comms Module; for example the T1/E1 Electrical Interface. A web page similar to the one shown
below will appear.
Figure 7-19. Communications Time Slot Configuration web page for Async Comms Module
Using the pull down menus assign the Async Comms two channels to the desired interface’s timeslot.
Note the example below has the Async Comms Module physically located in slot 9.
The settings are as follows:
ASN@slot9 Ch1 Use for channel 1

ASN@slot9 Ch2 Use for channel 2
ASN@slot9 Ch1_2 Use for channel 1 and 2 on the same timeslot
Note: To switch the same timeslot from using Ch1, to using Ch2, you may have to select “Not Used”
or “idle” first.

May 15, 2006 7-25 973.334.3100
7.1.9 AUDIO TONE TELEPROTECTION CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

Click on the Audio Tone button. A Web page similar to the one shown on the following page will
appear.

May 15, 2006 7-26 973.334.3100
Figure 7-21. Audio Tone Configuration Web page
Click on General Settings to go to the Audio Tone Configuration, General Settings web page as shown
on the following page. Click on Channel 1 Settings to go to the Audio Tone Configuration, Channel 1
Settings web page as shown in Figure 7-23. The Channel 2 through 4 Settings web pages, are similar.

May 15, 2006 7-27 973.334.3100
Figure 7-22. Audio Tone General Settings Web page

May 15, 2006 7-28 973.334.3100
General Settings Definitions
Local Label
A local label set by the user.
TX Logic Bus Start Bit (3-511 inc 1)

The range of Tx logic bus start bits can be set from 3 to 511 in increments of 1.
TX Logic Bus Length (0-32 inc 1)

The Tx logic bus length can be set from 0 to 32 in increments of 1.
RX Logic Bus Start Bit (3-511 inc 1)

The range of Rx logic bus start bits can be set from 3 to 511 in increments of 1.
RX Logic Bus Length (0-16 inc 1)

The Rx logic bus length can be set from 0 to 16 in increments of 1.
Module Status
Can be set to Enabled or Disabled.
Channel 1 Type
Can be set to On, Off, Pass Thru, or Modem
On: The channel is enabled
Off: The channel is disabled
Pass Thru: The channel will be configured to function as a transfer filter with programmable
bandwidth and amplification.
Modem: The channel will function as a modem.
Channel 2 Type
Can be set to On, Off, or Pass Thru
Channel 3 Type
Channel 4 type
Logic Type
Can be set to one of four logic types as follows:
Single 1, 2, 3, 4
Single 1, 2, Dual 3, 4
Dual 1, 2, Dual 3, 4
Simple

May 15, 2006 7-29 973.334.3100
General Settings Definitions (continued)
Local Tx Address (0-4000 inc 1)

This setting is only valid if channel 1 is configured as a modem. This is the address that will be sent to
the remote unit to be compared with the remote unit’s expected address. Valid addresses are from 0 to
4000 in increments of 1. The default address is 0. In atypical application, a unique address should be
assigned to each ATT module communicating over a given network.
Expected Remote Address (0-4000 inc 1)

This setting is only valid if channel 1 is configured as a modem. This is the address that will be
compared to the received remote address. Valid addresses are from 0 to 4000 in increments of 1. The
default address is 0.
Max Channel Delay (0-40 inc 1)

This setting is only valid if channel 1 is configured as a modem. The range is from 0 to 40ms in 1ms
increments. This is the one way channel delay calculated from a round trip ping-pong message.

May 15, 2006 7-30 973.334.3100
Figure 7-23. Audio Tone Channel 1 Settings Web page

May 15, 2006 7-31 973.334.3100
Channel 1 Settings Definitions
Ch1 TX Center Frequency (300-4000 inc 1)

This is the configured center frequency of the channel 1 transmitter. The actual tone transmitted will be
the center frequency plus the shift frequency or the center frequency minus the shift frequency. Legal
settings are from 300Hz to 4kHz in 1Hz increments.
Ch1 TX Shift
This is the channel transmitter shift frequency. This is a pull down menu with the following shift
frequency choices: 30, 42, 60, 75, 120, 150, and 240Hz.
Ch1 Tx Level (-30-+10 inc 1)

This is the channel 1 transmitter level in dBm. The range is from +10dBm to -30dBm in 1 dBm
increments. The user is cautioned that the summation of all Tx outputs combined can exceed the drive
capability of the ATT module. For this reason, if channel 1 is set to +10dBm, all of the other channels
must be set to OFF, two active channels cannot be set to more than +4dBm, and four active channels
cannot be set to more than -2dBm.
Ch1 Boost (0-12 inc 1)

This is a short term duration “increase” in the channel 1 Tx output level when the channel is keyed.
The legal range is from 0dB to +12dB in 1dB increments. For example, if the channel 1 Tx level is set
to -15dBm and the boost is set to 5dB, then the Tx output will be -10dBm for a short duration. The
duration is set at Settings, System Logic Configuration, Option Settings, Function A Boost (typically
assigned to channel 1), or can also be set at the Timer Settings web page. The duration “increase”
default is 15ms.
Ch1 RX Center Frequency (300-4000 inc 1)

This is the configured center frequency of the channel 1 receiver. The actual tone received will be the
center frequency plus the shift frequency or the center frequency minus the shift frequency. Legal
settings are from 300Hz to 4kHz in 1Hz increments.
Ch1 RX Shift
This is the channel receiver shift frequency. This is a pull down menu with the following shift
frequency choices: 30, 42, 60, 75, 120, 150, and 240Hz.
Ch1 RX Level (-40-0 inc 1)

This is the channel 1 receiver level in dBm. The range is from -40dBm to 0dBm in 1 dBm increments.
The user is cautioned that the summation of all Rx inputs combined can exceed the receive capability
of the ATT module.

May 15, 2006 7-32 973.334.3100
Channel 1 Settings Definitions (continued)
Ch1 Rx Alarm (-60-0 inc 1)

This is the Rx level that will cause an alarm. This is an alarm level that is typically set to a level where
the channel receiver is functioning normally, and is used as an early warning minor alarm to indicate
that a problem may be occurring.
Ch1 GBT Timer (0-1000 inc 0.25)

The channel 1 Guard Before Trip Timer creates a condition that requires the reception of a valid guard
signal for a period of time, before a trip can be recognized as valid. This timer can be set from 0ms to
1000ms in 0.25ms increments. It is typically set to the default value of 100ms.
Ch1 TAG Timer (0-1000 inc 0.25)

The channel 1 Trip After Guard Timer creates a condition that requires a trip to occur within a
specified period of time after the loss of a guard state. This timer can be set from 0ms to 1000ms in
0.25ms increments. It is typically set to the default value of 40ms.
Ch1 PRETRIP1 Attack (0-100 inc 0.25)*

A security timer that requires the trip detector to be active for a period of time before the trip is
accepted as valid. It is used to evaluate the condition of a trip signal, and it functions as a precaution
against noise-induced false trips. PRETRIP1 attack time and PRETRIP2 attack time are added together
to provide the total pre-trip time.
Ch1 PRETRIP1 Decay (0-100 inc 0.25)*

A security timer
Ch1 PRETRIP2 Attack (0-100 inc 0.25)*

A security timer
Ch1 PRETRIP2 Decay (0-200 inc 0.25)*

A security timer
Ch1 BLOCK Attack (0-1000 inc 0.25)*

A long term security timer
Ch1 BLOCK Decay (0-1000 inc 0.25)*

A long term security timer
*See note on next page.

May 15, 2006 7-33 973.334.3100
*These last six security timer settings must be taken from the following table, and must be set
differently for each shift frequency:
Table 7-3. Recommended Security Timer Settings
Shift Channel PRETRIP1 PRETRIP1 PRETRIP1 PRETRIP1 BLOCK BLOCK Average Trip
Frequency Spacing Attack Time Attack Time Attack Time Attack Time Attack Time Decay Time Time in ms
in Hz in ms in ms in ms in ms in ms in ms
±30Hz 120 4 0 5 5 100 11.5 26.7
±42.5Hz 170 4 0 2.5 5 100 11.0 21.5
±60Hz 240 3 0 1.5 5 100 10 15.59
±75Hz 340 3 0 1.5 0 100 10.5 13.42
±120Hz 480 2 0 2.0 5 100 8.5 11.36
±150Hz 680 2 0 2 5 100 9 10.69
±240Hz 960 2 0 1 5 100 10 9.77
Click on Home to get to the chassis configurations status web page. Then click on Audio Tone to get to
the Audio Tone Status web page as shown on the following page.

May 15, 2006 7-34 973.334.3100
Figure 7-24. Audio Tone Status Web page
Click on General Status to go to the Audio Tone General Status web page as shown in the following
Figure. Click on Channel Status to go to the Channel Status web page as shown in Figure 7-24. Click
on Modem Status to get to the Modem Status (Remote Status) web page as shown in Figure 7-25.

May 15, 2006 7-35 973.334.3100
Figure 7-25. Audio Tone, General Status Web page

May 15, 2006 7-36 973.334.3100
General Status Definitions for Column 1
Local Label
The assigned Local Label.
Chan 1 Level Alarm

The channel 1 level alarm indicator will be GREEN if the received level is higher than the set Rx level
limit, and will be RED if the value is equal to or below the set limit. For example, if we expect a level
of -15dBm and the Rx level alarm is set to -30dBm, the red indicator will be lit if the Rx level is at
-30dBm or less, otherwise the indicator will be green.
Chan 2 Level Alarm

Chan 3 Level Alarm

Chan 4 Level Alarm

Logic Type
There are four logic types as follows:
Single 1, 2, 3, 4
Single 1, 2, Dual 3, 4
Dual 1, 2, Dual 3, 4
Simple
Module Enable
The indicator will be GREEN if the module is enabled, and RED if the module is disabled.
ACTEL Firmware Version

The current ACTEL Firmware version.
Hardware Version
The Current Hardware version

May 15, 2006 7-37 973.334.3100
General Status Definitions for Column 2
Channel 1 RX Level
The actual channel 1 Rx level in dBm.
Channel 2 RX Level
Channel 3 RX Level
Channel 4 RX Level
Module Configured
The indicator will be RED if the module is not configured.
The indicator will be GREEN if the module is configured.
Typically, the indicator is always GREEN.
Logic Bus Error

The indicator will be RED if there are logic bus errors in the logic bus receiver.
The indicator will be GREEN if there are no logic bus errors.
Pic Version
Reports the PIC microcontroller software revision number, starting at version 1.0.
DSP Software Version

The current version of the Digital Signal Processor software.

May 15, 2006 7-38 973.334.3100
Figure 7-26. Audio Tone, Channel Status Web page

May 15, 2006 7-39 973.334.3100
Channel Status Web Page definitions for column 1
Chan 1 State
Channel 1 can be Enabled or Disabled
Chan 1 Transmit On
The indicator will be GREEN if the channel 1 transmitter is on.
The indicator will be RED if the channel 1 transmitter is off.
Chan 1 Transmit State

The current status of the channel 1 transmitter.
Can be High Frequency, Low Frequency, or Blank.
Chan 1 TX Boost
Channel 1 Tx Boost can be Active or Inactive.
Chan 2 State
Chan 2 Transmit On

Chan 2 TX Boost

May 15, 2006 7-40 973.334.3100
Channel Status Web Page definitions for column 1 (continued)
Chan 3 State
Chan 3 Transmit On

Chan 3 TX Boost
Chan 4 State
Chan 4 Transmit On

Chan 4 TX Boost

May 15, 2006 7-41 973.334.3100
Channel Status Web Page definitions for column 2
Chan 1 receive On
The indicator will be GREEN if the channel 1receiver is on.
The indicator will be RED if the channel 1 receiver is off.
Chan 1 RX State
The actual channel 1 received status. Can be High Frequency, Low Frequency, or Blank.
Chan 1 Noise Detectors

The actual channel 1 received noise detection status.
Can be Normal, AM Noise, FM Noise, or AM and FM Noise
Chan 2 receive On
The indicator will be GREEN if the channel 2 receiver is on.
Chan 2 RX State

Chan 3 receive On
Chan 3 RX State

Chan 4 receive On
Chan 4 RX State


May 15, 2006 7-42 973.334.3100
Figure 7-27. Audio Tone, Modem Status Web page

May 15, 2006 7-43 973.334.3100
Modem Status Web Page definitions for column 1
Remote Label
A label set by the user at the remote GARD 8000 unit.
Modem Channel OK
The indicator will be GREEN if the modem channel is OK.
The indicator will be RED if the modem channel is NOT OK.
Remote Ch1 Level Alarm

The indicator will be GREEN if there is no channel 1 level alarm.
The indicator will be RED if there is a channel 1 level alarm.



Remote Chan 1 RX State

Status from remote end can be Modem, High Frequency, or Low Frequency.




May 15, 2006 7-44 973.334.3100
Modem Status Web Page definitions for column 1 (continued)
Reset Date and Time

Displays the Date and Time of last reset.
Remote Address Expected

Displays the expected remote address from the far end.
Remote Address Alarm

The indicator will be GREEN if there is no remote address alarm.
The indicator will be RED if there is a remote address alarm.
Channel Delay Threshold

Displays actual channel delay threshold.
Channel Delay Alarm

The indicator will be GREEN if there is no channel delay alarm.
The indicator will be RED if there is a channel delay alarm.

May 15, 2006 7-45 973.334.3100
Modem Status Web Page definitions for column 2
Remote Rx Level 1
The actual value of level 1 received from the remote end
Can be Not Valid, or an actual dBm value.
Remote Rx Level 2
Remote Rx Level 3
Remote Rx Level 4
Remote Chan 1 Noise Detectors

The actual received noise detector status from the remote end for channel 1.
Can be Normal or Noise Detector.



Remote Address Received

The address received by the remote end.
Address Tests Failed Since Reset

The number of address test failures since the last reset.
Channel Delay Measured

The actual one-way channel delay measurement.
Channel delay Tests Failed Since Reset

The number of channel delay test failures since the last reset.

May 15, 2006 7-46 973.334.3100
7.1.10 POWER LINE CARRIER CONFIGURATION SETTINGS

Click on the Power Line Carrier button. A Web page similar to the one shown in Figure 7-24 will
appear.

May 15, 2006 7-47 973.334.3100
Figure 7-29. Power Line Carrier Configuration Web page
Click on General Settings to go to the Power Line Carrier Configuration, General Settings web page as
shown on the following page. Click on Checkback Settings to go to the Power Line Carrier
Configuration, Checkback Settings web page as shown in Figure 7-31.

May 15, 2006 7-48 973.334.3100
Figure 7-30. Power Line Carrier General Settings Web page

May 15, 2006 7-49 973.334.3100
General Settings Definitions:
Module Enable/Disable
The module can be Enabled or Disabled.
TX Center Frequency (20-500 inc 0.125)

Sets the TX Center Frequency (In on-off it’s the TX Block Frequency) from 20kHz to 500kHz in
0.125kHz increments. Refer to paragraph 10.4 for instructions on setting the RF Power Output Filter
(TX Filter) jumpers.
RX Center Frequency (20-500 inc 0.125)

Sets the RX Center Frequency (In on-off it’s the RX Block Frequency) from 20kHz to 500kHz in
0.125kHz increments.
System Mode
There are three System Modes as follows:
1) on-off
2) FSK: 2F
3) FSK: 3F
RX Bandwidth
There are three settings for each system mode as follows:
1) In FSK: 200Hz, 500Hz and 1000Hz
2) In on-off: 500Hz, 1000Hz and 1500Hz
• For 3F systems you must select the bandwidth between the center frequency and either the
Shift Up or Shift Down frequency. NOT the total bandwidth from Shift Up to Shift Down
frequencies.
Shift (FSK only) (0-1000 inc 2)

Sets the TX Shift from the center frequency.
Block Hold Timer (on-off only) (0-50 inc 1)

Used to extend the Block outputs by the selected amount of time. The range is from 0ms to 50ms in
1ms increments.
FSK TX Guard Level (on-off TX Reserve Level)

This setting has a dual meaning as follows:
In on-off systems it sets the TX Reserve Level. The selections are 1W, 3W or 10W.
In FSK systems it sets the TX Guard Level. The selections are 1W, 3W or 10W.
FSK TX Trip Level (on-off TX Block Level)

This setting has a dual meaning as follows:
In on-off systems it sets the TX Block Level. The selections are 1W, 3W or 10W.
In FSK systems it sets the TX Trip Level. The selections are 1W, 3W or 10W.

May 15, 2006 7-50 973.334.3100
General Settings Definitions (continued):
Signal Dropout Alarm (0-100 inc 1)

Sets the RX Signal Dropout Threshold. If the RX level drops more than the selected amount below
nominal, an Alarm is generated. The range is from 0dB to 100dB in 1dB increments.
Min. Rx Level(On-Off)Set to 6 for FSK (6-100 inc 1)
FSK Mode: Must be set to 6.

On/Off Mode: Set to the minimum level that should be considered a valid block, relative to
the block level at commissioning. For example; to reject carrier signals more
than 15 dB below nominal, set the Min. Rx Level to 15.
Factory recommended value for On/Off is 15 dB.
SNR Alarm Threshold (FSK Only) (0-100 inc 1)

Signal-To-Noise Ratio threshold. Sets the threshold below which a SNR Alarm is generated. The range
is from 0dB to 100dB in 1dB increments.
RPM Alarm Threshold (0-35 inc 1)

Reflected Power Meter Alarm Threshold. Sets the threshold above which an RPM Alarm is generated.
The range is from 0% to 35% in 1% increments.
Rx Agc Setpoint (10-40 inc 1)

Sets the headroom in the dynamic range.
For Example: To set the >40 dB dynamic range to +15/-25 set this setting to 15.
Recommended Settings: For On/Off and non-boost FSK, 2F or 3F (10W/10W): 10 dB
For boosted FSK, 2F or 3F (1W/10W): 13 dB
Limits: For On/Off and non-boost FSK, 2F or 3F (10W/10W):
10 dB minimum.
For boosted FSK, 2F or 3F (1W/10W): 13 dB minimum.
Start 1 input polarity (on-off only)

Sets the polarity of the Start 1 input contact. Can be set to Normal or Inverted. When set to Normal, the
contact is active when the station battery voltage is present, and is inactive when the station battery
voltage is not present. When set to Inverted, the contact is inactive when the station battery voltage is
present, and is active when the station battery voltage is not present.
Start 2 input polarity (on-off only)

Sets the polarity of the Start 2 input contact. Can be set to Normal or Inverted. When set to Normal, the

May 15, 2006 7-51 973.334.3100
General Settings Definitions (continued):
Stop 1 input polarity (on-off only)

Sets the polarity of the Stop 1 input contact. Can be set to Normal or Inverted. When set to Normal, the
Stop 2 input polarity (on-off only)

Sets the polarity of the Stop 2 input contact. Can be set to Normal or Inverted. When set to Normal, the
Start1/Start2 And/Or (on-off only)

Selects whether the Start 1 and Start 2 contacts are ANDed or ORed. The options are AND or OR.
Stop1/Stop2 And/Or (on-off only)

Selects whether the Stop 1 and Stop 2 contacts are ANDed or ORed. The options are AND or OR.
Local TX causes Block (on-off only)

Selects whether or not to generate a local block when a block is transmitted to the far end. Can be
Enabled or Disabled.
Trip 1 Shift Direction (FSK only)

In 2F mode selects the trip direction. The options are Shift Up or Shift Down.
In 3F mode selects the Trip 1 direction, and The Trip 2 direction is automatically set to the opposite
direction. The options are Shift Up or Shift Down.

The range of TX logic bus start bits can be set from 3 to 511 in increments of 1.
Refer to System Logic PDF for help.

The TX logic bus length can be set from 0 to 24 in increments of 1.

The range of RX logic bus start bits can be set from 3 to 511 in increments of 1.

The RX logic bus length can be set from 0 to 24 in increments of 1.

May 15, 2006 7-52 973.334.3100
Figure 7-31. Power Line Carrier Checkback Settings (on-off only) Web page (page 1 of 2)

May 15, 2006 7-53 973.334.3100
Figure 7-29. Power Line Carrier Checkback Settings (on-off only) Web page (page 2 of 2)

May 15, 2006 7-54 973.334.3100
Checkback Settings Definitions:
Checkback Mode
Selects Master, Remote or Disable. One end must be set to Master and the other end to Remote, or
both ends set to Disabled if you are not using the checkback feature.
Checkback test 1 Command

The code sent from the Master station to the Remote station for Test 1. Valid codes are 1-16, or Off.
Checkback test 1 Response

The code sent from the Remote station to the Master station in response to command for Test 1.
Checkback test 1 Level

Can be set to High or Low for Checkback Test 1.
High is the “Tx Block Level” set on the settings web page.
Low is the “Tx Reserve Level” set on the settings web page.

Same as test 1 Command.

Same as test 1 Response.

Same as test 1 Level.







May 15, 2006 7-55 973.334.3100
Checkback Settings Definitions (continued):












TX Hard Carrier Code 1

The code sent to the remote end to request a hard carrier response. The code can be sent using the PLC
Test web page. Selections are 1-16, or Off.


May 15, 2006 7-56 973.334.3100
Checkback Settings Definitions (continued):


RX Hard Carrier Low Power

A low power hard carrier is sent if the selected code is received. Selections are 1-16, or Off.
RX Hard Carrier High Power

A high power hard carrier is sent if the selected code is received. Selections are 1-16, or Off.
Hard Carrier Timer (0-180 inc 1)

Sets the duration of the hard carrier response. Can be set from 0 to 180 seconds in 1 second
increments.
Remote Init Code

1) In Master mode the checkback sequence is initiated in response to this code.
2) In Remote mode this code is sent to the master to request the checkback sequence. Selections
are 1-16, or Off. The recommended setting is 16.
Checkback start time HR (0-23 inc 1)

Sets the Hour of the day in real time when the checkback sequence will be initiated. Can be set from 0-
23 in one hour increments.
Checkback start time Min (0-59 inc 1)

Sets the Minute in real time when the checkback sequence will be initiated. Can be set from 0-59 in
one minute increments.
Hours between (0-24 inc 1)

Sets the time between automatically initiated checkback sequence. Can be set from 0-24 in one hour
increments.
Response Timeout (0-100 inc 1)

Sets the checkback response time out in seconds. Can be set from 0-100 seconds in one second
increments.
Click on Home to get to the chassis configurations status web page. Then click on PLC Status to get to
the PLC Status web page as shown on the following page.

May 15, 2006 7-57 973.334.3100
Figure 7-32. PLC Status Web page
Click on General Status to go to the PLC General Status web page as shown on the following page.
Click on Counter Values to go to the Counter Values web page as shown in Figure 7-34.

May 15, 2006 7-58 973.334.3100
Figure 7-33. PLC General Status Web page

May 15, 2006 7-59 973.334.3100
PLC General Status Definitions:
System Mode
Reports the system mode of operation: on-off, 2F or 3F.
TX Power
Reports the TX power output level of the PLC system in dBm referenced to 50 Ohms.
TX Fail Alarm
Indicates whether the transmitter is in alarm mode.
Transmitter State
Indicates the transmitter state.
Checkback Mode (on-off only)

Reports the checkback mode that is in use as follows: Master, Remote or Disabled.
Checkback Status
Reports status of the last checkback test as follows:
1) Not Yet Performed
2) Passed
3) Test X Failed (Where X is the number of the test, X can be 1 to 8)
Trans Hybrid Loss (FSK only)

Reports the Trans Hybrid Loss in dB.
Board Revision
Reports the circuit board revision number, with 1 corresponding to Revision A, 2 corresponding to
Revision B, etc.
Rear Board ID
Indicates the ID of the Rear Board.
ACTEL Firmware Version (Major)

Reports the ACTEL software version major number starting at version 1, (for example 1.1).
ACTEL Firmware Version (Minor)

Reports the ACTEL software version minor number starting at version 0, (for example 1.0).
RX Level
Reports the received level (in dB) relative to the normal RX level set during commissioning.
RX Carrier Alarm
Indicates whether the RX carrier is in alarm mode.

May 15, 2006 7-60 973.334.3100
PLC General Status Definitions (continued):
Receiver State
Indicates the receiver state.
SNR (FSK Only)

Reports the Signal To Noise Ratio of the RX signal in dB.
SNR Alarm (Channel Fail)

Reports an SNR (Signal to Noise Ratio) Alarm as follows: Channel OK, or Channel Fail
Reflected Power
Reports the reflected power in percent.
Reflected Power Alarm

Reports a reflected power alarm as follows: RPM OK or RPM Fail
Mod. Level
Reports the modification level of the PLC Digital module. An unmodified module is typically
modification level 0.
PLC Software Version

Reports the PLC (Power Line Carrier) software version starting at 1.
PIC Version
Reports the PIC microcontroller software revision number, starting at version 1.0.

May 15, 2006 7-61 973.334.3100
Figure 7-34. PLC Counter Values Web page
PLC Counters Definitions:
Trip Key 1 (FSK)/ Start 1 (On/Off)c3

In on-off mode indicates the Start 1 Key count.
In FSK mode indicates the Trip Key 1 count.
Trip Key 2 (FSK)/ Start 2 (On/Off)c4

Stop 1 (On/Off)(c2)
In on-off mode indicates the Stop 1 Key count.
Stop 2 (On/Off)(c5)
Trip 1 RX 1 (FSK)/Block RX (On/Off)c1

In on-off mode indicates the Block Rx count.
In FSK mode indicates the Trip 1 Rx count.

May 15, 2006 7-62 973.334.3100
PLC Counters Definitions (continued):
RX Alarm(FSK)(c6)
Indicates the FSK RX Alarm count.
Checkback tests count

Indicates the total checkback test count.
Checkback Pass count

Indicates the total checkback pass count.
Channel Fail count

Indicates the Channel Fail count.

May 15, 2006 7-63 973.334.3100
7.2 SYSTEM LABELS AND TRIGGERS
From the toolbar select Settings>System Labels And Triggers. A screen similar to the one below will
appear, showing a sub menu.
Figure 7-35. Chassis Configuration Status web page

May 15, 2006 7-64 973.334.3100
Select System Labels and Time. The following screen will appear.
Figure 7-36. System Labels and Time web page
The user system labels provide text boxes for identifying the GARD 8000 chassis. Examples include
substation names, line numbers or other information that can be applied to the complete GARD 8000
system. Communications modules and I/O modules have additional label fields to further identify
specific functions within the GARD 8000 System.

May 15, 2006 7-65 973.334.3100
User System Label 1

Enter a descriptive name for System Label 1
User System Label 2

Enter a descriptive name for System Label 2
User System Label 3
Enter a descriptive name for System Label 3.
Voltages
Displays the output voltages for the two available main power supplies. Each power supply has both a
positive and negative output voltage.
Ethernet
Displays and Settings
Active Port
Displays which of the two Ethernet ports Front/Back are active.
Data Rate
Displays the current data rate of the Ethernet connection.
Rear IP address
Displays the current IP address for the rear Ethernet port.
For additional security the user must be connected to the front Ethernet port and have the proper
security access level authorization to change the address of the rear Ethernet port. When connected to
the front Ethernet port enter the desired address in the space provided and select SAVE from the top of
the page.
Front IP address – Displays the IP address of the front Ethernet port. This address is programmed at
the factory and cannot be changed.
System Time
Enter the current date and time.

May 15, 2006 7-66 973.334.3100
7.2.1 LED LOGIC ASSIGNMENTS

From the toolbar select Settings>System Labels and Triggers. Dropdown screens screen similar to the
one below will appear.

May 15, 2006 7-67 973.334.3100
Select LED Logic Assignments from the drop down menu. The following screen will appear:
Figure 7-38. LED Logic Assignments web page

May 15, 2006 7-68 973.334.3100
The GARD 8000 has 20 LED’s. Each led can have one of four states;
OFF
Green
Yellow
Red
LED Labels:
Each LED can be assigned a “Global Label” and each color can be assigned a different label in
inserting text into the appropriate label field.
Bit#:
The LED’s are assigned to either a logic bit or a HMI bit.
If the LED is to be assigned to an input or output module function, the logic bit can be obtained from
the Bit Assignment column of the WEB page for that input or output module. The web page in Figure
7-18 shows the bit assignment of the corresponding input.
Control Logic:
The control logic is a drop down menu that identifies the LED bit number assignment as a Logic bit,
HMI IN bit, HMI Out bit or not assigned. The choices are:
None
Logic
HMIN
HMOUT
The bit numbers must be between 3 and 511 for Logic bits and 1 to 63 for HMI bits.
A warning screen will appear if the bit number is out of range when the user tries to exit the field. A
number within the specified range must be entered before continuing on.
Active State:
The active state selects if the LED color will be on when the assigned bit is a low state or high state.
To insure the LED turns is extinguished the off state must be assigned.
The LED’s have priority levels assigned to them. If two colors are active the higher priority color will
be turned on. The priority levels are:
OFF Highest
RED
YELLOW
GREEN Lowest

May 15, 2006 7-69 973.334.3100
Figure 7-39. Input Card in slot#2 Rear Left web page
If the LED is to be assigned to any other logic bit the bit number must be obtained from the GARD
8000 system logic drawing
If the LED is to be assigned to either an HMI In or HMI Out bit the HMI assignments can be obtained
from either the Edit HMI Labels page or from the GARD 8000 system logic drawing.

May 15, 2006 7-70 973.334.3100
7.2.2 SOE TRIGGERS AND LABELS


May 15, 2006 7-71 973.334.3100
Select SOE Triggers and Labels from the drop down menu. The following screen will appear:
Figure 7-41. Sequence of Events Configuration web page
The SOE Triggers and Labels page allows the user to enable SOE triggers and assign the triggers
labels that will be displayed in the GARD 8000 system SOE log. There are 191 triggers available. An
SOE trigger can only be assigned in the GARD 8000 logic files.
The first SOE Triggers and Labels page allows the user to assign a label to each of the triggers, enable
or disables SOE triggers by selecting a check box, clearing all SOE events stored in the system and
going to a second SOE configuration page that allows the user to assign additional names to trigger
states, assign colors associated with the SOE Trigger state, define the type of system action of the
trigger, Alarm and SOE or only an SOE while active.

May 15, 2006 7-72 973.334.3100
Trig #:
The SOE recorder has 191 user programmable SOE triggers. The Trig # column identifies the
trigger number used in the custom logic file.
Label:
User definable label for each of the 191 triggers.
Example: “North Breaker Reclose Initiate Output”.
Change this field by changing the text in the text box and selecting “SAVE” or by clicking on
the “EDIT” button to go to the edit screen.
High Logic Name:

This is the display of the user definable label for an active low SOE trigger state. This label will
be used in the SOE record to describe the status of the event.
Example: “Active” or “Inactive”, “Alarm” or “Normal”, “Open” or “Close”.
Change this field by clicking on the “EDIT” button directing the user to the edit screen.
Low Logic Name:

This is the display of the user definable label for an active low SOE trigger state. This label will
be used in the SOE record to describe the status of the event.
Example: “Active” or “Inactive”, “Alarm” or “Normal”, “Open” or “Close”.
High Logic CLR (color):

This is the display of the user definable color used on SOE record. When an SOE event occurs
there will be a name, defined above, and color associated with the event. The color can be
defined as:
Red
Yellow
Green
Black
Blue

May 15, 2006 7-73 973.334.3100
Low Logic CLR (color):

This is the display of the user definable color used on SOE record. When an SOE event occurs
there will be a name, defined above, and color associated with the event. The color can be
defined as:
Red
Yellow
Green
Black
Blue
Type:
The SOE triggers can be set to function only as an SOE trigger, Issue an Alarm (major system
alarm) and SOE trigger or issue an Alert (minor System alarm) and SOE trigger.
Check To Enable:
Placing check in box following the trigger enables that trigger in SOE log. Only items checked
will be recorded in the SOE log .
Change this field by clicking on the check box and selecting “SAVE” or by clicking on the
“EDIT” button to go to the edit screen.
Edit:
Clicking this button will display 10 SOE triggers starting with the trigger number associated
with the “EDIT” button selected. The user can then go in and edit the desired fields outlined
above.

May 15, 2006 7-74 973.334.3100
7.2.3 SOE SYSTEM COUNTERS

From the Toolbar select SOE>System Counters. The following screen will appear.
Figure 7-42. System Counters web page

This “Read Only” web page will inform the user of the count of enabled triggers. The count can be re-
set by clicking the “Reset System Counters” button.
Trig #:
The Trig # column identifies the trigger number used in the custom logic file. The first 2
numbers are reserved by the GARD 8000 system and cannot be assigned or changed by the
user.
Label:
Label for each of the triggers.
Count:
Count for the Enabled Trigger.
May 15, 2006 7-75 973.334.3100
7.2.4 LOGIC BIT LABELS


May 15, 2006 7-76 973.334.3100
Select Logic Bit Labels from the drop down menu. The following screen will appear:
Figure 7-44. Logic Bit Labels web page
The GARD 8000 has a logic bus that is used by all the I/O modules and function modules to
communicate status to other modules in the system. The logic bits are assigned in the GARD 8000
logic files. The logic files contain default labels for the logic bits. A typical logic file will contain
generic names for function. Where ever possible the GARD 8000 refers to the logic bits by the labels
assigned to the bits in either the logic files or on the configuration pages of the system. This approach
allows the use of a single logic file in multiple locations without having to create a custom logic file
for each application or location.

May 15, 2006 7-77 973.334.3100
The Edit Logic bit screen is used to change the default labels to user defined labels for customizing a
system to a specific location or application. If the user changes the default setting in this screen the
new label will be used by functions in the GARD 8000 system will use the new label to identify that
logic bit.
Bit 0, bit 1 and bit 2 are reserved by the GARD 8000 system and cannot be assigned or changed by the
user.
Bit #:
This is the actual logic bit number on the logic bus. This is a read only field
Logic Bit Label:

This is the present label assigned to a specific logic bit. If the label has not been changed this will be
the label assigned in the GARD 8000 logic file.
Change Logic bit Label:

This is a text field that allows the user to change the label for each logic bit.
Logic bit status:

This indicated the state of each logic bit. A “1” indicates a high logic bit and “0” indicates a low logic
bit.
Save:
The save button saves all changes to the labels. The changes will not take affect until the save button is
pressed. If the user exits the page prior to saving the changes all changes will be lost.

May 15, 2006 7-78 973.334.3100
7.2.5 EDIT HMI BIT LABELS


May 15, 2006 7-79 973.334.3100
Select Edit HMI Labels from the drop down menu. The following screen will appear:
Figure 7-46. Edit HMI Labels web page
The GARD 8000 has 128 user definable Human Machine Interface, HMI, bits. There are 64 HMI bits
defined as input bits and 64 HMI bits defined as output bits. The HMI bits can be assigned to provide
functions like LED assignment without using bits on the logic bus.
The EDIT HMI Labels page displays the current HMI label in a text box. A new label can be entered
by overwriting the existing label or labels and selecting the Save button.

May 15, 2006 7-80 973.334.3100
7.3 ALARM CONFIGURATION

May 15, 2006 7-81 973.334.3100
Select Alarm Configurations from the drop down menu. The following screen will appear.
Figure 7-48. Alarm Configurations web page
The modules in the GARD 8000 continually perform self-diagnostics. For different conditions a
module may issue either a major or minor alarm. The alarm configurations page lists each module in a
GARD 8000 system and allows mapping of the modules alarm state to the GARD 8000 system alarm
contacts. Any module alarm can be mapped to active the GARD 8000 Major Alarm, Minor Alarm,
Both Major and Minor Alarms or no alarm using the dropdown web page.

May 15, 2006 7-82 973.334.3100
Logic Bus Error:

Can be set to Major, Minor, Both or None. See descriptions below.
Over/Under Voltage Alarm:

Can be set to Major, Minor, Both or None. See descriptions below.
HMI Output Alarm:

Assigned Output0 or Output1 on internal schematic will trigger alarms visible on the web page.
Bit Error Rate Alarm Threshold:

The alarm will become active once the threshold set has been exceeded. The alarm thresholds are
shown below.
Table 7-4. Bit Error Rate Threshold Settings
None None
9E-3 9 per 1,000
1E-3 1 per 1,000
1E-4 1 per 10,000
1E-5 1 per 100,000
Slot #:
Indicates the physical slot the module is inserted into in the GARD 8000 chassis.
Location:
Indicates if the module is in the front or rear or the chassis.
In a 3 rack unit chassis the module location is also identified as occupying the left or right half of the
module on modules that have multiple function capabilities like the communications interface base or
the discrete I/O base.
In a 6 rack unit chassis the module location is also identified as occupying the top or bottom half of the
module on modules that have multiple function capabilities like the communications interface base or
the discrete I/O base.
Module:
Identifies the type of module.
Module Alarm:
Identifies the type of module alarm being mapped. This is a read only field identifying the Major and
Minor module alarm.

May 15, 2006 7-83 973.334.3100
System Alarm:
The system alarm is a drop down web page that will map the associated module alarm to the GARD
8000 system alarms. The selections are:
Major: Activates the GARD 8000 Major Alarm contact on the PS I/O when the module alarm
goes active
Minor Activates the GARD 8000 Minor Alarm contact on the PS I/O when the module alarm
goes active
Both: Activates the GARD 8000 Major and Minor Alarm contacts on the PS I/O when the
module alarm goes active
None: Does not activate either the GARD 8000 Major or Minor Alarm contacts on the PS I/O
when the module alarm goes active

May 15, 2006 7-84 973.334.3100
7.4 FILE OPERATIONS
From the toolbar select Settings>File Operations. The following web page will appear:
Figure 7-49. File Operations web page
Select “Send File to GARD 8000” web link if a file is to be sent from a PC to the GARD 8000.
Select “Save File to PC” web link if a file is to be saved to a PC from the GARD 8000 unit.

May 15, 2006 7-85 973.334.3100
Select Send File To GARD 8000. The web page shown below will appear.
Figure 7-50. Send File to GARD 8000 web page
The “Type of File” field will default to System Logic Database (.TXT File). Select the type of file to
be downloaded to the GARD 8000 system from the pull down menu.

May 15, 2006 7-86 973.334.3100
Figure 7-51. Send File to GARD 8000 web page
The following files appear as choices in the “Send file to GARD 8000” pulldown menu.
System Logic Database (.TXT File)
This file defines the web pages that configure the system logic. It must be loaded prior to a new logic
(.EDN) loading.
System Logic (.EDN File)
This file contains the actual system logic.
System Logic DSN (.DSN file)
This file is the ORCAD source file that is needed to edit the logic. It is not used by the GARD, merely
stored on it so that it can be uploaded and editing of the logic can be done.

May 15, 2006 7-87 973.334.3100
System Logic PDF (.PDF File)

This file is a printable copy of the logic schematic created from the ORCAD source file. It is not used
by the GARD, merely stored on it so that it can be uploaded and printed.
System Logic Firmware (.HEX File)
This is the operating software for the logic processor. This file is only loaded when there is a system
upgrade.
Distance Relay Module Settings Database
This file defines the pages for the distance relay settings. It needs to be loaded only when the distance
relay module is updated.
Distance Relay Module SOE Database
This file defines the pages for the distance SOE settings. It needs to be loaded only when the distance
relay module is updated.
Distance Relay Module Fault Record Database
This file defines the pages for the distance fault record settings. It needs to be loaded only when the
distance relay module is updated.
Distance Relay Module Logic Configuration
This file defines the distance relay internal logic. It needs to be loaded only when the distance relay
module logic is updated.
Audio Tone Module Settings Database
This file defines the web pages that configure the audio tone settings. It needs to be loaded only when
an audio board is installed in a chassis for the first time or when the audio board is updated.
Audio Tone Module Status Database
This file defines the web pages that display the audio tone status. It needs to be loaded only when an
audio board is installed in a chassis for the first time or when the audio board is updated.
Audio Tone Module Firmware (.HEX File)
This is the operating software for the audio tone module. This file is only loaded in the case of an
audio tone software upgrade.
PLC Module Settings Database

This file defines the web pages that configure the PLC settings. It needs to be loaded only when a PLC
board is installed in a chassis for the first time or when the PLC board is updated.
PLC Module Status Database

This file defines the web pages that display the PLC status. It needs to be loaded only when a PLC
board is installed in a chassis for the first time or when the PLC board is updated.
PLC Processor Software

PLC DSP Software
PLC Forth Software
The above files are the operating software for the PLC module; all three files need to be loaded when a
PLC board is updated.

May 15, 2006 7-88 973.334.3100
Current Differential Relay Settings Database

This file defines the web pages that configure the Current Differential relay settings. It needs to be
loaded only when a current diff board is installed in a chassis for the first time or when the current diff
board is updated.
Current Differential Relay Status Database

This file defines the web pages that display the current differential relay status. It needs to be loaded
only when a current diff board is installed in a chassis for the first time or when the current diff board
is updated.
Current Differential Relay SOE Database

Contains sequence of events which can be retrieved through the RFL web interface.
Current Differential Relay Firmware (.HEX File)

This is the operating software for the current differential relay module. This file is only loaded in the
case of a current differential software upgrade.
Async Comms Settings Database

This file defines the web pages that configure the async comms module settings. It needs to be loaded
only when an async comms module is installed in a chassis for the first time or when the async comms
board is updated.
Async Comms Status Database

This file defines the web pages that display the async comms status. It needs to be loaded only when an
async comms board is installed in a chassis for the first time or when the async comms board is
updated.
Whole Chassis Configuration
This file contains all the settings for a complete chassis. It can be loaded from a PC to configure the
GARD unit in one step.
Test Database
Defines the test web pages for certain GARD modules. Only to be loaded as instructed by the factory.

May 15, 2006 7-89 973.334.3100
The following files appear as choices in the “Save file to PC” pulldown menu.
System Logic (.EDN File)

This file contains the actual system logic. It maybe saved to a PC and loaded to other GARD units.
System Logic DSN (.DSN file)

This file is the ORCAD source file that is needed to edit the logic. It is not used by the GARD, merely
stored on it so that it can be saved to a PC and editing of the logic can be done.
System Logic PDF (.PDF File)

This file is a Viewable / printable copy of the logic schematic created from the ORCAD source file. It
is not used by the GARD, merely stored on it so that it can be saved to a PC and viewed or printed with
Adobe Acrobat.
System Manual PDF (.PDF File)

This is the system manual for the GARD unit. It may be saved to a PC and viewed with Adobe
Acrobat Reader. For version 6.4 Image File and up the System Manual will include Distance Relay
information.
Distance Relay Manual PDF (.PDF)

This is the manual for the distance relay module that may be installed in the GARD unit. It may be
saved to a PC and viewed with Adobe Acrobat Reader. Only for Image Files prior to 6.4.
Whole Chassis Configuration

This file contains all of the configuration settings for the GARD unit; it can be saved to a PC for
archiving.
The following files are reserved for RFL use only. They are not typically used in the field.
System Last Error EDN File
System Last Post Error Ioremapping File
System Last Error Timers File
System Last Error Hmibits File
System Logic Firmware (.HEX File)
Using the Browse button search for and select the file to be loaded, and click the Send button. Upon
successful loading of the file, the GARD chassis will respond by displaying a web page with a message
similar to the one shown below.
Successful to send file:2IN2OUT_D.TXT to GARD 8000!

May 15, 2006 7-90 973.334.3100
7.5 SYSTEM LOGIC CONFIGURATION
The System Logic Configuration page provides the user with logic programming flexibility through a
series of drop down menu’s. Inputs, Outputs, Timers, and other logic options can all be reconfigured
from this page without logic programming modifications. The configuration choices will be based on
the physical modules in the chassis and the system logic files loaded into a chassis.
From the toolbar select Settings>System Logic Configuration. A screen similar to the one below will
appear.
Figure 7-52. System Logic Configuration web page

May 15, 2006 7-91 973.334.3100
7.5.1 INPUT MAPPING

Inputs can be mapped to different points in the logic. Input mapping choices are set up in the TXT file
and are loaded in during a System Logic Database TXT upload. The example the TXT file provides a
series of choices for mapping 2 input cards to various points which are tied to 8 functions of a
Teleprotection module. See the example shown below.
Figure 7-53. Input Mapping web page (Typical)

May 15, 2006 7-92 973.334.3100
The example logic file provides 2 start inputs per function and 1 stop input per function. Each start and
stop input can be mapped to any of the inputs on the input modules or permanently tied True or False.
Selecting the drop down list for the item to be mapped will provide a list of all available inputs. An
example of input mapping for logic is shown below.
Figure 7-54. Input Mapping web page (Typical)

May 15, 2006 7-93 973.334.3100
7.5.2 OUTPUT MAPPING

Outputs can be mapped to different points in the logic. Output mapping choices are set up in the TXT
file and are loaded in during a System Logic Database TXT upload. The example *.TXT file provides
a series of choices for mapping 2 output cards to various points which are tied to 8 functions of a
Teleprotection module. From the toolbar select Settings> System Logic Configuration. A screen
similar to the one below will appear.

May 15, 2006 7-94 973.334.3100
Select Output Mapping. The screen below will appear.
Figure 7-56. Output Mapping web page (Typical)
This logic example provides four output mapping choices of NOT USED, TRIP, BLOCK, and
UNBLOCK, for each of the eight TPS functions. There is also a communications alarm, which can be
mapped to any of the hardware outputs.
NOT USED - If a hardware output is mapped to NOT USED, that hardware output will not be tied to
the logic, and will not operate under any situation.
TRIP – If a hardware output is mapped to TRIP, that hardware output will operate when the function it
has been mapped to has received a trip from the logic.
BLOCK – If a hardware output is mapped to BLOCK, that hardware output will operate when either
the local transmitter has initiated a trip on that function, or when the receiver has processed a trip.
UNBLOCK TRIP – If a hardware output is mapped to UNBLOCK TRIP, that hardware output will
operate when the communications has been lost. The output will then go active for a predetermined
amount of time.

May 15, 2006 7-95 973.334.3100
7.5.3 OPTION SETTINGS

To allow flexibility in the logic, without modifying the logic programming, an Options Settings section
is provided. In the Options sections the user has the ability to configure the logic using simple
commands. Option Setting choices are set up in the TXT file and are loaded in during a System Logic
Database TXT upload. From the toolbar select Settings> System Logic Configuration. A screen similar
to the one below will appear.

May 15, 2006 7-96 973.334.3100
Select Option Settings. A screen similar to the one below will appear.
Figure 7-58. Option Settings web page (Typical)

May 15, 2006 7-97 973.334.3100
FUNCTION START1/START2/STOP POLARITY

Provides the user with the ability to choose between Normal and Invert for Start 1, Start 2, and Stop 1
for each of the 8 TPS functions.
FUNCTION START
Provides the user with the ability to choose between “AND” or “OR” for Start 1 and Start 2 for each of
the 8 TPS functions.
FUNCTION MODE
Provides the user with the ability to choose between “NORMAL” or “DCB” for each of the 8 TPS
functions. When Normal mode is selected, that particular function will operate as standard Trip
function with the Start inputs of the logic keying the transmitter. When DCB is selected. The blocking
portion of the logic is enabled and allows the transmitter to utilize the Stop input on the transmitter
logic.
RECEIVE OUTPUT POLARITY

Provides the user with the ability to choose the output polarity Normal/Invert for the receivers of the 8
TPS functions.

May 15, 2006 7-98 973.334.3100
7.5.4 TIMER SETTINGS

To allow flexibility in the logic, without modifying the logic programming, the Timer Settings section
is provided. In this section the user has the ability to change timer values using simple commands.
Timer Setting choices are set up in the TXT file and are loaded in during a System Logic Database
TXT upload. Timers are programmable from 0-32767ms in 0.25ms increments. To go to the Timer
Settings page from the toolbar select Settings> System Logic Configuration. A screen similar to the
one shown below will appear.

May 15, 2006 7-99 973.334.3100
Select Timer Settings. A screen similar to the one below will appear.
Figure 7-60. Timer Settings web page (Typical)
Available timers will be dependant on the functional modules and the logic files loaded into the GARD
8000 chassis. Please refer to the System Logic section of the manual for a detailed description of the
timers associated with different GARD 8000 configurations and logic files.

May 15, 2006 7-100 973.334.3100
System Logic
SECTION 8. SYSTEM LOGIC
8.1 LOGIC OVERVIEW
The GARD 8000 relies on logic to interconnect the modules and implement logical operation on the
signals. Users familiar with the 9745 will find this concept similar but enhanced. The logic is custom
designed for each configuration of modules and user requirements. The logic is provided to the user in
the form of a PDF logic diagram. This diagram defines the operation of the system.
The logic diagram may consist of several sheets with a hierarchical structure. In a hierarchy, blocks
that appear on higher level sheets represent additional sheets containing low level logic diagrams.
8.2 LOGIC GATES
The GARD 8000 logic consists of inputs from the system, combined using logic gates, driving outputs
to the system. The following gates are defined for use in a logic diagram.
Two and Three input AND gates

Two and Three input OR gates
Inverter (not)
Exclusive OR gate
Timer
Latch
Buffer
Toggle
True
False
8.2.1 TWO INPUT AND GATE

A two input AND gate has two inputs and one output, as shown in Figure 8-1. If both inputs are true,
the output is true. If either input is false, the output is false.
Table 8-1. Truth table for Two Input AND gate
Input 1 Input 2 Output

INPUT 1
False False False
OUTPUT
False True False
INPUT 2
True False False
True True True
Figure 8-1. Two input AND gate

January 10, 2006 8-1 973.334.3100
System Logic
8.2.2 THREE INPUT AND GATE

A three input AND gate has three inputs and one output, as shown in Figure 8-2. If all three inputs are
true, the output is true. If any inputs are false, the output is false.
Table 8-2. Truth table for Three Input AND gate
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Output

False False False False
False False True False
False True False False
False True True False
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
True False False False
OUTPUT
INPUT 3 True False True False
True True False False
True True True True
Figure 8-2. Three input AND gate
8.2.3 TWO INPUT OR GATE

A two input OR gate has two inputs and one output, as shown in Figure 8-3. If both inputs are false,
the output is false. If either input is true, the output is true.
Table 8-3. Truth table for Two Input OR gate

INPUT 1
False False False
OUTPUT
INPUT 2
False True True
True False True
True True True
Figure 8-3. Two Input OR gate

January 10, 2006 8-2 973.334.3100
System Logic
8.2.4 THREE INPUT OR GATE

A three input OR gate has three inputs and one output, as shown in Figure 8-4. If all inputs are false,
the output is false. If any input is true, the output is true.
Table 8-4. Truth table for Three Input OR gate
Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Output

False False False False
False False True True
False True False True
INPUT 1 False True True True
INPUT 2 True False False True
INPUT 3 True False True True
True True False True
True True True True
Figure 8-4. Three Input OR gate
8.2.5 XOR GATE

An XOR (or Exclusive-OR) gate has two inputs and one output, as shown in Figure 8-5. If one input is
true and the other is false, the output is true. If both inputs are the same state (either true or false), the
output is false.
Table 8-5. Truth table for XOR gate

INPUT 1
False False False
OUTPUT
INPUT 2
False True True
True False True
True True False
Figure 8-5. XOR gate

January 10, 2006 8-3 973.334.3100
System Logic
8.2.6 INVERTER (NOT)

An INVERTER gate has one input and one output, as shown in Figure 8-6. The output is always the
inverse of the input.
Table 8-6. Truth table for NOT gate
Input Output
INPUT OUTPUT False True

True False
Figure 8-6. Inverter gate

January 10, 2006 8-4 973.334.3100
System Logic
8.2.7 LATCH
A latch has two inputs and one output, as shown in Figure 8-7. One input is called "SET," and the other
is "RESET”. The SET input is active true and the RESET input is active false. The latch starts out in a
false state. If the RESET input goes false, the output goes false. If the SET input goes true, the output
goes true and stays true unless the RESET is false.
INPUT 1 SET
GATE # Q OUTPUT
INPUT 2 RESET
a. Symbol
TRUE
INPUT 1
(SET) FALSE
TRUE
INPUT 2
(RESET) FALSE
TRUE
OUTPUT
(Q) FALSE
b. Timing Diagram
Set Reset Output
X L L
H H No change H = HIGH or TRUE
↑ H H L = LOW or FALSE
H No change ↑ = FALSE TO TRUE TRANSITION
↓
L ↓ = TRUE TO FALSE TRANSITION
X ↓
X = DON’T CARE
H ↑ L
L ↑ L
Figure 8-7. Latch

January 10, 2006 8-5 973.334.3100
System Logic
8.2.8 TOGGLE GATE (THREE INPUTS, ONE OUTPUT)

The Toggle primitive takes two inputs and forms a toggle gate as shown in Figure 8-8. If the
first input (clock) changes from FALSE to TRUE (rising edge), and the second input (RESET) is
FALSE, the output will toggle. If the second input (RESET) is TRUE, the output will always be
FALSE. The RESET input has no effect the rising edge requirement for the clock input. As a specific
example, if the clock input is TRUE and the reset is TRUE, when the reset goes FALSE the output will
remain FALSE. The clock input must be FALSE and then become HIGH to toggle the output after the
reset is released. The third input is used to set the initial condition of the rising edge detector. If the
third (initial state) input is TRUE and the clock input is TRUE when the logic primitives first starts to
run, the first TRUE clock does not toggle the output. If the (initial state) input is FALSE and the first
clock input is TRUE, the output will toggle as the primitive logic first starts to run. In all cases, if the
RESET is TRUE the output will be FALSE and the initial condition is not important. The initial state
will in almost all cases be set to zero and the reset should be used to clear the function.
TOGGLE TOGGLE
CLK Out CLK Out
RST RST
FALSE INIT INIT

TRUE
Figure 8-8. Toggle Gate

January 10, 2006 8-6 973.334.3100
System Logic
8.2.9 TIMER
A timer has one input and one output, as shown in Figure 8-9. The output tracks the input after a given
time delay. Each timer has two settings: "attack time" and "decay time." If the input goes true, the
output will go true after a time delay equal to the attack time, as long as the input is still true; if the
input is not true at the end of the attack time, the output will not change. If the input goes from true to
false after the attack time has been satisfied, the output will go false after a time delay equal to the
decay time. If the input remains false less than the decay time, the output will not go false.
TIMER #
INPUT IN GATE # OUT OUTPUT
ATTACK / DECAY VALUES (in ms)
a. Symbol
ATTACK TIME
TRUE
INPUT FALSE
DECAY TIME
TRUE
OUTPUT FALSE
Figure 8-9. Timer

January 10, 2006 8-7 973.334.3100
System Logic
8.2.10 BUFFER
The buffer primitive has one input and one output as shown in Figure 8-10. It takes an input and
outputs the same result.
Figure 8-10. Buffer
8.2.11 TRUE AND FALSE

In positive logic, True = 1 and False = 0.
8.3 LOGIC CONFIGURATION
The following scheme has been implemented for default logic and programmable logic in general.
Custom designs are generated at RFL that include a logic schematic created in ORCAD and a logic
setting database. These two files are to be downloaded to the unit.
Once these files are downloaded, the GARD will automatically generate user friendly web pages for
changing the configuration of the logic. The logic is field programmable to the following extent.
Timer Settings - All of the timer settings are displayed with custom labels. Attack and decay times
can be entered into text boxes. Timers with fixed values are not be displayed in the user settings.
Option Setting – The system designer (RFL systems engineering) is free to put in as much
programmability as desired in the logic. Different operating modes can be selected, inversions, etc.
Any modification of the logic operating modes must be added in by the designer. These controls are
present on the Option Setting web page with radio buttons for controls.
I/O Mapping – The inputs and outputs that are planned for the chassis are included in the logic design.
The mapping of inputs to logic and logic to outputs can be done in the field. The available logic inputs
are shown on the web pages and the possible inputs to drive them can be selected from a pull down
list. The available hardware outputs will be shown and the possible logic points to drive them can be
selected from a pull down list.

January 10, 2006 8-8 973.334.3100
System Logic
The System Logic Configuration page provides the user with logic programming flexibility through a
series of drop down menus as shown in Figure 8-11. Inputs, Outputs, Timers, and other logic options
can all be reconfigured from this page without logic programming modifications. From the toolbar
select Settings, System Logic Configurations. A screen similar to the one below will appear.

January 10, 2006 8-9 973.334.3100
System Logic
8.3.1 INPUT MAPPING

Inputs can be mapped to different points in the logic. Input mapping choices are set up in the logic
setting database and are loaded in during a System Logic Database TXT upload. The database for
default logic provides a series of choices for mapping 2 input cards to various points which are tied to
8 functions of a TPS module. See screen shot below. A user can select a single input to key more than
one input function.
Figure 8-12. Input Mapping web page

January 10, 2006 8-10 973.334.3100
System Logic

Outputs can be mapped to different points in the logic. Output mapping choices are set up in the logic
database and are loaded in during a System Logic Database TXT upload. The file for default logic
provides a series of choices for mapping 2 output cards to various points, which are tied to 8 functions
of a TPS module. From the toolbar select Settings> System Logic Configuration>Output Mapping. A
screen similar to the one below will appear. A user can select a single output to control more than one
output function.
Figure 8-13. Output Mapping web page
If a hardware output is mapped to NOT USED, that hardware output will not be tied to the logic, and
will not operate under any situation.

January 10, 2006 8-11 973.334.3100
System Logic

The Option Settings allow the user to change the way the logic functions without having to modify the
underlying logic. For example, the inputs and outputs can have their polarity inverted, inputs can be
combined (‘AND’ed or ‘OR’ed), DTT or DCB logic, etc. From the toolbar select Settings> System
Logic Configuration>Option Setting. A screen similar to the one below will appear.
Select Option Settings – A screen similar to the one below will appear.
Figure 8-14. Option Settings web page

January 10, 2006 8-12 973.334.3100
System Logic
8.3.4 TIMER SETTINGS

To allow flexibility in the logic, without modifying the logic programming, the Timer Settings section
is provided. In this section the user has the ability to change timer values using simple commands.
Timer Setting choices are set up in the TXT file and are loaded in during a System Logic Database
TXT upload. Timers are programmable from 0-32767ms in .25ms increments. To go to the Timer
Settings page from the toolbar select Settings>System Logic Configurations. A screen similar to the
one shown below will appear.
Figure 8-15. System Timer Setting web page

January 10, 2006 8-13 973.334.3100
System Logic
8.4 DEFAULT TPS LOGIC
The default TPS only logic in the GARD 8000 provides 12 inputs, 2 channels of transfer trip, each
with 8 transfer functions, and 12 outputs. The following tables describe the signals and configuration
settings. The logic diagrams should be referenced to for additional information.
8.4.1 INPUT MAPPING

Each of the following signals can be driven by any of the discrete hardware inputs 12 inputs and True
or False. One hardware input can drive more than one signal. In the following table, N can equal any
function from 1 to 8.
Table 8-7. Input Mapping
System Signal Default selection

Function N Start 1 Input Upper input 1 First Input to the function N transmit AND/OR gate
Function N Start 2 Input Upper input 1 Second Input to the function N transmit AND/OR gate
Function N Stop 1 Input Upper input 2 Input to the function stop N transmit control

There are 12 discrete outputs in the default configuration. Each of those outputs can be driven by one
of the following sources. Only one source can drive an output and each source can drive only one
output. In the following table, N can equal any function from 1 to 8.
Table 8-8. Output Mapping
System Source Description

Not used This indicates that this output is never driven active
Trip N This is the function receive trip output
This is the unblock trip output. After the unblock security time (20 ms) of failed
Unblock Trip N channel, this goes active for the unblock delay time (150 ms).
Block Trip N This goes active when a local trip is sent or when the receive trip goes active.
Alarm 1 & Alarm 2 These go active when channel 1 senses communication errors
Alarm 3 & Alarm 4 These go active when channel 2 senses communication errors

January 10, 2006 8-14 973.334.3100
System Logic

There are 5 different options for each function on the TPS. The following settings are available to the
user. In the following table, N can equal any function from 1 to 8.
Table 8-9. Option Settings
System Option Setting Default Description

Normal This sets the polarity of the start 1 input to normal or
Function N Start 1 Polarity inverted
Function N Stop 1 Polarity Normal This sets the polarity of the stop input to normal or inverted
Function N Start And / Or Or This sets whether the two start inputs are ANDed or Ored
Function N Mode Normal This sets whether DCB mode is enabled or not
Receive N TPS Channel 1 or 2 Channel 1 This sets which channel’s receive output is used
Normal This sets the polarity of the receive output to normal or
Receive N Output polarity inverted
8.4.4 TIMERS
The default logic has a series of timers that can be adjusted by the user. All of the timers are set in 1/4
ms increments up to a maximum value of 32.767 seconds. In the following table, N can equal any
function from 1 to 8 and X refers to TPS channel 1 or 2.
Table 8-10. Default Logic Timers
System Timer Default Description

Function N Transmit Command 1 ms This sets the length of time the function is transmitted after the
Extend input goes away
1 ms This sets the length of time before an input causes a trip to be
Function N Transmit Time delay sent
1 ms This sets the length of time a trip function must be received
Receive N Pre-Trip Time delay before it is recognized
1 ms This sets the length of time a trip output is held active after the
Receive N Trip Hold Time delay received trip goes away
10 ms This sets the length of time the channel must be good before
Channel X Guard Before Trip Delay tripping is enabled
20 ms This sets the length of time the channel can be bad before
Channel X Loss of Guard Delay tripping is disabled
20 ms This sets the length of time from when the channel goes bad
Channel X Unblock Security Timer until the unblock trips become active.
170 ms This sets the length of time the unblock trips are held active
from the start of the unblock security timer. (effectively 150 m
Channel X Unblock Trip Window in the default)

January 10, 2006 8-15 973.334.3100
System Logic
8.5 DEFAULT TPS & DISTANCE LOGIC
The default TPS & distance logic in the GARD 8000 provides 12 inputs, 1 channel of transfer trip with
8 transfer functions, a distance relay and 12 outputs. The following tables describe the signals and
configuration settings. The logic diagrams should be referenced to for additional information.
8.5.1 INPUT MAPPING

Each of the following signals can be driven by any of the discrete hardware inputs 12 inputs and True
or False. One hardware input can drive more than one signal. In the following table, N can equal any
Table 8-11. Input Mapping
System Signal Default selection Description

Function N Start 1 Input Upper input 1 First Input to the function N transmit AND/OR gate
Function N Start 2 Input Upper input 1 Second Input to the function N transmit AND/OR gate
Function N Stop 1 Input Upper input 2 Input to the function stop N transmit control
External trig for oscillography capture in the distance
Oscillography external trigger FALSE relay module
External Sync Check FALSE External sync check condition for the recloser
VT Fuse Fail FALSE External loss-of-potential condition
External Reclose Initiate for the recloser in the distance
External reclose initiate FALSE protection module
52B phase A FALSE Breaker closed input, phase A
52B phase B FALSE Breaker closed input, phase B
52B phase C FALSE Breaker closed input, phase C
Manual Breaker Close FALSE External manual close command
External Phase A Trip FALSE External phase A trip
External Phase B Trip FALSE External phase B trip
External Phase C Trip FALSE External phase C trip
External Breaker Failure
Initiate FALSE External Breaker Failure Initiate
89B Stub Bus FALSE Disconnector switch closed input for stub bus protection
Channel Stop FALSE External channel stop for DCB pilot scheme

January 10, 2006 8-16 973.334.3100
System Logic

There are 12 discrete outputs in the default configuration. Each of those outputs can be driven by one
of the following sources. Only one source can drive an output and each source can drive only one
output. In the following table, N can equal any function from 2 to 8.
Table 8-12. Output Mapping
System Source Description

Not used This indicates that this output is never driven active
Trip N This is the function receive trip output
This is the unblock trip output. After the unblock security time (20 ms) of failed
Unblock Trip N channel, this goes active for the unblock delay time (150 ms).
Block Trip N This goes active when a local trip is sent or when the receive trip goes active.
Alarm 1 - Alarm 4 These go active when channel 1 senses communication errors
Trip Distance 1 Trip signal from the distance protection module
Trip Distance 2 Trip signal from the distance protection module
Retrip Breaker Fail 1 Retrip signal from the breaker failure protection
Retrip Breaker Fail 2 Retrip signal from the breaker failure protection
BFR Pickup Breaker Failure Relay Pick-up signal
BFR Trip 1 Breaker Failure Relay trip signal
BFR Trip 2 Breaker Failure Relay trip signal
Breaker Close 1 Breaker close signal from the autorecloser
Breaker Close 2 Breaker close signal from the autorecloser
Delta Rate Step 1 Trip signal from rate of change of frequency function, step 1
Under Frequency Step 1 Trip signal from the under frequency function, step 1
Over Frequency Step 1 Trip signal from the over frequency function, step 1
Excess number of trips Trip signal from the Breaker Monitor for excess number of trips
Excess breaker current Trip signal from the Breaker Monitor for excess accumulated breaking current

January 10, 2006 8-17 973.334.3100
System Logic

There are 5 different options for each function on the TPS. The following settings are available to the
user. In the following table, N can equal any function from 2 to 8.
Table 8-13. Option Settings
System Option Setting Default Description

Function N Stop 1 Polarity Normal This sets the polarity of the stop input to normal or inverted
Function N Start And / Or Or This sets whether the two start inputs are ANDed or Ored
Function N Mode Normal This sets whether DCB mode is enabled or not
Normal This sets the polarity of the receive output to normal or
Receive N Output polarity inverted
Phase A - 52A or 52B 52B Selects whether the input is a 52A or 52B
Phase B - 52A or 52B 52B Selects whether the input is a 52A or 52B
Phase C - 52A or 52B 52B Selects whether the input is a 52A or 52B
BFI Polarity Normal Selects the polarity of the BFI input is normal or inverted
89B Polarity Normal Selects the polarity of the 89B input is normal or inverted

January 10, 2006 8-18 973.334.3100
System Logic
8.5.4 TIMERS
The default logic has a series of timers that can be adjusted by the user. All of the timers are set in 1/4
ms increments up to a maximum value of 32.767 seconds. In the following table, N can equal any
Table 8-14. Default Logic Timers
System Timer Default Description

Function N Transmit Command 1 ms This sets the length of time the function is transmitted after
Extend the input goes away
1 ms This sets the length of time before an input causes a trip to
Function N Transmit Time delay be sent
1 ms This sets the length of time a trip function must be received
Receive N Pre-Trip Time delay before it is recognized
1 ms This sets the length of time a trip output is held active after
Receive N Trip Hold Time delay the received trip goes away
10 ms This sets the length of time the channel must be good before
Channel 1 Guard Before Trip Delay tripping is enabled
20 ms This sets the length of time the channel can be bad before
Channel 1 Loss of Guard Delay tripping is disabled
20 ms This sets the length of time from when the channel goes bad
Channel 1 Unblock Security Timer until the unblock trips become active.
170 ms This sets the length of time the unblock trips are held active
from the start of the unblock security timer. (effectively 150
Channel 1 Unblock Trip Window m in the default)
1 ms This sets the length of time the distance trip output is
Distance Trip Delay delayed after it goes active
5 ms This sets the length of time the distance trip output is held
Distance Trip Hold active after it goes away.
1 ms This sets the length of time the re-trip breaker fail output is
Re-trip breaker fail delay delayed after it goes active
5 ms This sets the length of time the re-trip breaker fail output is
Re-trip breaker fail hold held active after it goes away.

January 10, 2006 8-19 973.334.3100
System Logic
8.6 LOGIC DESIGN RESERVED I/O
The following section describes the input and output bits that are reserved for specific operations in the
GARD8000 logic design.
8.6.1 HMI BIT ASSIGNMENT

Table 8-15. HMI Bit Assignment
HMI Bit Assignment

Reserved by the system to allow the CPU of the Controller Module to force SOE
HMIIN0 records.
HMIIN1 Driven by the Front Panel pushbutton.
HMIIN2 – HMIIN63 Driven by the Logic Options settings as defined by the Options Settings web page.
HMIOUT0 – HMIOUT1 Used for alarms as defined by the Alarms Configuration web page.
Current states appear in the Edit HMI Labels web page and can have user defined
HMIOUT2 – HMIOUT63 labels assigned.
Note that the current Edit HMI Labels web page has HMIIN0, HMIIN1 and HMIOUT0 as reserved.
The next software revision will update the web page to reflect the above table.
8.6.2 SOE TRIGGERS BIT ASSIGNMENT

Table 8-16. SOE Triggers Bit Assignment
SOE Trigger Assignment

TRIG0 – TRIG1 Reserved for system use.
TRIG2 – TRIG191 These bits are available to drive SOE events.
TRIG184 – TRIG191 *Used to prevent excess SOE events in Remote PLC Checkback.
*Note that these bits can be assigned to general SOE use as long as the following rules are observed.
1. Certain SOE triggers are predefined as ON/OFF Block Received bits. SOE’s are
recorded every time one of these becomes active. Logic must be included on the local
and remote Chassis to block this input if a matching PLC Test in Progress is active.
TRIG184 = Block Received PLC unit 1

2. Certain SOE triggers are predefined as Checkback Test in Progress bits. The activation
of one of these triggers will cause an SOE to be stored. In addition, when one of these
triggers becomes active, any SOE trigger caused by a matching Received Block
Trigger, that was received in the last 4-5 seconds must be deleted.

January 10, 2006 8-20 973.334.3100
System Logic
TRIG188 = TIP PLC unit 1

Note that the current Sequence of Events Configuration web page has TRIG0 as reserved. The next
software revision will update the web page to include TRIG1.
8.6.3 LOGIC BITS

Table 8-17. Logic Bit Assignment
Logic Bit Assignment

IOIN0 – IOIN2 Reserved for system use.
IOOUT0 – IOOUT2 Reserved for system use.
IOIN3 – IOIN509 These bits can be user defined.
IOOUT3 – IOOUT509 These bits can be user defined.
IOOUT510 Must be driven True by logic design.
IOOUT511 Must be driven False by logic design.

January 10, 2006 8-21 973.334.3100
System Logic

blank

January 10, 2006 8-22 973.334.3100
Teleprotection
SECTION 9. TELEPROTECTION
9.1 TELEPROTECTION OVERVIEW
The GARD 8000 Teleprotection Communications interface can be configured for digital, audio
(future), or fiber optic media. It is suited for all standard and non-standard pilot protection schemes.
9.2 TELEPROTECTION APPLICATIONS
The primary GARD Digital Teleprotection System consists of four teleprotection (TPS) channels
located on the Display With TPS module. Each TPS channel is capable of transmitting and receiving
eight independent and simultaneous bi-directional commands over a single communications interface.
Each TPS channel utilizes its own addressing and channel delay measurements. Addressing and
Channel Delay measurements are sent and received with each message. Functionality of the TPS
system is dependent on logic programming. Standard default logic is available to satisfy most
applications. For applications that are not covered in one of the default logics, custom logic can be
provided by RFL.
The GARD 8000 Teleprotection Channel is fully programmable and is suitable for Direct Transfer
Trip, Permissive Transfer Trip, and Blocking and Unblocking applications. Each of these is described
below.

March 1, 2006 9-1 973.334.3100
Teleprotection
9.2.1 PERMISSIVE TRANSFER TRIP

Permissive Transfer Trip schemes provide a high degree of security for transmission line protection.
This high degree of security in a permissive scheme is a result of the requirement that the
teleprotection receiver and the local relay must operate in order to trip. There are two basic types of
PTT schemes, Permissive Underreaching Transfer Trip (PUTT) and Permissive Overreaching
Transfer Trip (POTT). PTT schemes typically require trip times under 12ms. Security requirements for
PTT schemes can be less stringent since the local breaker must also operate. However, dependability is
stressed since fault clearing will not occur unless the teleprotection device operates. In an effort to
improve dependability, unblock timers can be used to allow operation even during channel losses
which are coincident with line faults.
Figure 9-1. Permissive Underreaching Transfer Trip
Figure 9-2. Permissive Overerreaching Transfer Trip

March 1, 2006 9-2 973.334.3100
Teleprotection
9.2.2 DIRECT TRANSFER TRIP

A direct transfer trip system is one in which the teleprotection device is solely responsible for tripping
of the remote breaker. This type of system is generally used for tripping remote circuit breakers, for
transformer faults, shunt reactor protection and breaker failure applications. DTT schemes typically
require trip times around 12ms, however, the trip times are not quite as critical as with PTT systems,
since DTT systems are typically backup protection. Because the teleprotection unit is solely
responsible for tripping, without supervision from the local relay, security and dependability is of the
utmost importance.
Figure 9-3. Direct Transfer Trip

March 1, 2006 9-3 973.334.3100
Teleprotection
9.2.3 DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCKING

DCB schemes locate a fault internal or external to a protected line. The results are passed between the
two ends of the protected line over a communications channel using teleprotection devices such as the
GARD 8000. If the reverse element detects a fault, the start input is keyed and a block signal is sent to
the remote end to prevent tripping for the external fault. However, if the forward looking element also
detects a fault, the stop input is keyed and the block signal is discontinued allowing the remote end to
trip for the internal fault. Both terminals must stop their block signal in order to trip because the block
signal prevails for both ends; even if one terminal transmits the block signal, the breakers will not trip.
Figure 9-4. Directional Comparison Blocking

March 1, 2006 9-4 973.334.3100
Teleprotection
9.2.4 DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON UNBLOCKING

DCUB schemes continuously transmit a block or guard signal until an internal fault is detected. If an
internal fault occurs, the transmitter sends an “unblock (trip). Unblocking schemes also provide for a
150ms unblock (trip) after a loss of channel is detected by the receiver.
Figure 9-5. Directional Comparison Unblocking
9.3 TELEPROTECTION SETTINGS
Refer to paragraph 7.1.6 for Teleprotection Configuration Settings.

March 1, 2006 9-5 973.334.3100
Teleprotection

blank

March 1, 2006 9-6 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
SECTION 10. POWER LINE CARRIER
10.1 INTRODUCTION
The Single Function PLC Module (module set) is a protection module for use in the GARD 8000
system. The PLC Module consists of two plug-in modules: 1) a Digital Module which plugs into the
front of the GARD 8000 chassis, and 2) an Analog module which plugs into the rear of the GARD
8000 chassis. The module set can be used in a GARD 8000 3U or 6U chassis.
The PLC Module is capable of transmitting and receiving a single PLC channel. The channel can be
configured for two modes of operation: 1) FSK, or 2) On/Off. In FSK mode, it can be configured to
support either 2F or 3F operation. In On/Off mode, it can be configured to support both Normal
Checkback and Hard Carrier Checkback.
In addition to performing the normal PLC functions, the Module will monitor the transmit interface to
measure transmit power, reflected power, trans-hybrid loss, and receive signal strength.

March 1, 2006 10-1 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
10.2 FSK OPERATION
The PLC Module supports two FSK operational modes: 2F and 3F.
In 2F operation a guard tone is located a fixed deviation below or above the channel center frequency.
At the occurrence of a trip, the tone shifts to the opposite side of the channel center frequency. In 3F
operation a guard tone is located at the channel center frequency. One of two trips can occur. One trip
causes the tone to shift a fixed deviation below the channel center frequency. The other trip causes the
tone to shift a fixed deviation above the channel center frequency.
The performance of 2F and 3F operation is defined by the Maximum Trip Transport Delay,
Dependability and Security.
Maximum Trip Transport Delay is defined as the time between the following two events: 1) when the
Module transmitter is notified of a trip event through the Logic Bus, until 2) the Module receiver on
the other side of the link writes the trip event into the Logic Bus status registers. More specifically, it is
defined as the delay between the Logic Bus frame reception interrupt which contains the trip event
information until the status register is written in the receiver. The Maximum Trip Transport Delay for
2F operation is defined by the three operational configurations given in Table 10-1. The Maximum
Trip Transport Delay for 3F operation is defined by the three operational configurations given in Table
10-2.
Dependability is defined as the probability that a trip event will be successfully communicated to the
other end of the link within the Maximum Trip Transport Delay as a function of the signal to noise
ratio of the link.
Security is defined as the probability that a false trip event will be declared at the receive end of the
link as a function of the signal to noise ratio of the link.

March 1, 2006 10-2 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
Digital Module Analog Module

Logic Bus
Control Bus
Midplane 10W TX Filter

Interface Power
Circuit Amp
RPM
Transceiver TX Power Monitor
Circuit
Balance Skewed
Network Hybrid
FPGA
Circuit
Line I/F
RX Components
Atten
Existing Gard Hardware

Controller / Logic
+/-18V
Power Supply
Discrete I/O
Figure 10-1. GARD 8000 PLC FSK Block Diagram

March 1, 2006 10-3 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
Table 10-1. 2F Trip Transport Delay and Channel Spacing
Configuration Settings Nominal Trip Minimum Minimum

Transport Delay Permissible Permissible
(With 0.5 ms Unidirectional Bidirectional
Pretrip Delay) Channel Channel
Spacing Spacing
Nominal Receive Bandwidth: 200 Hz 9.0 ms 500 Hz 1000 Hz
Tx Frequency Shift: +/- 100 Hz
Table 10-2. 3F Trip Transport Delay and Channel Spacing
Configuration Settings Nominal Trip Minimum Minimum

Transport Delay Permissible Permissible
(With 0.5 ms Unidirectional Bidirectional
Pretrip Delay) Channel Channel
Spacing Spacing

March 1, 2006 10-4 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
10.3 ON-OFF OPERATION
On-Off operation defines the absence of a tone (Off) to be the guard condition. The presence of a tone
(On) is the trip condition. Since there is no tone present under normal non-trip operating conditions, no
receive AGC functions may be performed. Therefore, the nominal receive signal level is determined
during deployment, and the operating parameters of the system are set accordingly and maintained in
non-volatile memory of the Module.
In order to determine that the link is operating normally, a checkback process is used to test the link.
For the purposes of checkback, the Module at the near end of the link is defined as the Master and the
Module at the far end of the link is defined as the Remote. During checkback, a pre-defined sequence
of on-off states (checkback codes) is transmitted by the Master to the Remote which responds with an
acknowledgement on a successful reception.
The Remote responds in one of two ways depending on how the Master terminates its transmission of
the Checkback Code. If the Master leaves the tone on for 5 seconds after the last bit of the Checkback
Code, the Remote responds in Hard Carrier Mode. Otherwise, the Remote responds in Normal Mode.
In Normal Mode, the Remote responds by transmitting a pre-defined sequence of on-off states (called
the Acknowledgement Code) to the Master. In Hard Carrier Mode, the Remote responds by
transmitting a tone to the Master for a pre-defined length of time.
Four, Hard carrier transmitted codes and two received codes can be programmed into either the master
or remote units. Operation from either end is possible.
Checkback may be initiated automatically by either the Master or the Remote. It may also be initiated
manually by the user. Remote initiation is accomplished by sending a specific code to the master. This
code tells the master to initiate a test sequence. This code is not available as a response code from
remotes for normal tests.

March 1, 2006 10-5 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
Digital Module Analog Module

Logic Bus
Control Bus
10W TX Filter
Midplane Power
Interface Amp
RPM
Circuit
Transceiver TX Power Monitor
Circuit
Skewed
Balance Hybrid
FPGA Network
Circuit Line I/F
Components
Not Used in On-Off System
RX
Atten
Existing Gard Hardware

Controller / Logic
+/-18V
Power Supply
Discrete I/O
Figure 10-2. GARD 8000 PLC On/Off Block Diagram

March 1, 2006 10-6 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
On/Off Systems transmit and receive on the same frequency. Therefore, the local receiver cannot
differentiate between remote transmissions and local transmissions. In addition, checkback sequences
are detected as a sequence of trip events. The local receiver will report all trip events through the Logic
Bus interface whether the source is from local transmissions, checkback sequences, or real trips. It is
up to the logging mechanism in the Logic Controller to filter out unwanted SOE reports. To aid in this
filtering the module will indicate that a test is in process through a bit on the logic bus that is active
while a test is ongoing in a master or while an incoming code is detected in a remote.
The performance of On/Off operation is defined by the Maximum Trip Transport Delay, Dependability
and Security.
Maximum Trip Transport Delay is the defined as the time between when the Module transmitter is
notified of a trip event throught the Logic Bus until the Module receiver on the other side of the link
writes the trip event into the Logic Bus status registers. More specifically, it is defined as the delay
between the Logic Bus frame reception interrupt which contains the trip event information until the
status register is written in the receiver. The Maximum Trip Transport Delay for On/Off operation is
defined by the three operational configurations given in Table 10-3.
Dependability is defined as the probability that a trip event will be successfully communicated to the
other end of the link within the Maximum Trip Transport Delay as a function of the signal to noise
ratio of the link.
Security is defined as the probability that a false trip event will be declared at the receive end of the
link as a function of the signal to noise ratio of the link.
Security & Dependability do not really apply to an on / off unit. The unit should issue a block received
output any time there is sufficient energy in the receive band regardless of total SNR. Instead of
security, adjacent channel rejection is probably more relevant. Dependability of an on/off unit should
remain constant as noise increases until the input circuits (or DSP numbers) saturate.
Table 10-3. On/Off Block Transport Delay and Channel Spacing
Configuration Settings Nominal Block Minimum

Transport Delay Permissible
Channel Spacing
Nominal Receive Bandwidth: 500 Hz 5 ms 1 kHz
Nominal Receive Bandwidth: 1000 Hz 3 ms 2 kHz
Nominal Receive Bandwidth: 1500 Hz 1.5 ms 3 kHz

March 1, 2006 10-7 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
10.4 SETTING THE TX CARRIER FREQUENCY RANGE
The operating band of the GARD 8000 PLC is from 30Hz to 500kHz. Setting the Tx carrier frequency
range is accomplished using jumpers J3 through J11 as shown in Table 10-4. These jumpers are
located on the GARD 8000 PLC Analog Module as shown in Figure 6-9 and Table 6-9. The 393.5kHz
to 500kHz version has no filter settings.
Table 10-4. Jumper Settings For Tx Filter
Frequency J3 J4 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J11

Range in
kHz
30-41.5 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
38-52.5 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4
49-67.5 13-14 5-6, 5-6, 5-6, 13-14 5-6, 5-6, 5-6, 13-14
7-8, 7-8, 7-8, 7-8, 7-8, 7-8,
9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10
64-88.5 15-16 5-6, 5-6, 5-6, 15-16 5-6, 5-6, 5-6, 15-16
7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8
85-117.5 17-18 7-8, 7-8, 7-8, 17-18 7-8, 7-8, 7-8, 17-18
9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10
114-157.5 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6
154-212.5 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-8
209-288.5 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10
285-393.5 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12 11-12

March 1, 2006 10-8 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
10.5 TX LEVEL METER CALIBRATION
This process aligns the metering of the transmit level with the actual output of the amplifier. This only
needs to be done if the front (digital) or rear (analog) module is changed or if the transmit level
potentiometer on the rear of the amplifier is adjusted. The process consists of enabling the transmitter
on the digital board to output a full scale signal (10 Watts) and then adjusting the amplifier output until
10 Watts (+40 dBm) is measured at the output of the amplifier. The test page calibration is then done
to align the TX metering.
1. Verify that the TX filter, and Hybrid is jumpered for the appropriate configuration, and
terminate the output with a non-inductive nominal load.
2. Force the carrier on and to10W:

a. On test page, change the setting “Force Carrier” to “On”.
b. Then click on “Run Test”.
3. Verify 40dBm (10W) on “PA OUT” Red (+), Black (-) test points on the rear of the Analog
Module (see Figure 10-3). Adjust Amplifier Gain as needed.
4. Calibrate the TX Level:

a. On the test page, enable the checkbox for “Calibrate TX Level”.
b. Click on “Run Test”.
5. Verify the reading for TX level is 40dBm.
6. Return carrier to normal

a. On test page, change the setting “Force Carrier” to “normal”.
b. Then click on “Run Test”.

March 1, 2006 10-9 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
10.6 REFLECTED POWER METER CALIBRATION
This calibration procedure is used to digitally calibrate the Reflected Power circuits in the module.
Minor variations in component values are compensated for, giving a more accurate reading. There is
an analog adjustment which is done at the factory and should not be changed in the field unless the Tx
frequency is changed by more than 50 kHz. The digital calibration adjusts for component variations
and only needs to be done if the front (digital) or rear (analog) module is changed or if the transmit or
receive frequency is changed. The calibration consists of two parts where the DC offset error and gain
error is adjusted out.
1. Verify that the TX filter, and Hybrid is jumpered for the appropriate configuration, and
terminate the output with a non-inductive nominal load.
2. Force the carrier on and to 10W.
On the test page, change the setting “Force Carrier” to “On”.

Then click on “Run Test”.
3. Adjust R5 & C2 on the analog module such that the Tx carrier signal at TP2 on the digital
module is at a minimum. Occasionally R2 will also need to be adjusted to achieve a minimum
level.
4. Calibrate the Tx Level:
On the test page, enable the checkbox for “Calibrate TX Level”.

Click on “Run Test”.
5. Verify the reading for TX level is 40dBm.
6. Return carrier to normal.
On the test page, change the setting “Force Carrier” to “normal”.

7. Turn the carrier off:
On the test page, change the setting “Force Carrier” to “Off”.

8. Calibrate the DC offset.
On the test page, change the setting “Calibrate RPM” to “Calibrate DC”.

March 1, 2006 10-10 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
9. Force the carrier on and to 10W.
On the test page, change the setting “Force Carrier” to “On”.

10. Put a 25 ohm load across the Line port (or in Tx port in 4W application)
11. Calibrate the gain:
On the test page, change the setting “Calibrate RPM” to “Calibrate Gain”.
12. Verify a reflected power of 11% (See Table 10.5 for tolerance)
13. Remove the 25 ohm load, and reconnect the non-inductive nominal load.
14. Verify a reflected power of 0% (See Table 10.5 for tolerance)
15. Verify the accuracy of the Reflected Power meter with a non-ideal, non-inductive load. Check
each point on the following Table.
Table 10-5. Common RPM test values
Nominal Actual Line Reflected Tolerance Tolerance

Impedance Impedance Power Up to 200 KHz Above 200 KHz
(Ohms) (Ohms) (%) (%) (%)
50/75 Short 100 * *
50 25 11.1 2 5
50 50 0.0 0 1
50 75 4.0 2 3
75 50 4.0 2 3
75 75 0.0 0 1
75 100 2.0 1 1
50/75 Open 100 * *
* The screen will indicate above 40% for these conditions.
• Note that the RPM indication will not drift over time more than 1%, given constant line
conditions.
• Tolerances measured at the GARD 8000 chassis connector. Adding Hybrids will degrade
accuracy.

March 1, 2006 10-11 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier

blank

March 1, 2006 10-12 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
Figure 10-3. Schematic, GARD 8000 PLC Analog Module,

Sheet 1 of 4

January 10, 2006 10-13 (10-14 blank) 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
Figure 10-3. Schematic, GARD 8000 PLC Analog Module, Sheet 2 of 4

March 1, 2006 10-15 (10-16 blank) 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
Figure 10-3. Schematic, GARD 8000 PLC Analog Module, Sheet 3 of 4

March 1, 2006 10-17 (10-18 blank) 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
Figure 10-3. Schematic, GARD 8000 PLC Analog Module,

Sheet 4 of 4

March 1, 2006 10-19 (10-20 blank) 973.334.3100
Power Line Carrier
LOGIC BITS 112-117

Overview On-Off 6 RELAY OUTLETS
6 Input SLOT N* LOWER
PLC_MODULE1 Logic Bus Bits RX 100-111, TX 112-128
Slot N* Lower TB2-13
BLOCK RX Output 1 TB2-14
TB2-15
TB2-1 BLOCK RX Output 2 TB2-16
Input 1 START1
TB2-2 TB2-17
TB2-3 Start 1 Start Carrier Output 3
Input 2 BLOCK RX TB2-18
TB2-4 Invert
Setting TB2-19
TB2-5
Input 3 BLOCK RX Output 4 TB2-20
TB2-6
START2 TB2-21
TB2-7
Input 4 CHECKBACK TEST IN PROGRESS Output 5 TB2-22
TB2-8
Start 2 TB2-23
TB2-9 Invert
Input 5 CHECKBACK TEST FAILED Output 6
TB2-10 TB2-24
Setting 2
TB2-11 Start AND/OR 2 1
Input 6 Setting COUNTER_3 2 AND2 1 TRIG10 OUTPUT MAPPING MODULE1
TB2-12
1 3
STOP1 1 6 RELAY OUTLETS
NOT 2
BLOCK_RX_1 BLOCK_1 SLOT M* LOWER
MODULE2 Stop 1 Stop Carrier BUF TB2-13
LOGIC BITS Invert
106 - 111 Setting 1 Output 7 Output 1 TB2-14
2
BLOCK_RX_2 BLOCK_2
TB2-15
BUF Output 8 Output 2 TB2-16
2 1
BLOCK_RX_3 BLOCK_3 TB2-17
STOP2 Output 9
BUF Output 3 TB2-18
Stop 2 TB2-19
2 1
Invert BLOCK_RX_4 BLOCK_4 Output 10 Output 4 TB2-20
Setting
2 1 BUF TB2-21
TRIG20
Output 11 Output 5 TB2-22
BUF 2 1
Stop AND/OR CHECKBACK_TIP CHECKBACK_TRIP TB2-23
REMOTE INITIATE
Setting Output 12 Output 6
BUF TB2-24
2 1
RESERVE KEY TRIG11
BUF MODULE3
2 1
CHECKBACK_FAILED CHECKBACK_FAILED LOGIC BITS 9-14
COUNTER_1 BUF
2 1
TRIG9
BUF * Subject to chassis location.
COUNTER_2
2 1
REFLECTED_POWER_ALARM 1 2 1 2
AND2 IN OUT REFLECTED_PWR_ALARM
TIMER BUF
ENABLE_RPM_ALARM 3 2 1
NUMBER=1 TRIG8
ATT_DEC=50_50 BUF
2 1
TX_FAIL_DETECTED 1 2 IN 1 2
AND2 OUT TX_FAIL
TIMER BUF
HMIIN2 3 NUMBER=2
COUNTER_4
ATT_DEC=50_50
COUNTER_5
2 1
FALSE CHECKBACK_TEST_FAIL_1 TRIG12
COUNTER_6 BUF
2 1 TRUE
CHECKBACK_TEST_FAIL_2 TRIG13 2 1
IOOUTS11
BUF
BUF
2 1
CHECKBACK_TEST_FAIL_3 TRIG14 FALSE
2 1
BUF IOOUTS10
BUF
2 1
CHECKBACK_TEST_FAIL_4 TRIG15
BUF
2 1 Logic Bus Assignment
BUF Transmit into Logic BUS >>>>>>> Logic (6 bits) 6 Input (6 bits) PLC On/Off (17 bits)
2 1
BUF
Receive from Logic BUS >>>>>>> PLC On/Off (12 bits) 6 Output (6 bits)
2 1
Logic (17 bits)
BUF
2 1
Bit 100 Bit 106 Bit 112 Bit 118 Bit 128
BUF
PLC_MODULE1
Figure 10-4. Default Logic, GARD 8000 On-Off PLC

March 1, 2006 10-21 (10-22 blank) 973-334.3100
Power Line Carrier
Overview - FSK
2 1
Logic Bus Bits RX 100-115, TRIG3
Input Mapping TX_CONTROL PLC_MODULE TX 116-131 RX_CONTROL BUF Output Mapping
6 Input 6 Relay Outlets

Slot 2 Left SHIFT_UP SHIFT_UP SHIFT_UP_RX SHIFT_UP_RX 2 1 Slot 4 Left
TRIP_1A
TRIP_KEY_1 TRIP_IN_1 BUF TB2-13
CENTER_FREQ CENTER_FREQ CENTER_FREQ_RX CENTER_FREQ_RX Output 1 Output 1 TB2-14
TB2-13 TB2-15
Input 1 Input 1 2 1
TB2-14 TRIP_KEY_2 TRIP_IN_2 SHIFT_DOWN SHIFT_DOWN SHIFT_DOWN_RX TRIP_1B Output 2 Output 2 TB2-16
SHIFT_DOWN_RX
TB2-15 BUF
Input 2 Input 2 TB2-17
TB2-16 Output 3 Output 3 TB2-18
TB2-17 LOW_LEVEL_ALARM LOW_LEVEL_ALARM 1
Input 3 Input 3 2 TB2-19
TB2-18 TRIP_1_OUT TRIP_1C
TX_CARRIER_DETECTED TX_CARRIER_DETECTED BUF Output 4 Output 4 TB2-20
TB2-19 2 1
Input 4 Input 4 TRIG4 TB2-21
TB2-20
SHIFT_UP_SENT LOW_SNR_ALARM BUF 2 1 Output 5 Output 5 TB2-22
TB2-21 SHIFT_UP_SENT LOW_SNR_ALARM
Input 5 Input 5 TRIP_2A
TB2-22 BUF TB2-23
TB2-23 CARRIER_FREQ_SENT CARRIER_FREQ_SENT Output 6 Output 6 TB2-24
Input 6 Input 6
TB2-24
2 1 MODULE1
SHIFT_DOWN_SENT SHIFT_DOWN_SENT TRIP_2_OUT TRIP_2B
BUF LOGIC BITS 3-8
MODULE1 6 Relay Outlets
LOGIC BITS Slot 4 Right
TX_FAIL_DETECT
15 - 20 2 1 TB2-1
TRIP_2C
TB2-3
2 1 Output 8 Output 2 TB2-4
6 Input GUARD_OUT GUARD_1 TB2-5
Slot 2 Right BUF
Output 9 Output 3 TB2-18
TX_CONTROL
REFLECTED_PWR_ALARM TB2-19
2 1
GUARD_2 Output 10 Output 4 TB2-20
TB2-1 2 1 BUF
Input 1 Input 7 TRIG1 TB2-21
TB2-2
BUF COUNTER_1 COUNTER_1 Output 11 Output 5 TB2-22
TB2-3
Input 2 Input 8 2 1 TB2-23
TB2-4 GUARD_3
TB2-5 COUNTER_2 COUNTER_2 BUF Output 12 Output 6 TB2-24
Input 3 Input 9 2 1
TB2-6 2 1 TRIG5
TRIG2 MODULE3
TB2-7 BUF
Input 4 Input 10 BUF COUNTER_3 1 LOGIC BITS 9-14
TB2-8 2
ALARM RX_ALARM
TB2-9 BUF
Input 5 Input 11
TB2-10 COUNTER_4
TB2-11 RX_CONTROL
Input 6 Input 12 2 1
TB2-12 COUNTER_5 TRIG6
BUF
MODULE4
COUNTER_6
LOGIC BITS
21 - 26
2 1
TRIG7
PLC_MODULE BUF
2 1
TX_FAIL
BUF
2 1 2 1
1 2 LOW_REFLECTED_PWR
AND2 IN OUT
TIMER BUF
ENABLE_RPM_ALARM 3 NUMBER=9
ATT_DEC=50_50
2 1
TRIG8
BUF
TRUE
2 1
IOOUTS11
BUF
FALSE 1
2
IOOUTS10
BUF
Figure 10-5. Default Logic, GARD 8000 FSK PLC

March 1, 2006 10-23 (10-24 blank) 973.334.3100
Tests and Diagnostics
SECTION 11. TESTS AND DIAGNOSTICS
11.1 INTRODUCTION
Pointing to Test on the GARD 8000 toolbar and clicking on SYSTEM TEST brings the user to the
System Testing web page. The page consists of a Chassis inventory page with radio buttons for each
functional module. See the Figure below for an example of the 6 rack unit chassis.
Figure 11-1. System Testing web page
In Figure 11-1, the background colors of the card slot locations will change according to the module
status as follows:
Yellow = Alert condition
Blue = Module not configured / Disabled
Red = Alarm condition
Gray = Empty slot

July 25, 2006 11-1 973.334.3100
11.2 INPUT MODULE TEST
Selecting a module will bring up that module’s test screen. Selecting the Input module in Chassis Rear
bottom, Slot #8 will bring you to the web page shown below.
Figure 11 2. Input Card web page

July 25, 2006 11-2 973.334.3100
The page consists of three sections, status, test buttons and test configuration.
The status section consists of the following read only fields.
Start of Logic Range:

Indicates the starting logic bit and if the module is using default logic assignment or custom logic
assignment.
Description:
Each of the 6 input functions include the description programmed in with the GARD 8000 logic file or
in the Input Card configuration screen.
Slot #:
Indicates the physical slot number of the module in the GARD 8000 chassis.
TB#:
Gives the terminal block numbers of the input function.
State:
Provides the logic state of the function when the page is loaded.
Bit assignment:
Indicates the logic bit the input function is assigned to on the logic bus.
Enabled?:
Indicates if the input function is enabled on the Input settings page. If the input is enabled the status of
that input is placed on the GARD 8000 logic bus.
There are five buttons associated with the input test page they are:
Module Enable:
This enables the Input module. The status of all six of the input functions of that module is
placed on the GARD 8000 logic bus.
Module Disable
This disables the Input module. The status of all six of the input functions of that module is
blocked from being placed on the GARD 8000 logic bus.
Set all to Normal

Returns the mode of all the input functions to normal operation. Normal operation will place
the state of the input onto the logic bus. This function will be used to return the module to
normal operating condition after performing tests that require changes to the input mode as
described below.
Execute test
When the Execute test button is pressed the state of the 6 input functions will be changed to the
state described in the Mode section that follows.

July 25, 2006 11-3 973.334.3100
All input functions can be returned to normal state by setting the function mode to normal on
all functions and hitting the execute test button or by hitting the Set all to normal button
described above.
Execute Pulse
After a function is set to a mode other than normal the Pulse check box becomes active.
Pressing the Execute Pulse button will change the state of all functions with selected pulse
boxes.
The test Configuration section consists of the following:
Description:
Each of the 6 input functions include the description programmed in with the GARD 8000 logic file or
in the Input Card configuration screen are repeated.
Mode:
This is a drop down box. It allows the tester to set the input to the following modes:
Normal
Normal mode is the normal operating condition for the input. The input status is placed
on the logic bus.
Active
Sets the input to an high state (1) on the logic bus independent of the status of the input
signal on the terminal block.
Inactive
Sets the input to an low state (0) on the logic bus independent of the status of the input
signal on the terminal block.
Lock
Lock will lock the input to the state of the input when the test mode is executed.
The inputs mode will only change after the Execute test button has been pressed.
The module will issue a Minor Alarm if any input function is set to anything other than Normal. The
alarm will remain active until all functions are returned to Normal Mode
Pulse:
The pulse checkbox can be selected if the associated function is in any mode other than normal. The
function’s mode must first be changed and execute test button pressed. After the test has been
executed, selecting a pulse box will change the state of the function for approximately 125 ms after the
execute pulse button is pressed.
Field:
Indicates the status of the input at the rear terminal block. A “0” indicates the input’s terminal block is
not keyed. A “1” indicates the input is keyed.

July 25, 2006 11-4 973.334.3100
Bus:
Indicates the logic state from the input module to the bus. This may be different from the field if any
other state than Normal is selected in the mode function above.
Test:
Indicates the mode of the function. Because the mode does not change until the execute test button is
pressed the Test column indicates what the present mode of the input function is, the mode column will
represent what mode the input function will change to after the execute test button is pressed. The
background of the test field will be red for any function that is not in Normal mode.
Status indicators:
There are four module status indicators as follows:
Configured:
This will be green if the module has been configured after initial installation into the chassis
and red if the module has not been configured.
Enabled:
This will be green if the module is enabled and red if it is disabled.
Major Alarm:
If the module is in a major alarm condition this indicator will be red, otherwise this will be
green indicating a non-alarmed condition.
Minor Alarm:
If there is a minor alarm or whenever any function is in a state other than Normal the Minor
alarm indicator will be yellow. During normal conditions this indicator will be Green.

July 25, 2006 11-5 973.334.3100
11.3 OUTPUT MODULE TEST
Selecting a module will bring up that module’s test screen. Selecting the Solid State output module in
chassis Slot #9 Rear top will bring you to the web page shown below.
Figure 11-3. Output Module web page

July 25, 2006 11-6 973.334.3100
The page consists of three sections, status, test buttons and test configuration.
The status section consists of the following read only fields.
Start of Logic Range:
Indicates the starting logic bit and if the module is using the default logic assignment or custom logic
assignment.
Description:
Each of the 6 output functions include the description programmed in with the GARD 8000 logic file
or in the output module configuration screen.
Slot #:
Indicates the physical slot number of the module in the GARD 8000 chassis.
TB#:
Gives the terminal block numbers of the output function.
State:
Provides the logic state of the function when the page is loaded or refreshed.
Bit assignment:
Indicates the logic bit the output function is driven by on the logic bus.
Enabled?:
Indicates if the output function is enabled on the Input settings page. If the output is enabled the
GARD 8000 logic bus will drive that output function.
There are five buttons associated with the Output Module test page. They are:
Module Enable:
This enables the output module. The GARD 8000 logic bus drives the output functions.
Module Disable
This disables the Output module. All six of the output functions of that module are blocked
from the GARD 8000 logic bus. Changes to GARD 8000 logic bus will not change the output
function.
Set all to Normal

Returns the mode of all the output functions to normal operation. Normal operation will result
in the output being driven by the logic bus. This function will be used to return the module to
normal operating condition after performing tests that require changes to the output mode as
described below.
Execute test
When the Execute test button is pressed the state of the 6 output functions will be changed to
the state described in the Mode section below.

July 25, 2006 11-7 973.334.3100
All output functions can be returned to normal state by setting the function mode to normal on
all functions and hitting the execute test button or by hitting the Set All to Normal button
described above.
Execute Pulse
After a function is set to a mode other than normal the Pulse check box becomes active.
Pressing the Execute Pulse button will change the state of all functions with selected pulse
boxes for 125 ms.
The test Configuration section consists of the following:
Description:
Each of the 6 output functions include the description programmed in with the GARD 8000 logic file
or in the Input Card configuration screen.
Mode:
This is a drop down box that allows the tester to set the input to the following test modes:
Normal
Normal mode is the normal operating condition for the output. The logic bus drives the output.
Active
Sets the output to a high state (1) bus independent of the status of the logic bus.
An output that is set for a normally closed contact will open.

An output that is set as a normally open contact will close.
See hardware configuration of output modules for further details.
Inactive
Sets the output to a low state (0) bus independent of the status of the logic bus.
An output that is set for a normally closed contact will close.

An output that is set as a normally open contact will open.
See hardware configuration of output modules for further details.
Lock
Will lock the output to the Logic bus state when the test mode is executed.
The outputs mode will only change after the Execute Test button has been pressed.
The module will issue a Minor Alarm if any output function is set to anything other than Normal. The
alarm will remain active until all functions are returned to Normal Mode.
Pulse:
The pulse checkbox can be selected if the associated function is in any mode other than normal. The
function’s mode must first be changed and execute test button pressed. After the test has been
executed, selecting a pulse box will change the state of the function for approximately 125 ms after the
execute pulse button is pressed.

July 25, 2006 11-8 973.334.3100
Field:
Indicates the status of the input at the rear terminal block. A “0” indicates the input’s terminal block is
not keyed. A “1” indicates the input is keyed.
Bus:
Indicates the logic state from the input module to the bus. This may be different from the field if any
other state than Normal is selected in the mode function above.
Test:
Indicates the mode of the function. Because the mode does not change until the execute test button is
pressed the Test column indicates what the present mode of the input function is, the mode column will
represent what mode the output function will change to after the execute test button is pressed. The
background of the test field will be red for any function that is not in Normal mode.
Status indicators:
There are four module status indicators as follows:
Configured
This will be green if the module has been configured after initial installation into the chassis
and red if the module has not been configured.
Enabled
This will be green if the module is enabled and red if it is disabled.
Major Alarm
If the module is in a major alarm condition this indicator will be red, otherwise this will be
green indicating a non-alarmed condition.
Minor Alarm
If there is a minor alarm or whenever any function is in a state other than Normal the Minor
alarm indicator will be yellow. During normal conditions this indicator will be Green.

July 25, 2006 11-9 973.334.3100
11.4 COMMUNICATIONS MODULES
The GARD 8000 can be configured with different communications interfaces. Each interface has
multiple loop-back capabilities.
Most GARD 8000 communications interfaces can have up to 12 channels or functional modules
connected to them. Performing loop-back tests on the interface will loop all devices back. Care must be
taken to prevent false tripping as a result of loop back tests.
The data on the Local loop-back and remote loop-back tests are transmitted to the designated receiving
terminals and redirected. Care must be taken to isolate the outputs of GARD 8000 chassis to prevent
false tripping of GARD 8000 systems during test.
If an interface is configured for Loop timing the interface will have to be programmed for Internal
timing before executing loop-back tests.

July 25, 2006 11-10 973.334.3100
11.4.1 DIGITAL INTERFACE
Figure 11-4. Digital Interface web page

July 25, 2006 11-11 973.334.3100
User Label:
This is a user-defined label. This label can identify a line number, remote substation or any
other information that may assist in identifying the interface.
Module Type:
The protocol is the type of interface the Digital Interface Module is configured as. This can be
RS-449, X.21 or V.35.
Chassis Location:
Indicates the physical location of the communications interface in the chassis. The chassis
position, slot number, and location on the interface board, top or bottom is provided.
The Teleprotection module contains a Multiprotocol function on it. If the location is identified
by “Slot X, front” this indicates that the Digital Interface Module function is located on a
Teleprotection module located in slot X on the front of the chassis.
If the location is identified by “Slot X, top rear” this indicated that this is an independent
Digital Interface Module located in the rear of the chassis in slot 9 on the top half of the
module.
Line Rate:
Provides the line rate, or bandwidth, of the Digital interface module to the external communications
equipment.
Configured:
Indicates that the module is properly configured. Green indicates that the modules configured,
red indicates that the module is not configured.
Major Alarm:
For the framer, a major alarm is loss of sync (RLOS). This alarm is also applied for loss of
carrier and unframed all ones; both conditions result in a loss of sync. Green indicates that the
Major Alarm is not active; red indicates that the Major Alarm is active.
Minor Alarm:
Becomes active when the module is placed in loop-back mode.
Remote Alarm:
Indicates that the remote terminal is in an alarm state.
Service Enabled:
Indicates that the interface is enabled, passing information to the remote terminal. Green
indicates that the interface is enabled, red indicates that the interface is not enabled.

July 25, 2006 11-12 973.334.3100
PLL Lock:
Indicates a valid Phase Lock Loop, received data and received clock are locked together and
not drifting with respect to each other. Failure to properly lock could result in bit errors and
communication failure.
Frame Lock:
Indicates that the framer has properly locked on the received data’s framing bit.
Transmit Activity:
Indicates the presence of outgoing data on the communications bus from the Digital Interface
Module. This would be the data being received from the remote terminal.
Receive Activity:
Indicates the presence of incoming data to the Digital Interface Module to the communications
bus. This is the data that is going to be sent to the remote terminal.
Loop-Back Modes:
The GARD 8000 Digital interface module is capable of performing 3 loop-back tests, Manual
loop-back, Local loop-back and Remote loop-back.
Loop-Back Mode Tests:

Each loop-back mode has an Enable / Disable button associated with it. By clicking on the
button the user can enable different types of loop-back tests. When a test is disabled the
assigned button is green, when a test is enabled the button will be red. The test will not start
until the execute button is selected.
There is a “Loop-Back Status” indicator that will turn red and display “ACTIVE” if any of the
loop-back tests are currently being run or will be green and “DISABLED” if all loop-back
modes are disabled. The Digital Interface will also issue a minor alarm while in loop-back and
the Digital Interface button on the inventory pages will be yellow.
The radio buttons next to each of the loop back tests allows the operator to enable or disable the
test. Click on the radio button to change the state and click on the “Execute” button to activate
the test.
Note
Loop-Back will continue to run if you exit the Test Page. Remember to
return to the Loop-Back Test Page to stop the test.

July 25, 2006 11-13 973.334.3100
Manual Loop-Back:
The manual lop-back requires an external loop-back connector attached to the 37-pin interface
connector. The loop-back connector acts as a crossover for the transmit data and receive data. The
GARD 8000 must be disconnected from the remote terminal. See Figure 11-5.
GARD 8000 Digital interface

TX TX
Remote
RX Terminal
Rx Data
Figure 11-5. Manual Loopback
If the digital interface module is internally timed:

• Connecting the loop-back connector will loop the chassis back on itself.
• The manual loop-back button does not need to be activated.
• Set the devices, TPS channels or Functional modules, TX and RX addresses to the same
value.
If the Digital interface is in Loop timing:

• Remove the cable from the DB-37 connector.
• Select click on the “Manual Local” button to enable.
• Click on “Execute”.
• Attach the loop back connector.
value.
An external loop-back plug can be made using a female DB-37 connector and jumper:
Pins 4 to 6
Pins 22 to 24

July 25, 2006 11-14 973.334.3100
Local Loop-Back:
The local loop-back function loops the data being transmitted to the remote terminal back on to the
receive portion of the digital interface module. The received data from the remote terminal is
interrupted. The transmit data from the local terminal is passed on to the remote terminal and
redirected to the local received data path. See Figure 11-6.
GARD 8000 Digital Interface

TX Data TX Remote
RX Terminal
Rx Data
Figure 11-6. Local Loopback
If the digital interface module is Internally timed:

• Click on the “Local Loop-Back” button to enable.
value.
If the Digital interface is in Loop timing:

• Set the digital interface to internal timing on the settings page.
value.

July 25, 2006 11-15 973.334.3100
Remote Loop-Back:
The remote loop-back function directs the received data back out the Digital Interface Module to the
remote GARD 8000 system. The local transmit data is interrupted. The received data is passed through
to the local GARD 8000 system and returned to the transmitting GARD 8000 System. See Figure 11-7.
GARD 8000 Digital Interface

TX Data TX
Remote
RX Data Terminal
Rx Data
Figure 11-7. Remote Loopback
• Click on the “Remote Loop-Back” button to enable.

Exit Loop-back:
To exit a loop-back test
• Click on the active loop-back test button.
• The button will change from red and “Active” to green and “Disabled” and hit
“Execute”.
• The module will remain in loop-back until the execute button is pressed.
• The “Loop-back” status will change from red and Active to green and Disabled.
• Any system settings that were changed during testing must be returned to normal
operating before returning the equipment to service.
• The minor alarm, TX Activity and RX Activity indicators will be green.
• Reset error counters.
Module Status:
GARD Comms Bus:

Identifies what communications bus, 1 or 2, the multiprotocol module is assigned to.
GARD Comms Direction:

Identifies what communications bus direction, A or B, the Digital interface module is assigned
to.
Interface Clock Polarity:

Give the programmed clock polarity for the interface. The transmit and receive clocks can be
set for either “Normal” or “Inverted".
Accumulated Errors:
Provides a count of total errored words since last reset.
Errors per Second

Provides a count of the number of errored words that occurred over the last second.

July 25, 2006 11-16 973.334.3100
Errored Seconds
Provides a count of the total number of errored seconds since the last reset.
Reset Error Counters button:

Provides the user a means to reset the error counters of the Digital interface module.
Time Slot Configuration Button:

The time slot configuration button allows the user to view the communications time slot
assignment of the Digital interface module.

July 25, 2006 11-17 973.334.3100
11.4.2 C37.94 SHORT-HAUL FIBER INTERFACE
Figure 11-8. C37.94 Web page

July 25, 2006 11-18 973.334.3100
The GARD 8000 C37.94 interface module is capable of performing 2 loop-back tests, Local loop-back
and Remote loop-back.
Configuration status information:
User Label:
Chassis Location:
Provides the physical location of the communications interface in the chassis. The chassis
Number of Data Channels:

Provides the number of 64kb/s channels in use by the C37.94 interface.
Timing Status:
Provides the communications channel timing source.
Major Alarm:
Minor Alarm:
Becomes active when the module is placed in loop-back mode.
C37.94 Remote Alarm:

Indicates that the C37.94 interface is receiving an alarm from a remote device.
Configured:
Service Enabled:
Channel Remote Alarm:

Indicates the C37.94 is receiving a remote channel alarm. The indicator will be green when no
alarm is received and red when an alarm is received.
Transmit Activity:
Indicates the presence of outgoing data from the communications bus to the C37.94 interface.
Receive Activity:
Indicates the presence of incoming data to the C37.94 interface.

July 25, 2006 11-19 973.334.3100
Loop-back Mode Tests:

Each loop-back mode has an Enable / Disable button associated with it. By clicking on the button the
user can enable different types of loop-back tests. When a test is disabled the assigned button is green,
when a test is enabled the button will be red. The test will not start until the execute button is selected..
There is a “Loop-Back Status” indicator that will turn red and display “ACTIVE” if any of the loop-
back tests are currently being run or will be green and “DISABLED” if all loop-back modes are
disabled. The Digital Interface will also issue a minor alarm while in loop-back and the Digital
Interface button on the inventory pages will be yellow.
The radio buttons next to each of the loop back tests allows the operator to enable or disable the test.
Click on the radio button to change the state and click on the “Execute” button to activate the test.
Local Loop-Back:
receive portion of the C37.94 interface module. The received data from the remote terminal is
redirected back to the local received data path. See figure 11-9.
GARD 8000 C37.94

TX Data TX Data Remote
Rx Data Terminal
Rx Data
If the C37.94 interface module is Internally timed:

value.
If the C37.94 interface is in Loop timing:

value.

July 25, 2006 11-20 973.334.3100
Remote Loop-Back:
The remote loop-back function directs the received data back out the C37.94 interface module to the
to the GARD 8000 system. See figure 11-10.
GARD 8000 C37.94

TX Data TX Data
Remote
Rx Data Terminal
Rx Data
• Click on the “Remote Loop-Back” button to enable.

Each loop-back mode has an enable disable button associated with it. By clicking on the button the
when a test is enabled the button will be red. The test will not start until the execute button is selected.
There is a “Loop Back” status indicator that will turn red and display “ACTIVE” if any of the loop-
back tests are currently being run or will be green and display “DISABLED” if all loop-back modes
are disabled. The C37.94 interface will also issue a minor alarm while in loop-back and the C37.94
interface button on the inventory pages will be yellow.
Exit Loop-back:
To exit a loop-back test:
“Execute”.
GARD Communications Bus:

Identifies what communications bus, 1 or 2, the Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX) data of the
C37.94 interface module is assigned to.
GARD Communications Direction:

Identifies what communications bus direction, A or B, the Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX)
data of the C37.94 interface module is assigned to.

July 25, 2006 11-21 973.334.3100
Channel Framing:
Indicates if channel system framing is enabled. Channel framing is automatically enabled for
channel bandwidths greater than 64kb/s
Channel Frame Lock:

Indicates if the system channel is locked on frame.
C37.94 Timing Lock:

Indicates if the C37.94 timing is locked.
C37.94 Frame Sync:

Indicates if the C37.94 frame is in synch.
Accumulated Errors:
Errors per Second:

Errored Seconds:

Provides the user a means to reset the error counters of the C37.94 interface module.

assignment of the multiprotocol module.

July 25, 2006 11-22 973.334.3100
11.4.3 G.703 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE
Figure 11-11. G.703 web page
The GARD 8000 G.703 interface module is capable of performing 2 loop-back tests, Local loop-back

July 25, 2006 11-23 973.334.3100
Configuration and alarm status information:( Read only)
User Label:
Chassis Location:
Timing Status:
Indicates the timing source setting for the communications interface. This can be,
Slave
Module gets it’s timing source from the Communications bus.
Master Internal
Module generates the timing source for the entire communications bus. One
module on the communications bus must be programmed as the Master clock
source. The master internal setting uses the modules internal clock to generate
the clock source.
Master Recovered
Module generates the timing source for the entire communications bus. One
module on the communications bus must be programmed as the Master clock
source. The master recovered setting uses a clock source recovered from an
incoming data source, a multiplexer as an example, to generate the
communications bus clock.
Configured:

July 25, 2006 11-24 973.334.3100
Major Alarm:
Minor Alarm:
Become active when a loss of frame is detected but no loss of synch. The difference between a
minor and a major alarm is the loss of synch. Green indicates that the Minor Alarm is not
active; red indicates that the Minor Alarm is active.
Remote Alarm:
Service Enabled:
PLL Lock:
not drifting with respect to each other, Green. Failure to properly lock could result in bit errors
and communication failure.
Transmit Activity:
Indicates the presence of outgoing data on the communications bus, Green. If no data is being
received the indicator will be Red.
Receive Activity:
Indicates the presence of incoming data on the communications bus, Green. If no data is being
received the indicator will be Red.
Octet Timing:
Indicates if Octet timing is enabled, Green, or disabled, Red.


July 25, 2006 11-25 973.334.3100
Local Loop-Back:
receive portion of the G.703 interface module. The received data from the remote terminal is
GARD 8000 G.703

Rx Data Terminal
Rx Data
If the G.703 interface module is Internally timed:

value.
If the G.703 interface is in Loop timing:

value.
Remote Loop-Back:
The remote loop-back function directs the received data back out the G.703 interface module to the
GARD 8000 G.703

TX Data TX Data
Remote
Rx Data Terminal
Rx Data
Click on the “Remote Loop-Back” button to enable.

Click on “Execute”.

July 25, 2006 11-26 973.334.3100
Exit Loop-back:
To exit a loop-back test,
“Execute”.
Additional status information:
GARD Communications Bus:

Identifies what communications bus, 1 or 2, the Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX) data of the
C37.94 interface module is assigned to.
GARD Communications Direction:

Identifies what communications bus direction, A or B, the Transmit (TX) and Receive (RX)
data of the C37.94 interface module is assigned to.
Interface Data Polarity:

Indicates the programmed Data polarity for the interface. Transmit and receive data can be set
for either “Normal” or “Inverted".
Accumulated Errors:
Errors per Second:

Errored Seconds:

Provides the user a means to reset the error counters of the multiprotocol module.


July 25, 2006 11-27 973.334.3100
11.4.4 LONG HAUL FIBER
Figure 11-14. Long Haul Fiber web page

July 25, 2006 11-28 973.334.3100
Configuration and alarm status:
User Label:
Module Type:
Identified the communications interface as a Fiber Optic interface module.
Chassis Location:
Configured:
Major Alarm:
Minor Alarm:
Remote Alarm:
Service Enabled:


July 25, 2006 11-29 973.334.3100

The GARD 8000 Fiber Optic interface module is capable of performing 2 loop-back tests, Local loop-
back and Remote loop-back.

Local Loop-Back:
receive portion of the Fiber Optic interface module. The received data from the remote terminal is
GARD 8000 Fiber I/O

Rx Data Terminal
Rx Data
If the Fiber optic interface module is Internally timed:

value.
If the Fiber Optic interface is in Loop timing:

• Set the Fiber Optic interface to internal timing on the settings page.
value.

July 25, 2006 11-30 973.334.3100
Remote Loop-Back:
The remote loop-back function directs the received data back out the Fiber Optic interface module to
the remote GARD 8000 system. The local transmit data is interrupted. The received data is passed
through to the GARD 8000 system. See figure 11-14.
GARD 8000 Fiber I/O

TX Data TX Data
Remote
Rx Data Terminal
Rx Data
Each loop-back mode has an enable disable button associated with it. By clicking on the button the
There is a “Loop Back Status” indicator that will turn red and display “ACTIVE” if any of the loop-
back tests are currently being run or will be green and display “Disabled” if all loop-back modes are
disabled.
Exit Loop-back:
To exit a loop-back test,
“Execute”.

July 25, 2006 11-31 973.334.3100
External Loop-Back:
The fiber optic interface can be looped back using a fiber optic patch cord. This will not require
activating any of the Loop-Back modes on the test page.
• Set the Fiber Optic interface to internal timing on the settings page.
• Label the existing fiber optic cables as the transmitter and receiver then remove the
fibers from the GARD 8000 chassis and install protective covers over the ends of the
fibers.
• Install the fiber optic patch cord between the TX and RX connectors on the Fiber Optic
interface.
• Set the devices mapped to the interface to be tested, TPS channels or Functional
modules, TX and RX addresses to the same value.
GARD 8000 Fiber Optic interface

TX TX
Remote
RX Terminal
Rx Data
Read only status information:
Frame Lock:
Indicates that the framer has properly locked on the received data’s framing bit.
Transmit Activity:
Indicates the presence of outgoing data on the communications bus.
Receive Activity:
Indicates the presence of incoming data on the communications bus.
PLL Lock:
not drifting with respect to each other. Failure to properly lock could result in bit errors and
communication failure.
Line Rate:
Provides the line rate, or bandwidth, of the Fiber Optic interface module to the external
communications equipment.
Interface Clock Polarity:

Give the programmed clock polarity for the interface. The transmit and receive clocks can be
set for either “Normal” or “Inverted".

July 25, 2006 11-32 973.334.3100
Timing Mode Setting:

Indicates the programmed setting for communications interface timing. The Status can be:
Primary Internal
Primary Recovered
Slave
Fallback Internal
Fallback Recovered
Fallback Communications bus1 clock
Fallback Communications bus2 clock
One communications interface in the GARD 8000 must be chosen as the primary clock source.
The remaining interfaces must be configured as slaves will synchronize their transmit clocks to
the primary source.
The primary clock source can either generate its own transmit clock source or generate one
based on a clock received from an external communications device or multiplexer.
If the status is Primary-Internal the communications interface clock will be generated by

GARD 8000 chassis.
If the status is Primary – Recovered the GARD 8000 communications interface clock will be
generated based on a received clock from an external multiplexer.
If the status is Slave the interface will receive its communications interface clock from the
primary interface within the chassis.
If the primary clock source has failed, the GARD 8000 has 4 fallback modes:
Internal – The transmit clock is generated by the interface module.
Recovered – The transmit clock will be based on the recovered received clock being
generated by the remote device.
Communications Bus 1- The transmit clock will be based on the GARD 8000’s
internal communications bus 1. This would provide all interface modules within a
GARD 8000 chassis with a synchronous clock source relative to the chassis
communications bus 1.
Communications Bus 2- The transmit clock will be based on the GARD 8000’s
internal communications bus 2. This would provide all interface modules within a
GARD 8000 chassis with a synchronous clock source relative to the chassis
communications bus 2.

July 25, 2006 11-33 973.334.3100
Active Timing Mode:

Indicates the active timing source for the communications interface. This is typically the same
as the Timing Mode setting unless there is a problem detected with the master clock source.
GARD Subsystem:
Identifies what communications bus, 1 or 2, the Fiber Optic interface module is assigned to.
Clock Mode:
Indicates if the interface is the communications system clock source, master, or receives its
communications clock, slave. One interface on each of the GARD 8000 communications buses
must be configured as the master source; the remaining interfaces must be configured as slaves.
Fall-back Timing:
Indicates the source of communications timing programmed if the master clock source fails.
Accumulated Errors:
Errors per Second:

Errored Seconds:

Provides the user a means to reset the error counters of the Fiber Optic interface module.

July 25, 2006 11-34 973.334.3100
11.4.5 T1/E1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE
Figure 11-18. T1/E1 Web page

July 25, 2006 11-35 973.334.3100
The GARD 8000 T1/E1 Interface module is capable of performing 2 loop-back tests, Local loop-back
Configuration and alarm status:
User Label:
Module Type:
Identified the communications interface as a T1/E1 interface.
Chassis Location:
Configured:
Indicates that the module is properly configured. Green indicates that the modules configured, red
indicates that the module is not configured.
Major Alarm:
Minor Alarm:
Remote Alarm:
Service Enabled:

disabled. The T1/E1 Interface will also issue a minor alarm while in loop-back and the Digital

July 25, 2006 11-36 973.334.3100
Local Loop-Back:
receive portion of the T1/E1 Interface module. The received data from the remote terminal is
GARD 8000 T1/E1

Rx Data Terminal
Rx Data
Remote Loop-Back:
The remote loop-back function directs the received data back out the T1/E1 interface module to the
GARD 8000 T1/E1

TX Data TX Data
Remote
Rx Data Terminal
Rx Data
Exit Loop-back:
To exit a loop-back test:
“Execute”.
• The interface will remain in loop-back until the execute button is pressed.
Read only status information:
Receive Yellow Alarm:

A Received Yellow Alarm is an alarm that is issued by a remote device indicating that the
remote device is receiving data errors. Green indicates that the interface is not receiving
Yellow Alarms; red indicates the interface is receiving Yellow Alarms.

July 25, 2006 11-37 973.334.3100
Receive Blue Alarm:

A Received Blue Alarm is an alarm that is issued from a higher order multiplexer to show that
communications is interrupted somewhere in the system. Green indicates that the interface is
not receiving Blue Alarms; red indicates the interface is receiving Blue Alarms.
Receive Carrier Loss:

Active when no carrier signal is detected or receiving all zeroes. Green indicates that the
interface is receiving a valid carrier signal; red indicates the interface is not receiving a valid
carrier signal.
Receive Synch Loss:

Active when the framer cannot synchronize to a signal. The signal is missing framing bits.
Green indicates that the interface is maintaining synchronization; red indicates the interface has
lost synchronization.
Enabled:
Indicates that the T1/E1interface is enabled, passing information to the remote terminal. Green
indicates that the T1/E1 interface is enabled, red indicates that the T1/E1 interface is not
enabled.
Errored Sec:
Counts the number of seconds a minor alarm was active since last reset. The counter
increments a maximum of one for each second that contains errors.
Sev. Err Sec:

Severely Erred Seconds: Counts the number of seconds a major alarm was active since last
reset. The counter increments a maximum of one for each second that contains errors.
Line Code Violation:

Bi-polar violation counter.
Path Code Violation:

Counts bad words based on cyclic redundancy Check bits (CRC) in the T1/E1 data stream.
Frame Bit Errors:

Counts the number of frame bit errors in Super Frame Mode. The GARD 8000 checks a
framing message to determine if the communications system is still properly framed. For each
invalid frame message the counter will increment.

Provides the user a means to reset the error counters of the Fiber Optic interface module.


July 25, 2006 11-38 973.334.3100
11.5 AUDIO TONE MODULE TEST
Figure 11-21. Audio Tone Protection Test Web page
Note: Do not use the REFRESH button on this web page, as it may cause unpredictable results.

July 25, 2006 11-39 973.334.3100
Audio Protection Test Definitions:
Station Label
Indicates the assigned Station Label.
Logic Bus Outputs

Can Be set to Normal or Disable. Allows a user to disable the logic bus drivers in the Audio Tone
module.
Internal loopback
Can be set to Normal or Enable. Allows a user to enable loopback tone signals inside the Audio Tone
module.
Chan 1 Tx State
Indicates the Channel 1 Tx State as follows: Modem, High Frequency, Low Frequency or Disabled.
Chan 1 Rx State
Indicates the Channel 1 Rx State as follows: Modem, High Frequency, Low Frequency or Disabled.
Chan 2 Tx State
Indicates the Channel 2 Tx State as follows: High Frequency, Low Frequency or Disabled.
Chan 2 Rx State
Indicates the Channel 2 Rx State as follows: High Frequency, Low Frequency or Disabled.
Chan 3 Tx State
Chan 3 Rx State
Chan 4 Tx State
Chan 4 Rx State
Modify Channel 1 Tx
Four selections are available as follows:
1) Normal: Channel 1 transmitter is operating normally.
2) Low: Channel 1 will transmit at the lower configured frequency.
3) High: Channel 1 will transmit at the higher configured frequency.
4) Off: Channel 1 transmitter is off.

July 25, 2006 11-40 973.334.3100
Audio Protection Test Definitions (continued):

Modify Channel 2 Tx
Modify Channel 3 Tx
Modify Channel 4 Tx
Remote Station Label

The Remote Station Label will be displayed if the Audio Tone module is configured to be a modem
and the modem is operating properly.
Modem Channel Okay

The Modem Channel OK indicator can be Green or Red.
1) Green indicates that modem communications are operational.
2) Red indicates that modem communications have failed or are not configured.
Remote Chan 1 Rx State

There are five possible Chan 1 Rx States as follows:
1) Low Freq: Remote receiver is receiving lower configured frequency.
2) High Freq: Remote receiver is receiving higher configured frequency.
3) Not Active: No tones are being received.
4) Disabled; Remote channel 1 receiver is disabled.
5) Modem Fail: Modem is not functioning.
Remote Chan 1 Rx Level

Displays the Remote Chan 1 receiver level in dB.

July 25, 2006 11-41 973.334.3100






Reset Date and Time

Indicates the Date and Time that the Reset Counter was reset to zero.
Remote Address Expected

Displays the expected remote address.
Remote Address Received

Displays the received remote address.

July 25, 2006 11-42 973.334.3100
Address Tests Failed Since Reset

Displays the number of address tests failed since reset.
Channel Delay Threshold

Displays the channel delay threshold.
Channel Delay Measured

Displays the measured channel delay.
Channel Tx Delay
Selects the Channel Tx delay from 1ms to 25ms in 1ms increments. When set to Normal the delay is
0ms.
Channel Delay Tests Failed Since Reset

Indicates the number of times that the channel delay has exceeded the threshold. The Channel Delay
Test is conducted approximately once per second.
Reset Counters
When box is checked the “Address Test Failed Counter” and the “Channel Delay Test Failed Counter”
will be reset.

July 25, 2006 11-43 973.334.3100
11.6 PLC MODULE TEST

From the pull down menu select “System Test” the following web page will appear. Then click on
Power Line Carrier to go to the PLC Module Test web page as shown in Figure 11-23.
Figure 11-22. System Testing web page with PLC Module (typical)

July 25, 2006 11-44 973.334.3100
Figure 11-23. PLC Module Testing web page

Note: Do not use the REFRESH button on this web page, as it may cause unpredictable results.

July 25, 2006 11-45 973.334.3100
PLC Module Test definitions:
TX Power
Reports the transmitted power in dBm.
RX Level
Reports the received level relative to the nominal level in dB.
Trans Hybrid Loss (FSK only)

Reports the Trans Hybrid loss in dB.
Reflected Power
Reports the Reflected power in %.
SNR
Reports the Signal To Noise Ratio in dB.
System Mode
Reports the system mode: on-off, 2F or 3F.
Checkback Mode (on-off only)

Reports the checkback mode: Disabled, Master or Remote.
SNR Alarm (Channel Fail)

Indicates whether an SNR alarm is detected: No Alarm, or Alarm
TX Fail Alarm
Indicates whether a Tx Fail alarm is detected: No Alarm, or Alarm
Reflected Power Alarm

Indicates whether a Reflected Power alarm is detected: No Alarm, or Alarm
RX Carrier Level Alarm

Indicates whether an Rx Carrier alarm is detected: No Alarm, or Alarm
Checkback Status
Indicates the status of the last checkback test.
Transmitter State
Indicates the transmitter state as follows:
In on-off mode: Carrier Off, Carrier On, or Carrier Stopped
In 2F mode: Guard Tx or, Trip Tx
In 3F mode: Guard Tx, Trip 1 Tx, or Trip 2 Tx

July 25, 2006 11-46 973.334.3100
PLC Module Test definitions (continued):
Receiver State
Indicates the receiver state as follows:
In on-off mode: No carrier received, or Block Rx
In 2F mode: Guard Rx, or Trip Rx
In 3F mode: Guard Rx, Trip 1 Rx, or Trip 2 Rx
Wideband Gain
Indicates the Wideband AGC’s gain.
RX Attenuation
Reports the Front End Attenuator’s attenuation.
Trip 1/Block RX count (c1)

In on-off mode indicates the Block Rx count.
Trip 2 RX count (FSK) (c2)

Trip key 1/Start 1 count (c3)

Trip Key 2/Stop 1 count (c4)

Channel Fail count (FSK)(c5)

Indicates the Channel Fail count.
Refl. PWR Fail (FSK)(c6)

In FSK mode indicates the Reflected Power Fail count.
Checkback tests Count

Indicates the total checkback test count.
Checkback Pass count

Indicates the total checkback pass count.
Checkback Fail count

Indicates the total checkback fail count.
Logic bus outputs

Enables or Disables the logic Bus outputs

July 25, 2006 11-47 973.334.3100
Force Carrier
Forces the carrier to one of six modes as follows: Normal, Off, On, Low Frequency, Center Frequency
or High Frequency.
Start Checkback/Remote Init

In Master mode it starts the checkback sequence.
In Remote mode it sends the Remote Initiate code to the master end.
Send checkback Code

Sends the selected checkback code to the far end as follows: 1–16, or none.
Send Hard Carrier Request

Sends the selected hard carrier request to the far end.
Reset all Counters

When box is checked, it resets all counters.
Recommission Unit
When box is checked, it recommissions the RX AGC and Attenuator.
Calibrate Tx Level
When box is checked, the TX Level Meter is calibrated..
Calibrate RPM
Calibrates the Reflected Power Meter as follows:
1) No: (does nothing)
2) Gain: calibrates the RPM gain
3) DC: calibrates the RPM DC offset.

July 25, 2006 11-48 973.334.3100
11.7 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL RELAY TEST

From the pull-down menu select “System Test” the following web page will appear. Then click on
Current Diff Relay to go to the Current Diff Test web page as shown in Figure 11-25.
Figure 11-24. System Testing web page with Current Diff Relay (typical)

July 25, 2006 11-49 973.334.3100
Figure 11-25. Current Diff Relay Testing web page

July 25, 2006 11-50 973.334.3100
Current Diff Relay Test definitions:

Invalid Configuration
When red this indicates that the module has received an invalid configuration message from the
controller and rejected it. If the module had previously received a valid configuration it will continue
to use the previous configuration.
Green indicates the last configuration was valid.
Module Out of Service
When red this indicates the module is not in service. This could be because the module has been
disabled by the user, the module is in the process of initializing, it has not received a valid
configuration, or it has detected a hardware problem and taken itself out of service. Green indicates
the module is in service.
When a module is out of service it does not provide any protection functions and does not drive either
the communications or logic busses in the GARD system.
Major Alarm
When red this indicates that the module has an active major alarm (see section Error! Reference
source not found.). Green indicates the absence of a major alarm.
Minor Alarm
When red this indicates that the module has an active minor alarm (see section Error! Reference
source not found.). Green indicates the absence of a minor alarm.
Local Test Mode Active
When red this indicates that the local relay is in test mode (see section Error! Reference source not
found.). Green indicates that the local relay is not in test mode.
Remote Test Mode Active
When red this indicates that the remote relay is in test mode (see section Error! Reference source not
found.). Green indicates that the remote relay is not in test mode.
Backup Mode Active
When red this indicates that the relay is in backup mode (see section Error! Reference source not
found.). Green indicates that the relay is not in backup mode.
Backup Guard Before Trip Not Satisfied
When red this indicates that the backup guard before trip criteria has not been satisfied and the relay
will not trip in backup mode. Green indicates that either the criteria have been satisfied or guard
before trip has been disabled by the user.
Stub Bus Mode Active
When red this indicates that the relay is in stub bus mode (see section Error! Reference source not
found.). Green indicates that the relay is not in stub bus mode.
Configuration
This will indicate if the relay is configured for single pole (“1-pole”) or three pole (“3-pole”)
operation.

July 25, 2006 11-51 973.334.3100
Current Diff Relay Test definitions (Continued):
Local and Remote Phase A, B, C, and Ground Active Trip

When red this indicates that the corresponding phase has an active trip. Green indicates the absence of
an active trip.
Current Diff Alarm Phase A, B, C, and Ground

When red this indicates that the corresponding phase has an active current differential alarm. Green
indicates the absence of a current differential alarm.
Phase Loss Alarms Phase A, B, and C

Red indicates that the relay has calculated a loss of current in the corresponding phase per the open
conductor or loss of load algorithms. Note that if the open conductor or loss of load algorithm is
configured by the user to cause a trip the condition will be transient and would not be expected to be
seen on the web page. Green indicates the algorithms have not calculated a phase loss condition.
Local and Remote Phase A, B, C, and Ground

The system provides an indication of the relative phasing of the phase currents. The phasing is
reported relative to the phase A current (no voltages are applied to the relay, only currents). The data
is only valid when the system is in steady-state and there are currents applied to the relay.
The local currents will be displayed as 0º, 120º, 240º or “Error” (not available). The remote currents
will be displayed as 180º, 300º, 60º or “Error”.
Phase A, B, C, and Ground current (Primary)

These indicate the current measured locally for each of the relay inputs. The measurements are in
ARMS and are referenced to the primary side of the CT.
Remote 1 Phase A, B, C, and Ground current (Primary)

These indicate the current measured at the remote relay for each of the relay inputs. The
measurements are in ARMS and are referenced to the primary side of the CT.
Address Fail
When red this indicates that the address received from the remote relay (set via the transmit address
setting on the remote relay) does not match the setting for the received address at the local relay. No
protection messages are passed between relays unless the addresses match. Green indicates the
addresses are correct.
Received Address
This displays the received address from the remote relay (which must match the local settings for
receive address). It is displayed to help diagnose addressing problems, which may be caused by
network misconnections.
July 25, 2006 11-52 973.334.3100

Relay Configuration Mismatch
There are a number of key setup and configuration parameters that need to be the same on both ends of
the line being protected. The current diff relay compares these parameters and if they do not match
this indicator is set to red. When they match the indicator is set to green.
The parameters that must match include:
• 50 Hz /60 Hz line
• Two-terminal / three terminal relay configuration
• Single-pole / three-pole configuration
• The local and remote CT factor settings in both relays must agree
Pong-Pong Alarm
When red this indicates that the ping-pong measurements made by the local and remote relay do not
match. The ping-pong is a bidirectional measurement and should provide the same result when either
relay initiates the test. If the two measurements differ by more than 3 ms the error flag is set.
Green indicates the ping-pong tests are the same.
Comms Alarm
When red this indicates an alarm condition in the communications channel. Green indicates the
absence of an alarm condition.
Comms Failure
When red this indicates a failure in the communications channel. Green indicates the absence of a
failure condition.
Guard Before Trip Not Satisfied

When red this indicates that the guard before trip criteria has not been satisfied and the relay will not
trip in primary protection mode. Green indicates that either the criteria have been satisfied or guard
Reset Oscillography
Check this box to clear the oscillography records saved in the relay (See Error! Reference source not
found.). Click Run Test.
Reset SOE
Check this box to clear the SOE records saved in the relay (See Error! Reference source not found.).
Click Run Test.

When red this indicates that the local relay is in test mode (see section Error! Reference source not
found.). Green indicates that the local relay is not in test mode.

July 25, 2006 11-53 973.334.3100

When red this indicates that the remote relay is in test mode (see section Error! Reference source not
found.). Green indicates that the remote relay is not in test mode.
Local Test Mode Command

When red this indicates that the local relay was commanded to enter test mode and will be blocked
from tripping the breaker. Green indicates that the local relay is not in test mode.
Remote Test Mode Command

When red this indicates that the remote relay was commanded to enter test mode and will be blocked
from tripping the breaker. Green indicates that the remote relay is not in test mode.
Enter Test Mode

Check this box to enter test mode, this will block tripping and issue a minor alarm. Click “Run Test.”
Exit Test Mode

Check this box to restore trips to the Current Diff Module and exit test mode. Click “Run Test.”
The following will give the listed components installed version.
Relay ACTEL Firmware Version
Relay Board Version
PIC Software Version
I/O ACTEL Firmware Version
I/O Hardware Version

July 25, 2006 11-54 973.334.3100
Audio Tone
SECTION 12. AUDIO TONE
Table 12-1. Audio Tone Logic Block Diagrams
Logic Diagram Figure See page
Single 1 2 3 4 12-1 12-3
Single 1 2, Dual 3 4 12-2 12-5
Channel 1 As A Modem 12-3 12-7
Dual 1 2, Dual 3 4 12-4 12-9
Simple 12-5 12-11

September 19, 2005 12-1 973.334.3100
Audio Tone

blank

September 19, 2005 12-2 973.334.3100
Audio Tone
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4

0 Guard 7 Guard 14 Guard Guard
21
1 Trip 8 Trip 15 Trip Trip
22
2 Level Alarm 9 Level Alarm 16 Level Alarm Level Alarm
23
Rx 3 Levels Valid To Rx 10 Levels Valid To Rx 17 Levels Valid To Levels Valid To
Analog Rx Rx 24
Logic Analog Rx Logic Analog Rx Logic Analog Rx Logic
4 Freq Low Bus 11 Freq Low Bus 18 Freq Low Freq Low
Bus 25 Bus
5 Freq High 12 Freq High 19 Freq High Freq High
26
6 Noise 13 Noise 20 Noise Noise
27
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3

Function Function Function
Channel 4
Function
On On On On
0 3
From From From 6
From 9
Boost Boost Boost Boost
Logic 1 Tx Analog Tx Logic 4 Tx Analog Tx Logic Tx Logic
7 Analog Tx 10 Tx Analog Tx
Bus RTS Bus RTS Bus RTS Bus RTS
2 5 8 11
Figure 12-1. Audio Tone Logic Block Diagram,

Single 1 2 3 4

September 19, 2005 12-3 (12-4 Blank) 973.334.3100
Audio Tone
Channel 1 Channel 2 Dual 3 & 4
0 Guard 7 Guard 30 Dual Guard (3&4)

1 Trip 8 Trip 31 Dual Trip (3&4)
2 Level Alarm 9 Level Alarm 16 Level Alarm 3
Rx 3 Levels Valid To Rx 10 Levels Valid To Rx 3 17 Dual Level Valid (3&4)
Analog Rx Logic Analog Rx Logic Analog Rx 3
4 Freq Low Bus 11 Freq Low Bus 18 Freq Low Ch3
5 Freq High 12 Freq High 19 Freq High Ch3
6 Noise 13 Noise 20 Noise Ch3
To
Logic
Bus
30 Dual Guard (3&4)
Channel 1 Channel 2 31 Dual Trip (3&4)
Function Function
On On 23 Level Alarm 4
From 0 3
Boost From Boost
Logic Tx Tx Rx 4 24 Dual Level Valid (3&4)
1 Analog Tx Logic 4 Analog Tx
Bus RTS Bus RTS 25 Freq Low Ch4
2 5 Analog Rx 4
26 Freq High Ch4
27 Noise Ch4
Dual 3 & 4
Function
On Analog Tx 3
From 14
Logic Boost
15 Tx
Bus CH3 RTS
Analog Tx 4
8
CH4 RTS
11

Single 1 2 Dual 3 4

September 19, 2005 12-5 (12-6 Blank) 973.334.3100
Audio Tone
0 NA
1 NA
2 Level Alarm 1
To
Analog Rx 3 NA Logic
(From A Bus
Modem) 4 Address Fail
5 Channel Delay Fail
6 Modem Fail
Channel 1
Not Used
0
Not Used Modem
1 Tx Analog Tx
Not Used
2
Note: This will work if Channel 1 is set up as a “Single In” Logic, such as
Single 1, 2, 3, 4
Single 1, 2 Dual 3, 4

Channel 1 Used as a Modem

September 19, 2005 12-7 (12-8 Blank) 973.334.3100
Audio Tone
Channel 1 & 2 Channel 3 & 4
28 Dual Guard (1&2) 30 Dual Guard (3&4)
29 Dual Trip (1&2) 31 Dual Trip (3&4)
2 Level Alarm 1 16 Level Alarm 3
Rx 1 3 Dual Level Valid (1&2) Rx 3 17 Dual Level Valid (3&4)
4 Freq Low 1 18 Freq Low 3
5 Freq High 1 19 Freq High 3
6 Noise 1 20 Noise 1
To To
Analog Rx 1 & 2 Logic Analog Rx 3 & 4 Logic
Bus Bus
28 Dual Guard (1&2) 30 Dual Guard (3&4)
29 Dual Trip (1&2) 31 Dual Trip (3&4)
9 Level Alarm 2 23 Level Alarm 4
Rx 2 10 Dual Level Valid (1&2) Rx 4 24 Dual Level Valid (3&4)
11 Freq Low 2 25 Freq Low 4
12 Freq High 2 26 Freq High 4
13 Noise 2 27 Noise 4
Channel 1 & 2 Channel 3 & 4

Function Function
On On
12 14
Boost Boost
From 13 Tx Analog Tx From 15 Tx Analog Tx
Logic Chan 1 RTS Logic Chan3 RTS
Bus 2 Bus 8
Chan 2 RTS Chan4 RTS
5 11

Dual 1 2 Dual 3 4

September 19, 2005 12-9 (12-10 Blank) 973.334.3100
Audio Tone
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4
0 AM1 High 8 AM1 High 16 AM1 High 24 AM1 High

1 AM2 High 9 AM2 High 17 AM2 High 25 AM2 High
2 AM1 Low 10 AM1 Low 18 AM1 Low 26 AM1 Low
Rx 3 AM2 Low To Rx 11 AM2 Low To Rx 19 AM2 Low To Rx 27 AM2 Low To
Analog Rx Logic Analog Rx Logic Analog Rx Logic Analog Rx Logic
4 FD High Bus 12 FD High Bus 20 FD High Bus 28 FD High Bus
5 FD Low 13 FD Low 21 FD Low 29 FD Low
6 FM+SN Noise 14 FM+SN Noise 22 FM+SN Noise 30 FM+SN Noise
7 LVL Alarm 15 LVL Alarm 23 LVL Alarm 31 LVL Alarm
Function Channel 1 Channel 2 Function Channel 3 Channel 4

Function Function
On On On On
0 4 8 12
Boost Boost Boost Boost
From 1 Tx Analog Tx From 5 Tx Analog Tx From 9 Tx Analog Tx From 13 Tx
RTS RTS RTS Analog Tx
Logic Logic Logic Logic RTS
Bus 2 6 Bus 10 14
Bus Bus
RSE RSE RSE RSE
3 7 11 15
Figure 12-5. Audio Tone Logic Block Diagram, Simple

September 19, 2005 12-11 (12-12 Blank) 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
SECTION 13. DISTANCE RELAY
13.1 DESCRIPTION
The GARD 8000 Distance Module incorporates all functions required for a complete line protection.
Using the most advanced digital technology, based on microprocessors and DSPs, it provides distance
protection, together with current, voltage and frequency protection functions, recloser, synchronism
check, supervision functions and metering.
13.2 GENERAL OVERVIEW

The GARD 8000 Distance Module provides
• Distance measuring elements (with their supervisory units, such as detectors for close onto
fault, remote breaker opening, loss-of-potential, power swing and load encroachment)
• Voltage measuring elements (phase over/undervoltage and ground overvoltage)
• Current measuring elements (instantaneous and time overcurrent, directional or non directional
phase and ground overcurrent, stub bus and thermal protection, open phase and breaker failure
detectors)
• Frequency measuring elements (over/underfrequency and rate of change of frequency)
The distance measuring elements may be used in Pilot Protection Schemes to speed up remote-end
tripping. In addition, pilot scheme logic for the negative sequence and ground directional elements are
also available. These can use the same channel as the distance protection pilot logic, or separate
channels.
The GARD 8000 Distance Module can be configured for single pole tripping and logic for series
compensated line applications is included.
The GARD 8000 Distance Module recloser function provides up to 3 reclose attempts. The recloser
can be supervised by the built-in synchronism check function, or by the use of an external device.
Breaker monitoring functions are provided to detect an excessive number of tripping operations and
excessive breaking current.
Other GARD 8000 Distance Module features are digital fault records (oscillography), fault reports
(with fault location) and event records.
Note: Throughout this section reference is made to Gard web pages; example: GARD web page
3.8.1. These are unique numbers appearing in the title bar of the web page and are not to
be confused with section numbers.

July 25, 2006 13-1 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.3 SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
13.3.1 ANALOG CURRENT INPUTS

Phase currents, polarization current and residual current from parallel line:
Rated AC Current IN = 5 A or 1 A (selectable)

4 x INominal (continuously)
50 x INominal (for 3 s)
100 x INominal (for 1 s)
Dynamic Limit:
250 x INominal
Current Circuit Burden:

< 0.2 VA (IN = 5 A or 1 A)
13.3.2 ANALOG VOLTAGE INPUTS

Rated AC Voltage:
Vn = 110 V @ 50 Hz
Vn = 120 V @ 60 Hz

300 Vac (continuously)
600 Vac (for 10 s)
Voltage Circuit Burden:

0.55 VA (110/120 Vac)
13.3.3 MEASUREMENT ACCURACY

Measured Currents (IA, IB, IC, INPAR, IPOL):
±0.1 % or ±2mA (whichever is greater) for IN = 1A or 5A
Calculated currents (I1, I2 or I0):

±0.3 % or ±8 mA (whichever is greater) for IN = 1A or 5A
Measured Voltages (VA, VB, VC, VSYNC):

±0.1% or ±50 mV (whichever is greater)
Calculated Voltages:
(V1, V2 and V0): ±0.3% or ±100 mV (whichever is greater)
Angle:
0.4º
July 25, 2006 13-2 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Frequency:
±0,005 Hz
Pick Up and Drop Out Accuracy for Overcurrent Units:

Overcurrent units:
Pick up and drop out (IN = 5A) ±3 % of setting or ±50 mA (whichever is greater)
Pick up and drop out (IN = 1A) ±3 % of setting or ±10 mA (whichever is greater)
Time measurement:
Fixed Time: ±1 % of setting or ±20 ms (whichever is greater)
Inverse Time: Class 2 (E = 2 %)
(UNE 21-136, CEI 255 and ANSI C37.60)
Repeatability:
Operating Time: < 2% or 25 ms (whichever is greater)

July 25, 2006 13-3 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.3.4 DISTANCE RELAY OPERATING TIMES
Three Phase
25
20
milliseconds
15 SIR=0.1
SIR=1
10 SIR=10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
% of set reach
Figure 13-1. Three Phase Operating Times
Phase-Phase
30
25
20
milliseconds
SIR=0.1
15 SIR=1.0
SIR=10
10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
% of set reach
Figure 13-2. Two Phase Operating Times

July 25, 2006 13-4 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Single Phase
25
20
milliseconds
15 SIR=0.1
SIR=1
10 SIR=10
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
% of set reach
Figure 13-3. Single Phase Operating Times

July 25, 2006 13-5 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.4 STANDARDS AND TYPE TESTS
The equipment satisfies the standards indicated below. When not specified, the standard is UNE
21-136 (IEC-60255).
Insulation Test (Dielectric Strength) IEC -60255-5

Between all circuit terminals and ground: 2 kV, 50/60 Hz, for 1 min; or
2.5 kV, 50/60 Hz, for 1 s
Between all circuit terminals: 2 kV, 50/60 Hz, for 1 min; or

2.5 kV, 50/60 Hz, for 1 s
Measurement of Insulation Resistance IEC -60255-5

Common mode: R ≥ 100 mΩ or 5µA
Differential mode: R ≥ 100 kΩ or 5mA
Voltage Impulse Test IEC 60255-5 (UNE 21-136-83/ 5)

Common mode (analog inputs, DIs, DOs and OP): 5 kV; 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J
Differential mode (DOs): 1 kV; 1.2/50 µs
Differential mode (Power supply): 3 kV; 1.2/50 µs
1 MHz Burst Test IEC 60255-22-1 Class III (UNE 21-136-92/22-1)

Common mode: 2.5 kV
Differential mode: 2.5 kV
Fast Transient Disturbance Test IEC 60255-22-4 Class IV (UNE 21-136-92/22-4), (IEC 61000-4-4)
4 kV ± 10%
Radiated Electromagnetic Field Disturbance IEC 61000-4-3 Class III

Amplitude modulated (EN 50140) 10 V/m
Pulse modulated (EN 50204) 10 V/m
Conducted Electromagnetic Field Disturbance (IEC 61000-4-6) Class III (EN 50141)
Amplitude modulated 10 V
Electrostatic Discharge IEC 60255-22-2 Class IV (UNE 21-136-92/22-2), (IEC 61000-4-2)

On contacts ±8 kV ± 10%
In air ±15 kV ± 10%
Surge Immunity Test IEC-61000-4-5 (UNE 61000-4-5)

(1.2/50µs – 8/20µs)
Between conductors: 4 kV
Between conductors and ground: 4 kV

July 25, 2006 13-6 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Radiated Electromagnetic Field Disturbance at Industrial Frequency (50/60Hz)
IEC 61000-4-8
Radio Frequency Emissivity EN 55022 (radiated)

and EN 55011 (conducted)
Temperature IEC 60068-2

Cold work IEC 60068-2-1 -5ºC, 2 hours
Cold work limit conditions IEC 60068-2-1 -10ºC, 2 hours
Dry heat IEC 60068-2-2 +45ºC, 2 hours
Dry heat limit conditions IEC 60068-2-2 +55ºC, 2 hours
Humid heat IEC 60068-2-78
+40ºC, 93% relative humidity, 4 days
Quick temperature changes IEC 60068-2-14 / IEC 61131-2
IED open,
-25ºC for 3 h and
+70ºC for 3 h (5 cycles)
Changes in humidity IEC 60068-2-30 / IEC 61131-2
+55ºC for 12 h, and +25ºC for 12 h (6 cycles)
Endurance test +55ºC during 1000 hours
Operating range: From -40ºC to +85ºC
Storage range: From -40ºC to +85ºC
Humidity: 95% (non-condensing)
Climate Test (55º, 99% humidity, 72 hours)
Time/current Characteristic ANSI C37.60 Class II
Power Supply Interference and Ripple < 20% and 100 ms

IEC 255-11 / UNE 21-136-83 (11)
Inverse Polarity of the Power Supply IEC 61131-2
Resistance of Ground Connection IEC 61131-2

< 0.1 Ω
Gradual Stop/ Start Test IEC 61131-2 (Test A)
Surge Capacity IEC 60044-1
Vibration Test (sinusoidal) IEC 60255-21-1 Class I
Mechanical Shock and Bump Test IEC 60255-21-2 Class I
External Protection Levels IEC 60529 / IEC 60068-2-75 (IP30 / IK07)

July 25, 2006 13-7 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.5 CONFIGURATION
13.5.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW

The GARD 8000 System differs from most conventional multifunctional distance relays in that rather
than supplied with very complex generic default logic, GARD 8000 is intended to be easily customized
to meet your specific application requirements.
For most applications, the factory default logic may be suitable but RFL will modify it free-of-charge
as required.
The advantage with custom logic is that the user interface is greatly simplified as the web pages for
logic settings are automatically created to correspond to the actual logic.
While the logic is custom made, a considerable amount of settings and field flexibility can be built-in
to cover a large number of application needs. For instance, mapping of inputs and outputs, inverters for
inputs and outputs, timers, communications channel selections, etc. can all be made on web pages as
settings.
The distance relay in itself is highly programmable but the interaction in the system has been kept to a
minimum in order to simplify the system user interface. Recognizing the need for different
functionality for different users and/or applications, the logic signals (in and out) exchanged between
the system logic and the distance protection module can be custom specific.
13.5.2 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

A GARD 8000 System can be built up with Functional Modules as required for a specific application,
with selectable number of inputs, outputs and communications interfaces. Each GARD 8000 is
delivered with chassis drawings, showing the actual hardware and the factory default configuration.
These drawings are delivered as a paper copy and also in pdf format inside the GARD itself for print-
out or viewing on your PC.
The following overview describes a factory default configuration of a 3U chassis built up of:

• Display Board with base Teleprotection System
• RS 449 communications port on the rear of the PS module (included in Base System)
• C37.94 communications module in rear Slot 1
• Distance Protection module in front and rear Slot 3
• 12 output module (6 solid state and 6 relay out) in rear Slot 4

July 25, 2006 13-8 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Display with TPS (Slot 1) Distance Relay (Slot 3)

Single Power Supply
PS 48/
125V
Chassis Front View

C37.94 Comms Module (Slot 1)
Input Module (Slot 2) RS-449
+ +
- -
Chassis Rear View Single Power Supply

Output Module (Slot 4)
Figure 13-4. Front and Rear views of 3U chassis with Distance Relay (Typical)
External DC connections are made as shown in the following the schematic for the example system
configuration.
Rear Slot 4
1
2 OUT 1
Rear Slot 1
3
OUT 2
4
13 5
IN 1 OUT 3
14 6
15 7
IN 2 OUT 4
16 8
17 9 OUT 5
IN 3 10
18 Rear Slot 2
19 11
IN 4 OUT 6
20 12
21 13 13
IN 5 IN 7 OUT 7
22 14 14
23 15 15
IN 6 IN 8 OUT 8
24 16 16
Figure 13-5. External connections for the 3U chassis

July 25, 2006 13-9 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
The inputs (Slot 2) and outputs (Slot 4) are user configurable and is setup using a web page:
Figure 13-6. Input Mapping web page
The number of physical inputs depends on how many input modules were ordered. The logic inputs
(shown on the left on the input mapping page) are determined in the Orcad logic, and can be
customized for your application. The above example shows logic with a distance relay and an 8
function teleprotection system.
Outputs are configured in a similar way. Again, number of physical outputs depends on how many
output modules that were ordered. The logic outputs (shown on the left on the output mapping page as
‘source’) are determined in the Orcad logic, and can be customized for your application. The example
below shows logic with a distance relay and an 8 function teleprotection system.

July 25, 2006 13-10 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-7. Output Mapping web page
The rear terminals on Slot 3 are assigned as follows:
Rear Slot 3
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
IN- IN+ IC- IC+ IB- IB+ A- A+ SYNC VC- VC+ VB- VB+ VA- VA+
Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis Chassis V- SYNC Chassis
GND GND GND GND GND PARALLEL V+ GND
NI+
PARALLEL
NI-
Figure 13-8. Distance relay rear connections
The terminals for the distance relay are fixed, and should be wired according to the AC schematic:

July 25, 2006 13-11 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
GARD 8000
Slot 3
2
VA VA
3
4
VB VB
5
6
VC VC
7
VN
8
V sync
9 check
13
IA
IA
14
16
IB
IB
17
19
IC
IC
20
IN
10 I sensitive
neutral or
current
11 polarizing
52
22
I neutral from
parallel line
23 for fault
locator
Figure 13-9. AC Schematic for GARD 8000 Distance Protection

July 25, 2006 13-12 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
To fully understand what the inputs and outputs are doing in the system logic, the actual System Logic
Diagram should be consulted. This is supplied at the rear of the GARD 8000 manual and is also
available for download or viewing from the GARD file operations menu.
For example, the distance relay inputs are shown as follows
Figure 13-10. Distance Relay Inputs, schematic diagram
The logic inside the ‘distance’ block on the schematic is fixed as delivered from the factory but can be
custom ordered for your application. While the proven logic in the distance relay is not changed, the
input and output signals of the distance block can be customized to provide different functionality for
different applications. A complete list of available signals is provided at the end of this section.
The physical inputs (in this example Inputs 1 – 12) are mapped on the webpage to logic inputs. Any
physical input can be freely assigned to any number of logical inputs. For example, the default distance
relay configuration uses 52b inputs per phase. One external combined 52b input can be mapped to all
three logical inputs. On the other hand, if a breaker with single pole operating mechanism is used, the
three physical inputs can be wired individually to GARD 8000 inputs to provide pole discrepancy
protection.
The outputs are mapped in a similar way.

July 25, 2006 13-13 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-11. Distance Relay Outputs, schematic diagram
The logical outputs available are defined in the Orcad logic and can be customized for your
application. A logic output can be mapped to a single physical output only, and that is why some logic
signals are duplicated in the logic. In case there is a need for more alarm or trip contacts, this can be
simply provided by a custom made logic for your needs.
The GARD 8000 System provides 20 user configurable LED’s. Each LED is tri-colored; red, yellow,
and green. Each color can individually represent a logic function. In case more than one color is active,
red will override yellow and green and yellow will override green.
The distance relay logic also includes a block named ‘LED MAPPING SIGNALS’. These signals are
created for simple mapping to the front panel LED’s. Again, custom made logic can provide other
and/or more signals as required.
Each LED function can be given a label. The front panel label can also be custom made by a print-out
of the supplied template. While there is limited space for text on the front, the web page user labels can
contain up to 32 characters.

July 25, 2006 13-14 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.5.3 LOGIC SIGNALS AVAILABLE FROM THE DISTANCE

PROTECTION MODULE
The distance relay module creates a number of logic signals from its measuring element and protection
logic. The GARD 8000 System logic uses these signals to perform trip and pilot scheme operations.
The default logic is bringing out some of the available signals, but all of the signals shown in the logic
diagrams in Section 7 are available for custom logic.

July 25, 2006 13-15 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.6 DISTANCE RELAY SETTINGS
13.6.1 GENERAL SETTINGS

GARD web page 3.7
Description Range Units Step Default

Enable distance protection
Sets all distance protection module functions ON or OFF No - Yes - 1 No
RX Logic Bus Start Bit
Used by system logic. Factory set. 3-511 - 1 300
RX Logic Bus Length
TX Logic Bus Start Bit
TX Logic Bus Length
Active Setting Group Group 1
Determines setting group in use by the distance protection Group 2
module Group 3
Group 4 - 1 Group 1
Line CT ratio
Current transformer ratio for the protected line. For
example, a 2000/5 A CT has the ratio 400. 1 - 3000 - 1 1
Line PT Ratio
Voltage transformer ratio for the protected line. For
example, a 115,000/120 V PT has the ratio 1125. 1 - 10000 - 1 1
Bus PT Ratio
Voltage transformer ratio for a bus voltage used for the
synchro-check function. For example, a 115,000/120 V PT
has the ratio 1125. 1 - 10000 - 1 1
Polarization CT ratio
Current transformer ratio for a CT used for current ground
polarization. 1 - 3000 - 1 1
Parallel line CT Ratio
Current transformer ratio for the CT on a parallel line used
for mutual coupling compensation for the fault locator. 1 - 3000 - 1 1
Excessive Trips
Maximum number of breaker trips during a half hour
interval. Performed by the breaker monitoring function. 1 - 40 - 1 40
I² Sum Alarm
Alarm level for accumulated breaking current. 0 - 99999.99 kA² 0.01 99999.99
I² Dropout Value
The dropout value is used to reset the counter following
breaker maintenance (then set to 0). It can also be set to a
value corresponding to estimated breaking current at the
time GARD 8000 is put into service, enabling a ‘start’ value
for the counter other than 0. 0 - 99999.99 kA² 0.01 0
Capacitive VT
Enable (Yes) or disable (No) the use of CCVT filter for the
distance relay. No - Yes - 1 No

July 25, 2006 13-16 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.6.2 LINE PROTECTION SYSTEM SETTINGS

GARD 8000 web page 3.7.8

Line Pos.Seq. Impedance Magnitude
Positive sequence impedance magnitude for the protected line
in secondary ohms 0.01 - 100 Ohm 0.01 1.25
Line Pos.Seq. Impedance Angle
Positive sequence impedance angle for the protected line in
degrees 5 - 90 deg 1 75
Pos. Seq. Angle Zone 2
Positive sequence impedance angle for the protected line
sections for Zone 2 in degrees 5 - 90 deg 1 75
Zone 1 k0 Factor
Zero sequence compensation factor magnitude for Zone 1.
k0=Z0/Z1 (unitless) 0.5 - 10 - 0.01 2
Line Zero Seq. Impedance Angle
Zero sequence impedance angle for the protected line in
degrees 5 - 90 deg 1 75
Zone 2 k0 Factor
k0=Z0/Z1 (unitless) 0.5 - 10 - 0.01 2
Zone 2 Zero Seq. Angle
Zero sequence compensation factor angle in degrees for Zone
2. Lk0=LZ0 - LZ1 5 - 90 deg 1 75
Zone 3 k0 Factor
k0=Z0/Z1 (unitless) 0.5 - 10 - 0.01 2
3. Lk0=LZ0 - LZ1 5 - 90 deg 1 75
Zone 4 k0 Factor
k0=Z0/Z1 (unitless) 0.5 - 10 - 0.01 2
4. Lk0=LZ0 - LZ1 5 - 90 deg 1 75
Local Pos.Seq. Source Impedance Magnitude
Positive sequence impedance magnitude for the local source, in
secondary ohms. Used for the fault locator. As the source
impedance value may differ depending on system
configuration, use the typical value. 0.01 - 100 Ohm 0.01 1.25
Local Pos.Seq. Source Impedance Angle
Positive sequence impedance angle for the local source, in
degrees. Used for the fault locator. As the source impedance
value may differ depending on system configuration, use the
typical value. 5 - 90 deg 1 75

July 25, 2006 13-17 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

Local Zero Seq. Source Impedance Magnitude
Zero sequence impedance magnitude for the local source, in
Local Zero Seq. Source Impedance Angle
Zero sequence impedance angle for the local source, in
Remote Pos.Seq. Source Impedance Magnitude
Positive sequence impedance magnitude for the remote source,
in secondary ohms. Used for the fault locator. As the source
Remote Pos.Seq. Source Impedance Angle
Positive sequence impedance angle for the remote source, in
Remote Zero Seq. Source Impedance Magnitude
Zero sequence impedance magnitude for the remote source, in
Remote Zero Seq. Source Impedance Angle
Zero sequence impedance angle for the remote source, in
Parallel Line Pos.Seq. Magnitude
Positive sequence impedance magnitude for a parallel line in
secondary ohms. Used for mutual compensation for the fault
locator. 0.01 - 10000 Ohm 0.01 1.25
Parallel Line Pos. Seq, Angle
Positive sequence impedance angle for a parallel line in
degrees. Used for mutual compensation for the fault locator. 5 - 90 deg 1 75
Parallel Line Zero Seq. Magnitude
Zero sequence impedance magnitude for a parallel line in
secondary ohms. Used for mutual compensation for the fault
locator. 0.01 - 10000 Ohm 0.01 1.25
Parallel Line Zero Seq. Angle
Zero sequence impedance angle for a parallel line in degrees.
Used for mutual compensation for the fault locator. 5 - 90 deg 1 75
Fault Locator Units
Determines display of fault locator calculation in % (% of
Length) or in kilometers/miles (Length Units) as set for the Length Units
parameter ‘Length Units’. % of Length - 1 % of Length
Line Length
Total line length in kilometers or miles, as set for the parameter
‘Length Units’. 0 - 400 - 0.01 100
Indication Zone
Determines if fault location should be calculated and displayed
for faults on the protected line only (In) or for all faults that are In
detected by the distance relay (In & Out) In & Out - 1 In

July 25, 2006 13-18 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

Length Units
Determines display of fault locator calculation in kilometers or
miles, when parameter ‘Fault Locator Units’ is set to ‘Length Kilometers
Units’. Miles - 1 Kilometers
Mutual Coupl. Factor
Mutual coupling factor to a parallel line for mutual
compensation of the fault locator. The coupling factor is
determined as |Z0/Zm0| 0 - 10 Ohm 0.01 0
Mutual Coupl. Angle
Mutual coupling angle to a parallel line for mutual
compensation of the fault locator. The angle is determined as
LZ0 - LZm0 5 - 90 deg 1 25
Mut Coupl. Comp. Enable
Turns mutual coupling compensation ON or OFF. For mutual
coupling, the neutral ct current from the parallel line needs to
be wired into the GARD 8000 relay. No - Yes - 1 No
Pick Up Report
This setting determines whether fault records should be
triggered from pick-up of any element (YES) or following a
trip only (NO). No - Yes - 1 No
Three-Phase Trip
Selects 3-pole tripping (Yes) or single pole tripping (No) No – Yes - 1 No
1 Pole Trip 67G
Selects 3-pole tripping (No) or single pole tripping (Yes) from
the directional ground element No – Yes - 1 No
Ground Units Z1 Disable -
Enables trip operation by Zone 1 ground distance units Enable - 1 Disable
Phase Units Z1 Disable -
Enables trip operation by Zone 1 phase distance units Enable - 1 Disable
Remote Breaker Open Disable -
Enables the remote open breaker logic. Enable - 1 Disable
Close Into Fault Disable -
Enables the close into fault logic. Enable - 1 Disable
Stub Bus Prot. Disable -
Enables the stub bus protection logic. Enable - 1 Disable
Thermal Image Disable -
Enables the thermal image element. Enable - 1 Disable
Open Phase Detector Disable -
Enables open phase/broken conductor detector logic. Enable - 1 Disable
Pole Discrepancy Disable -
Enables the pole discrepancy logic. Enable - 1 Disable
Out of Step Trip Disable -
Enables out of step trip operation. Enable - 1 Disable

July 25, 2006 13-19 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

50P-1 Disable -
Enables trip by Instantaneous Phase Overcurrent, step 1. Enable - 1 Disable
50P-2 Disable -
50P-3 Disable -
51P-1 Disable -
Enables trip by Phase Timeovercurrent, step 1. Enable - 1 Disable
51P-2 Disable -
51P-3 Disable -
50G-1 Disable -
Enables trip by Instantaneous Ground Overcurrent, step 1. Enable - 1 Disable
50G-2 Disable -
50G-3 Disable -
51G-1 Disable -
Enables trip by Ground Timeovercurrent, step 1. Enable - 1 Disable
51G-2 Disable -
51G-3 Disable -
50Q-1
Enables trip by Instantaneous Negative Sequence Overcurrent, Disable -
step 1. Enable - 1 Disable
50Q-2
50Q-3
51Q-1 Disable -
Enables trip by Negative Sequence Timeovercurrent, step 1. Enable - 1 Disable
51Q-2 Disable -
51Q-3 Disable -
59-1 Disable -
Enables trip by Phase Overvoltage, step 1. Enable - 1 Disable
59-2 Disable -
59-3 Disable -
27-1 Disable -
Enables trip by Phase Undervoltage, step 1. Enable - 1 Disable
27-2 Disable -
27-3 Disable -
59G-1 Disable -
Enables trip by Ground Overvoltage, step 1. Enable - 1 Disable
59G-2 Disable -
Enables trip by Ground Overvoltage, step 2. Enable - 1 Disable

July 25, 2006 13-20 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

81 UNDFREQ1 Disable -
Enables trip by Underfrequency, step 1. Enable - 1 Disable
81 OVERFREQ1 Disable -
Enables trip by Overfrequency, step 1. Enable - 1 Disable
81 FREQCHG1 Disable -
Enables trip by Rate-of-change of Frequency, step 1. Enable - 1 Disable

July 25, 2006 13-21 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.6.3 CURRENT ELEMENTS

13.6.3.1 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS

GARD 8000 web page 3.7.1.5

67P Characteristic angle
Characteristic angle for phase directional elements 0 - 90 deg 1 45
67G Characteristic angle
Characteristic angle for ground directional elements 0 - 90 deg 1 45
Characteristic angle 67Q
Characteristic angle for negative sequence directional elements 0 - 90 deg 1 45
67P Minimum voltage
Minimum polarizing voltage threshold for phase directional
elements 0.05 - 10 V 0.01 0.2
67G Minimum voltage
Minimum polarizing voltage threshold for ground directional
elements 0.05 - 10 V 0.01 0.2
67Q Minimum voltage
Minimum polarizing voltage threshold for negative sequence
directional elements 0.05 - 10 V 0.01 0.2
Resid. Volt. Compensation
Sets a factor to amplify available zero sequence voltage
polarization level 0 - 50 - 0.01 0
Negative Sequence Voltage Compensation
Sets a factor to amplify available zero sequence voltage
polarization level 0 - 50 - 0.01 0
Loss of polarization blocking
Select whether to block overcurrent element when polarization
voltage is below set thresholds (Yes) or to allow the elements
to operate non-directional (No). No - Yes - 1 No
Coordination time
This is a timer setting for transient block logic when the
directional overcurrent elements (50P and/or 50Q/G) are used
in a permissive pilot scheme. 0 – 30 ms 1 0
13.6.3.2 PHASE ELEMENTS


Enable instantaneous phase (50P-1)
Enable instantaneous phase overcurrent element, step 1 No - Yes - 1 No
50P-1 Pick-Up
Pick-up level for instantaneous phase overcurrent element, step
1 0.05 - 150 A 0.01 5
50P-1 Time-Delay
Time delay for instantaneous phase overcurrent element, step 1 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
50P-1 Torque Control Direction NO
Directional control of instantaneous phase overcurrent element, Forward
step 1 Reverse - 1 NO
50P-1 Torque Control Type
Selection to use directional element or Zone 2 for torque 67P
control of the instantaneous phase overcurrent element, step 1 Z2 - 1 67P
July 25, 2006 13-22 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

50P-2 Pick-Up
2 0.05 - 150 A 0.01 5
50P-2 Time-Delay
50P-3 Pick-Up
3 0.05 - 150 A 0.01 5
50P-3 Time-Delay
Enable timeovercurrent phase (51P-1)
Enable phase timeovercurrent element, step 1 No - Yes - 1 No
51P-1 Pick-Up
Pick-up level for phase timeovercurrent element, step 1 0.10 - 125 A 0.01 2
(see time
51P-1 Time Curve curve
Sets the time/current characteristic for phase timeovercurrent selection Definite
element, step 1 below) - 1 Time
51P-1 Time Dial
Set the time dial for the selected curve 0.05 - 10 - 0.01 1
51P-1 Time Delay
Sets the minimum time delay for the curves with Time Limit
(TL) for the phase timeovercurrent element, step 1 0.05 - 300 s 0.01 0.05
NO
51P-1 Torque Control Direction Forward
Directional control of phase timeovercurrent element, step 1 Reverse - 1 NO
control of the phase timeovercurrent element, step 1 Z2 - 1 67P
51P-2 Pick-Up
(see time
51P-2 Time Dial
Set the time dial for the selected curve 0.05 - 10 - 0.01 1

July 25, 2006 13-23 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

51P-2 Time Delay
NO
51P-3 Pick-Up
(see time
51P-3 Time Dial
Sets the time dial for the selected curve 0.05 - 10 - 0.01 1
51P-3 Time Delay
NO
* Time Curve Selection

Definite Time
Inverse IEC
Very Inverse IEC
Extr. Inverse IEC
Long Time Inv. IEC
Short Time Inv. IEC
Inverse IEC Minimum Time (TL)
Very Inverse IEC Minimum Time (TL)
Extr. Inverse IEC Minimum Time (TL)
Long Time Inv. IEC Minimum Time (TL)
Short Time Inv IEC Minimum Time (TL)
Mod. Inverse IEEE
Very Inverse IEEE
Extr. Inverse IEEE
Inverse IEEE Minimum Time (TL)
Very Inverse IEEE Minimum Time (TL)
Extr. Inverse IEEE Minimum Time (TL)
Mod. Inverse ANSI
Inverse ANSI
Very Inverse ANSI
Extr. Inverse ANSI
Short Time Inv. ANSI
Mod. Inverse ANSI Minimum Time (TL)
Inverse ANSI Minimum Time (TL)

July 25, 2006 13-24 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.6.3.3 GROUND ELEMENTS


Enable instantaneous ground (50G-1)
Enable instantaneous ground overcurrent element, step 1 No - Yes - 1 No
50G-1 Pick-Up
Pick-up level for instantaneous ground overcurrent element, step 1 0.600 - 150 A 0.01 5
50G-1 Time-Delay
Time delay for instantaneous ground overcurrent element, step 1 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
50G-1 Torque Control Direction NO
Directional control of instantaneous ground overcurrent element, Forward
50G-1 Torque Control Type 67G
Selection to use directional element or Zone 2 for torque control of 67Q
the instantaneous ground overcurrent element, step 1 Z2G - 1 67N
50G-2 Pick-Up
50G-2 Time-Delay
50G-3 Pick-Up
50G-3 Time-Delay
Enable timeovercurrent ground (51G-1)
Enable ground timeovercurrent element, step 1 No - Yes - 1 No
51G-1 Pick-Up
Pick-up level for ground timeovercurrent element, step 1 0.600 - 125 A 0.01 1
51G-1 Time Curve (see time
Sets the time/current characteristic for ground timeovercurrent curve
element, step 1 selection Definite
below) - 1 Time
51G-1 Time Dial
51G-1 Time Delay
Sets the minimum time delay for the curves with Time Limit (TL)
for the ground timeovercurrent element, step 1 0.05 - 300 A 0.01 0.05
the ground timeovercurrent element, step 1 Z2G - 1 67N
July 25, 2006 13-25 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

NO
51G-1 Torque Control Direction Forward
Directional control of ground timeovercurrent element, step 1 Reverse - 1 NO
Enable timeovercurrent ground 51G-2)
51G-2 Pick-Up
below) - 1 Time
51G-2 Time Dial
51G-2 Time Delay
for the ground timeovercurrent element, step 2 0.05 - 300 s 0.01 0.05
Directional control of ground timeovercurrent element, step 2 Forward
Reverse - 1 NO
Enable timeovercurrent ground (51G-3)
51G-3 Pick-Up
below) - 1 Time
51G-3 Time Dial
51G-3 Time Delay
for the ground timeovercurrent element, step 3 0.05 - 300 s 0.01 0.05
Directional control of ground timeovercurrent element, step 3 Forward
Reverse - 1 NO

Definite Time
Inverse IEC
Very Inverse IEC
Extr. Inverse IEC
Long Time Inv. IEC
Short Time Inv. IEC
Mod. Inverse IEEE
Very Inverse IEEE
July 25, 2006 13-26 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Extr. Inverse IEEE

Mod. Inverse ANSI
Inverse ANSI
Very Inverse ANSI
Extr. Inverse ANSI
13.6.3.4 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE ELEMENTS


Enable instantaneous negative sequence (50Q-1)
Enable instantaneous negative sequence overcurrent element,
step 1 No - Yes - 1 No
50Q-1 Pick-Up
Pick-up level for instantaneous negative sequence overcurrent
element, step 1 0.25 - 150 A 0.01 10
50Q-1 Time-Delay
Time delay for instantaneous negative sequence overcurrent
element, step 1 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
50Q-1 Torque Control Direction NO
Directional control of instantaneous negative sequence Forward
overcurrent element, step 1 Reverse - 1 NO
50Q-1 Torque Control Type
Selection to use directional element or Zone 2 for torque control
of the instantaneous negative sequence overcurrent element, 67Q
step 1 Z2 - 1 67Q
50Q-2 Pick-Up
element, step 2 0.25 - 150 A 0.01 10
50Q-2 Time-Delay
element, step 2 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
step 2 Z2 - 1 67Q
50Q-3 Pick-Up
element, step 3 0.25 - 150 A 0.01 10
50Q-3 Time-Delay
element, step 3 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
July 25, 2006 13-27 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

step 3 Z2 - 1 67Q
Enable timeovercurrent negative sequence (51Q-1)
Enable negative sequence timeovercurrent element, step 1 No - Yes - 1 No
51Q-1 Pick-Up
Pick-up level for negative sequence timeovercurrent element,
step 1 0.50 - 25 A 0.01 2
51Q-1 Time Curve * (see time
Sets the time/current characteristic for the negative sequence curve
timeovercurrent element, step 1 selection Definite
below) - 1 Time
51Q-1 Time Dial
51Q-1 Fixed Time
(TL) for the negative sequence timeovercurrent element, step 1 0.05 - 300 s 0.01 0.05
Selection to use directional element or Zone 2 for torque control 67Q
of the negative sequence timeovercurrent element, step 1 Z2 - 1 67Q
Directional control of negative sequence timeovercurrent Forward
element, step 1 Reverse - 1 NO
51Q-2 Pick-Up
step 2 0.50 - 25 A 0.01 2
below) - 1 Time
51Q-2 Time Dial
51Q-2 Fixed Time
51Q-3 Pick-Up
step 3 0.50 - 25 A 0.01 2
below) - 1 Time
July 25, 2006 13-28 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

51Q-3 Time Dial
51Q-3 Fixed Time

Definite Time
Inverse IEC
Very Inverse IEC
Extr. Inverse IEC
Long Time Inv. IEC
Short Time Inv. IEC
Mod. Inverse IEEE
Very Inverse IEEE
Extr. Inverse IEEE
Mod. Inverse ANSI
Inverse ANSI
Very Inverse ANSI
Extr. Inverse ANSI

July 25, 2006 13-29 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.6.3.5 MISC. CURRENT ELEMENTS


46 Open phase enable
Enables the Broken Conductor (open phase) function No - Yes - 1 No
46 Open phase pick up
Pick-up setting for broken conductor function. The pick-up level
is set as I2/I1, the ratio of negative sequence and
positive sequence current. 0.05 - 0.4 I2/I1 0.01 0.05
46 Open phase time delay
Time delay for trip for broken conductor 0.05 - 300 s 0.01 0.05
46 Minimum load
Sets minimum load level for the broken conductor function.
If the positive sequence current is below this level, the broken
conductor function is blocked. 0.10 - 5 A 0.01 0.5
Forward Sup. 1-Ph
Minimum operating current for forward phase-
ground impedance zone operation 0.20 - 7.5 A 0.01 1
Forward Sup. 2-Ph
Minimum operating current for forward phase-
phase and three-phase impedance zone operation 0.20 - 7.5 A 0.01 1
Reverse Sup. 1-Ph
Minimum operating current for reverse phase-ground
impedance zone operation. When using Zone 4 reverse
looking for directional comparison blocking (DCB) pilot
schemes, the reverse sensitivity should be set higher (lower
setting of the current supervision element) than the forward
elements to ensure proper coordination. 0.20 - 7.5 A 0.01 1
Reverse Sup. 2-Ph
Minimum operating current for forward phase-phase and
three-phase impedance zone operation. When using Zone
4 reverse looking for directional comparison blocking (DCB)
pilot schemes, the reverse sensitivity should be set higher
(lower setting of the current supervision element) than the
forward elements to ensure proper coordination. 0.20 - 7.5 A 0.01 1
49 Thermal Img. Enable
Enables the thermal image function No - Yes - 1 No
49 Heating constant
Heating constant for the line. 0.50 - 300 min 0.01 0.50
49 Cooling constant
Cooling constant for the line. 0.50 - 300 min 0.01 0.50
49 Max. Sust. Curr.
Maximum allowed continuous load current on the line 1 - 12.5 A 0.5 5
49 Alarm Level
Thermal image alarm level 50 - 100 % 1 50
49 Thermal Memory
If thermal memory is set to Yes, the function retains
the last calculated thermal level in memory and uses
this as start level when the GARD 8000 is put back
into service. No - Yes - 1 No
49 Reset Threshold
Thermal image reset level in % of alarm level. 50 - 100 % 1 80

July 25, 2006 13-30 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.6.4 BREAKER FAILURE


Trip Seal-In
Enables trip seal for breaker failure relay trips No - Yes - 1 No
Fail to Open Time
Time following breaker open command until fail to open
condition is declared 0.02 - 5 s 0.01 0.02
Fail to Close Time
Time following breaker close command until fail to close
condition is declared 0.02 - 5 s 0.01 0.02
Sync Check Supervision
Enables synchro-check supervision of breaker close command No - Yes - 1 No
50BF Breaker Failure Enable
Enables breaker failure function No - Yes - 1 No
Single Phase PU
Pick up level on per phase basis for single pole trip 0.10 – 12 A 0.01 1
BF three phase Pick Up
Pick-up level on per phase basis for three pole trip 0.10 - 12 A 0.01 1
BF Ground Pick Up
Pick up level for 3I0 breaker failure measurement 0.10 - 6 0.01 0.5
1 Pole BF Delay
Single pole breaker failure trip delay 0.05 - 2 s 0.01 0.5
3 Pole BF Delay
Three pole breaker failure trip delay 0.05 - 2 s 0.01 0.5
3 Pole No OC BF Delay
Breaker failure time delay for the non-overcurrent supervised
function 0.05 - 2 s 0.01 0.5
1 Pole Retrip Delay
Time delay for single pole re-trip breaker failure function. 0.05 - 2 s 0.01 0.5
3 Pole Retrip Delay
Time delay for three pole re-trip breaker failure function. 0.05 - 2 s 0.01 0.5
3 Pole Retrip NoOC Dly
Breaker failure re-trip time delay for the non-overcurrent
supervised function 0.05 - 2 s 0.01 0.5
Enable Remote open breaker detection
Enables loss-of-load function No - Yes - 1 Yes
Remote Open breaker Time Delay
Time delay for loss-of-load trip 0 - 2000 ms 1 0
Detection by cap current
For long lines where there is sufficient capacitive line
charging current, this current can be used to supervise the loss-
of-load function. In that case, use the setting ‘Yes’ No - Yes - 1 No
Min current level
Minimum current level for line charging current.
When the measured current is below this value, the
breaker pole is determined to be open. 0-5 A 0.01 0.75

July 25, 2006 13-31 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.6.5 DISTANCE ELEMENTS

13.6.5.1 ZONE 1 TO ZONE 4


Zone 1 Enable
Enable operation of Zone 1 distance No – Yes - 1 Yes
Zone 1 direction Reverse
Zone 1 measuring direction, forward or reverse. Forward - 1 Forward
Zone 1 reach
Zone 1 reactive reach in secondary ohms, at set characteristic line
angle. 0.01 - 100 Ohm 0.01 1
1-Ph Resistive Limit Zone 1
Resistive reach in secondary ohms for Zone 1 phase-ground
quadrilateral characteristic. Note that the setresistance is the direct
loop resistance, without zero sequence compensation factor
applied. For phase A, the resistance at the R-axis is Rset = VA/IA. 0.01 – 100 - 0.01 4
Resistive reach in secondary ohms for Zone 1 phase-phase
quadrilateral characteristic. Note that the set resistance is the
phase-phase resistance. For phase A to B, the resistance at the R-
axis is Rset = VAB/IAB. 0.01 - 100 - 0.01 4
Zone 1 ground timer
Zone 1 ground elements time delay 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
Zone 1 phase timer
Zone 1 phase elements time delay 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
Zone 1 quad tilt time delay
Time delay for the load compensation of the reactive
quadrilateral line. After this time, the load compensation is turned
off and the line reverts to being parallel with the R-axis.
Recommended time delay is 0.08 s (80 ms). 0 - 0.5 s 0.01 0
Zone 2 Enable
Zone 2 reach
angle. 0.01 - 100 Ohm 0.01 2
quadrilateral characteristic. Note that the set resistance is the direct
applied. For phase A, the resistance at the R-axis is Rset = VA/IA. 0.01 - 100 - 0.01 4
Zone 2 ground timer
Zone 2 ground elements time delay 0 - 300 s 0.01 0.5
Zone 2 phase timer
Zone 2 phase elements time delay 0 - 300 s 0.01 0.5

July 25, 2006 13-32 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

Zone 3 Enable
Zone 3 reach
angle. 0.01 – 100 Ohm 0.01 3
applied. For phase A, the resistance at the R-axis is Rset = VA/IA. 0.01 – 100 - 0.01 4
Zone 3 ground timer
Zone 3 ground elements time delay 0 - 300 s 0.01 1
Zone 3 phase timer
Zone 3 phase elements time delay 0 - 300 s 0.01 1
Zone 4 Enable
Zone 4 direction
Zone 4 measuring direction, forward or reverse. Note that when
the pilot logic “Directional Comparison Blocking’, “Weak Infeed”
and/or ‘Transient Block” is used, Zone 4 is always reverse, Reverse
regardless of this setting. Forward - 1 Forward
Zone 4 reach
angle. 0.01 - 100 Ohm 0.01 4
applied. For phase A, the resistance at the R-axis is Rset = VA/IA. 0.01 - 100 - 0.01 4
Zone 4 ground timer
Zone 4 ground elements time delay 0 - 300 s 0.01 1.5
Zone 4 phase timer
Zone 4 phase elements time delay 0 - 300 s 0.01 1.5
Gnd. Distance Char.
Selection of mho, reactance (quadrilateral), mho AND reactance,
mho OR reactance for the ground distance elements. Note that the Reactance,
setting ‘Mho AND reactance’ requires both characteristics to Mho,
operate for a trip to be produced. ‘Mho OR reactance’ produces a Reactance
trip from either element. For applications when a larger resistive and MHO,
reach as compared to the reactive reach is required, the setting Reactance
‘Reactance’ or ‘Reactance OR Mho’ should be used. OR MHO - 1 Mho

July 25, 2006 13-33 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

Phase Distance Char. Reactance,
Selection of mho, reactance (quadrilateral), reactance AND mho, Mho,
reactance OR mho the phase distance elements. Reactance
and MHO,
Reactance or
MHO - 1 Mho
Characteristic Angle
Characteristic line angle in degrees for the directional element for
the quadrilateral characteristic. It is typically set at 75 degrees. See
Description of Operation for definition of this angle. 0 - 90 deg 1 75
Lagging phase for PH-PH-G faults
For two-phase-to-ground faults, the leading phase-ground element
may overreach and is not allowed to measure. The lagging phase
can be allowed to operate as it will underreach and is enabled by
this setting. Two phase to ground faults will generally by detected
by phase-phase elements, but in case high resistance is expected
for these type of faults, the setting should be YES. No - Yes - 1 No
Distance Block Timer
When a digital input is used for blocking the distance protection,
this timer provides drop-out delay of the block signal. Not used in
factory default logic. 0 - 1000 ms 50 150
Duration memory
This setting determines the polarization voltage memory
duration, in cycles. Recommended setting is 2 cycles. 2 - 80 Cycles 1 2
Voltage Threshold
Voltage threshold for the memory polarization. When the
measured voltage is below the set threshold, memory is used. 0.1 – 5 V 0.1 1
13.6.5.2 PILOT (COMMS SCHEME)


Open Brkr Carrier sending
Enables open breaker carrier send. Used with Permissive schemes
(PUTT, POTT, DCUB, DTT). No - Yes - 1 Yes
Security Time
Sets a pick-up delay for a carrier receive signal for DTT schemes
and weak feed logic. This will ensure that no spurious carrier
signal will cause a false trip at the receiving end. 0 - 50 ms 1 0
Weak infeed Undervoltage Level
Sets the undervoltage threshold for Weak Infeed tripping. 15 - 70 V 0.01 45
LOP Block Weak Infeed
Enables block of weak infeed tripping by loss-of-potential block. No - Yes - 1 No
Distance Pilot Scheme Step
Selects the type of scheme used. Distance
Zone 1
Extension
PUTT
DTT
POTT
DCUB Step
DCB - 1 Distance
Dist Carrier Time
Sets the drop-out delay for carrier send. Used with Permissive
schemes (PUTT, POTT, DCUB, DTT). 0 - 200 ms 10 50

July 25, 2006 13-34 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

Dist Coord Time
Sets a coordination drop-out time delay for the carrier start signal
from the reverse blocking zone, providing transient block function. 0 - 50 ms 1 25
DCB dist delay time
Sets the time delay for Directional Comparison Blocking (DCB)
trip signal. This is the amount of time the forward pilot zone will
wait to receive a blocking carrier signal before trip is released. 0 - 200 ms 10 50
Z1 Ext. Block Time
This is the time following breaker closing for when Zone 1
extension will become active. This prevents trip from an
overreaching zone following reclosing. Used for Zone 1 Extension
scheme. 0.05 - 300 s 0.01 10
Overreaching Zone
Determines which zone is used as overreaching Pilot zone (Z2 or Zone 2
Z3). Zone 3 - 1 Zone 2
Distance Weak Infeed Logic Output None
Set whether to use weak infeed echo (echo), week infeed trip and Echo
echo (ECHO+TRIP) or no weak infeed logic (None) ECHO+TRI
P - 1 None
Enable Dist. Curr. Rev. trans. Blocking
Enable Transient Block Logic for the overreaching permissive
pilot schemes (POTT, DCUB) No - Yes - 1 No
Carrier Fast Sending
This setting is applicable to Directional Comparison Blocking
(DCB) only and enables to select Carrier Start from non-
directional
phase and ground overcurrent elements, in addition to the reverse
blocking zone. The 50P-1, 50G-1 elements are utilized for this
function. No - Yes - 1 No
67 Pilot Scheme None
Selects the type of pilot scheme to use for the directional PUTT
overcurrent elements. DTT
POTT
DCUB
DCB - 1 None
67 Carrier Time
Sets the time delay for carrier send. Used with Permissive schemes
(PUTT, POTT, DCUB, DTT). 0 - 200 ms 10 50
67 Coord Time
Sets the coordination drop-out time delay for the carrier start
signal. Used with Blocking schemes (DCB). 0 - 50 ms 1 25
DCB 67 delay time
Sets the time delay for Directional Comparison Blocking (DCB)
trip signal. This is the amount of time the forward overcurrent
element zone will wait to receive a blocking carrier signal before
trip is released. 0 - 200 ms 10 50
67 Weak Infeed Logic Output None
Set whether to use weak infeed echo (echo), week infeed trip Echo
and echo (ECHO+TRIP) or no weak infeed logic (None) for the ECHO+TRI
overcurrent directional comparison pilot schemes. P - 1 None
Enable O/C curr. Rev. trans. blocking
Enable Transient Block Logic for the overcurrent directional
comparison pilot schemes. No - Yes - 1 No

July 25, 2006 13-35 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.6.5.3 POWER SWING BLOCK AND OTHER ADVANCED FUNCTIONS


Enable OOS Block
Enables Out-of-Step Blocking No - Yes - 1 No
Enable OOS Trip
Enables Out-of-Step Tripping No - Yes - 1 No
Blinders angle
Characteristic angle for the out-of-step blinders 0 - 90 deg 1 75
Forward ext reach
Forward reach of the outer (external) upper blinder 0.1 - 100 Ohm 0.01 10
Forward med reach
Forward reach of the middle (medium) upper blinder 0.1 - 100 Ohm 0.01 5
Forward int reach
Forward reach of the inner (internal) upper blinder. The inner
blinder is used for out-of-step tripping only. 0.1 - 100 Ohm 0.01 1
Reverse ext reach
Reverse reach of the outer (external) lower blinder 0.1 - 100 Ohm 0.01 10
Reverse med reach
Reverse reach of the middle (medium) lower blinder 0.1 - 100 Ohm 0.01 5
Reverse int reach
Reverse reach of the inner (internal) lower blinder. The inner
Right ext resistance
Resistance reach of the outer (external) right blinder 0.1 - 500 Ohm 0.01 10
Right med resistance
Resistance reach of the middle (medium) right blinder 0.1 - 500 Ohm 0.01 5
Right int resistance
Resistance reach of the inner (internal) right blinder. The inner
Left ext resistance
Resistance reach of the outer (external) left blinder 0.1 - 500 Ohm 0.01 10
Left med resistance
Resistance reach of the middle (medium) left blinder 0.1 - 500 Ohm 0.01 5
Left int resistance
Resistance reach of the inner (internal) left blinder. The inner
I1 supervision
The minimum required positive sequence current for release of
out-of-step measuring elements. 0.2 - 50 A 0.01 1
OOS Time
The swing detection time between the outer (external) and middle
(medium) blinders. 0-1 s 0.002 0.03
OOS reset time
Reset time of the out-of-step condition. If the impedance locus
remains in the distance zone operating characteristic longer than
this time, out-of-step blocking is inhibited and the relay will trip. 0.1 - 5 s 0.1 1
OOS trip type
Out-of-step tripping can be selected on the Way-In (Fast trip) or Fast trip
Way-Out (Slow trip). Slow trip - 1 Slow trip
Fast trip time
Time delay for the Way-In (Fast trip) trip operation. 0-1 s 0.002 0.05
OOS cond reset time
Reset time for the out-of-step condition following a swing locus
moving outside the outer (external) blinder. 0.02 - 1 s 0.002 0.05

July 25, 2006 13-36 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

Distance Protection scheme out of step block Disable -
Enable block of pilot distance scheme by out-of-step block. Enable - 1 Disable
Z1 Out of Step Block Disable -
Enable block of Zone 1 distance scheme by out-of-step block. Enable - 1 Disable
Enable block of Zone 2 distance elements by out-of-step block. Enable - 1 Disable
Enable Arc Detector
Enables arc detection function No - Yes - 1 No
Arc detector pick up
Arc current detector threshold 0.05 - 1 s 0.01 0.05
Arc detector time
Arc current detector trip delay 0.1 - 2 s 0.01 0.1
Enable Fuse Failure
Enable fuse failure (loss-of-potential) function No - Yes - 1 No
LOP Input DropOut Time
Drop out delay for external loss-of-potential detection signal 0 - 1000 ms 50 150
Enable Block
Enable blocking of distance protection zone elements by the loss-
of-potential function No - Yes - 1 No
Enable load encroachment
Enable the load encroachment logic No - Yes - 1 No
Right Area Limit
Load encroachment forward load area resistive reach setting 0.1 - 100 Ohm 0.01 65
Left Area Limit
Load encroachment reverse load area resistive reach setting 0.1 - 100 Ohm 0.01 65
Right Area Angle
Load encroachment forward load area angle setting 0 - 90 deg 1 20
Left Area Angle
Load encroachment reverse load area angle setting 0 - 90 deg 1 20
Open Pole Selection
Open pole can be selected to used three 52b (or 52a) inputs
(setting ‘3 inputs’) or using one input that can either be an OR of
the 52b contacts or an AND from the 52b contacts. The factory
default logic is supplying individual 52b signals to the distance 3 inputs,
relay and this setting should be ‘3 inputs’ 2 inputs - 1 3 inputs
A Pole Open Current
Phase A current needs to be below this setting for an open pole to
be declared 0.200 – 4 A 0.01 0.2
B Pole Open Current
Phase B current needs to be below this setting for an open pole to
be declared 0.200 – 4 A 0.01 0.2
C Pole Open Current
Phase C current needs to be below this setting for an open pole to
be declared 0.200 – 4 A 0.01 0.2
Enable Stub Bus
Enable stub bus protection. No - Yes - 1 No
Stub Bus Prot. PU
Pick-up current threshold for stub bus trip. 0.10 - 150 A 0.01 20
Stub Bus Prot. Dly.
Trip time delay for stub bus trip. 0 - 100 s 0.01 0

July 25, 2006 13-37 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

Serial Comp. Enable
Enables series compensation logic No – Yes - 1 No
Series Comp. Delay
Drop-out delay of the series compensation transient block signal 0 – 100 s 0.01 32
Series Comp Dist Msk
Determines if Zone 4 reverse element is used for the transient
block logic No – Yes - 1 No
Series Comp GND O/C Msk
Determines if ground overcurrent reverse element (67G/50G-3) is
used for the transient block logic No – Yes - 1 No
Series Comp NS Msk
Determines if negative sequence reverse element (67Q/50Q-3) is
Series Comp Ph O/C Msk
Determines if phase overcurrent reverse element (67/50P-3) is
Enable Close onto Fault
No - Yes - 1 No
CIFT Sup. Zone Zone 2
Selects the distance zone used for close-into-fault (Z2 or Z3). Zone 3 - 1 Zone 2
CIFT O/C Pick Up
Overcurrent threshold for Close-Into-Fault operation. 1 - 30 A 0.05 10
Z1 Ext. After Recl.
Selects if the ‘CIFT Sup. Zone’ is allowed to trip following
reclosing. No - Yes - 1 No
2nd Harm. Restraint
Set the % for 2nd harmonic restraint following breaker closing. 0 - 50 % 1 0
Enable Pole Discrepancy
Enables pole discrepancy logic. No - Yes - 1 No
Pole discrep delay
Time delay for pole discrepancy trip. 0 - 50 s 0.01 2
81 Inhibit Voltage
Inhibit voltage for frequency measurements. When the voltage is
below the set threshold, all frequency elements are disabled. 2 - 150 V 1 40
81 Pick Up Time
Activation time (pick-up time) set in number of half cycles. This
setting determines the number of half cycles used for measuring
the frequency before a frequency condition can be declared. 3 - 30 scycs 1 6
81 Dropout Time
De-activation time (drop-out time) set in number of cycles. This
determines the number of cycles used to determine that the
frequency has returned to a non-faulted condition. When the
frequency units have picked up but not yet tripped, there could be
a change in frequency of a short duration and this setting prevents
the units from dropping out for such a condition. 0 - 10 cycls 1 0
81M-1 Overfreq. Enable
Enables overfrequency, step 1 No - Yes - 1 No
81M-1 Overfreq. Pickup
Pick-up threshold for overfrequency, step 1 40 - 70 Hz 0.01 70
81M-1 Overfreq. Delay
Pick-up time delay for overfrequency, step 1 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
81M-1 Dropout Time
Drop-out time delay for overfrequency, step 1 0 - 300 s 0.01 2

July 25, 2006 13-38 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

81M-2 Dropout Time
81M-3 Dropout Time
81m-1 Underfreq. Enable
Enables underfrequency, step 1 No - Yes - 1 No
81m-1 Underfreq. Pickup
Pick-up threshold for underfrequency, step 1 40 - 70 Hz 0.01 40
81m-1 Underfreq. Delay
Pick-up time delay for underfrequency, step 1 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
81m-1 Dropout Time
Drop-out time delay for underfrequency, step 1 0 - 300 s 0.01 2
81m-2 Dropout Time
81m-3 Dropout Time
81D-1 ROC Freq. Enable
Enables rate-of-change of frequency, step 1 No - Yes - 1 No
81D-1 Underfrec Pickup
Pick-up threshold for underfrequency for the rate-of-change of
frequency element, step 1 40 - 70 Hz 0.01 40
81D-1 ROC Freq. Pickup
Pick-up threshold for rate-of-change of frequency, step 1 -10 - -0.5 Hz/s 0.01 -1
81D-1 ROC Freq. Delay
Pick-up time delay for rate-of-change of frequency, step 1 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
81D-1 Dropout Time
Drop-out time delay for rate-of-change of frequency, step 1 0 - 300 s 0.01 2

July 25, 2006 13-39 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

81D-2 Dropout Time
81D-3 Dropout Time
13.6.6 FAULT RECORDER (DFR)


Trip Required
Determines whether a digital fault record should be saved
following a trip only (Yes) or from pick-up of the trig elements
(No). No - Yes - 1 Yes
Continuous Mode
If set to ‘Yes’, the DFR starts when a trig is activated and keeps
recording until the trig elements reset. When set to ‘No’, the
record starts when a trip is activated and keeps recording until
the pre-set ‘Length’ time is reached. No - Yes - 1 No
Pretrig. Length
Number of pre-fault cycles in the record. 0 - 25 cycls 1 5
Length
Number of fault cycles in the record when ‘Continuous Mode’ is set to ‘No’. 5 - 240 cycls 1 5
VA
Enables recording of analog channel voltage phase A No - Yes - - Yes
VB
Enables recording of analog channel voltage phase B No - Yes - - Yes
VC
Enables recording of analog channel voltage phase C No - Yes - - Yes
VSYNC
Enables recording of analog channel voltage synchronizing input No - Yes - - Yes
IA
Enables recording of analog channel current phase A No - Yes - - Yes
IB
Enables recording of analog channel current phase B No - Yes - - Yes
IC
Enables recording of analog channel current phase C No - Yes - - Yes
IPOL
Enables recording of analog channel current polarizing input No - Yes - - Yes
IGPAR
Enables recording of analog channel neutral current from parallel line No - Yes - - Yes

July 25, 2006 13-40 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.6.7 OSCILLOGRAPHY MASK


50P-1
Instantaneous phase overcurrent, step 1 No - Yes - - No
50P-2
50P-3
50G-1
Instantaneous ground overcurrent, step 1 No - Yes - - No
50G-2
50G-3
50Q-1
Instantaneous negative sequence overcurrent, step 1 No - Yes No
50Q-2
50Q-3
51P-1
Phase time overcurrent, step 1 No - Yes No
51P-2
51P-3
51G-1
Ground time overcurrent, step 1 No - Yes No
51G-2
51G-3
51Q-1
Negative sequence time overcurrent, step 1 No - Yes No
51Q-2
51Q-3
27P-1
Phase undervoltage, step 1 No - Yes No
27P-2
27P-3
59P-1
Phase overvoltage, step 1 No - Yes No
59P-2
59P-3
59G-1
Ground overvoltage, step 1 No - Yes No
59G-2
Ground overvoltage, step 2 No - Yes No
July 25, 2006 13-41 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

81 UNDFREQ1
Underfrequency, step 1 No - Yes No
81 UNDFREQ2
81 UNDFREQ3
81 OVERFREQ1
Overfrequency, step 1 No - Yes No
81 OVERFREQ2
81 OVERFREQ3
81 FREQCHG1
Rate-of-change of frequency, step 1 No - Yes No
81 FREQCHG2
81 FREQCHG3
Load Restriction 1
Load restriction characteristic picked up No - Yes No
OPEN PHASE
46 Broken conductor/open phase No - Yes No
THERMAL IMG
Thermal image alarm No - Yes No
External
External trip No - Yes No
Z1 Ph PU
Zone 1 phase element pick-up No - Yes No
Z1 G PU
Zone 1 ground element pick-up No - Yes No
Z2 Ph PU
Z2 G PU
Z3 Ph PU
Z3 G PU
Z4 Ph PU
Z4 G PU

July 25, 2006 13-42 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.6.8 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS


59-1 Phase Overvoltage Enable
Enables phase overvoltage element, step 1 No - Yes - 1 No
59-1 Pick Up
Pick-up level for phase overvoltage, step 1 20 - 300 V 0.01 70
59-1 Time Delay
Time delay for phase overvoltage, step 1 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
59-1 Output Logic
Selects if the three phase voltage elements should OR
be connected in series (AND) or in parallel (OR) AND - 1 OR
59-2 Pick Up
59-2 Time Delay
59-2 Output Logic
Selects if the three phase voltage elements should OR
be connected in series (AND) or in parallel (OR) AND - 1 OR
59-3 Pick Up
59-3 Time Delay
59-3 Output Logic
Selects if the three phase voltage elements should be OR
connected in series (AND) or in parallel (OR) AND - 1 OR
59G-1 Gnd Overvoltage Enable
Enables ground overvoltage element, step 1 No - Yes - 1 No
59G-1 Pick Up
Pick-up level for ground overvoltage, step 1 2 - 150 V 0.01 10
59G-1 Time Delay
Time delay for ground overvoltage, step 1 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
59G-2 Gnd Overvoltage Enable
Enables ground overvoltage element, step 2 No - Yes - 1 No
59G-2 Pick Up
Pick-up level for ground overvoltage, step 2 2 - 150 V 0.01 10
59G-2 Time Delay
Time delay for ground overvoltage, step 2 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
27-1 Ph Undervoltage Enable
Enables phase undervoltage element, step 1 No - Yes - 1 No
27-1 Pick Up
Pick-up level for phase undervoltage, step 1 10 - 300 V 0.01 40
27-1 Time Delay
Time delay for phase undervoltage, step 1 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
27-1 Output Logic
27-2 Pick Up
July 25, 2006 13-43 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

27-2 Time Delay
27-2 Output Logic
27-3 Pick Up
27-3 Time Delay
27-3 Output Logic
27P Drop-Out Ratio
Drop-out ratio for the phase undervoltage elements 101 - 150 % 1 105
59P Drop-Out Ratio
Drop-out ratio for the phase overvoltage elements 50 - 99 % 1 95
59G Drop-Out Ratio
Drop-out ratio for the ground overvoltage elements 50 - 99 % 1 95

July 25, 2006 13-44 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.6.9 RECLOSER AND SYNC CHECK

13.6.9.1 RECLOSER

In Service
Enables recloser No - Yes - 1 No
External Blocking
Type of signal used for external block of the recloser. ‘Recloser
blocking type’ requires the blocking signal to be continuous. Unblock Recloser
occurs when the blocking signal is removed ‘Pulse’ is used when the Blocking
blocking signal is delivered as a pulse. The also an unblock logic input Type
needs to be used to unblock the recloser by another pulse. Pulse - 1 Yes
Reclose Mode 1P Mode,
Selects single pole (1P), three pole (3P), single and three pole (1P/3P) or 3P Mode,
fault type dependent more reclosing. See ‘Description of Operation’ for 1P/3P
details. Mode,
Dependent
Mode - 1 1P/3P
Reclose Attempts
Number of reclose attempts, 1 – 3 1-3 - 1 3
1st Recl. 25 Superv. Disable -
Enable synchro-check supervision of 1st reclose attemp Enable - 1 Disable
2nd Recl. 25 Superv. Disable -
Enable synchro-check supervision of 2nd reclose attemp Enable - 1 Disable
3rd Recl. 25 Superv. Disable -
Enable synchro-check supervision of 3rd reclose attemp Enable - 1 Disable
Enable 1st Recl. 25 Wait Time
Enable wait time for 1st synchro-check supervised recluse attempt. If
disabled, synch-check condition is checked following the dead-time and
it not fulfilled, the recloser goes to lock-out. If enabled, the recloser
waits for the ‘Sync Wait Time’ before going into lock-out due to lack of Disable -
synchronism. Enable - 1 Enable
Enable 2nd Recl. 25 Wait Time
Enable wait time for 2nd synchro-check supervised recluse attempt. If
Enable 3rd Recl. 25 Wait Time
Enable wait time for 3rd synchro-check supervised reclose attempt. If
1st 1Ph Recl. Cycle Time
Dead-time for the 1st single pole attempt. 0.05 - 300 s 0.01 1
1st 3Ph Recl. Cycle Time
Dead-time for the 1st three pole attempt. 0.05 - 300 s 0.01 1
2nd Recl. Cycle Time
Dead-time for the 2nd attempt. 0.05 - 300 s 0.01 0.5
3rd Recl. Cycle Time
Dead-time for the 3rd attempt. 0.05 - 300 s 0.01 0.5
July 25, 2006 13-45 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

Sync Wait Time
Delay time for synchronizing check 0.05 - 300 s 0.01 5
Security Time
Recloser reset time following closing of the circuit breaker. 0.05 - 300 s 0.01 10
Security Time for manual close
Recloser reset time following manual closing of the circuit breaker. 0.05 - 300 s 0.01 5
Start Time
Recloser start timer. If this time expires before the recluse initiate signal
resets, the circuit breaker opens and the TRIP signal resets, the recloser
goes into lock-out. 0.07 - 0.6 s 0.01 0.2
Zone 1 RI Disable -
Enable reclose initiate from Zone 1 trips Enable - 1 Disable
Zone 2 RI Disable -
Zone 3 RI Disable -
Zone 4 RI Disable -
50P-1 RI
Enable reclose initiate from phase instantaneous overcurrent trips, Step Disable -
1 Enable - 1 Disable
50P-2 RI
50P-3 RI
51P-1 RI Disable -
Enable reclose initiate from phase timeovercurrent trips, Step 1 Enable - 1 Disable
51P-2 RI Disable -
51P-3 RI Disable -
50G-1 RI
Enable reclose initiate from ground instantaneous overcurrent trips, Step Disable -
50G-2 RI
50G-3 RI
51G-1 RI Disable -
Enable reclose initiate from ground timeovercurrent trips, Step 1 Enable - 1 Disable
51G-2 RI Disable -
51G-3 RI Disable -
50Q-1 RI
Enable reclose initiate from negative sequence instantaneous Disable -
overcurrent trips, Step 1 Enable - 1 Disable
50Q-2 RI

July 25, 2006 13-46 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

50Q-3 RI
51Q-1 RI
Enable reclose initiate from negative sequence time overcurrent Disable -
trips, Step 1 Enable - 1 Disable
51Q-2 RI
51Q-3 RI
Open Phase RI Disable -
Enable reclose initiate for broken conductor trips Enable - 1 Disable
Remote Breaker Open Enable Disable -
Enable reclose initiate from remote breaker open trips Enable - 1 Disable
13.6.9.2 SYNC CHECK


Sync Check Enable
Enable synchro-check function
No - Yes - 1 No
Volt. Supervision Enable
Enable voltage supervision function No - Yes - 1 No
Volt. Diff. Enable
Enable voltage difference function No - Yes - 1 No
Phase Diff. Enable
Enable phase difference function
No - Yes - 1 No
Freq. Diff. Enable
Enable frequency difference function
No - Yes - 1 No
Side A Volt. PU
Sets side A voltage (line side) pick up. 20 - 70 V 1 20
Side B Volt. PU
Sets side B voltage (bus side) pick up. 20 - 70 V 1 20
D BUS/D LINE Disable -
Enable Dead Bus – Dead Line energizing Enable - 1 Disable
H BUS/D LINE Disable -
Enable Hot Bus – Dead Line energizing Enable - 1 Enable
D BUS/H LINE Disable -
Enable Dead Bus – Hot Line energizing Enable - 1 Disable
H BUS/H LINE Disable -
Enable Hot Bus – Hot Line energizing Enable - 1 Enable
Internal/external sync check External,
Selects internal or external synch check Internal - 1 External
Reference voltage Va, Vb,
Selects bus voltage reference phase Vc - 1 Va
Max. Voltage diff.
Sets maximum allowed voltage difference between side A and side B 2 - 30 % 1 2
Max. Phase diff.
Sets maximum allowed phase difference between side A and side B 2 - 80 deg 1 2

July 25, 2006 13-47 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

Max. Freq. diff.
Sets maximum allowed frequency difference between side A and side B 0.01 - 2 Hz 0.01 0.01
Sync. Delay
Sets delay time for synchro-check function 0 - 300 s 0.01 0
LOP Sync Check Block
Enables block of synchro-check function for loss-of-potential conditions No - Yes - 1 No

July 25, 2006 13-48 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.6.10 SOE MASK

The signals in the table below are available as triggers for Sequence of Event records. If the setting is
‘Yes’, pick-up of the signal will trigger a SOE record. If the setting is ‘No’, no SOE will be triggered
by the logical signal.

ON SystemNonCriticalError No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON SystemCriticalError No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON ChangeofSettingsInitialization No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON PhaseA51PUnit1PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON PhaseB51PUnit1PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON PhaseC51PUnit1PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON 51GUnit1PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON PhaseA51PUnit1Trip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON PhaseB51PUnit1Trip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON PhaseC51PUnit1Trip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON 51GUnit1Trip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON OpenPhaseDetectorPickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON OpenPhaseDetectorTrip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON OpenI2CounterAlarm No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON BGZone4PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON AGZone4PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON ABZone4PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON CGZone4PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON CAZone4PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON BCZone4PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes

July 25, 2006 13-49 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

ON Zone4StepDistanceTrip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON CPoleTrip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON BPoleTrip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON APoleTrip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON CloseIntoFault No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON LOPDetectorON No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON DistanceProtectionChannelStart No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON DistancePilotSchemeTrip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON WeakInfeedTripDistance No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON Out-of-stepBlock No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON RemoteBreakerOpenDetector No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON FaultDetectorActivation No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON DistanceProtectionChannelStop No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON Trip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON ThermalImageAlarm No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON ThermalImageTrip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON RecloserLockOut No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON RecloseCommand No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON ExcessiveNumberofTrips No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON CloseCommand No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON OpenCommand No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON 50QUnit1PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON 50QUnit1Trip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON StubProtectionPickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON StubBusProtectionTrip No - Yes - 1 Yes
July 25, 2006 13-50 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

ON ThreePhase27PUnit1Trip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON ThreePhase59PUnit1PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
July 25, 2006 13-51 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

ON 81OverfrequencyUnit1PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON 81UnderfrequencyUnit1PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON 81FrequencyRateofChangeUnit1PickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON 81OverfrequencyUnit1Trip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON 81UnderfrequencyUnit1Trip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON 81FrequencyRateofChangeUnit1Trip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON SettingsGroup1byDigitalInput No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON SettingsGroup1byCommunications No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON 50BFBreakerFailurePickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON PhaseARetrip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON PhaseBRetrip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON PhaseCRetrip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON ThreePhaseRetrip No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON Zone1Fault No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON Zone1PhaseUnitsPickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes
ON Zone1GroundUnitsPickUp No - Yes - 1 Yes

July 25, 2006 13-52 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION
13.7.1 DISTANCE ELEMENTS

The GARD 8000 Distance Protection Module is provided with four independent protection zones. The
operating direction for each zone, forward or reverse, is selected using the ‘Zone n direction’ setting on
web page 3.7.5.1 (Distance Elements, Zone1 to Zone4).
The Zone 4 direction can be forced reverse, depending on what pilot scheme is selected. When the
selected protection scheme is either Directional Comparison Blocking or when Weak Infeed Logic or
Transient Block Logic is used, Zone 4 will operate as reverse-looking even if the setting is forward.
Therefore, when either of these schemes is in use, it is not necessary to adjust the Zone 4 direction.
Each zone has six measuring elements, one for each type of fault. The measuring element operates
based on a phase angle comparison of an operation phasor and a polarization phasor. The two phasors
are derived from the voltage and current phasors, and the specific settings for the zone.
The ground fault elements use a compensation factor for the ground return in order to measure an
impedance proportional to the line’s positive sequence impedance. This compensation factor is the
setting K0, defined as:
K0=ZL0/ZL1, where ZL0 and ZL1 are the zero sequence and positive sequence impedances of the
line.
Each zone has an individual reach setting (positive sequence impedance) and individual setting of the
zero sequence compensation factor (K0=ZL0/ZL1), as well as individual phase angle setting. This
enables a more exact setting for applications with mixed line properties, such as an overhead section
followed by a cable section.
Fault detection is made by use of mho and/or quadrilateral characteristic, with a setting for
Quadrilateral characteristic, Mho characteristic, or both of them simultaneously. The reach setting is
common for both the Quadrilateral and Mho characteristics. Mho elements have a closed circular and
directional characteristic, while the Quadrilateral elements have open non-directional characteristics.
Hence, Quadrilateral elements are complemented with a directional unit and a resistive limiter with
adjustable reach.
13.7.1.1 MHO CHARACTERISTIC

The GARD 8000 Mho characteristic is polarized by the positive sequence voltage of the corresponding
phase. This polarization gives the following characteristic, similar to cross-polarization:
• Variable: The Mho circle always includes the origin, and the diameter is a function of
the source impedance.
• Dynamic: The Mho circle diameter varies from the inception of the fault to a return to
the steady state.

July 25, 2006 13-53 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
For faults with low positive sequence voltage (less than 10 V), memory voltage is used.
The following table shows the operation and polarization phasors of the Mho characteristic measuring
elements, as well as the applied operating criterion.
Table 13-1. MHO Characteristic
Table 13-2. MHO Characteristic Table Definitions
Figure 13-12 shows the phase-to-ground fault Mho characteristics. Due to the polarization used, the
diameter of the characteristic is the vector addition of the adjusted reach and a vector corresponding to
the local source impedance. This effect enables tripping for close in faults with very low voltage. This
displacement has no effect on the directional characteristic as is illustrated in Figure 7-2. For a reverse
fault, the mho characteristic is displaced in the forward direction.

July 25, 2006 13-54 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
IeqZset
IFRF
F
Va1M
ZSL(Ieq-Iload)
Figure 13-12. MHO Phase-Ground Characteristic (I)
Figure 13-12 shows a ground fault MHO characteristic at the inception of a fault. With the voltage
memory feature, the positive sequence voltage two cycles prior to the fault is used to polarize the
MHO characteristic. The diameter of the characteristic is increased by the impedance:
Z LS ⋅ ( I eq − I Φload )
When the buffer for the voltage memory has expired during a sustained fault, the source impedance
vector becomes:
Z LS ⋅ ( I eq − I1Φ )
Figure 7-2 shows a ground fault Mho characteristic for a reverse fault. With the voltage memory
feature, this characteristic demonstrates a displacement that is defined by the vector:
( Z L + Z LS ) ⋅ ( I eq − I1load )
When the buffer for the voltage memory has expired during a sustained fault, the displacement is
maintained, defined by the vector:
( Z L + Z LS ) ⋅ ( I eq − I1Φ )

July 25, 2006 13-55 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
IeqZset
Va1M
(ZL+ZRS)(Ieq-Iload)
Va
F
Figure 13-13. Mho Phase-Ground Characteristic (II)
Where:
Table 13-3. MHO Phase-Ground Characteristic Definitions
ZLS Local source positive sequence impedance

ZL Line positive sequence impedance
ZRS Remote source positive sequence impedance
Zset Set reach
Ieq Equivalent ground fault current = Iphase + I0(K0-1)
Ia Phase A current. The same measurement is being made for phase B and
C.
I1 Positive sequence fault current
Iload Load current, prior to fault
Va Phase A voltage. The same measurement is being made for phase B and
C.
V1M Polarizing voltage. Positive sequence voltage for the corresponding
phase, directly or from memory buffer
Figure 13-3 and Table 13-4 show the phase-to-phase fault Mho characteristics. These figures have
been drawn for a forward fault current. In the case of a reverse fault current, the characteristic layout
would be different, and the origin would be outside the characteristic as shown in Figure 13-13.

July 25, 2006 13-56 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Iph-phZset
IFph-phRF/2
F
Vph-ph1M
ZSL(Iph-ph-Iload)
Figure 13-14. Phase-Phase Mho Characteristic (I)
Figure 13-14 shows a characteristic at the instant of a fault. Using the voltage memory feature, the
positive sequence voltage prior to the fault is used to polarize the characteristic. The characteristic
diameter is increased by the impedance
Z LS ( I ΦΦ − I load )
When the buffer for the voltage memory has expired during a sustained fault, the source impedance
vector becomes:
Z LS ( I ΦΦ − I ΦΦ1 )
where
Table 13-4. Phase-Phase Mho Characteristic Definitions
ZLS Local source positive sequence impedance

Iph-ph Phase to phase current (Iab, Ibc, Ica)
Iph-ph1 Positive sequence phase to phase current
Iload Phase to phase load current
Vph-ph Phase to phase voltage
Vph-ph1M Polarizing voltage. Positive sequence voltage for the corresponding
phases, directly or from memory buffer

July 25, 2006 13-57 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.1.2 QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTIC

The GARD 8000 uses a load compensated Quadrilateral characteristic, polarized with the negative
sequence current of the corresponding phase, eliminating over- and under-reach due to the remote-end
infeed current’s effect on the fault impedance. This compensation is equivalent to a tilt in the
characteristic, which is defined as tilt angle. This tilt angle is only applied during a short time after the
fault occurs. This time is set with the parameter ‘Zone 1 quad tilt time delay’ on web page 3.7.5.1
Distance Elements/Zone 1 to Zone 4. Once the timer expires, the characteristic returns to its original
position. Load compensation is applied only to Zone 1 as the other zones are set overreaching with
sufficient margin not to be affected by over- or under-reach.
The following table shows the operation and polarization phasors of the Quadrilateral characteristic
measuring elements, as well as the applied operation criteria.
Table 13-5. Quadrilateral Characteristics
Reactance Characteristic
Element Operation phasor (Fop) Polarization Criteria
Phasor (Fpol)
AG [Ia + I0 ⋅ (K0n − 1)] ⋅ ZnF − Va Ia2 or Ia-Iapf
BG [Ib + I0 ⋅ (K0n − 1)] ⋅ ZnF − Vb Ib2 or Ib-Ibpf
CG [Ic + I0 ⋅ (K0n − 1)] ⋅ ZnF − Vc Ic2 or Ic-Icpf [ ( ) (

0 º ≤ arg Fop − arg Fpol )] ≤ 180 º
AB
Iab ⋅ ZnF − Vab Iab-Iabpf
BC
Ibc ⋅ ZnF − Vbc Ibc-Ibcpf
Ica ⋅ ZnF − Vca
CA Ica-Icapf
Table 13-6. Quadrilateral Characteristics Definitions
Ia, Ib, Ic Phase currents

Iapf, Ibpf, Icpf Pre-fault phase currents (load)
Iab, Ibc, Ica Phase-phase currents (Ia-Ib), (Ib-Ic), (Ic-Ia)
Iabpf, Ibcpf, Icapf Pre-fault phase-phase currents (Iapf-Ibpf), (Ibpf-Icpf), (Icpf-
Iapf)
Ia2, Ib2, Ic2 Negative sequence currents, referenced to each phase
I0 Zero sequence current
Va, Vb, Vc Phase voltages
Vab, Vbc, Vca Phase-phase voltages (Va-Vb), (Vb-Vc), (Vc-Va)
Z1n Zone n set reach, (n=1,...,4)
Z0n Zone n set reach for zero sequence impedance, (n=1,...,4)
K0n =
Z0n Zero sequence compensation factor for zone n, (n=1,...,4)
Z1n

July 25, 2006 13-58 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
The ground fault reactance elements are normally polarized by negative sequence current which is
parallel to the fault current through the fault resistance. However, the negative sequence current is not
useful during a single pole open interval or for two-phase-to-ground faults. For these cases the negative
sequence current is replaced by the faulted phase current less the pre-fault load current which will be in
phase with the voltage drop over the fault resistance.
Figure 13-15 and 13-16 show a Quadrilateral characteristic, and the corresponding phasors.
In Figure 13-15, the point F indicates where the fault occurs, and point F´ indicates where the relay
measures the fault. As shown, the points do not coincide due to the IF RF vector, which represents the
voltage drop in the fault impedance. Under no-load conditions, this vector would be horizontal, and F´
would be located on the horizontal line passing through F. Remote-end feeding creates a rotation by an
angle α that displaces F´ to the point shown in the figure.
Figure 13-15. Quadrilateral Characteristic (I)
When the characteristic C1 (representing no remote-end-feeding conditions) is rotated by an angle

alpha, the characteristic is changed, as shown by C2. Thus, F´ remains inside the operating zone.
Rotation of the Quadrilateral characteristic (polarized by negative sequence current) compensates for
the voltage drop produced by the fault impedance (as seen by the relay), avoiding both overreach and
underreach.

July 25, 2006 13-59 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-16. Quadrilateral Characteristic (II)
Figure 13-16 shows a Quadrilateral characteristic under a no-load system (without remote-end current
infeed to the fault). In this case, the fault is seen by the relay to be rotated by an angle gamma due to
the lack of homogeneity on the system. The tilt angle changes the characteristic from C1 to C2,
avoiding the overreach of the relay during the preset tilt time, and allowing the adjacent protection
elements to clear the fault. Angle gamma is calculated by the relay from the line and source
impedances.
In the previous figures, Ieq is the ground fault equivalent current:

July 25, 2006 13-60 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.1.3 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENT

The directional unit consists of elements for each type of fault, common to the four zones. These
elements are polarized by the positive sequence voltage (with memory when required) of the
corresponding phase or phases.
Figure 13-17. Directional Unit
Assume a system with Ia2 in phase with Ieq. A directional characteristic C3 is then added to the
Quadrilateral characteristic C2.
The following table shows the operation and polarization phasors of the directional elements, as
well as the applied operating criteria.
Table 13-7. Directional Unit
Directional element
Element Operating phasor Polarizing phasor Criteria
AG Ia Va1M
BG Ib Vb1M
CG Ic Vc1M (90º+α ) ≤ [arg(Fop) − arg(Fpol)] ≤ (90º−α )
AB Iab Vab1M
BC Ibc Vbc1M
CA Ica Vca1M
Where:
Table 13-8. Directional Unit Definitions

Iab, Ibc, Ica Phase-phase currents (Ia-Ib), (Ib-Ic), (Ic-Ia)
Va1M, Vb1M, Vc1M Positive sequence memory voltage, referred to each phase
Vab1M, Vbc1M, Vca1M Positive sequence memory voltage, phase-phase

July 25, 2006 13-61 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.1.4 RESISTIVE BLINDER
Figure 13-18. Resistive Blinder
The GARD 8000 quadrilateral element is provided with three resistive limiters, one per phase, with
independent reach settings for each zone. The characteristic is polarized by the equivalent current of
the corresponding phase; hence, they are parallel to the reactance axis. Figure 13-18 shows the
resistive limiter characteristic C4 and C5, added to the Quadrilateral and directional characteristics C2
and C3. Both C4 and C5 are at an angle to resistive axis equal to the positive sequence loop impedance
for the zone in question.
In the above figure, Ieq is the ground fault equivalent current:
The following table shows the operation and polarization phasors of the resistive limiters, as well as
the operating criteria.

July 25, 2006 13-62 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Table 13-9. Resistive Limiter Characteristic

Resistive Limiter – Axis R>0 Characteristic
Unit Fop Fpol Criteria
AG Ia ⋅ RGn − Va Ia ⋅ RGn
BG Ib ⋅ RGn − Vb Ib ⋅ RGn − ( 90º +θ ) ≤ ⎡⎣∠ ( Fop ) − ∠ ( Fpol ) ⎤⎦ ≤ θ
CG Ic ⋅ RGn − Vc Ic ⋅ RGn
Resistive Limiter – Axis R<0 Characteristic
AG − Ia ⋅ RGn − Va − Ia ⋅ RGn
BG − Ib ⋅ RGn − Vb − Ib ⋅ RGn − ( 90º −θ ) ≤ ⎡⎣∠ ( Fop ) − ∠ ( Fpol ) ⎤⎦ ≤ θ
CG − Ic ⋅ RGn − Vc − Ic ⋅ RGn
Resistive Limiter – Axis R>0 Characteristic
AB Iab ⋅ RPn − Vab Iab ⋅ RPn
BC Ibc ⋅ RPn − Vbc Ibc ⋅ RPn − ( 90º +θ ) ≤ ⎡⎣∠ ( Fop ) − ∠ ( Fpol ) ⎤⎦ ≤ θ
CA Ica ⋅ RPn − Vca Ica ⋅ RPn
Resistive Limiter – Axis R<0 Characteristic
AB − Iab ⋅ RPn − Vab − Iab ⋅ RPn
BC − Ibc ⋅ RPn − Vbc − Ibc ⋅ RPn − ( 90º +θ ) ≤ ⎡⎣∠ ( Fop ) − ∠ ( Fpol ) ⎤⎦ ≤ θ
CA − Ica ⋅ RPn − Vca − Ica ⋅ RPn
Where:
Table 13-10. Resistive Limiter Characteristic Definitions

Iab, Ibc, Ica Phase-to-phase currents (Ia-Ib), (Ib-Ic), (Ic-Ia)
Va, Vb, Vc Phase voltages
Vab, Vbc, Vca Phase-to-phase voltages
RGn Resistive reach for ground faults corresponding to zone n
RPn Resistive reach for phase-to-phase faults corresponding to zone n
θn Positive sequence reach impedance angle corresponding to zone n
θb Loop impedance angle for zone n:
θ b = θ n − [∠( Ia) − ∠( Ieqn)]

July 25, 2006 13-63 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.1.5 DISTANCE ELEMENTS OPERATIONAL LOGIC

The distance elements AG, BG, CG, AB, BC and CA for Zone to Zone 4 are combined with a number
of other supervisory elements to produce an output:
• Current supervision elements

• Phase selector
• Open pole detector
• Fuse fail (loss-of-potential) detector
• Load encroachment
Phase to ground fault element logic is shown in the Figure below. Single-phase to ground measuring
elements in the leading are not allowed to operate for two-phase to ground faults as they will
overreach. However, the lagging phase can be allowed to operate as it will be underreaching. This is
enabled by the setting “Lagging phase for PH-PH-G faults”. In either case, two-phase-to-ground faults
will also be measured by the phase-to-phase impedance unit.
The ‘pole-open’ release of the single phase to ground element is used for single pole trip applications
when the phase selector is not operational during the open pole interval.
ZONE n AG (C_n_AG) DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
FORWARD AG ELEMENTS SUPERVISION (IDA)
AG FAULT (AG)
CAG FAULT (CAG)

ZONE n (n_AG) AG ELEMENT PICKUP
PHASE LAG ENABLE

POLE B OPEN (PB_A)
SETTING
POLE C OPEN (PC_A)
FUSE FAILURE BLOCKING (BLQ_FF)
LOAD ENCROACHMENT ACTIVATION (DEL)
Figure 13-19. AG Distance Element Operational Logic

July 25, 2006 13-64 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
The operational logic for a two-phase element is shown in the figure below.
ZONE n AB (C_n_AB) DISTANCE CHARACTERISTIC
FORWARD AB ELEMENTS SUPERVISION (IDAB)
GROUND FAULT (GR)
ABG FAULT (ABG) ZONE n (n_AB) AB ELEMENT PICKUP
POLO C OPEN (PC_A)
FUSE FAILURE BLOCKING (BLQ_FF)
LOAD ENCROACHMENT ACTIVATION (DEL)
Figure 13-20. AB Distance Element Operational Logic
13.7.1.6 VOLTAGE MEMORY LOGIC

The positive sequence voltage memory buffer stores the voltage from two cycles before fault
inception, as determined by a fault detector.
The use of memory voltage is conditional, in addition, the memorized positive sequence voltage is
only used if its value is above 20 V to prevent use of memory for close-into-fault conditions with 0
pre-fault voltage. The duration of using memory voltage is determined by the setting ‘Duration
Memory’ on web page 3.7.5.1 – Zone 1 to Zone 4.
For most applications, voltage memory is only required for clearing three phase faults with voltage
below the fixed threshold of 10 V. The only exception is series compensated applications where the 10
V threshold is not applied.
The memory duration is generally set relatively short, typically 4 cycles. Only if time-delayed Zone 2
operation for faults with terminal voltage below 10 V is required, would the memory duration need to
be extended to last for set Zone 2 time delay.
13.7.2 SUPERVISION ELEMENTS

The distance relay contains overcurrent elements to supervise the operation of the distance measuring
elements. These overcurrent elements are used to establish a minimum current level of operation for
the distance elements. Supervision elements are divided into two groups:
• Forward supervision
• Reverse supervision
Each one includes supervision of phase currents and line currents. Forward and reverse supervision
elements are non-directional overcurrent elements. The following table lists supervision elements with
their operation current and pickup settings. The output signal generated is also included.

July 25, 2006 13-65 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Table 13-11. Supervision Elements

Direction Element Iop Pickup Setting Output
Phase A Ia Forward AG elements supervision
Single-Phase
Phase B Ib Forward BG elements supervision
Forward
Phase C Ic Forward CG elements supervision
Forward
Phases AB Iab Forward AB elements supervision
Phases BC Ibc Two Phases Forward Forward BC elements supervision
Phases CA Ica Forward CA elements supervision
Phase A Ia Reverse AG elements supervision
Single-Phase
Phase B Ib Reverse BG elements supervision
Reverse
Phase C Ic Reverse CG elements supervision
Reverse
Phases AB Iab Reverse AB elements supervision
Phases BC Ibc Two Phases Reverse Reverse BC elements supervision
Phases CA Ica Reverse CA elements supervision
where
Table 13-12. Supervision Elements Definitions
The forward or reverse supervision element will pick up when the true RMS value of the
corresponding phase or line current exceeds 105% of the pickup value, and resets below the pre-set
value.
13.7.3 CLOSE-INTO-FAULT
The distance relay is provided with a Close-Into-a-Fault Detector, which generates a non-reclosing
three-phase tripping signal when a fault is detected at the time a breaker close command is generated.
Under such conditions, the fault is considered to be inside the line or it would have been cleared by the
corresponding protection elements. This element will activate after a manual breaker closing operation:
1. After activation of the status contact input Manual Close signal, in case of a fault inside
zone 2 or zone 3 (according to setting selection for ‘CIFT Sup. Zone’).
2. Following reclosing, in case of a fault inside zone 2 or zone 3 (according to setting
selection for ‘CIFT Sup. Zone’) and when “Zone Extension After Reclosing” is enabled by
the setting ‘Z1 Ext. After Recl’.
3. Following closing (manual or reclose) for a positive sequence voltage below 50 V and
current over the set value for ‘CIFT O/C Pick Up’.
The settings for the CIFT function are on page 3.7.5.2, “Power Swing Block and other Advanced
Functions”

July 25, 2006 13-66 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
The overcurrent function provides a means to clear a fault when a distance measurement is not possible
due to a lack of adequate polarization voltage, when the PTs are connected on the line side and closing
into a 3 phase fault. The use of Zone 2/3 when possible (two and single phase faults) enables a higher
overcurrent setting for the current element as only 3 phase faults need to be considered which increases
security. In addition, the current elements used for Close-Into-Fault have a settable 2nd harmonic
restraint, set with ‘2nd Harm. Restraint’.
V1
Ia 2nd
Ib 2nd
Ic 2nd
300 ms
Manual Close
CIFT
300 ms
Reclose command
Z1 Ext. After Recl.
Zone 2
Zone 3
CIFT Sup. Zone
Figure 13-21. Close-Into-Fault Block Diagram

July 25, 2006 13-67 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.4 STUB BUS PROTECTION

The stub bus protection will clear faults instantly in the stub between the breaker (line CT) and the
open line disconnect switch, with line PT on the line side of the switch. The stub bus function uses an
input from a line disconnector 89b switch together with three phase current elements set as ‘Stub Bus
Prot. PU’. When 89b is high and the current is above the set operating threshold, a trip will be
generated after the set time delay, ‘Stub Bus Prot. Dly.’
Figure 13-22. Stub Bus Protection
13.7.5 LOAD ENCHROACHMENT

The GARD 8000 Distance Protection has dynamic mho characteristic which will expand with the
source impedance. As it is not possible to control the resistive reach of the dynamic mho, there is a risk
that the characteristic will fall into the load impedance on long, heavily loaded lines. To prevent this, a
load encroachment characteristic is provided. The characteristic has individual setting for forward and
reverse load, which enables fine tuning for the actual application. Generally, maximum forward and
reverse load differs and the blocking zones should not be larger than necessary for the application. The
load encroachment characteristic provides blocking zones that will prevent an expanding mho
characteristic from operation within the set zone.
X
Blocking zone
α2 α1
LOAD AREA LOAD AREA
R2 R1 R
Figure 13-23. Load Encroachment Characteristic

July 25, 2006 13-68 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.6 OUT-OF-STEP UNIT

Out-of-step conditions caused by power swings are disturbances produced by imbalances between
generation and demand, which may originate from changes in the topology of the network, load
variations, system faults, etc.
Current and voltage variations, in magnitude as well as angle, during a power swing may result in
distance relays measuring an impedance that falls within its operating characteristic.
Power swings may be stable (dampened until reaching a new balance situation) or unstable (balance
not recovered). In case of unstable power swings, it is necessary to separate the system, creating
islands in which there is balance between generation and demand.
For any power swing, it is necessary to block the trip of the distance units: if the swing is stable, a trip
may convert this to unstable and if the swing is unstable, a controlled islanding should take place by
trips in pre-determined locations rather than the line protection.
The GARD 8000 distance relay includes and out-of-step to prevent tripping of the distance elements
on stable power swings (out-of-step block) and allow controlled tripping on unstable power swings
(out-of-step trip).
The out-of-step detector bases its operation on the analysis of the transfer speed of the impedance point
through the R-X diagram. In case of a fault, the transfer between the non-faulted condition and the
fault condition presents a very high transfer speed of the impedance point (since this involves an
electromagnetic phenomenon). The transfer of this same point in case of a power swing involves a
much lower speed (given that this is an electromechanical phenomenon), which depends on the initial
load, the difference between generation and demand, generator inertia, etc.
The principle of operation is based on time measurement that the impedance locus takes to travel
between the two quadrilateral zones, external and intermediate. If this time is longer than a threshold
(set by the out-of-step detection time setting, OOS Time) there is no system fault but rather a power
swing.
Once a power swing has been detected, if the Out-of-step Trip function has been enabled (OOS Trip
Enabled), it is determined if the swing is stable or unstable. If the measured impedance reaches an
internal quadrilateral zone, the swing is considered unstable and allowed to generate a trip.
The out-of-step detector has three units of phase-to-phase impedance measurement per zone. When the
three poles of the breaker are closed, it is sufficient to verify one of these measuring units, for example,
AB, given the symmetry of the power swing phenomenon. (For single pole trip applications, the
opening of a pole disables the measuring units related to the open phase.)
The out-of-step detector is based on three quadrilateral impedance zones; external, medium, and
internal. These are all formed by resistive blinders and reactance blinders. The ‘internal’ zone is only
used for out-of-step trip. In case this function is not used, the setting is ignored.

July 25, 2006 13-69 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-24. Out-Of-Step Unit
There are a number of settings associated with the Out-of-step element:
• Blinders angle
o Characteristic angle for the out-of-step blinders (A in the above Figure)
• Forward ext. reach
o Forward reach of the outer (external) upper blinder
• Forward med. Reach
o Forward reach of the middle (medium) upper blinder
• Forward int. reach
o Forward reach of the inner (internal) upper blinder. The inner blinder is used for out-of-
step tripping only.
• Reverse ext. reach
o Reverse reach of the outer (external) lower blinder
• Reverse med. Reach
o Reverse reach of the middle (medium) lower blinder
• Reverse int. reach
o Reverse reach of the inner (internal) lower blinder. The inner blinder is used for out-of-
step tripping only.
• Right ext resistance
o Resistance reach of the outer (external) right blinder
• Right med resistance
o Resistance reach of the middle (medium) right blinder
• Right int resistance
o Resistance reach of the inner (internal) right blinder. The inner blinder is used for out-
of-step tripping only.
• Left ext resistance
o Resistance reach of the outer (external) left blinder

July 25, 2006 13-70 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
• Left med resistance

o Resistance reach of the middle (medium) left blinder
• Left int resistance
o Resistance reach of the inner (internal) left blinder. The inner blinder is used for out-of-
step tripping only.
• I1 supervision
o The minimum required positive sequence current for release of out-of-step measuring
elements.
• OOS Time
o The swing detection time between the outer (external) and middle (medium) blinders.
• PS reset time
o Reset time of the out-of-step condition. If the impedance locus remains in the distance
zone operating characteristic longer than this time, out-of-step blocking is inhibited and
the relay will trip.
• OOS trip type
o Out-of-step tripping can be selected on the Way-In (Fast trip) or Way-Out (Slow trip).
• Fast trip time
o Time delay for the Way-In (Fast trip) trip operation.
• OOS cond reset time
o Reset time for the out-of-step condition following a swing locus moving outside the
outer (external) blinder.
13.7.7 NON-PILOT AND PILOT SCHEMES

13.7.7.1 STEPPED DISTANCE
The stepped distance logic is always active. The Stepped Distance protection scheme can be selected
alone or as a complement to any of the other schemes. Operation of the Stepped Distance scheme is
based on the time delay of the different zones; therefore, communication is not required.

July 25, 2006 13-71 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

blank

July 25, 2006 13-72 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
LOP Block Trip
Ser com p block (option)
Out-of-step Block
Phase A Zone 1 Unit

Z1 G PU/Zone 1 Ground Units Pick Up
Phase B Zone 1 Unit Z1G

Enable Z1G
delay
Zone 1
Phase C Zone 1 Unit 0 0 Step
Zone 1 Fault Distance
30 ms Z1P
Phase AB Zone 1 Unit
delay Enable Z1 OSB
Phase BC Zone 1 Unit 0

Z1 Ph PU/Zone 1 Phase Units Pick Up
Enable Z1P
Phase CA Zone 1 Unit
Phase A Zone 2 Unit


Enable Z2G
delay
Zone 2
Phase C Zone 2 Unit 0 Step
0 Distance
Zone 2 Fault
30 ms Z2P
delay Enable Z2 OSB

Enable Z2P
Step Distance
Phase A Zone 3 Unit


Enable Z3G
delay
Zone 3
30 ms Z3P
delay Enable Z3 OSB

Enable Z3P
Phase A Zone 4 Unit


Enable Z4G
delay
Zone 4
30 ms Z4P
delay Enable Z4 OSB

Enable Z4P
Figure 13-25. Stepped Distance

July 25, 2006 13-73(13-74 Blank) 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
The stepped distance logic generates the Pickup signals of the phase and ground elements for zones 1,
2, 3, and 4, using the Mho and Quadrilateral elements outputs. Once the Phase Time Delay and Ground
Time Delay settings have been adjusted for each zone, the elements will be ready for a trip operation.
Activation of a zone element can be blocked for out-of-step conditions. This is achieved when the bits
related to the Out-of-Step Element Blocking setting are set to (YES). If this value is set to (NO), the
zone elements will activate independently of the Out-of-Step detector status. Step distance tripping can
be blocked in case of a loss-of-potential condition. To select this feature, the LOP Loss-of-Potential
Blocking must be enabled. LOP may be detected by the terminal unit itself or externally detected and
indicated through the VT Fuse Failure status contact input.
13.7.7.2 ZONE 1 EXTENSION

Zone 1 extension is a non-pilot scheme where fast fault clearing for 100% of the line is accomplished
without a communications channel in conjunction with the recloser operation. This scheme provides
fast tripping of the overreaching zone (set beyond 100% of the line length). As this scheme can make
the relay operate for faults on the adjacent line, Zone 1 extension is inhibited following reclose to
avoid a second trip for an external permanent fault. The blocking time ‘Z1 Ext. Block Time’ should be
set longer than the dead-time reclose interval.
If selected by setting, the Zone 1 Extension is also blocked by Out-of-step (‘Enable OSB pilot).
Any pole open
Z1 Ext. Block Time
Forward pilot zone Distance pilot protection

trip
Out-of-step Block
Enable OSB pilot
Figure 13-26. Zone 1 Extension
13.7.7.3 DIRECT TRANSFER TRIP

This scheme is similar to Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip (PUTT) with the difference that
channel signal reception produces instantaneous tripping without additional supervision. The carrier
receive signal is provided with a pick-up delay to prevent tripping for spurious carrier signals, set on
timer ‘Security Time’. Carrier send (Distance protection carrier start) can be initiated by an open
breaker as selected by the setting ‘Enable open breaker carrier keying’. Out-of-step can be set to block
carrier send by the setting ‘Enable OSB pilot’ and both trip and carrier send is blocked by the signal
input ‘Block pilot trip’.

July 25, 2006 13-75 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Carrier Receive
Distance pilot protection
0 trip
Security Time
0
Zone 1 Fault
Distance protection
T channel start
100ms
Dist carrier time
Three Poles Open
0 Enable open breaker

carrier sending
Block pilot trip
Out-of-step Block
Enable OSB pilot
Figure 13-27. Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)
13.7.7.4 PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH TRANSFER TRIP (PUTT)

The PUTT sends a permissive trip signal for faults on the line only. The receiving end is then allowed
to trip provided that its forward overreaching zone has also detected the fault. This provides higher
security than Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip schemes as no external fault will cause a permissive
signal to be sent. The purpose of the scheme is to speed-up tripping for end zone faults that is outside
zone 1 reach from one line end.
The security provided by the PUTT scheme may be advantageous on parallel line applications as
transient block logic is not required. It should be confirmed however that the two zone 1 elements
cover the center of the line for all possible faults, considering that the reach might have been reduced
due to mutual coupling effects.
STATION “A” Z2
STATION “A” Z1
BKR BKR
A B
STATION “B” Z1
STATION “B” Z2
+ +
“A” Z2 “A” Z1 “B” Z1 “B” Z2
TRANSMIT TRANSMIT
TRIP B TRIP A
T2A RXA RXB T2B
TRIP BKR A TRIP BKR B
Figure 13-28. Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip (PUTT)

July 25, 2006 13-76 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Permissive Underreach is activated when selected in the Protection Scheme setting. It functions as a
complement to the Step Distance scheme. With this scheme, if a terminal locates the fault inside zone
1 (adjusted below 100% of the line), and the other terminal locates the fault inside zone 2 (adjusted
over 100% of the line), the fault is considered internal to the transmission line; closer to the terminal
that initially detects the fault.
The terminal detecting the fault inside zone 1 will generate an instantaneous tripping signal and
transmit this channel signal to the remote end to allow tripping. If any overreach measuring element
(zone 2 or zone 3) has picked up, the remote terminal will trip instantaneously when the channel signal
is received.
Weak infeed trip distance
Carrier Receive
trip
Forward pilot zone
Zone 1 Fault
Distance protection
T channel start
Dist carrier time
100ms
Three Poles Open

carrier sending
Block pilot trip
Out-of-step Block
Enable OSB pilot
Figure 13-29. PUTT
The open circuit breaker carrier send signal selection is included in the settings, ‘Enable open breaker
carrier sending’. To determine if the three poles have opened, three status contact inputs (one for each
pole) can be used, or one input can be used that corresponds to the three poles in series.
The “Dist carrier time’ timer provides a minimum time for channel signal transmission. Channel
tripping and channel sending can be disabled using the status contact input ‘Block pilot trip’. It can
also be disabled for out-of-step conditions by adjusting the Out-of-Step Element ‘Enable OSB pilot’
setting.
In case weak infeed logic is to be used with the PUTT scheme, the setting should be ‘TRIP+ECHO’.
The ‘Echo’ setting is of no use for an underreach scheme and the ‘Trip+ECHO’ setting allows for local
trip, even though no echo function will be performed (as the sending end has tripping from its sending,
underreach zone).

July 25, 2006 13-77 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.7.5 PERMISSIVE OVERREACH (POTT)

STATION “A” Z2
BKR BKR
A B
STATION “B” Z2
+ +
“A” Z2 “B” Z2
TRANSMIT TRANSMIT
TRIP B TRIP A
T2A T2B
RXA RXB
Figure 13-30. Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT)
Permissive Overreach is activated when selected in the Pilot Scheme setting. It will function as a
complement to the Step Distance scheme. In this scheme, assume one terminal locates the fault inside
zone 1 (adjusted below 100% of the line) or inside zone 2 (adjusted over 100% of the line,
overreaching). The other terminal locates the fault inside zone 2 (adjusted over 100% of the line, over-
reaching). The fault would be considered internal to the transmission line between the terminals, closer
to the second terminal detecting the fault only in zone 2. When a permissive signal is received,
instantaneous trip from the overreaching pilot zone is made.
The GARD 8000 allows selection of either Zone 2 or Zone 3 as the overreaching Pilot Zone (Forward
pilot zone).
The Three Poles Open (breaker open) signal selection is included in the settings. To determine if the
three poles have opened, three status contact inputs (corresponding to one for each pole) can be used,
or one input can be used that corresponds to the three poles in series. There is a setting to select
whether carrier send should be initiated by an open breaker, ‘Enable open breaker carrier sending’. The
time delay for this function is fixed to 100 ms.
The ‘Dist carrier time’ provides a minimum time for channel signal transmission.
Channel tripping and channel activation can be disabled using a status contact input ‘Block pilot trip’.
It also can be disabled for out-of-step conditions by the setting ‘Enable OSB pilot’.
Weak infeed logic enables carrier send and weak infeed trip according to the settings for this function.

July 25, 2006 13-78 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
ECHO distance
Carrier Receive
trip
Dist prot scheme

reversal current blocking
Forward pilot zone 0
Distance protection
T channel start
Dist carrier time

Zone 1 Fault
100ms
Three Poles Open

carrier sending
Block pilot trip
Out-of-step Block
Enable OSB pilot
Figure 13-31. Permissive Overreach

July 25, 2006 13-79 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.7.6 DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCKING (DCB)

DCB is operating on the principle to use a communication channel to block tripping for external faults
while no signal transfer is required for internal faults. This scheme was typically applied with ON/OFF
Power Line Carrier and has the advantage of not being affected by a possible loss-of-signal for faults
internal to the line. Power Line Carrier transmission uses the power line itself and there is a risk of a
transmitted signal being shorted or interrupted by a fault on the same conductor or line.
The DCB scheme with directional start uses a reverse directional element to start and maintain a carrier
block signal. The principle is otherwise similar to the previous scheme, except that a channel
coordination timer is required, and a reverse distance zone is required. For a digital channel, the
coordination timer should be adjusted to accommodate maximum expected channel delay.
21P
21R (CARRIER TX)
BKR BKR
A B
21R (CARRIER TX)
21P
+ +
21P 21R 21R 21P
T2A CARRIER CARRIER T2B

RX CARRIER TX CARRIER TX RX
coordination
timer coordination
timer
Figure 13-32. Directional Comparison Blocking With Directional Carrier TX
Directional Comparison is activated when selected in the Protection Scheme setting. It will function as
a complement to the Step Distance scheme.

July 25, 2006 13-80 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
The main difference between this scheme and the others is that the channel signal is transmitted to
block remote tripping instead of permitting it. Proper operation of this scheme requires that the
measuring element used to activate the channel be selected as reverse. Therefore, if directional
comparison is selected as the protection scheme, Zone 4 will be set as reverse, even if the setting is
selected as forward.
When a terminal unit on the transmission line detects a reverse fault, a channel signal (channel start)
will be transmitted to avoid remote-end tripping by overreach elements (zone 2 or Zone 3). Therefore,
overreach tripping will occur when no channel signal is received. The channel signal is transmitted to
the remote end by the terminal detecting the reverse direction fault.
Correct application of this scheme requires that the following conditions are satisfied:
1. The distance covered by the reverse element must be longer than the distance covered by the
forward overreach element of the remote end. This will avoid any zone 2 (or Zone 3) tripping
for a fault outside the line.
2. Overreach elements must be provided with a time delay (DCB dist delay time) to allow the
transmission of the channel signal between terminals.
Input channel stop
T
Channel receive

0 trip
DCB dist delay

time
Forward pilot zone
Zone 1 Fault
Distance protection
0 channel stop
Reverse pilot zone (Z4)

T
Dist Coord Time
50P-1 Phase A
Distance protection
channel start
50P-1 Phase B
Fast carrier start

50P-1 Phase C
50G-1 Ground
Block pilot trip
Out-of-step Block
Enable OSB pilot
Figure 13-33. Directional Comparison Blocking
The DCB scheme can also use ‘Fast carrier start’. The ‘Fast carrier start’ uses non-directional
overcurrent elements to start carrier which enables faster trip (shorter DCB delay time setting). The
‘Fast carrier start’ scheme uses step 1 instantaneous overcurrent elements, 50P-1/50G-1 in the diagram.
For this scheme, the setting of these elements should be non-directional.

July 25, 2006 13-81 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
The timer ‘Dist Coord Time’ should be set to avoid overreach elements tripping in case of transient
reverse overcurrent after a fault has been cleared. The timer ‘DCB dist delay time’ on the block
diagram provides a coordination time delay to allow the transmission of the blocking channel signal
between terminals in case of faults outside the protected line. Channel tripping and channel activation
can be disabled using the status contact input ‘Block pilot trip’. It can also be disabled for out-of-step
conditions by adjusting the Out-of-Step Element Blocking setting.
13.7.7.7 DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON UNBLOCKING (DCUB)

The DCUB scheme was designed for Frequency Shift Power Line Carrier. The FSK carrier sends a
continuous blocking signal. When a forward distance element detects a fault, the transmitted carrier
frequency is shifted to a trip signal. The scheme is therefore a permissive principle; forward operation
AND received permission are required for a trip. To accommodate for a risk of losing the carrier signal
in the fault on the line, an unblock trip window is provided. If the receiver does not detect any signal,
neither block frequency (GUARD), nor trip frequency, the relay is allowed to trip from its forward
distance element for a short period (typically 150 ms) following loss-of-signal.
For a digital channel, the risk of losing the signal should be minimal. However, the DCUB scheme’s
ability of overriding a 60 ms SONET interruption makes it an attractive candidate for use on digital
communication networks. As in other permissive schemes, channel delay is directly added to
protection trip times. Excessive channel delays should affect only the operating time of the protection
system, but might need to be considered for any built-in channel coordination logic, such as transient
block logic for parallel line applications.
STATION “A” 21P (CARRIER KEY)
BKR BKR
A B
STATION “B” 21P (CARRIER KEY)
LOSS OF CHANNEL LOSS OF CHANNEL

+ +
CARRIER 150 ms
+ + 150 ms CARRIER
RX “A” ONE-SHOT ONE-SHOT RX “B”
“A” 21P “B” 21P
TRANSMIT TRANSMIT
OR TRIP B TRIP A OR
T2A T2B
Figure 13-34. Directional Comparison Unblocking

July 25, 2006 13-82 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
ECHO distance
Carrier Fail
0
Carrier fail time T
T
Unblock window
Unblock delay time
Carrier Receive
trip
Loss-of-guard
Dist prot scheme Distance protection

reversal current blocking T channel start
Dist carrier time

Forward pilot zone
Zone 1 Fault
100ms
Three Poles Open

carrier sending
Block pilot trip
Out-of-step Block
Enable OSB pilot
Figure 13-35. Directional Comparison Unblocking Diagram
During normal operation, a ‘guard’ carrier signal is transmitted and received at the remote terminal.
When a terminal detects a forward fault within its pilot zone, it issues a signal for the carrier to switch
to trip frequency (Distance protection channel start). When the shift is recognized at the remote end, a
‘carrier receive’ signal is given to the receiving relay, and a ‘Distance protection pilot trip’ is issued as
for a permissive overreach scheme. As for the permissive schemes, the carrier signal is continued for
the time set by ‘Dist carrier time’.
The transient block logic (Dist prot scheme reversal current blocking) ensures that overtripping is not
taking place for current reversals on parallel lines.
In case the carrier trip signal is lost in the fault on the line, the unblock logic comes into play. A ‘loss-
of-guard’ AND no ‘Carrier receive’ provides a permissive trip signal to the distance relay after a short
time delay, ‘Unblock delay time’. This delay should be set to the time it takes the carrier to switch
from guard to trip frequency, hence avoiding enabling the unblock logic for normal carrier operation.
The permissive signal is held during the ‘Unblock window’ typically set to 150 ms.
The unblock logic also supervises the state of the carrier. In case there is a continuous trip being
received, and alarm will be issued after the time ‘Carrier fail time’.
July 25, 2006 13-83 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.7.8 TRANSIENT BLOCK LOGIC

The transient block logic for current reversals prevents an overreaching zone to generate erroneous
trips due to current reversals that may occur during sequential tripping of faults on a parallel line. The
overreaching zone is blocked for a short adjustable time after detecting a fault in the reverse direction.
Forward Pilot A
A B
Permissive Signal from A to B
Figure 13-36. Transient Block Logic

Breaker opened
Forward Pilot B
A B
Permissive Signal from A to B

Trip conditions
fulfilled
Figure 13-37. Transient Block Logic
Zone 4 fault Transient block
Dist Coord Time
Figure 13-38. Transient Block Logic Diagram
The transient block logic is very simple. A fault in the reverse direction within Zone 4 reach creates a
‘Transient block’ signal that is used in the permissive overreaching pilot schemes (POTT, DCUB) to
ensure that false tripping does not occur for current reversals. The blocking signal is held high for the
time set on ‘Dist Coord Time’. The transient block logic needs to be enabled by the setting ‘Enable
Dist. Curr. Rev. trans. Blocking’.

July 25, 2006 13-84 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.7.9 WEAK INFEED LOGIC

Weak Infeed logic may be used with the permissive overreach scheme for cases when one of the
terminal units has a weak supply and is not able to transmit the channel signal. An Echo function is
available, which allows the channel signal to be transmitted to the remote-end terminal whenever a
channel signal has been received from the remote-end terminal, and none of the blocking elements is
activated. The Weak Infeed Scheme trip function must also be enabled.
When both terminal units are under normal supply, this scheme behaves like the Permissive Overreach
Scheme. A trip is generated when a fault is detected by the overreach elements (zone 2 or zone 3), the
reverse-looking elements (zone 4) are deactivated, and the remote-end terminal has transmitted the
channel signal. Once the remote-end channel signal has been received (and the overreach elements and
the reverse-looking elements are not activated, indicating that the fault is inside the line), the terminal
will transmit a signal back to the emitter (echo signal) allowing tripping. This signal allows the remote-
end terminal to trip by their overreach elements.
Proper operation of this scheme requires that the measuring element used to activate the channel is
adjusted reverse. Therefore, if Weak Infeed is selected, Zone 4 will be set as reverse, even if the setting
is selected as forward.
As a complement, this scheme includes Weak Infeed Trip logic. A trip by this logic will occur when all
of the following conditions are satisfied:
1. Channel signal is received (trip permitted).
2. Overreach elements (zone 2 or zone 3) and blocking elements (zone 4) are deactivated.
3. Undervoltage elements have picked up.
The channel receive signal is provided with a pick-up delay to prevent operation for spurious carrier
signals. The time is set by ‘Security Time’.
Weak feed trip is blocked by loss-of-potential (fuse fail) if this is set to ‘Enable Block’.
To ensure proper operation for reverse faults (as detected by Zone 4), the weak feed blocking function
provided by these elements is drop-out delayed by the time set on ‘Dist Coord Time’.
The carrier echo signal will be sent for 100 ms only. This avoids the risk of an echo signal continuing
being sent from one to the other, just to be echoed back.

July 25, 2006 13-85 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Weak infeed Undervoltage Level
VA Trip Weak Infeed A
VB Trip Weak Infeed B
VC Trip Weak Infeed C
Forward pilot zone
Trip Weak Infeed
Carrier Receive
Security time
0 Echo Distance
Zone 4 fault
100 ms
T
Dist Coord Time
Loss-of-potential
Enable Block
None
Echo
Distance Weak Infeed

Logic Output
Figure 13-39. Weak Infeed Logic

July 25, 2006 13-86 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.8 DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT PILOT SCHEMES

The GARD 8000 Pilot schemes can be complemented with similar logic for the directional ground and
directional negative sequence elements. The schemes and logic available for these elements are
• Permissive Underreach transfer trip

• Direct Transfer Trip
• Permissive overreach Transfer Trip
• Directional Comparison Unblocking
• Directional Comparison Blocking
• Weak Infeed Logic
• Transient Block Logic
These pilot schemes are intended as complement to the distance pilot logic and provide higher
sensitivity for high resistance ground faults.
The carrier send signals can be combined in the logic to be the same signal as used for the distance
relay pilot operation. In that case, careful consideration needs to be made that the schemes are
compatible with each other, and that there are no system conditions that cause different directions of
positive sequence current as compared to negative and zero sequence current.
The ground and negative sequence pilot schemes can also use their own communication channel and
then there are generally no coordination issues.
The scheme logic is very similar to the distance element scheme logic. 67G-1/67Q-1 (step 1
instantaneous ground and/or negative sequence elements) is used as a ‘Zone 1’ element. Note that the
pick-up setting for these elements should be high enough not to operate for fault outside the line. 67G-
2/67Q-2 (step 2 instantaneous ground and/or negative sequence elements) is used as a ‘Zone 2’
element, overreaching. 67G-3/67Q-3 (step 3 instantaneous ground and/or negative sequence elements)
is used as a ‘Zone 4’ element, overreaching in the reverse direction.
13.7.9 REMOTE OPEN BREAKER DETECTION

The distance relay unit is provided with a remote breaker open detector, which generates a signal to
instantaneously open the local breaker when the zone 2 element activates and the remote-end breaker
trips three-pole. Under these conditions, the trip is instantaneous; since the fault is located inside the
line (zone 2 elements adjusted over 100% of the length of the protected line).
Detector operation is blocked under the following conditions:
1. The fault is detected by the zone 1 element at the local end; therefore, tripping is
instantaneous.
2. The trip signal is activated. If this signal is activated before the detector output signal
becomes activated, the trip signal will initiate tripping the breaker.
3. A three-phase fault occurs, since it is not possible to see beyond the fault.
Under these conditions, and when remote-end breaker opening is detected, a trip is permitted as long as
the zone 2 element is activated and the zone 1 element is not activated. In case of faults inside zone 1,

July 25, 2006 13-87 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
the zone 2 element will also be activated, even before the zone 1 element. Therefore, a time delay is
implemented after the input of the zone 2 pickup signal.
Either of the following conditions must be satisfied to determine remote-end opening:
• If the line is long enough, capacitive current present in the phases without a fault indicates that
those phases are open at the remote end. This tendency gets stronger the longer the line.
• For very short lines, the capacitive current may be below the element sensitivity. Therefore,
detection (based on measuring the current in each phase) could be affected. However, in case of
remote end three-phase opening during a single-phase or two-phase fault, the current through
undamaged phases will become very small, while zone 2 would still be detecting the fault in
the damaged phases. The detection threshold is set to 0.75 A; hence the detector does not
operate properly for load currents below this value.
The block diagram below shows the operation of the remote breaker open detector logic.
Figure 13-40. Open breaker detector

July 25, 2006 13-88 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.10 OPEN POLE LOGIC

The open pole logic detects the opening of any pole of the breaker, generating the corresponding
outputs (A pole open, B pole open and C pole open), based not only on the condition of the breaker
position contacts but also on the output of the three undercurrent detectors, one for each pole, whose
levels are given by the following adjustments: A pole open current level, B pole open current level and
C pole open current level. With the aperture indication outputs of each pole, the open pole detector
also generates the following outputs: ‘one open pole’, ‘three open poles’, or ‘any open pole’.
The outputs of this unit are used by other units such as pole discrepancy, close-into-fault, and
reclosing.
The type of open pole logic is selected on GARD 8000 web page 3.7.5.2 ‘Power Swing Block and
Other Advanced Functions’; ‘Open Pole Selection’.
The setting ‘3 inputs’ allows for individual 52b (or 52a) inputs, one for each phase. The GARD 8000
system logic may however use one 52 input that is mapped to the three phase selective inputs. It is also
possible to use the setting ‘2 inputs’ which allows open pole detection to operate on either one 52b
where the 3 phases are connected in AND or connected in OR.
13.7.11 POLE DISCREPANCY

The pole discrepancy logic will detect an abnormally of the position of the three breaker poles. If this
condition is maintained during the time setting a three pole trip is generated. Given that the single-pole
reclose cycles will produce a pole discrepancy condition, the time setting should be longer than the
single pole reclose time.
13.7.12 LOSS-OF-POTENTIAL BLOCK

If the PT secondary circuit fuses blow, the terminal unit will lose the corresponding voltage analog
input. This situation may cause unwanted operation of the distance elements. Therefore, this condition
must be detected and the measuring elements must be blocked before undesired tripping occurs.
The Loss-of-potential threshold is 30 V. LOP logic operation is blocked when any breaker pole is open
and if a fault detector is active. The loss-of-potential condition has a drop-out delay set by ‘LOP Input
Drop Out Time’ to prevent assertion of distance elements when the voltage is restored.
LOP < 30 V
VA
VB
LOP (Fuse fail)

VC
Any pole open T
0
Fault Detector
LOP Input Drop Out Time
Figure 13-41. Loss-of-Potential Block

July 25, 2006 13-89 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.13 OVERCURRENT ELEMENTS

The GARD 8000 includes a large number of overcurrent elements:
• 3 phase instantaneous overcurrent measuring units (50P-1, 50P-2, 50 P-3)
• 3 ground instantaneous overcurrent measuring units (50G-1, 50G-2, 50G-3)
• 3 negative sequence instantaneous overcurrent measuring units (50Q-1, 50Q-2, 50Q-3)
• 3 phase time overcurrent measuring units (51P-1, 51P-2, 51 P-3)
• 3 ground time overcurrent measuring units (51G-1, 51G-2, 51G-3)
• 3 negative sequence time overcurrent measuring units (51Q-1, 51Q-2, 51Q-3).
13.7.13.1 INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT ELEMENTS

The instantaneous overcurrent elements are measuring the RMS value of the analog current being fed
to the unit. The unit assert when the RMS value exceeds 1.05 times the set value and resets at 1times
the set value.
The ground overcurrent element is operating on a 3I0 quantity calculated from phase RMS values
according to the formula:
3I 0 = I A + I B + I C
The negative sequence overcurrent element is operating on an I2 quantity calculated from phase RMS
values according to the formula:
I + I ⋅1∠240° + I C ⋅1∠120°
I2 = A B
3
Each instantaneous overcurrent element has an independent timer setting,
All overcurrent units can individually be set directional, forward or reverse. Type of directional
polarization is selectable either from the corresponding directional element or by Zone 2 torque
control.
13.7.13.2 TIME OVERCURRENT UNITS

The time overcurrent elements are measuring the RMS value of the analog current being fed to the
unit. The unit assert when the RMS value exceeds 1.05 times the set value and resets at 1times the set
value.
The timing function is achieved by integrating the measured values. The integration is made by a
counter that determines the time delay according to the set time curve.
When the RMS value drops below the set pick-up value the integrator is reset. Assertion of the output
from the unit requires that the pick-up remains active during the time of the integration; any reset
causes the counter to reset so that a new pick-up starts over counting from zero.
Time overcurrent units include a wide range of operation curves, which can be selected according to
IEC and IEEE/ANSI standards:

July 25, 2006 13-90 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
ANSI US
• Moderately Inverse
• Inverse
• Very Inverse
• Extremely Inverse
• Short Term Inverse
IEC
• Inverse
• Very Inverse
• Long Term Inverse
• Short Term Inverse
IEEE
• Moderately Inverse
• Very Inverse
In addition, the RI Inverse used for coordination with some electromechanical relays.
The time dial setting for all the curves is from 0.05 – 10. However, the following restrictions apply:
• The IEC curves have a range of 0.05 – 1. If set to a value above 1, it will default to the
maximum setting of 1. The increment is 0.01.
• All other curves (IEEE, ANSI, RI) have a range of 0.1 – 10. If set to a value below 0.1, it will
default to 0.1. The increment for these curves is 0.1, even though the setting allows steps of
0.01. When set between 0.1 steps, the setting will be rounded to the nearest valid setting. For
example, 2.33 will result in a setting of 2.30 and 2.37 will result in a setting of 2.40.
In addition to the above standard curves, a User defined curve can be applied. This curve needs to be
created in the application program ZIVerCOM, saved in a file, and sent to the relay.
There are 4 settings associated with a time overcurrent element; the type of curve, pick-up, time-dial
and Minimum Time delay (or Fixed Time).
When the curve type is selected to Fixed Time, only this setting is applicable.
13.7.13.2.1 MINIMUM TIME DELAY
Each curve can be configured with Minimum Operating Time Limit. This means that the selected
curve is complemented with a fixed time portion so that regardless of the current magnitude, no trip
can be made faster than the set minimum time. The Minimum Operating Time is set as the parameter
Fixed Time.

July 25, 2006 13-91 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-42. Minimum Operating Time for time overcurrent curve
The Minimum Operating Time setting is not allowed to be larger than the curve’s operating time at 1.5
x pick-up. If this is the case, the fixed time setting is ignored and the operating time at this threshold is
used as Minimum Operating Time. This is illustrated in the figure below.
Figure 13-43. Minimum Operating Time when set Fixed Time exceeds curve time delay at 1.5 x pick-up.
Note. It is important to realize that while the curves are defined for up to 20 times the input current
(which is the set pick-up) it is not always possible to guarantee this range. The saturation limitation for
the current channels are 160 phase-ground. Considering this limitation, the ‘times pick-up’ where the
curves are valid is a function of the setting:
160 A
If > 20 the curve is guaranteed in it’s entire range (up to 20 times pick-up).
SetPU
160 A
If < 20 the curve is guaranteed up to the actual multiple of the se pick-up of 160 A. For
SetPU
example, an overcurrent element set with a pick-up of 40 A would follow the curve for up to 160/40 =
4 times pick-up
When a current larger than 20 times pickup is applied to the relay, the trip time will be equal to that
for 20 times.

July 25, 2006 13-92 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.13.3 INVERSE CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
Figure 13-44. ANSI Moderately Inverse

0.0104
t = td (0.0226 + )
I S 0.02 − 1

July 25, 2006 13-93 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-45. ANSI Inverse

5.95
t = td (0.180 + )
IS 2 −1

July 25, 2006 13-94 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-46. ANSI Very Inverse

3.88
t = td (0.0963 + )
IS 2 −1
July 25, 2006 13-95 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-47. ANSI Extremely Inverse

5.67
t = td (0.0352 + )
IS 2 −1

July 25, 2006 13-96 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-48. ANSI Short time

0.00342
t = td (0.00262 + )
I S 0.02 − 1

July 25, 2006 13-97 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-49. Inverse (IEC)

0.14
t = td ( )
I s 0.02 − 1

July 25, 2006 13-98 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-50. IEC Very Inverse

13.5
t = td ( )
Is −1

July 25, 2006 13-99 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-51. IEC Extremely Inverse

80
t = td ( )
Is2 −1

July 25, 2006 13-100 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-52. IEC Long Inverse
120
t = td ( )
Is −1

July 25, 2006 13-101 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-53. IEC short inverse
0.05
t = td ( )
I s 0.04 − 1

July 25, 2006 13-102 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-54. IEEE Moderately Inverse
0.0515
t = td (0.114 + )
I S 0.02 − 1

July 25, 2006 13-103 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-55. IEEE Very Inverse
19.61
t = td (0.491 + )
IS 2 −1

July 25, 2006 13-104 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-56. IEEE Extremely Inverse
28.2
t = td (0.1217 + )
IS 2 −1

July 25, 2006 13-105 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-57. RI Inverse

⎡ ⎤
⎢ ⎥
1
t = td ⎢ ⎥
⎢ ⎛1 ⎞⎥
⎢ 0.339 − 0.236 ⋅ ⎜ ⎟⎥
⎣⎢ ⎝ IS ⎠ ⎦⎥
July 25, 2006 13-106 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.13.4 DIRECTIONAL CONTROL OF OVERCURRENT UNITS

The overcurrent units can all be made directional, or torque controlled. There is an individual setting
for each unit.
Phase units can be selected to be

• Non-directional
• Forward by use of the phase directional element (67P)
• Reverse by use of the phase directional element (67P)
• Forward by use of Zone 2 (Z2), Note that the Zone 2 element should be set forward.
• Reverse by use of Zone 2 (Z2). Note that the Zone 2 element should be set reverse.
Ground units can be selected to be

• Non-directional
• Forward by use of the ground directional element (67N)
• Reverse by use of the ground directional element (67N)
• Forward by use of the negative sequence directional element (67Q)
• Reverse by use of the negative sequence directional element (67Q)
• Forward by use of Zone 2 (Z2G)
• Reverse by use of Zone 2 (Z2G)
Negative sequence units can be selected to be

• Non-directional
• Forward by use of the negative sequence directional element (67Q)
• Reverse by use of the negative sequence directional element (67Q)
• Forward by use of Zone 2 (Z2)
• Reverse by use of Zone 2 (Z2)
13.7.13.5 BLOCKING OF OVERCURRENT UNITS

All overcurrent units have the ability of being blocked by an input signal ‘Block Trip’. This signal
inhibits trip. If applied following a trip, the trip signal is reset,
There overcurrent units also have an input that can override the time delay. When this signal ‘Cancel
Time Delay’ is asserted, the unit issued an instantaneous trip when picked-up.
13.7.13.6 POLARIZATION CONTROL

When the polarizing quantity is too low for the directional elements to operate, the overcurrent units
can be selected to be either blocked or allowed to trip non-directionally. This is done by the setting
‘Loss of polarization blocking’ set to No or Yes.

July 25, 2006 13-107 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.14 DIRECTIONAL UNITS

The GARD 8000 Distance module has the following directional elements:
• Phase directional unit (67P)
• Ground directional unit (67G)
• Negative sequence directional unit (67Q)
• Zone 2 phase directional unit (used for Z2 torque control)
• Zone 2 ground directional unit (used for Z2 torque control)
There are 2 settings for each of the three first elements; characteristic angle and minimum voltage. The
three of them have one common setting; a coordination timer for the time overcurrent units. The
instantaneous units are enabled as soon as the directional elements is picked up, the time overcurrent
units are enabled after the set coordination time.
In addition, the negative sequence polarization voltage has a compensation factor setting in order to
increase the measuring quantity. This gives higher sensitivity for the negative sequence directional
unit.
The directional units are used for directional control of the overcurrent elements. At loss of
polarization the overcurrent elements can be blocked or enabled for non-directional trip as determined
by the setting ‘Loss of polarization blocking’. When this is set to No (release), the instantaneous
elements are enabled immediately and the time overcurrent units after the set coordination time.
The directional units assert when the directional element pick-up and when the level of polarization
quantity exceeds the set threshold. The directional units initiate start of the timing of the overcurrent
units. Should the directional element reset, the overcurrent unit timer is also reset and a new pick-up
starts counting from zero. A trip requires uninterrupted directional operation for the duration of the
timer.
All directional elements are bi-directional, forward and reverse. All directional units can be blocked by
a digital input signal. This block signal inhibits any release of non-directional operation of the
overcurrent elements as well. If these are set directional, their operation will be blocked.
13.7.14.1 PHASE DIRECTIONAL UNIT

There is one directional unit for each phase. The operating quantity is the phase current and the
polarizing quantity is the memorized voltage between the other two corresponding phases as shown in
the table. The memorized quantity is taken from 2 cycles preceding fault inception.
Table 13-13. Phase Directional Measurement
ABC Phase rotation

Phase Operating quantity Polarizing quantity
A IA VBC = VB - VC
B
B IBB VCA = VC - VA
C IC VAB = VA - VB B

July 25, 2006 13-108 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
The operating characteristic that consists of a straight line is shown in Figure 7-47. The operation zone
is an area +/- 90 degrees from the set maximum torque angle. The angle is generally set to the
complement of line’s positive sequence angle as shown in the example in the next section.
Figure 13-58. Vector diagram for the phase directional unit
13.7.14.1.1 APPLICATION EXAMPLE
The following setting example illustrates how to select the characteristic angle for the phase directional
unit. ABC phase rotation is assumed.
VC
U BC VA
IA ZI α VB α
90 - α
IA
VA
90- α
Figure 13-59. Application example

July 25, 2006 13-109 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Assume a simple case with a line open at one end and with a A phase to ground fault without fault
resistance. If the line impedance is Zlα, the fault current IA lags the voltage VA with an angle α. The
phase directional unit does not use the phase voltage for polarization but the voltage between the other
two un-faulted phases, i.e. VCB which is displaced from the faulted phase voltage by 90 degrees. If the
angle between the operating and polarizing vector falls within the set characteristic angle α +/- 90
degrees, a forward operation is obtained.
Consequently, the characteristic angle α for a line with positive sequence angle θ should be set to:
α = 90 - θ
13.7.14.2 GROUND DIRECTIONAL UNIT

The operation of the ground directional unit is based on zero sequence quantities. The operating quantity is the zero
sequence current and the polarizing quantity is the zero sequence voltage.
13.7.14.2.1 VOLTAGE POLARIZED GROUND DIRECTIONAL UNIT
Figure 13-60. Ground directional characteristic with voltage polarization
The operating quantity is I0.

The polarizing quantity is –V0+I0∠(90-set angle) x set compensation factor.
The last term in the polarizing quantity is intended to increase the available polarizing quantity by
boosting the magnitude.
The minimum polarizing quantity is settable 0.05 – 10 V. The sensitivity of the operating quantity is
0.02 x IN (0.1 A for a 5A relay). If the magnitudes are below these thresholds, the unit will not be able
to make a directional determination and the overcurrent units are blocked or allowed to issue a non-
directional trip as selected by setting.

July 25, 2006 13-110 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.14.3 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE DIRECTIONAL UNIT

The operation of the negative sequence directional unit is based on calculated negative sequence
current and voltage.
The operating quantity is I2.
The polarizing quantity is –V2+I0∠(set angle) x set compensation factor.
The last term in the polarizing quantity is intended to increase the available polarizing quantity by
boosting the magnitude.
The minimum polarizing quantity is settable 0.05 – 10 V. The sensitivity of the operating quantity is
0.02 x IN (0.1 A for a 5A relay). If the magnitudes are below these thresholds, the unit will not be able
to make a directional determination and the overcurrent units are blocked or allowed to issue a non-
directional trip as selected by setting.
13.7.14.4 ZONE 2 TORQUE CONTROL

Zone 2 phase and ground elements can by used for torque control of the overcurrent units in the same
way as the directional units.
13.7.14.5 TRIP DIRECTION INVERSION

All the directional units have a digital input that will invert the direction of the unit.
13.7.14.6 COORDINATION TIME FOR DIRECTIONAL UNITS

The coordination timer provided for all directional units is intended for use with the directional time
overcurrent elements when they are applied in a pilot scheme. It provides transient block for current
reversals in parallel lines. The timer should be set longer than the reset time of any carrier equipment
used for communications.
13.7.15 VOLTAGE UNITS

The GARD 8000 provides a large number of voltage units:
• 3 undervoltage units for each phase (27P)
• 3 overvoltage units for each phase (59P)
• 2 ground overvoltage units (59G)

July 25, 2006 13-111 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.15.1 PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE UNITS (27P)

The GARD 8000 has three independent phase undervoltage units. Each can be selected to measure on
phase-ground or phase-phase voltage.
The undervoltage units measure in each phase, and the output can be selected to be from each phase
separately (OR) or for all three phases (AND). This setting selection is done independently for each of
the three units:
• AND: The unit trips when all three phase elements pick up
• OR: The unit trips when any one of the three phase elements pick-up
The three units also have independent time delay settings.
The undervoltage elements pick up as soon as the measured voltage is below the set threshold, and a
trip signal is issued if the voltage maintains a value below for the duration of the timer. As soon as the
voltage rises above the set value plus the settable reset ratio (101-150%) the element and timer reset.
All undervoltage units can be blocked by a digital input.

July 25, 2006 13-112 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-61. Block Diagram for Phase Undervoltage units
13.7.15.2 PHASE OVERVOLTAGE UNITS (59P)

The GARD 8000 has three independent phase overvoltage units. Each can be selected to measure on
phase-ground or phase-phase voltage.
The overvoltage units measure in each phase, and the output can be selected to be from each phase
separately (OR) or for all three phases (AND). This setting selection is done independently for each of
the three units:
• AND: The unit trips when all three phase elements pick up
• OR: The unit trips when any one of the three phase elements pick-up
The three units also have independent time delay settings.
A typical example for the overvoltage units could be:

• 59P-1 set to 1.2 times nominal voltage with AND logic and instantaneous trip
• 59P-2 set to 1.1 times nominal voltage with OR logic and time delayed trip

July 25, 2006 13-113 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
The overvoltage elements pick up as soon as the measured voltage is above the set threshold, and a trip
signal is issued if the voltage maintains a value above for the duration of the timer. As soon as the
voltage drops below the set value plus the settable reset ratio (50 - 99%) the element and timer reset.
All overvoltage units can be blocked by a digital input, for example the 52b input.
Figure 13-62. Block Diagram for Phase Overvoltage units
13.7.15.3 GROUND OVERVOLTAGE UNITS (59)

There are two ground overvoltage units, 59G-1 and 59G-2. Each unit has a pick-up setting and a timer
setting.
The ground voltage is computed from the phase voltages as:

3V0 = VA + VB + VC
The overvoltage elements pick up as soon as the measured voltage is above the set threshold, and a trip
signal is issued if the voltage maintains a value above for the duration of the timer. As soon as the
voltage drops below the set value plus the settable reset ratio (50 - 99%) the element and timer reset.
All overvoltage units can be blocked by a digital input, for example the 52b input.
July 25, 2006 13-114 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.16 FREQUENCY UNITS (81)

The GARD 8000 has 3 units each for Underfrequency (81m), Overfrequency (81M) and Rate-of-
Change of Frequency (81D) for supervision or load shed applications.
The frequency is calculated from one voltage channel.
All frequency units have individual pick-up settings, delay time and drop-out time. In addition, there
are 3 settings common to all frequency units:
• Undervoltage inhibit. When the voltage is below the set threshold (2 – 150 V), the frequency
elements are blocked.
• Activation time (pick-up time) set in number of half cycles. This setting determines the number
of half cycles used for measuring the frequency before a frequency condition can be declared.
• De-activation time (drop-out time) set in number of cycles. This determines the number of
cycles used to determine that the frequency has returned to a non-faulted condition. When the
frequency units have picked up but not yet tripped, there could be a change in frequency of a
short duration and this setting prevents the units from dropping out for such a condition.
13.7.16.1 OVERFREQUENCY UNITS (81M)

The overfrequency units use phase A voltage to measure the frequency. They pick-up when the
frequency exceeds 100% of set value for the set number of half cycles, following a frequency
condition has been declared (set as a common setting). The drop-out is at 99.9% of set value for the
duration of the set drop-out time set for the individual frequency unit.
13.7.16.2 UNDERFREQUENCY UNITS (81m)

The underfrequency units use phase A voltage to measure the frequency. They pick-up when the
frequency is below 100% of set value for the set number of half cycles, following a frequency
condition has been declared (set as a common setting). The drop-out is at 100.1% of set value for the
duration of the set drop-out time set for the individual frequency unit.
13.7.16.3 CHANGE OF RATE OF FREQUENCY UNITS (81D)

The change of rate of frequency units use phase A voltage to measure the frequency. They have
settings for underfrequency and rate-of-change of frequency pick-up levels. The underfrequency
element picks up when the frequency is below 100% of set value the set the number of half cycles,
following a frequency condition has been declared (set as a common setting). The underfrequency
drop-out is at 100.1% of set value for the duration of the set drop-out time set for the individual
frequency unit. The rate of change of frequency element picks up when the measured rate of change
exceeds the set value + 0.05 Hz/s for set number of half cycles (set as a common setting), but a
minimum of 5 cycles. The reason for this is that while frequency can be calculated over one cycle, rate
of change of frequency needs 5 cycles for calculation. In case the set time is less than 10 half cycles, 5
cycles (10 half cycles) are still used.

July 25, 2006 13-115 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-63. Rate of change of frequency
13.7.16.4 BLOCK OF FREQUENCY UNITS

All frequency units have a block input that can be used for example to block the units.
13.7.16.5 UNDERVOLTAGE BLOCK UNIT

The undervoltage unit supervises the frequency units and blocks them for undervoltage conditions.
This unit asserts when the voltage drops below 100% of set value, resetting at 105% of the setting if
this condition persist during a time period of 10 cycles.
Note that the relay can not determine the frequency for voltage below 10 V so for these conditions all
frequency elements are blocked.
13.7.16.6 APPLICATION OF FREQUENCY UNITS

When load and supply for a given portion of power systems are unequal, or not distributed equally, any
type of a sudden generation or transmission deficiency may cause cascading outages. When the load
in a balanced power system significantly exceeds generation, the system can survive only if enough
load is separated from the system with a shortage in generation to cause generator output to be equal to
or slightly above the connected load.
Variations in frequency are caused by unbalance between generation and load. The reason for the
unbalance is often one of the following:
• Break up of the power system in sections

• Unbalance between generation and load due to lack of running reserves
• Loss of generation, trip of substations or lines for important interconnections

July 25, 2006 13-116 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Frequency is a reliable indicator of unbalance between generation and load. Any decrease in frequency
is caused by excess loads. Under frequency relays are used for load shed in order to adjust the load to
available generation to avoid a system collapse. When the frequency is restored to normal and the
system has stabilized, the loads are reconnected. The restoration is made by using over frequency
relays. Sufficient time delay should be employed to assure that the power system is stable prior to
initiating load restoration. In areas where isolation of a large surplus of generation relative to
connected load can be anticipated, automatic over frequency tripping of generation may be considered
to prevent excessive high frequency and resultant uncontrolled generator tripping and equipment
damage.
13.7.17 BREAKER FAILURE RELAY UNIT

The breaker failure unit is used to detect failure of the breaker to open following a trip command and
to give a trip signal to other circuit breakers to isolate the fault.
The breaker failure unit uses four current detectors; one for each phase and ground. The breaker failure
relay is capable of performing on a per phase basis in single pole trip applications, but the base version
of the relay operates for three pole tripping only. (Settings associated with the single pole trip option
are ignored.)
The current measuring elements are designed with a fast reset in order to minimize the breaker failure
timer setting.
Breaker failure relay initiation is made by all GARD 8000 trips, but external initiation can also be
made via an input. Both re-trip and breaker failure trip outputs are provided. Each of these has their
individual time delay setting.
In addition, there is a non-current breaker failure trip option. This is initiated by trips from elements
that operate on quantities other than current, e.g. voltage or frequency elements or gas pressure relay
via an external input. For this function, the current elements are bypassed and a breaker failure trip is
issued if the initiate signal stays high for the duration of the set time delay.
13.7.18 BROKEN CONDUCTOR (PHASE UNBALANCE) UNIT (46)

The broken conductor unit detects imbalance between phase currents of the protected line. It compares
the negative sequence current with the positive sequence current, allowing for a more sensitive setting
as the unit operates on the ratio I2/I1. A broken conductor algorithm taking only I2 into account would
require a higher setting to account for higher imbalance at higher loads; operating on the ratio removes
this compromise.
The unit has settings for I2/I1 pick-up, time delay and minimum load current (I1) required. If load is
below the I1 setting, the unit is blocked. This again allows for a more sensitive setting, as imbalance
for very low load conditions can be proportionally larger.

July 25, 2006 13-117 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.19 SYNC CHECK UNIT

The sync check unit in GARD 8000 is used with the recloser and/or manual closing commands to
determine if the two sides of the circuit breaker are synchronous with each other. Closing a circuit
breaker out of synchronism may cause damage to the breaker or result in out of step conditions.
The synch check function has two parts:

• Synchronism check by comparing voltages on both sides of the breaker with regards to
magnitude, frequency and/or angle.
• Energizing check by confirming that the voltage is low on one side (dead) and high on the other
(live). Settings for which direction this is allowed are available, LLDB, DLLB, LLDB/DLLB.
Phase A line voltage is always used for the comparison. The bus voltage can be selected to be phase A,
B or C, or AB, BC or CA. The voltage selected has to be entered in the settings so that the appropriate
phase shift can be taken into account.
When the bus voltage is a phase-ground voltage, no magnitude adjustment is used. If it is a phase-
phase voltage, the magnitude of the bus voltage is divided by √3.
The angular compensation used is shown in the Table below.

Table 13-14. Angular Compensation
Line side Bus side ABC phase rotation

VA VA 0º
VA VBB 120º
VA VC 240º
VA VAB 330º
VA VBC 90º
VA VCA 210º
13.7.19.1 VOLTAGE DIFFERENCE UNIT

The voltage difference unit asserts when the difference between the bus and the line voltage is below
the set threshold for this function. It resets at 105% of set value.
13.7.19.2 ANGULAR DIFFERENCE UNIT

The angular difference unit asserts when the phase angle difference between the two voltages is below
the set threshold. It resets at 105% of set value, or set value + 2 degrees, whichever is greater.
13.7.19.3 FREQUENCY DIFFERENCE UNIT

The frequency difference unit asserts when the frequency difference between the two voltages is below
the set threshold. It resets at set value + 0.01 Hz.

July 25, 2006 13-118 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.19.4 ENERGIZING CHECK

The energizing check unit allows closing of the circuit breaker when the voltage is high (live) on one
side and low (dead) on the other. Two overvoltage elements with individual settings are used to
determine the live condition and the dead condition. These elements assert at 105% of set value and
resets at 100%.
13.7.19.5 SELECTION OF SYNC CHECK

The recloser can be set to use the internal sync check element or an external synch check condition via
a digital input.
13.7.19.6 APPLICATION OF SYNCH CHECK

The synchronism check function is used to monitor the reconnection of the two parts of the circuit by
breaker closing. It verifies that the voltages on both sides of the breaker (BUS and LINE) are within
the magnitude, angle and frequency limits established in the settings.
Verification of synchronism is defined as the comparison of the voltage difference of two circuits with
different sources to be joined through an impedance (transmission line, feeder, etc.), or connected with
parallel circuits of defined impedances. The voltages on both sides of a breaker are compared before
allowing its closing so as to minimize possible internal damage due to a voltage difference in phase,
magnitude and/or angle. This is very important close to steam-powered power plants where an
unsynchronized closing of the line with considerable angle difference could cause serious damage to
the shaft of the turbine.
The difference in voltage level and phase angle at a given point in time is the result of the load between
sources connected through parallel circuits and the impedance of the elements that join them.
In interconnected systems, the angle difference between two sides of an open breaker is generally not
significant since their sources are joined remotely by other elements (equivalent or parallel circuits).
However, in islanded circuits, as in the case of an independent generator, the voltage angle, magnitude
and/or frequency difference can be considerable.
13.7.20 THERMAL IMAGE UNIT

Overhead lines and cables are capable of carrying significant overload for some period of time. While
thermal image units are generally applied to transformers or generators, they do also have their place
for line protection. A simple overcurrent can be set with a time delay but cannot take into account the
effect of load prior to the overload event or repeated periods of overload shorter than the set time
delay. An overloaded line is normally overloaded for a reason (other essential lines have tripped) and a
trip for overload is undesirable if at all unavoidable. In order to provide as much restriction possible for
overload tripping and still protect the line for damaging amount of overload, the GARD 8000 includes
and overload protection with a thermal image. This unit provides both alarm and trip level settings.
The thermal image is selected for the type of object (line/cable) and uses the set heating and cooling
constants in its algorithm.

July 25, 2006 13-119 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
The thermal image unit is measuring the current and by use of a thermal equation estimates the
temperature of the object. When reaching set threshold, a trip and/or alarm signal is generated.
The algorithm is based on modeling the heating of a resistive element by the current applied. If,
following an overload of relatively short duration, the current drops below 0.5 A, a cooling constant is
applied to ‘reset’ the element.
The thermal image unit does not have a lower ‘start’ level, it is always asserted. The operating time
depends on level of circulating current. The formula used for this calculation is:
dθ
I 2 =θ +τ ⋅
dt
where
I is the applied current

τ is the set time constant
τ is defined as the time constant that will raise the temperature of the object from the initial θ0 to a 63%
of the final temperature of θ∞ as illustrated in the figure below.
Figure 13-64. Thermal time constant
There is a setting that enables the GARD 8000 to memorize the temperature calculated in case of
powering off the relay. If this setting is enabled, the thermal image algorithm’s start temperature will
be the memorized value.

July 25, 2006 13-120 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Figure 13-65. Thermal image characteristic time curves

July 25, 2006 13-121 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.21 TRIP LOGIC

The GARD 8000 Distance Relay trip logic combines all measuring elements set to produce tripping into one main TRIP
signal.
Weak Infeed 67
Pilot Trip 67
Weak Infeed Distance
Distance Pilot Trip
Trip Open Phase

(Broken concuctor)
Trip Undervoltage
Trip Pole Discordance
OST
Frequency Trip
Phase Overvoltage Trip
Ground Overvoltage Trip
Phase A Current
Supervision
Thermal Trip
Phase B Current
Supervision
0
Phase C Current
Block Distance
Supervision
T
Step Distance Trip
Distance Pilot Trip
Trip 50-1 Q
Trip 50-1 G
Pilot Trip 67
Trip 50Q
Trip 50G
Trip 51Q
Trip 51G TRIP
Trip 50P
Trip 51P
Stub bus trip
Remote open breaker

trip (load loss)
Close-Into-Fault
Fault Detector
Block Trip
Figure 13-66. Distance Module Trip Logic

July 25, 2006 13-122 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.22 RECLOSING UNIT

The GARD 8000 provides a recloser for up to 3 reclosing attempts with individual dead time and reset
settings. It can work together with the built-in synch check unit or with an external unit via a digital
input.
The following reclosing modes can be set:
1P mode Only single pole reclosing is allowed. The recloser will lockout after a three pole trip.
Therefore, this mode has a single reclosing attempt, independent of the set number of
attempts.
3P mode Only three pole reclosing is allowed, forcing the tripping logic to make all the trips of
this type.
1P / 3P mode Both single and three pole reclosing is allowed. The first attempt will be either single
pole or three pole, depending on the fault type. The remaining attempts (depending on
the Reclosing Attempts setting) will always be three pole.
Dependent mode
Only one reclosing will be attempted after a three pole trip. For single pole trips, the
recloser will operate according to the number of attempts selected in the Reclosing
Attempts setting.
Reclosing can be initiated by a large number of measuring units in the GARD 8000 as determined by
setting.
13.7.22.1 RECLOSE INITIATE BY EXTERNAL TRIPS

The recloser operates in the same manner for trips generated by the GARD 8000 distance protection or
by external protection.
13.7.22.2 RECLOSING SEQUENCE START

The Reclosing sequence starts for trips generated by any distance element or by any other element
selected in the settings for Reclose Initiate on page 3.7.7.1 ‘Recloser”. Sequence start is also generated
by protection pilot trips or by external trips (when input External Protection Trip is programmed). In
each case, sequence start will activate the signal SIR.
The Recloser Sequence Start logic will be blocked when the status contact input External Recloser
Blocking is activated, or when the recloser attempts have exceeded the set limit.
There is a setting for the type of external blocking used, ‘External Blocking’. ‘Recloser blocking type’
requires the blocking signal to be continuous. Unblock occurs when the blocking signal is removed.
The setting ‘Pulse’ is used when the blocking signals is delivered as a pulse. Then also an unblock
logic input needs to be used to unblock the recloser by another pulse.

July 25, 2006 13-123 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Step Distance
Zone 1
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
50P-1 RI
50P-2 RI
50P-3 RI
51P-1 RI
51P-2 RI
51P-3 RI
50G-1 RI
50G-2 RI
50G-3 RI
51G-1 RI
51G-2 RI
51G-3 RI
SIR - Reclose Initiate

50Q-1 RI
50Q-2 RI
50Q-3 RI
51Q-1 RI
51Q-2 RI
51Q-3 RI
Open phase RI
Out of Step Trip RI
Remote Breaker Open

Enable
Enable
CIFT
Reclose cycle in
progress
Distance Pilot Trip
67 Pilot Trip
Trip
External Trip
Block Recloser
Excessive number of
trips
Figure 13-67. Reclose Initiate Logic

July 25, 2006 13-124 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.22.3 RECLOSING LOGIC

Figure 13-67 depicts the flow diagram for the recloser operation. Figure 13-68 shows the block
diagram of the recloser lockout.
Lock-out for
Definite Trip TRIP = 1
SIR = 0 Reset
CC = 0
n=0
52b = 1
TRIP = 0
Lock-out for Open
Breaker
SIR - Reclose Initiate
Start Time
SIR = 1
SIR = 0 TRIP = 1
TRIP = 0 52b = 0
52b = 1
Lock-out for Start

CC = 1
Time failure
CC = Reclose cycle in progress
n = index number of reclose attempt
N = number of set reclose attempts
SIR = reclose initiate
Recl. Cycle Time (n)
Sync check
No
supervision (n)?
Yes n=n+1
Yes Sync = 1
No
Sync wait time

No
(n)?
Yes
Lock-out for lack of

Recl = 1 Sync = 1 Sync wait timer (n) Sync = 0
sync
Lock-out for
lack of sync Fail to close time
52b = 0
Lock-out for SIR = 1

Recl = 0
definite trip n<N
n=N
Lock-out for 52b = 1 Security time

open breaker
Figure 13-68. Reclosing Mode

July 25, 2006 13-125 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Any Lock-out State
SIR = 0
TRIP = 0
52b = 1
Manual close security Lock-out for Close

TRIP = 1
time Into Fault
Lock-out = 0
Reset
Figure 13-69. Recloser lock-out operation
The Reclose Initiate signal (SIR) starts a Start Time timer. If this timer times out while the SIR signal
is still asserted, the trip signal is still active, or the breaker is still closed, the recloser goes into lock-
out.
The recloser remains in locked-out state until the breaker is manually closed for the time set on
Security Time after Manual Close.
The CC signal (reclosing in process) will remain activated during the entire recloser sequence, since
the first attempt sequence (and any subsequent attempts) will continue until the recloser switches to the
Reset or the Lockout state.
A reclosing sequence (without synch check) is illustrated in the following Figure.

July 25, 2006 13-126 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Reclose cycle
Start check
complete
Fault inception Breaker trip
Reclose Breaker closed
Breaker closed command check
check
Trip signal
Reclose initiate signal
Breaker open 52b
Recl. Cycle Time
Start time
Fail to Close Time
Security time
Figure 13-70. Recloser lock-out operation
13.7.22.4 RECLOSER TIMER (DEAD TIME)

The Recloser Cycle Timer (dead time) is the time the breaker is allowed to remain open before a
reclose is attempted. Activation of the Reclose Command signal (Recl) generates the breaker closing
command signal.
When the Start Time state is reached, the corresponding timer will be started:
• The First Three-Pole Recloser Cycle Timer will start for the first reclosing attempt after a
three-pole trip.
• The Second or Third Recloser Cycle Timer will start for a second or third recloser cycle
If the recloser is manually blocked before the timer has timed out, the recloser changes to the Recloser
Reset status without reclosing. If the blocking signal is not activated during the timer countdown, the
Sync Check state is reached.

July 25, 2006 13-127 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
The Sync Check Supervision setting may be adjusted independently for each recloser cycle. If the Sync
Check Supervision setting for the corresponding cycle is set to NO, the Reclose Command signal
(Recl) is generated and the Fail to Close (inhibit) timer is started. In case the breaker does not close
during the set time, further reclosing is blocked.
If the Sync Check Supervision setting for the corresponding cycle is set to YES, the next step is to
check the Sync signal, which indicates the presence of synchronous conditions. If this signal is
activated, the Reclose Command signal (Recl) is generated and the Fail to close timer is started.
When synchronous conditions are not reached (Sync deactivated), the Sync Wait Timer Enable setting
is checked. If this setting is set to NO, the recloser changes to the Lock-out Due to Lack of
Synchronism state. If the setting is set to YES, the Sync Wait Timer starts to count down the adjusted
time.
Activation of the Sync signal before timeout generates activation of the Reclose Command signal
(Recl), and the Fail to Close timer is started. If the Sync signal is not activated before timeout, the
recloser changes to Lock-out Due to Lack of Synchronism state.
13.7.22.5 FAIL TO CLOSE TIME

When the recloser Fail to Close Time state is reached, the Reclose Command output (Recl) is activated
to send a close command to the breaker, and an adjustable Fail to Close Timer is started.
• If the breaker closes before the Fail to Close Time is completed, the Recloser Reset Time state is
entered.
• If the time is completed and the breaker remains open, the recloser state switches to Lock-out Due To
Open Breaker.
In either case, the Reclose Command output is subsequently de-activated.
13.7.22.6 SECURITY TIME

When the Recloser Security Time state is reached, an adjustable Security Time timer is started. This
setting is common for all the three reclosing cycles. The Security Time setting is used to determine
whether two consecutive trips correspond to the same fault that has not been successfully cleared, or to
two consecutive faults. If the Security Time is completed without a trip being initiated, the recloser
switches to the Recloser Reset state, and the reclose attempt is completed.
If a trip occurs and the Reclose Initiate signal (SIR) is activated before the Security Time is completed,
the next step in the reclose sequence is determined by the Number Of Reclose Attempts (n) setting. If a
trip occurs (SIR signal activated) after the last reclose attempt permitted by this setting, the recloser
switches to Recloser Lock-out Due To Definite Trip. At this point, the reclose sequence ends. If the
Recloser has not reached the last permitted reclose attempt, the trip signal that occurs before the
Security Time is completed will initiate a new reclose attempt.
The recloser will then switch to the Start Time state.

July 25, 2006 13-128 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.22.7 RECLOSER LOCKOUT

The previous sections in this chapter have described how the Recloser Lockout state is achieved when
the Recloser cannot initiate a breaker closing attempt in response to fault conditions and corresponding
trip operations. There is another condition that can produce Recloser Lockout; when the breaker is
opened without a fault associated with the breaker operation, Recloser Lockout will also occur. Under
this circumstance, the Recloser switches to Recloser Lock-out Due To Open Breaker, and reclosing is
disabled.
The Recloser will remain in the Recloser Lock-out Due To Open Breaker state until a closed breaker is
detected or a Manual Close Command is initiated.
The Recloser will then reset only if the breaker remains closed for the Manual Close Security Time set
by the user. If a trip occurs before timeout, the Recloser switches to Recloser Lockout Due To Close
Onto a Fault, and reclosing is disabled.
13.7.22.8 BLOCK RECLOSING

The recloser can be manually blocked or unblocked with the Recloser Block command.
If the recloser is in a reclose sequence when the Block Recloser command is received, further
operations are suspended. No reclose attempts will be initiated after a breaker trip.
The type of signal used for external block of the recloser can be set. ‘Recloser blocking type’ requires
the blocking signal to be continuous. Unblock occurs when the blocking signal is removed ‘Pulse’ is
used when the blocking signal is delivered as a pulse. Then also an unblock logic input needs to be
used to unblock the recloser by another pulse.
13.7.22.9 DEFINITE TRIP

A Definite Trip signal will be generated in the Recloser when the Recloser is blocked or, after the
reclosing attempt sequence, the SIR (Recloser Initiate) signal is not asserted.
The Definite Trip signal will remain activated as long as the element performing that trip does not
reset. This usually happens when, after a trip, no reclosing attempt takes place. In this case, the recloser
will change to Recloser Lockout Due to Definite Trip.
13.7.22.10 RECLOSER NOT IN SERVICE

The Recloser is placed in the Not In Service state whenever the Recloser In Service Enable setting is
NO. If a trip occurs under this condition, the Definite Trip Due to Disabled Recloser signal will be
activated, generating the corresponding event in the Event Recorder.
13.7.22.11 RECLOSE COUNTER

There is a counter accessible from the operator interface, which indicates the number of reclose
attempts completed.

July 25, 2006 13-129 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.7.22.12 SYNCHRONISM CHECK TYPE SELECTION

Both the Recloser and the command logic (for opening and closing operations of the breaker) use the
Sync signal, which indicates whether there are synchronous conditions prior to breaker closing. Such
information is provided to the GARD 8000 distance protection module either by the synchronism unit
included in the terminal unit or by an external device through the status contact input External
Synchronism signal. The Sync Check setting ‘Internal/external sync check’ indicates which signal is
being used for synchronism:
13.7.22.13 CLOSING COMMAND

The direct output for breaker closing is activated when a Reclose Command (Recl) or a Manual Close
Command is present.
When the closing command is due to reclosing, the local control logic generates the Breaker Close
signal, since synchronism is included in the Recloser logic.
When the closing command is due to a manual operation through the HMI, or through communications
(local or remote), the local control logic will check for synchronism (Sync signal), as long as the “Sync
Check Supervision” setting for manual closing (web page 3.7.4, Breaker Failure) is set to YES.
When synchronous conditions are not present (Sync de-activated), the local control logic generates the
event “Closing Command Halted Due to Lack of Synchronism.” The local control logic is halted at
this point.
The local control logic generates the Closing Command signal and the Breaker Close signal when
synchronous conditions are present (Sync activated), or when no synchronism supervision is
performed (Sync Check Supervision is set to NO).
Once the close signal is generated, the Close Fail Time starts counting down. The Close Command
Failure signal will activate if the timer times out before detecting the Breaker Closed status signal. The
corresponding event will be recorded in the Events Recorder.
13.7.23 BREAKER SUPERVISION FUNCTIONS

The GARD 8000 provides two functions useful for indicating need for breaker maintenance; total
accumulated breaking current and excessive number of trips.
13.7.24 ACCUMULATED BREAKING CURRENT

The GARD 8000 provides breaker supervision by calculating the square of the breaking current. The
kA2 of the current is proportional to the actual energy opened by the breaker.
The ‘breaker opening current’ is measured as the square of the maximum current between the time of
the trip (or manual open command) and the time the breaker opens.

July 25, 2006 13-130 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
There are two settings for this function:
• Alarm level for accumulated kA2

• Actual kA2
The second setting is used to enter a ‘starting value’ for the calculated sum in case the breaker has been
in service some time after maintenance before GARD 8000 is installed. It is also used to reset the sum
following breaker maintenance.
13.7.24.1 EXCESSIVE NUMBER OF TRIPS

The function for excessive number of trips limits the possibility of uncontrolled open and close
operations of the breaker. The number of trips can be set to 1 - 40, and when the set number is
exceeded during a 30 minute time period, further reclosing of the breaker is prevented by asserting the
lock-out function in the recloser.
13.7.24.2 ARC DETECTOR

This function detects an arc over an open breaker pole. When the breaker opens (as indicated by the
52b contact) and the current is above the set level for ‘Arc detector pick up’, the signal ‘Arc detector
trip’ will be generated after the set time delay ‘Arc detector time’.
13.7.25 SERIES COMPENSATED APPLICATIONS

Faults which involve voltage reversal are common on lines with series compensation. These occur
when the impedance from the voltage transformer position up to the fault point is capacitive. This
voltage reversal results in erroneous directional decisions, given that all the directional units are
designed assuming inductive relations between the operating current and the polarization voltage.
The distance characteristics determine the direction of the fault, using positive sequence voltage as
a polarization phasor. In most cases this voltage is not reversed in case of single pole or phase to phase
faults, but may be in case of three phase faults, for which the use of memory voltage is necessary.
When the series compensation logic is enabled, the positive sequence voltage with memory is always
used whenever the fault detector is active, independent of the positive sequence voltage level at the
time, given that a reversal of this voltage can be given with relatively high voltage. The duration of the
voltage memory will be given by the Memory duration setting.
In general, to correctly clear faults in a forward direction it is not necessary to use long memory times,
because the voltage reversal does not tend to arise for faults in zone 2. The correct performance in case
of reverse direction faults may, however, require very long memory times, which will depend on the
operating times of the adjacent line protections in charge of clearing these faults.
In order to avoid incorrect trips at the end of the voltage memory time, the distance relay incorporates
a logic which allows to transiently blocking all directional units which supervise in a forward direction,
once it is detected that the fault is in a reverse direction.

July 25, 2006 13-131 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.8 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS REPORTS AND FAULT RECORDING
13.8.1 MEASURED VALUES, TRIP STATUS, SEQUENCE OF EVENTS AND

FAULT RECORDS
The Distance Protection module has its own Sequence of Event record, in addition to the System SOE.
While a trip (and other trig signals as defined in the system logic) will trigger a system event, the
distance SOE allows for more protection related details in the log. The Distance relay fault records
give even more information about the fault condition, such as pre-fault and fault analog values.
13.8.2 MEASURED VALUES AND TRIP STATUS

The GARD 8000 distance relay display the measured values and trip status. The first screen provides a
summary of status and whether DFR (oscillography), SOE records and Fault Reports are available.
Figure 13-71. Distance Measured Values

July 25, 2006 13-132 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Selecting ‘Metering Values’ brings up a screen with all analog values, measured and calculated. Note
that the web browser will not automatically update these values. To get a new reading, refresh the
browser window.
Figure 13-72. Distance Metering

July 25, 2006 13-133 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
‘Unit Status’ displays the status of all measuring elements, whether they are in picked up state or not.
Figure 13-73. Distance Protection Unit Status

July 25, 2006 13-134 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
“Recloser Status” displays which elements are active in the recloser logic.
Figure 13-74. Distance Recloser Status

July 25, 2006 13-135 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
‘Last Trip Status’ displays which elements were active during the last trip event.
Figure 13-75. Distance Status at last trip

July 25, 2006 13-136 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.8.2.1 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS

100 SOE’s are recorded in the Distance SOE, with the oldest numbered as #1 and the newest as #100.
The record is accessed by selecting the distance relay module on the main status screen, and selecting
Distance Sequence of Events. The events are time tagged from the system clock with a resolution of
1 ms.
The distance elements that trigger an SOE record are defined in the ‘SOE Mask’ settings.
Figure 13-76. Distance SOE screen

July 25, 2006 13-137 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
Selecting an SOE # button gives further details about the event, which elements were picked up with
fault currents and voltages.
Figure 13-77. Distance SOE detail screen

July 25, 2006 13-138 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.8.2.2 FAULT RECORDS

The fault reports provide a summary of the most pertinent information for each fault event. This
enables a quick overview of what caused the relay operation. 15 detailed fault records are stored.
Figure 13-78. Distance Fault Record
At fault inception, the following information is presented:

• Date and time stamp
• Pre-fault currents and voltages as measured two cycles before the fault inception. The displayed
values include phase currents and phase voltages, neutral current and voltage and sequence
quantities.
• Relay units asserted during the fault duration.

July 25, 2006 13-139 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
At trip, the following information is presented:

• Date and time stamp
• Fault currents and voltages as measured two and a half cycles following the fault inception. The
displayed values include phase currents and phase voltages, neutral current and voltage and
sequence quantities.
• Relay units tripped.
• Distance to the fault.
• Type of fault.
Figure 13-79. Distance Fault Record Details (Part 1 of 3)

July 25, 2006 13-140 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

July 25, 2006 13-141 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

July 25, 2006 13-142 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.8.2.3 DIGITAL FAULT RECORDING

The GARD 8000 provides powerful digital fault recording as part of the distance relay module. The
oscillography is captured with 32 samples per cycles, up to a total of 15 seconds.
The oscillographic records are stored in non-volatile memory. In case of loss-of-power, the records are
guaranteed to remain in memory for a minimum of 27 days.
Fault records are captured and stored in COMTRADE binary format, according to IEEE C37.111-
1999. Any COMTRADE reader can be used for fault analysis, including the versatile Analyzer
provided as part of the ZIVerCom Application program.
13.8.2.4 ANALOG AND DIGITAL CHANNELS

The GARD 8000 distance relay module has nine analog channels: 5 currents and 4 voltages. They are:
3 phase currents
3 phase voltages
1 neutral current used for sensitive ground fault relaying or current polarization or the directional units
1 neutral current from a parallel line used for mutual coupling compensation of the fault locator
1 voltage input for a bus voltage used in the synch check unit
The digital channels to be recorder are defined in the ‘Oscillography Mask’ settings.
13.8.2.5 TRIG CONDITIONS

A digital fault record will be triggered by pick-up of any of the elements selected in the oscillography
mask.
13.8.2.6 PRE-FAULT TIME

The pre-fault time can be set between 0 and 25 cycles.
13.8.2.7 LENGTH OF OSCILLOGRAPHIC RECORD

A maximum of 725 cycles can be recorded in the memory. The number of fault records depends on the
length selected for the recording. Maximum number of records is 64 and they are related to the set
length as shown in the Table below.
Table 13-15. Oscillographic Record
Set number of cycles Maximum number of records

725 1
350 2
175 3
... ...
22 32
11 64

July 25, 2006 13-143 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
13.8.2.8 DOWNLOAD OF COMTRADE OSCILLOGRAPHIC RECORD

All DFR records are stored directly in COMTRADE format. To view a DFR records, it needs to be
downloaded to a computer and the files opened with a viewer. The viewer can be any standard
COMTRADE reader or the ZIVerCOM Analyzer provided with the GARD 8000 System.
To download a DFR file ‘Retrieve Oscillography File from Distance Relay’ is selected from the
Distance Relay Status screen. This opens a screen where the record to be downloaded and the format is
selected. The data file can be either binary (smaller file) or ASCII.
13.8.3 FAULT LOCATOR

The GARD 8000 distance protection module includes a fault locator. The algorithm compensates for
load flow and uses an innovative steady state algorithm for very accurate distance to fault indication.
13.8.3.1 SETTINGS FOR THE FAULT LOCATOR

• Line Impedance, Local Source Impedance The following line parameters are used by the fault
locator algorithm
o Positive sequence magnitude
o Positive sequence angle
o Zero sequence angle and K0 factor
All values are secondary ohms.
• Line Length. The length is a unit-less value and corresponds to the next setting length units.
• Line length units. Kilometers or miles.
• Fault locator units. This parameter can be set to ‘length units’ and will then display the
measured km or miles. If set to % it will display the distance to the fault as a percentage of the
line length.
• Indication zone. If set to ‘In’ the fault locator will display the distance for faults on the
protected line only. When set to ‘In & Out’ it will display distance for all faults detected within
any distance zone.
13.8.4 PHASE SELECTOR

The fault locator uses the phase selector to determine the type of fault. Then the algorithm for each
type of fault determines the distance to the fault.
The fault locator uses two main algorithms. The first determines whether the fault is three-phase. This
requires three simultaneous conditions:
1) High positive sequence component, that is, above 0.1 x In.

2) Low negative sequence current: meaning no more than 0.1 x In A and <10% of the positive-
sequence current.
3) Low zero-sequence current: no more than 0.08 x In and < 8% of the positive sequence
current.

July 25, 2006 13-144 973.334.3100
Distance Relay
If the fault detected does not fulfill all the conditions of a three-phase fault, the second phase selector
algorithm is executed. It compares the arguments of the negative and positive cycles.
If the fault is not three-phase and meets the third condition for three-phase faults (low zero- sequence
component), it can not be a ground fault. Therefore, it has to be two-phase. If, however, it does not
meet the third condition for three-phase faults (high zero-sequence component), it must be a ground
fault, single-phase or two-phase to ground.
Faulted phases are determined by analyzing the angle:

φ = arg(Ia2) − arg(Ia1_ f )
where:
Ia2: Phase A negative sequence current.
Ia1_f: Faulted phase A positive sequence current (once the load component is eliminated).
The following figures represent the angle diagrams used to determine the phases involved in the fault
by the φ angle.
Figure 13-80. Phase selector

July 25, 2006 13-145 973.334.3100
Distance Relay

blank

July 25, 2006 13-146 973.334.3100
SECTION 14. CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
14.1 OVERVIEW
The GARD 8000 Current Differential Module provides a comprehensive set of primary protection
algorithms. An additional set of backup protection algorithms are available when inter-relay
communications are lost for any reason.
The GARD 8000 Current Differential Module can be configured for optional single-pole tripping. The
standard ordering version is for three-pole tripping only. Three terminal configuration is also available
as an option.
Other GARD 8000 Current Differential Module features include sequence of events recorder (SOE)
and oscillography.
14.1.1 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

The primary protection functions included in the GARD 8000 Current Differential Module include:
• Current Differential
• Close Into Fault
• High Set Trip
• Open Conductor
The current differential protection is the heart of the relay. The algorithm includes a secure
communications protocol and a robust current measurement that reduces the impact of momentary
measurement transients.
The communications channel delay is removed as part of the normal data processing. The design of
the algorithm will tolerate fairly modest errors in the channel delay measurement or changes in the
delay due to network conditions.
The current differential protection can easily be configured to accommodate any specific installation.
Line charging currents and system resonances create particular concerns immediately following a
breaker closing. Proper system configuration allows the relay to ride-through these normal transient
events while allowing a trip if the system closes into a faulted line.
The high set trip routines provide an extremely fast response under very high fault currents.
The open conductor routines allow the system to respond to system imbalances when the fault
condition results in a phase open circuiting rather than shorting to another phase or ground.
14.1.1.1 BACKUP PROTECTION

The protection algorithms just described are the “primary” protection routines and are intended to
provide protection with relays at both ends of the line being protected and a communications link
between the relays. There will be unavoidable failures in the communications link and the relay
provides some backup protection algorithms to maintain protection even without a functioning
communications channel.

July 25, 2006 14-1 973.334.3100
• Overcurrent
• Time Overcurrent
• Close Into Fault
• Loss of Load
The relay also has a stub bus protection feature. When an 89 disconnect is used to disconnect a line
from the remote end it may leave a bus stub energized and requiring protection. The 89B contact can
be fed into the relay to enable the stub bus feature.
The stub bus function basically isolates the local and remote relays. The local relay will operate using
only overcurrent and time overcurrent routines that are similar to the backup routines but have
independently programmable settings. The remote relay will then continue to operate in primary
protection mode but will be told that the local (stub-bus side) relay is receiving zero current through
the line.
14.1.2 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS

The current differential relay also provides several additional functions:
• Transferred Status Bits
• Sequence of Events
• Oscillography
• Recloser Block
14.2 CONFIGURATION
14.2.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW

The GARD 8000 System differs from most conventional multifunctional differential relays in that
rather than supplied with very complex generic default logic, the GARD 8000 can be easily
customized to meet your specific application requirements.
For most applications, the factory default logic may be suitable but RFL will modify it free-of-charge
when required.
The advantage with custom logic is that the user interface is greatly simplified as the web pages for
logic settings are automatically created to correspond to the actual logic.
While the logic is custom made, a considerable amount of settings and field flexibility can be built-in
to cover a large number of application needs. For instance, mapping of inputs and outputs, inverters for
inputs and outputs, timers, communications channel selections, etc. can all be made on web pages as
settings.
The current diff. module in itself is highly programmable but the interaction in the system has been
kept to a minimum in order to simplify the system user interface. Recognizing the need for different
functionality for different users and/or applications, the logic signals (in and out) exchanged between
the system logic and the current diff. module can be custom specific.

July 25, 2006 14-2 973.334.3100
14.2.1.1 HARDWARE CONFIGURATION

A GARD 8000 System can be built up with Functional Modules as required for a specific application,
with a selectable number of inputs, outputs and communications interfaces. The following overview
describes a factory default configuration of a 3U chassis built up of:

• Display Board with base Teleprotection System
• RS 449 communications port on the rear of the PS module (included in Base System)
• C37.94 communications module in rear Slot 1
• Distance Protection module in front and rear Slot 4
• Current Differential Module in Slot 3
• 6 output module in rear Slot 2
Current Diff (Slot 3)
Display with TPS (Slot 1)
Single Power Supply Distance Relay (Slot 4)
Chassis Front View

Current Diff (Slot 3) C37.94 Comms Module (Slot 1)
RS-449
+ +
- -
Chassis Rear View Single Power Supply

6 - Input / 6 - Output Module (Slot 2)
Figure 14-1 Front and Rear view of 3U chassis with Current Diff Module (Typical)
July 25, 2006 14-3 973.334.3100
Connections are made to the Current Diff. Module on the rear of the GARD chassis as shown below.
The terminal assignments are the same for the 3U and 6U chassis. These connections are fixed.
IG +
IC +
IB +
IA +
IG -
IC -
IA -
IB -
Figure 14-2. Current Differential Rear Connections
Shown below is a typical AC/DC Schematic for the GARD 3U Chassis with a Distance Relay Module
in slot 3 and a Current Diff Module in slot 4.
-
125VDC
+ + +
125VDC 125VDC 125VDC
89b 52b
52b Breaker
Key Disconnect
DTT
Transfer
Initate Available
Status
Trip
89b
AC SCHEMATIC
Slot 2-21
Slot 2-17
Slot
2-22
Slot 2-19
2-20
Slot
Slot 2-13
Slot 2-15
Slot 2-23
Slot
2-18
Slot
2-24
Slot
Slot
2-14
2-16
+ 125
GARD 8000 Distance Relay Slot 1-13 VDC
SLOT 3
2 Slot Distance
VA 3 VA 1-14 Only Trip
4
VB 5 VB Slot 1-15
6 Slot Distance SPARE
VC 7 VC 1-16 Only Trip
VN
8 + 125
V SYNC CHECK Slot 1-17 VDC
9
Slot Distance "or"
1-18 Differential Trip
IA 13
14 IA Slot 1-19
+ 125
VDC
IB 16 Slot Distance "or"

17 1-20 Differential Trip
IB
IC 19 Slot 1-21
IN 20 IC
Tripping Direction
Slot Differential
I SENSITIVE NEUTRAL 1-22 Only Trip 52 52
10
OR CURRENT TC-2 TC-1
11 Slot 1-23
POLARIZING
Slot Differential
22 I NEUTRAL FROM SPARE 52a 52a
1-24 Only Trip
23 PARALLEL LINE FOR
FAULT LOCATOR Slot 2-1
52 GARD 8000 Line Current Slot Differential
Differential Relay 2-2 Only Trip
SLOT 4 + 125
IA Slot 2-3 VDC
+
IA I Slot Differential
- A 2-4 Only Trip
TO SCADA
+ 125
Slot 2-5 VDC
IB
+
Slot Transfer Trip
IB I 2-6
- B
+ 125
Slot 2-7 VDC
IC Slot Transfer Trip

+ 2-8
IC I + 125
- C Slot 2-9 VDC
Slot 87L Multi Phase 86-2 86-1

IG TO
+ 2-10 Reclose Block 86-2 86-1
RECLOSE
IG I
+ 125 BLOCK
- G Slot 2-11 VAC
Slot Communications
2-12 Alarm
PS2-1
TO SCADA
Slot 1-RX
Slot 1-TX
+ 38/150 VDC
PS2-4
PS2-3
PS1-4
PS1-3
PS1-5
PS2-5
Station Power
Battery PS2-2 Supply
_
87L Current PS2 Minor Alarm PS1 Major Alarm

Differential
Communications
C37.94 Compliant
TO ANNUNCIATOR OR SCADA
Optical Interface
Figure 14-3. AC/DC Schematic for GARD 8000 Differential Relay (Typical)

July 25, 2006 14-4 973.334.3100
In many cases the system logic for the current diff relay application is pre-configured (mapped) at the
factory. The following pages will give the user a brief introduction to the mapping options available
when the current diff module is installed. For a more detailed discussion of system logic
configuration see Section 8 in this manual. As every chassis logic configuration is unique the logic
files have to be sent to the GARD.
From the home page “Settings” pull down menu click “File Operations,” the following web page will
appear.
Figure 14-4 File Operations, Current Diff
Click “Send File to GARD 8000,” select and SEND the 4 System Logic files.
Figure 14-5 Send File to GARD 8000, Current Diff

July 25, 2006 14-5 973.334.3100
Return to the home page and from the “Settings” pull down menu click “System Logic Configuration”
as shown below.
Figure 14-6. Home Page

The following web page will appear.
Figure 14-7 System Logic Configuration

July 25, 2006 14-6 973.334.3100
Click “Input Mapping” the following web page will appear.
Figure 14-8. Input Mapping Webpage
The number of physical inputs depends on how many input modules were ordered. The logic inputs
(shown on the left on the input mapping page) are determined in the OrCAD logic, and can be
customized for your application.
Outputs are configured in a similar way. Again, the number of physical outputs depends on how many
output modules were ordered. The logic outputs (shown on the left on the output mapping page as
‘source’) are determined in the OrCAD logic, and can be customized for your application.
When changes are made click the “Save” button to save your configuration, a conformation page
will appear.

July 25, 2006 14-7 973.334.3100
Figure 14-9. Output Mapping Webpage
To fully understand what the inputs and outputs are doing in the system logic, the actual System Logic
Diagram should be consulted. This is supplied in a separate section at the rear of the instruction
manual.
For example, the current diff. inputs are shown as follows:

July 25, 2006 14-8 973.334.3100
LOGIC BUS RX: 100-123 (LEN=24
LOGIC BUS TX: 124-147 (LEN=24)
Input Mapping U7 CURRENT_DIFF
TIMER
6 Input NUMBER = 1
Slot 2 Right ATT_DEC = 1_1
2 1 PH_A_TRIP
INPUT_89b IN OUT IN_89b
TB2-13 U16 PH_B_TRIP

Input 1 Input 1
TB2-14 1
2
TB2-15 TRIG5
Input 2 Input 2 PH_C_TRIP
TB2-16 BUF
TB2-17
Input 3 Input 3
TB2-18 PH_G_TRIP
TB2-19 TRIP_DISABLE TRIP_DISABLE_IN
Input 4 Input 4
TB2-20
TB2-21 U22
Input 5 Input 5
TB2-22 1
2
TB2-23 TRIG6
Input 6 Input 6 COMMS1_FAIL
TB2-24 BUF
MODULE1 INPUT_STATUS_BIT_0 STATUS_BIT_0 OUT_OF_SERVICE

LOGIC BITS
9 - 15
INPUT_STATUS_BIT_1 STATUS_BIT_1 LCCT_ALARM
INPUT_STATUS_BIT_2 STATUS_BIT_2 LOL_OC_ALARM
INPUT_STATUS_BIT_3 STATUS_BIT_3 SINGLE_POLE
INPUT_STATUS_BIT_4 STATUS_BIT_4 MAJOR_ALARM
INPUT_STATUS_BIT_5 STATUS_BIT_5 MINOR_ALARM
INPUT_STATUS_BIT_6 STATUS_BIT_6 BACKUP_MODE
INPUT_STATUS_BIT_7 STATUS_BIT_7 STARTUP_MODE
STATUS_BIT_0_RX
STATUS_BIT_1_RX
STATUS_BIT_2_RX
STATUS_BIT_3_RX
STATUS_BIT_4_RX
STATUS_BIT_5_RX
STATUS_BIT_6_RX
STATUS_BIT_7_RX
Figure 14-10. Current Differential Inputs, Schematic Diagram
The logic inside the ‘current diff’ block on the schematic is fixed as delivered from the factory but can
be custom ordered for your application. While the proven logic in the current diff relay is not changed,
the input and output signals of the current diff block can be customized to provide different
functionality for different applications. A complete list of available signals is provided at the end of
this section.
The physical inputs (in this example Inputs 1 – 6) are mapped on the webpage to logic inputs. Any
physical input can be freely assigned to any number of logical inputs.

July 25, 2006 14-9 973.334.3100
The outputs are mapped in a similar way.
Output Mapping
U1
2 1
U6 TRIG2 6 Relay Outlets
2 BUF
1 Slot 4 Left
AND2 TRIP_A
U2 TB2-13
3 2 1 Output 1 Output 1 TB2-14
U13 TRIG3
2 BUF TB2-15
1
AND2 TRIP_B Output 2 Output 2 TB2-16
U3
3 1 TB2-17
U20 2
TRIG4 Output 3 Output 3 TB2-18
2 BUF
1 TB2-19
AND2 TRIP_C
U34 Output 4 Output 4 TB2-20
3 1
2 TB2-21
TRIG7
COMMS_1_FAIL TB2-23
U37
2 1 Output 6 Output 6 TB2-24
TRIG8
BUF
OUT_OF_SERVICE MODULE2
U40 LOGIC BITS 3-8
2 1
TRIG9
BUF
LCCT
U42
2 1
TRIG10
BUF
LOL_OC_ALARM
U45
2 1
TRIG15
BUF
MAJOR_ALARM
U47
2 1
TRIG11
BUF
MINOR_ALARM
U50
2 1
TRIG12
BUF
BACKUP_MODE
U51
2 1
TRIG13
BUF
STARTUP_MODE
U20
2
1
AND2 RECLOSE_BLOCK
U62
3 2 1
HMIOUT17
BUF
U63 OUTPUT_STATUS_BIT_0
2 1
TRIG14
BUF
OUTPUT_STATUS_BIT_1
OUTPUT_STATUS_BIT_2
OUTPUT_STATUS_BIT_3
OUTPUT_STATUS_BIT_4
OUTPUT_STATUS_BIT_5
OUTPUT_STATUS_BIT_6
OUTPUT_STATUS_BIT_7
Figure 14-11. Current Differential Outputs, Schematic Diagram

July 25, 2006 14-10 973.334.3100
The logical outputs available are defined in the OrCAD logic and can be customized for your
application. A logic output can be mapped to a single physical output only, this is why some logic
signals are duplicated in the logic. If there is a need for more than two alarm or trip contacts, it can be
simply provided by a custom made logic for your needs.
The GARD 8000 System provides 20 user configurable LED’s. Each LED is tri-colored; red, yellow,
and green. Each color can individually represent a logic function. In case more than one color is active,
red will override yellow and green and yellow will override green.
The current diff relay logic also includes a block named ‘LED MAPPING SIGNALS’. These signals
are created for simple mapping to the front panel LED’s. Again, custom made logic can provide other
and/or more signals as required.
Each LED function can be given a label. The front panel label can also be custom made by a print-out
of the supplied template. While there is limited space for text on the front, the web page user labels can
contain up to 32 characters.
14.2.1.2 LOGIC SIGNALS AVAILABLE FROM THE CURRENT

DIFFERENTIAL MODULE
The Current Differential Module creates a number of logic signals from its measuring element and
protection logic. The GARD 8000 System logic uses these signals to perform trip and pilot scheme
operations. The default logic is bringing out some of the available signals, but all of the signals shown
in the logic diagrams are available for custom logic.

July 25, 2006 14-11 973.334.3100
14.3 RELAY SETTINGS
From the Home Page pull down menu click Settings > Chassis Configuration.
Clicking on the Current Diff. Module will bring up the Current Diff. Relay Configuration web page as
shown below.
Figure 14-12. Current Differential Relay Configuration
Each of the above web pages can be configured by the end user. In many cases the Current Differential
Module comes pre-configured from the factory. RFL recommends that the Supervising Engineer
carefully review the following information and if necessary consult RFL before making any changes.

July 25, 2006 14-12 973.334.3100
14.3.1 GENERAL SETTINGS

The following pages list the various settings with their definitions. If changes are made click the
“Save” button to save your configuration, a conformation page will appear.
The General Settings web page is shown below.
Figure 14-13. Current Differential Relay General Settings

July 25, 2006 14-13 973.334.3100
General Settings Definitions:

Sets the beginning position of the TX logic bus time-slot. Allowed values are between 3 and 511 in
increments of 1. TX logic bus time-slot refers to data driven onto the logic bus by the current diff
module.
Sets the length of the TX logic bus time-slot.
Sets the beginning position of the RX logic bus time-slot. RX logic bus time-slot refers to data
retrieved from the logic bus by the current diff module.
Sets the length of the TX logic bus time-slot.
Module Service
This enables or disables the module. When disabled it is removed from the logic and communications
busses.
Last Trip Close Timer (100-5000 inc 100)
This timer is used for the last trip function (section 14.4.6). This sets the time the relay must be in a
non-tripped condition in order to close a trip event and make the information available in the last trip
status page.
The setting must be between 100ms and 5s (inclusive) in increments of 100ms.
Guard Before Trip
This enables or disables the guard before trip function. The guard before trip function adds an extra
level of security to the permissive trip functions of the relay by requiring a clean and stable
communications channel prior to allowing any trip messages through. This function may be disabled if
the speed of reestablishing protection is more important than the added security the feature provides.
Ground Trip Delay
This enables or disables the ground trip delay function (see below).
Ground Trip Delay (1-30000 inc 1)
This sets the delay for the ground tripping function when enabled (see above). When the ground phase
calculates a trip the issuing of the trip command may be delayed in order to allow other elements to
clear the fault.
The delay may be set between 1ms and 30s (inclusive) in increments of 1ms.
Line Connections
Single Pole Tripping
For relays purchased with the single pole option this is used to enable or disable the single pole
features. Disabling single pole makes the relay function as a three pole relay.

July 25, 2006 14-14 973.334.3100
Line Frequency
The user must select either 50Hz or 60Hz line frequency.
Protection Rescaling Factor (0.1-10.0 inc 0.1)
The current measurements used for the protection algorithms are internally adjusted to a normalized
scale based upon the CTs; however, in rare occasions the automatic normalization factors need to be
adjusted. The protection current measurements are divided by the protection rescaling factor prior to
being processed by the algorithms. In most applications this parameter should be left at 1.0 and should
only be changed following consultation with RFL.
The protection rescaling factor must be between 0.1 and 10 (inclusive) in increments of 0.1. The
protection rescaling factor must be set to the same value in both relays.
Local and Remote CT Nameplate
Local and Remote Primary CT Factor (50-6000 inc 50)
The user must set the primary CT factor from the nameplate rating. The acceptable range is 50 to 6000
(inclusive) in increments of 50.
Local and Remote CT Secondary Factor
The user must select the secondary factor for the CT. The available options are 1ARMS and 5ARMS.
Fault Detectors
Phase Overcurrent Fault Detector (0.125-15 inc 0.125)
This is used to set the threshold for the overcurrent fault detectors for phase A, B, and C. The setting
must be between 0.125ARMS and 20ARMS (inclusive) in increments of 0.125ARMS.
See section 14.5.1.5.3.1 for further information.
Ground Overcurrent Fault Detector (0.125-15 inc 0.125)
This is used to set the threshold for the overcurrent fault detector for ground. The setting must be
between 0.125ARMS and 20ARMS (inclusive) in increments of 0.125ARMS.
Phase Peak-Change Fault Detector (0.125-5 inc 0.125)
This is used to set the threshold for the peak-change fault detectors for phase A, B, and C. The setting
Ground Peak-Change Fault Detector (0.125-5 inc 0.125)
This is used to set the threshold for the peak-change fault detector for phase A, B, and C. The setting
After all the settings have been entered click the “Save” button to save your configuration, a
conformation page will appear.

July 25, 2006 14-15 973.334.3100
14.3.2 COMMUNICATIONS SETTINGS

The Comms Settings web page is shown below.
Figure 14-14. Current Differential Relay Comms Settings
Comms Settings Definitions:

Transmit Addr 1 (0-4095 inc 1)
This sets the transmit address for communications channel 1. It may be from 0 to 4095 in increments
of 1. The transmit address setting at the local relay must match the receive address setting at the
remote relay for communications to take place.
This prevents inadvertent communications network cross-connects from creating incorrect relay links.
Receive Addr 1 (0-4095 inc 1)
This sets the receive address for communications channel 1. It may be from 0 to 4095 in increments of
1. The transmit address setting at the local relay must match the receive address setting at the remote
relay for communications to take place.
This prevents inadvertent communications network cross-connects from creating incorrect relay links.

July 25, 2006 14-16 973.334.3100
14.3.3 PRIMARY SETTINGS

The Primary Settings web page is shown below.
Figure 14-15. Current Differential Relay Primary Settings

Primary Settings Definitions:
Phase Bias (1-10 inc 0.125)
This sets the bias for phase A, B, and C. The setting must be between 0.5ARMS and 10ARMS (inclusive)
in increments of 0.125ARMS. The bias is the minimum operate level for the current differential
algorithms. The operate level can increase for a period following breaker closing (bias boost, section
14.5.1.1.7) or based upon the measured currents in the system (slope characteristic, section 14.5.1.1.8).

July 25, 2006 14-17 973.334.3100
Phase Bias Boost Level (0-20 inc 0.125)

This sets the bias boost for phase A, B, and C. The setting must be between 0ARMS and 20ARMS
(inclusive) in increments of 0.125ARMS. The bias boost increases the operate level for the current
differential algorithms for a user programmable duration following breaker closing (see bias boost
duration below). Setting this parameter to zero effectively disables it.
For further information see section 14.5.1.1.7.
Phase Bias Boost Duration (50-2000 inc 10)
This sets the duration of bias boost for phase A, B, and C. The setting must be between 50ms and 2s
(inclusive) in 10ms increments. Following a breaker closing the operate level for the current
differential algorithms is increased by the bias boost setting (see above) for the duration set with this
parameter.
Ground Bias (0.5-10 inc 0.125)
This sets the bias for ground. The setting must be between 0.5ARMS and 10ARMS (inclusive) in
increments of 0.125ARMS. The bias is the minimum operate level for the current differential
algorithms. The operate level can increase for a period following breaker closing (bias boost, section
14.5.1.1.7) or based upon the measured currents in the system (slope characteristic, section 14.5.1.1.8).
Ground Bias Boost Level (0-20 inc 0.125)
This sets the bias boost for ground. The setting must be between 0ARMS and 20ARMS (inclusive) in
increments of 0.125ARMS. The bias boost increases the operate level for the current differential
algorithms for a user programmable duration following breaker closing (see bias boost duration
below). Setting this parameter to zero effectively disables it.
Ground Bias Boost Duration (50-10000 inc 10)
This sets the duration of bias boost for ground. The setting must be between 50ms and 2s (inclusive)
in 10ms increments. Following a breaker closing the operate level for the current differential
algorithms is increased by the bias boost setting (see above) for the duration set with this parameter.
Phase Operate Current Slope 1 (0.01-2 inc 0.01)
This sets the slop for the first segment of the operate level slope characteristic for phase A, B, and C.
The setting must be between 0 and 2 (inclusive) in increments of 0.01. The operate level slope
characteristic increases the operate level based upon the currents measured by both relays. This is used
to desensitize the relay with increasing current to allow for cumulative system errors such as CT
nonlinearities.
Phase Operate Current Slope 2 (0.01-2 inc 0.01)
This sets the slop for the second segment of the operate level slope characteristic for phase A, B, and
C. The setting must be between 0 and 2 (inclusive) in increments of 0.01. The operate level slope
nonlinearities.

July 25, 2006 14-18 973.334.3100
Phase Operate Current Crossover (5-30 inc 0.125)

This sets the transition point between the first and second slope segments of the operate level slope
characteristic for phase A, B, and C. The setting must be between 5ARMS and 30ARMS (inclusive) in
increments of 0.125ARMS. The operate level slope characteristic increases the operate level based upon
the currents measured by both relays. This is used to desensitize the relay with increasing current to
allow for cumulative system errors such as CT nonlinearities.
Ground Operate Current Slope 1 (0.01-2 inc 0.01)
This sets the slop for the first segment of the operate level slope characteristic for ground. The setting
must be between 0 and 2 (inclusive) in increments of 0.01. The operate level slope characteristic
increases the operate level based upon the currents measured by both relays. This is used to
desensitize the relay with increasing current to allow for cumulative system errors such as CT
nonlinearities.
Ground Operate Current Slope 2 (0.01-2 inc 0.01)
This sets the slop for the second segment of the operate level slope characteristic for ground. The
setting must be between 0 and 2 (inclusive) in increments of 0.01. The operate level slope
nonlinearities.
Ground Operate Current Crossover (5-30 inc 0.125)
This sets the transition point between the first and second slope segments of the operate level slope
characteristic for ground. The setting must be between 5ARMS and 30ARMS (inclusive) in increments of
0.125ARMS. The operate level slope characteristic increases the operate level based upon the currents
measured by both relays. This is used to desensitize the relay with increasing current to allow for
cumulative system errors such as CT nonlinearities.
High Set Trip
This is used to enable or disable the high set trip (HST) function in the relay (see section 14.5.1.3).
Phase High Set Limit (5-30 inc 0.125)
This sets the threshold for the HST routines for phase A, B and C. The setting must be between
5APEAK and 30APEAK (inclusive) in increments of 0.125APEAK. The HST routines provide a very quick
tripping mechanism for high internal fault currents.
For further information see section 14.5.1.3.
Ground High Set Limit (5-30 inc 0.125)
This sets the threshold for the HST routine for ground. The setting must be between 5APEAK and
30APEAK (inclusive) in increments of 0.125APEAK. The HST routines provide a very quick tripping
mechanism for high internal fault currents.

July 25, 2006 14-19 973.334.3100
Open Conductor Action

This sets the action to take when an open conductor fault is detected. The user may set the relay to go
into minor or major alarm, or to disable the function. This function is automatically disabled in single-
pole / selective-pole relays.
Open Conductor Delay (50-5000 inc 50)
This sets the delay for the open conductor algorithm. The setting must be between 50ms and 5s
(inclusive) in increments of 50ms.

July 25, 2006 14-20 973.334.3100
14.3.4 BACKUP PROTECTION SETTINGS

The Backup Settings web page is shown below.
Figure 14-16. Current Differential Relay Backup Settings

July 25, 2006 14-21 973.334.3100
Backup Settings Definitions:

Backup Functions Enable
This is used to enable or disable all backup functions in the relay (see section 14.5.1.5.1).
Overcurrent Backup Enable
This is used to enable or disable the overcurrent backup function in the relay (see section 14.5.1.5.1).
Phase Overcurrent Backup Setpoint (6-31.875 inc 0.125)
This sets the threshold for the overcurrent backup algorithm for phase A, B, and C. The setting must
be between 6ARMS and 31.875ARMS (inclusive) in increments of 0.125ARMS.
Ground Overcurrent Backup Setpoint (0.125-31 inc 0.125)
This sets the threshold for the overcurrent backup algorithm for ground. The setting must be between
0.125ARMS and 31ARMS (inclusive) in increments of 0.125ARMS.
Backup Overcurrent Timer (0-1000 inc 10)
This sets the timer for the overcurrent backup algorithm for both the three phases and ground. The
setting must be between 0ms and 1s (inclusive) in increments of 10ms.
Time Overcurrent Backup Enable
This enables or disables the TOC functions for both the three phases and ground.
For further information see section 14.5.1.5.1.2.
Phase TOC Characteristic
This selects which TOC characteristic curve to use for phase A, B, and C. There are four USA curves
and three IEC curves supported.
Phase TOC Pickup (0.5-31.875 inc 0.125)
This selects the TOC pickup current for phase A, B, and C. The setting must be between 0.5ARMS and
31.875ARMS (inclusive) in increments of 0.125ARMS.
Phase TOC Dial (0.05-15.0 inc 0.05)
This selects the TOC time dial for phase A, B, and C. The setting must be between 0.05 and 15
(inclusive) in increments of 0.05.
Ground TOC Characteristic
This selects which TOC characteristic curve to use for ground. There are four USA curves and three
IEC curves supported.

July 25, 2006 14-22 973.334.3100
Ground TOC Pickup (0.5-31 inc 0.125)

This selects the TOC pickup current for ground. The setting must be between 0.5ARMS and
31.875ARMS (inclusive) in increments of 0.125ARMS.
Ground TOC Dial (0.05-15.0 inc 0.05)
This selects the TOC time dial for ground. The setting must be between 0.05 and 15 (inclusive) in
increments of 0.05.
Close Into Fault Backup Enable
This is used to enable or disable the Close Into Fault (CIF) backup function in the relay (see section
14.5.1.5.1.3).
Close Into Fault Window (30-1000 inc 10)
This sets the CIF window for both the three phases and ground. The setting must be between 30ms
and 1s (inclusive) in increments of 10ms. The current must exceed the setpoint (see below) within this
specified time window in order for the relay to trip. If tripped the relay output will deactivate when the
timer window is exceeded.
Close Into Fault Phase Setpoint (0.5-31 inc 0.125)
This sets the CIF setpoint for phase A, B, and C. The setting must be between 0.5ARMS and 31ARMS
(inclusive) in increments of 0.125ARMS. The current must exceed the setpoint for approximately one
full cycle within the specified time window (see above) in order for the relay to trip. If tripped the
relay output will deactivate when the timer window is exceeded.
Close Into Fault Ground Setpoint (0.5-31 inc 0.125)
This sets the CIF setpoint for ground. The setting must be between 0.5ARMS and 31ARMS (inclusive) in
increments of 0.125ARMS. The current must exceed the setpoint for approximately one full cycle
within the specified time window (see above) in order for the relay to trip. If tripped the relay output
will deactivate when the timer window is exceeded.
Loss of Load Action
This sets the action to take when a Loss of Load (LOL) fault is detected. The user may set the relay to
go into minor or major alarm, or to disable the function. This function is automatically disabled in
single-pole / selective-pole relays.
Loss of Load Delay (50-5000 inc 50)
This sets the delay for the LOL algorithm. The setting must be between 50ms and 5s (inclusive) in
increments of 50ms.
Stub Bus Functions Enable
This enables or disables all of the stub bus features of the relay (see section 14.5.1.5.2).

July 25, 2006 14-23 973.334.3100
Stub Bus Overcurrent Enable

This is used to enable or disable the stub bus overcurrent function in the relay (see section 14.5.1.5.2).
Stub Bus Overcurrent Delay (0-1000 inc 10)
This sets the timer for the stub bus overcurrent algorithm for both the three phases and ground. The
setting must be between 0ms and 1s (inclusive) in increments of 10ms.
Stub Bus Phase Overcurrent (6-31.875 inc 0.125)
This sets the threshold for the overcurrent backup algorithm for phase A, B, and C. The setting must
be between 6ARMS and 31.875ARMS (inclusive) in increments of 0.125ARMS.
Stub Bus Ground Overcurrent (0.125-31 inc 0.125)
This sets the threshold for the overcurrent backup algorithm for ground. The setting must be between
0.125ARMS and 31ARMS (inclusive) in increments of 0.125ARMS.
Stub Bus Time Overcurrent
This is used to enable or disable the stub bus TOC functions in the relay. When enabled they use the
same TOC configuration settings as the backup TOC routines (see section 14.5.1.5.1.2).

July 25, 2006 14-24 973.334.3100
14.3.5 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS (SOE) SETTINGS

The following 2 web pages are used for reporting data; the triggers can be toggled on or off.
The SOE Settings web page is shown below.
Figure 14-17. Current Differential Relay SOE Settings

July 25, 2006 14-25 973.334.3100
SOE Settings Definitions:
Fault Detectors
Setting this to “Yes” will allow the fault detectors to trigger a SOE recording. A change of state
(becoming active or inactive) in any of the fault detectors (see section 14.5.1.5.3) for any phase or
ground will initiate an SOE recording.
Major Alarm
Setting this to “Yes” will allow the major alarm to trigger a SOE recording. A change of state
(becoming active or inactive) in the major alarm will initiate an SOE recording. See section 14.5.2.4
for further information.
Minor Alarm
Setting this to “Yes” will allow the minor alarm to trigger a SOE recording. A change of state
(becoming active or inactive) in the minor alarm will initiate an SOE recording. See section 14.5.2.5
for further information.
Curr Diff Alarm

Setting this to “Yes” will allow the current differential alarm to trigger a SOE recording. A change of
state (becoming active or inactive) in the current differential alarm will initiate an SOE recording. See
section 14.5.1.1.11 for further information.
Ping-Pong Alarm
Setting this to “Yes” will allow the ping-pong alarm to trigger a SOE recording. A change of state
(becoming active or inactive) in the ping-pong alarm will initiate an SOE recording. See section
14.5.2.6.4 for further information.
Address Failure
The relay verifies communications with the proper remote relay using an addressing scheme (see
section 14.5.2.6.1). Setting this to “Yes” will allow an address failure (or recovery from an address
failure) to trigger an SOE recording.
Comms Failure
Setting this to “Yes” will allow the communications failure flag to trigger a SOE recording. A change
of state (becoming active or inactive) in the communications failure flag will initiate an SOE
recording. See section 14.5.2.6.3 for further information.
Remote # 1 Fault Detector

Setting this to “Yes” will allow a change in the status of the remote relays fault detector, triggering an
SOE recording.

July 25, 2006 14-26 973.334.3100
Remote # 1 TCTD
Setting this to “Yes” will allow the receipt of a TCDT message from the remote relay to trigger an
SOE recording.
Remote # 1 HST
Setting this to “Yes” will allow the receipt of a HST message from the remote relay to trigger an SOE
recording.
Input 89B
Setting this to “Yes” will allow the Logic Bus signal representing the 89B input to trigger a SOE
recording. A change of state (becoming active or inactive) in the 89B input (after being qualified by
the timer in the controller’s logic processing) will initiate an SOE recording.
Input Trip Disable

Setting this to “Yes” will allow the Logic Bus signal representing the Trip Disable to trigger a SOE
recording. A change of state of the Trip Disable input will initiate an SOE recording.
Input Transferred Status # 0 through # 7

Setting this to “Yes” will allow the Logic Bus signals representing the Tx Transferred Status input bits
to trigger a SOE recording. A change of state of the logic bus bit will initiate an SOE recording. Note
that these bits are inputs to the relay, the relay will transmit the information to the remote relay (hence
“Tx” bits).
See section 14.5.2.7 for more information.
Output Out of Service

Setting this to “Yes” will allow the Logic Bus signals representing the out of service flag output bit to
trigger a SOE recording. A change of state of the bit will initiate an SOE recording. The relay may be
out of service if it has been disabled by the user, is in the process of initializing, or has taken itself out
of service due to a detected problem.
Output Reclose Block

Setting this to “Yes” will allow the Logic Bus signals representing the reclose block output bit to
trigger a SOE recording. A change of state of the bit will initiate an SOE recording. See section TBD
for more information.
Output Transferred Status # 0 through #7

Setting this to “Yes” will allow the Logic Bus signals representing the Rx Transferred Status output
bits to trigger a SOE recording. A change of state of the logic bus bit will initiate an SOE recording.
Note that these bits are outputs from the relay, the relay has received the information from the remote
relay (hence “Rx” bits).
See section 14.5.2.7 for more information.

July 25, 2006 14-27 973.334.3100
14.3.6 OSCILLOGRAPHY SETTINGS

The Oscillography Settings web page is shown below.
Figure 14-18. Current Differential Relay Oscillography Settings

July 25, 2006 14-28 973.334.3100
Oscillography Settings Definitions – Configuration:

Oscillography Duration (10-180 inc 1)
This sets the length of each oscillography recording in units of cycles. The setting must be between 10
cycles and 600 cycles (inclusive) in increments of 1. The length selected for each oscillography
recording will impact the total number of recordings that can be saved in the system. Changing this
parameter will cause all previously recorded oscillography records to be erased.
See section 14.6.2.1 for further information.
Oscillography Pre-Trigger (0-180 inc 1)
This sets the length of pre-trigger data to be recorded for each oscillography recording. The setting
must be between 0 cycles and 300 cycles (inclusive) in increments of 1. If the setting exceeds the
oscillography duration setting (see above) the relay will save the entire recording as pre-trigger data.
Changing this parameter will cause all previously recorded oscillography records to be erased.
Oscillography Settings Definitions – Triggers:
The user may configure which signals within the relay will cause an oscillography recording to be
initiated.
In addition to the user selectable triggers the design of the relay sets all trips as valid oscillography
triggers. Thus, a change of state (becoming active or inactive) in any primary tripping element (see
sections 14.5.1.1 through 14.5.1.4) or backup element (see sections 14.5.1.5.1 through 14.5.1.5.2) for
any phase or ground will initiate an oscillography recording.

July 25, 2006 14-29 973.334.3100
14.4 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL RELAY STATUS

From the Home page select Current Differential, a webpage similar to the one shown below will
appear.
Figure 14-19. Current Differential Relay Status

July 25, 2006 14-30 973.334.3100
14.4.1 GENERAL STATUS

The General Status web page is shown below.
Figure 14-20. Current Differential Relay General Status webpage

General Status Definitions:
Invalid Configuration
When red this indicates that the module has received an invalid configuration message from the
controller and rejected it. If the module had previously received a valid configuration it will continue
to use the previous configuration.
Green indicates the last configuration was valid.
Module Out of Service

When red this indicates the module is not in service. This could be because the module has been
disabled by the user, the module is in the process of initializing, it has not received a valid
configuration, or it has detected a hardware problem and taken itself out of service. Green indicates
the module is in service.
When a module is out of service it does not provide any protection functions and does not drive either
the communications or logic busses in the GARD system.
Major Alarm
When red this indicates that the module has an active major alarm (see section 14.5.2.4). Green
indicates the absence of a major alarm.
July 25, 2006 14-31 973.334.3100
Minor Alarm
When red this indicates that the module has an active minor alarm (see section 14.5.2.5). Green
indicates the absence of a minor alarm.
When red this indicates that the local relay is in test mode (see section 14.5.2.1). Green indicates that
the local relay is not in test mode.

When red this indicates that the remote relay is in test mode (see section 14.5.2.1). Green indicates
that the remote relay is not in test mode.
Backup Mode Active

When red this indicates that the relay is in backup mode (see section 14.5.1.5.1). Green indicates that
the relay is not in backup mode.
Backup Guard Before Trip Not Satisfied

When red this indicates that the backup guard before trip criteria has not been satisfied and the relay
will not trip in backup mode. Green indicates that either the criteria have been satisfied or guard
Stub Bus Mode Active

When red this indicates that the relay is in stub bus mode (see section 14.5.1.5.2). Green indicates that
the relay is not in stub bus mode.
Configuration
This will indicate if the relay is configured for single pole (“1-pole”) or three pole (“3-pole”)
operation.
Relay Options
Single-pole Available
This indicates if the relay was purchased with the single pole option (“yes” or “no”).

July 25, 2006 14-32 973.334.3100
As well as informing the user on the health of the Current Diff module this web page will give the
installed version of the following components.
Relay ACTEL Firmware Version
Relay Board Version
PIC Software Version
I/O ACTEL Firmware Version
I/O Hardware Version

July 25, 2006 14-33 973.334.3100
14.4.2 PHASE STATUS

The Phase Status web page is shown below.
Figure 14-21. Current Differential Relay Phase Status webpage
Relay Phase Status Definitions:

Local and Remote Trips
Phase A, B, C, and Ground Active Trip
When red this indicates that the corresponding phase has an active trip. Green indicates the absence of
an active trip.

July 25, 2006 14-34 973.334.3100
Fault Detectors
Phase A, B, C, Ground, and Remote Fault Detectors
When red this indicates that the corresponding phase has an active fault detector (see section
14.5.1.5.3). Green indicates the absence of active fault detectors.
Current Differential Alarms

Current Diff Alarm Phase A, B, C, and Ground
When red this indicates that the corresponding phase has an active current differential alarm (see
section 14.5.1.1.11). Green indicates the absence of a current differential alarm.
Phase Loss Alarms

Phase Loss Alarms Phase A, B, and C
Red indicates that the relay has calculated a loss of current in the corresponding phase per the open
conductor or loss of load algorithms. Note that if the open conductor or loss of load algorithm is
configured by the user to cause a trip the condition will be transient and would not be expected to be
seen on the web page. Green indicates the algorithms have not calculated a phase loss condition.
Local and Remote Phase Sequence (deg)

Phase A, B, C, and Ground
The system provides an indication of the relative phasing of the phase currents. The phasing is
reported relative to the phase A current (no voltages are applied to the relay, only currents). The data
is only valid when the system is in steady-state and there are currents applied to the relay.
The local currents will be displayed as 0º, 120º, 240º or “Error” (not available). The remote currents
will be displayed as 180º, 300º, 60º or “Error”.

July 25, 2006 14-35 973.334.3100
14.4.3 COMMUNICATIONS STATUS

The Communications Status web page is shown below.
Figure 14-22. Current Differential Relay Communications Status webpage
Relay Communications Status Definitions:
Address Fail
When red this indicates that the address received from the remote relay (set via the transmit address
setting on the remote relay) does not match the setting for the received address at the local relay. No
protection messages are passed between relays unless the addresses match. Green indicates the
addresses are correct.
Received Address
This displays the received address from the remote relay (which must match the local settings for
receive address). It is displayed to help diagnose addressing problems, which may be caused by
network misconnections.
Relay Configuration Mismatch

There are a number of key setup and configuration parameters that need to be the same on both ends of
the line being protected. The current diff relay compares these parameters and if they do not match
this indicator is set to red. When they match the indicator is set to green.
The parameters that must match include:

July 25, 2006 14-36 973.334.3100
• 50 Hz /60 Hz line
• Two-terminal / three terminal relay configuration
• Single-pole / three-pole configuration
• The local and remote CT factor settings in both relays must agree
Pong-Pong
This is the unidirectional channel delay (in ms) as measured by the ping-pong tests. The ping-pong is
calculated based on a bidirectional measurement; the displayed result is half of the bidirectional
measurement.
Pong-Pong Alarm
When red this indicates that the ping-pong measurements made by the local and remote relay do not
match. The ping-pong is a bidirectional measurement and should provide the same result when either
relay initiates the test. If the two measurements differ by more than 3 ms the error flag is set.
Green indicates the ping-pong tests are the same.
BER
This is an approximation of the communications channel bit error rate (BER). It is most accurate for
modest BER’s (between 2E-6 and 8E-3).
Comms Alarm
When red this indicates an alarm condition in the communications channel. Green indicates the
absence of an alarm condition.
Comms Failure
When red this indicates a failure in the communications channel. Green indicates the absence of a
failure condition.
Guard Before Trip Not Satisfied

When red this indicates that the guard before trip criteria has not been satisfied and the relay will not
trip in primary protection mode. Green indicates that either the criteria have been satisfied or guard

July 25, 2006 14-37 973.334.3100
14.4.4 TRANSFERRED STATUS

The Transferred Status Bits web page is shown below.
Figure 14-23. Current Differential Relay Transferred Status Bits webpage

The status of eight bits received by the logic bus in the chassis is shown above. Green indicates an
active state while red indicates an inactive state. See section 14.6.2.6.

July 25, 2006 14-38 973.334.3100
14.4.5 METERING AND STATUS

The Metering and Status webpage is shown below.
Figure 14-24. Current Differential Metering and Status webpage
Phase A, B, C, and Ground current (Primary)

These indicate the current measured locally for each of the relay inputs. The measurements are in
ARMS and are referenced to the primary side of the CT.
Remote 1 Phase A, B, C, and Ground current (Primary)

These indicate the current measured at the remote relay for each of the relay inputs. The
measurements are in ARMS and are referenced to the primary side of the CT.
Phase A, B, C, and Ground differential current (Sec)
These indicate the differential current calculated at the local relay for each phase. The measurements
are in ARMS and are referenced to the secondary side of the CT.
Phase A, B, C, and Ground operate current (Sec)

These indicate the relay operate current calculated at the local relay for each phase. The measurements
are in ARMS and are referenced to the secondary side of the CT.

July 25, 2006 14-39 973.334.3100
14.4.6 LAST TRIP INFORMATION

The Relay Last Trip status webpage is shown below.
Figure 14-25. Current Differential Relay Last Trip webpage

The last trip web page provides a very broad overview of the last trip processed by the relay. It is a
summary only, it is anticipated that the user will review the SOE and oscillography records for more
detailed information.
The relay’s last trip web page displays all of the tripping elements that were active during the last trip
event. A ‘trip event’ in this context includes the time period between the first tripping element
becoming active and all tripping elements being inactive for a user programmable period of time (see
section 14.3.1).
For example, if the last trip event close timer is set for 1 second. A trip will start the event window and
all trips that become active (even momentarily) are recorded. If the trips are all cleared and a reclose
occurs two seconds later, which causes another trip, a new last trip event would be saved—it would
include only the trips detected as a result of the reclosing. If the last trip event close timer was set for
three seconds the trips detected during the initial fault and the reclosing would be included in the same
last trip display.
July 25, 2006 14-40 973.334.3100
14.4.7 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS

The Sequence of Events status webpage is shown below.
Figure 14-26. Current Differential Relay Last Trip webpage

The above web page shows SOE records with #1 being the oldest. Clicking a button will display the
data for that button. The web page displayed is an instantaneous “snapshot” of the conditions when the
trigger event occurred.
To reset this webpage do the following:
From the pull down menu select Test > System Test, and check the Current Diff Relay Module. In the
web page that appears check the “Reset SOE” box. Click Run Test.

July 25, 2006 14-41 973.334.3100
14.4.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
The Oscillography Records webpage is shown below.
Figure 14-27. Retrieving Oscillography Records webpage

The above web page shows oscillography records with #1 being the oldest. Clicking a button will
transfer the oscillography record to a customer directory.
To reset this webpage do the following:
From the pull down menu select Test > System Test, and check the Current Diff Relay Module. In the
web page that appears check the “Reset Oscillography” box. Click Run Test.

July 25, 2006 14-42 973.334.3100
14.5 APPLICATIONS
14.5.1 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
14.5.1.1 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION

Each relay measures the local current, stores the locally measured value, and transmits the
measurement to the remote relay.
When a relay receives a message regarding the current measured at the remote relay it compares it to
the current measured locally for the same phase at the same instant in time.
The differential current calculated for that half-cycle is compared to a calculated operate level. If the
differential current exceeds the operate level a trip is issued.
14.5.1.1.1 CURRENT MEASUREMENTS

The basic current measurement used for the current differential algorithm takes the currents measured
between zero crossings. All of the individual samples (normally sixteen of them) are added together.
This essentially calculates the integral of the current during that half-cycle (or “area under the curve”)
multiplied by a scale factor.
This is related directly to the charge being transferred over the line and in the case of sinusoidal
currents the RMS value of the current during the half-cycle. Using this “equivalent RMS” value
provides an increased level of security and robustness when compared to peak measurements etc.
14.5.1.1.2 MEASUREMENT QUALIFIERS

The purpose of the half-cycle current measurements is to provide a standardized and consistent basis
for relays at both ends of the line so that meaningful comparisons can be made. As such certain
qualifiers are added to the measurements to ensure the validity of the data.
14.5.1.1.3 COMMUNICATING CURRENT MEASUREMENTS TO REMOTE RELAY

Each valid half-cycle current measurement is saved locally for the current differential processing
routines. Phase A, B, and C transmit their current measurements only for the positive half-cycle and
the ground transmits only the negative half-cycle measurements. The messages used to transmit the
measured current are called CCD messages.
When a current measurement is transmitted to the remote relay two additional pieces of information
are included in the message. The message includes a flag to indicate the status of the local fault
detectors. The message also includes information regarding the delay between when the current
measurement was taken and when the message was transmitted to the remote end.
14.5.1.1.4 NESTING
When a relay receives a CCD message from the remote relay it must compute how long ago the actual
current measurement was made. As stated above the message itself includes information indicating
how long the data was held in queue at the remote end prior to transmission. Two additional pieces of
timing information are also required to determine how old the data is.
The relay keeps track of the channel delay in the system (how long it takes between transmitting a
message and receiving it at the other end. The last piece of timing information required is the delay at
the local end between when a message is received and the data is actually processed.

July 25, 2006 14-43 973.334.3100
These three delay times (remote queuing time, channel time, and local queuing time) are added to
determine how long ago the remote relay made the current measurement that is being processed. This
is used to determine which of the locally calculated half-cycle currents was measured at the same time.
This process is called nesting.
The fact that the comparisons are made based upon half-cycle measurements results in some notable
characteristics of the algorithm. First, the channel delay is canceled by the algorithm so it does not
compromise the integrity of the protection (although longer channel delays will result in delayed trip
times). The system can tolerate greater than 27ms of channel delay and still provide protection.
The other benefit is that exact delay compensation is not required. Modest errors in the calculated
delays can be tolerated while still allowing the received CCD message to nest with the correct local
half-cycle. Delay compensation errors on the order of ± 4ms will not cause a nesting error.
14.5.1.1.5 OPERATE LEVEL CALCULATION

The differential current that will cause the relay to operate is the operate level. The operate level is
based upon several user settings and the dynamic conditions of the line.
14.5.1.1.6 BIAS SETTING

The user selects the bias level depending upon the system application. There is one setting for the
phases and one for ground.
14.5.1.1.7 BIAS BOOST

The user may chose to boost the bias level following a breaker closing. This reduces the relay’s
sensitivity and accommodates line charging currents. Phase and ground have independent settings for
both the boost level and the duration of the boost. The boost function may be disabled by setting the
boost level to zero.
14.5.1.1.8 OPERATE LEVEL SLOPE CHARACTERISTIC

The bias level sets the baseline operate level. As line currents increase the relay must be further
desensitized to accommodate normal system variances and errors, such as CT errors. This is
accomplished by increasing the operate level as the line currents increase.
The parameter that is used as the driving factor for this compensation is the scalar sum of the line
currents. The magnitudes of the current measured at each relay are added and the compensation is
based upon this sum. The compensation is a two-segment piecewise linear function as shown in the
following Figure.

July 25, 2006 14-44 973.334.3100
Operate Current Bias Setting (+ boost)
Slope 2
Slope 1
Slope Crossover
Scalar Sum
Figure 14-28 Operate Level Slope Characteristic
As show in the figure above with zero current at both ends the operate level is equal to the bias setting
(plus boost following a breaker close). As the current increases from zero the operate increases as
specified by “slope 1”. Thus continues until the scalar sum reaches the user specified slope crossover
current point at which it will increase as prescribed by “slope 2”.
The phase and ground have independent settings for both slopes and the crossover point.
14.5.1.1.9 TRIP CALCULATION

The calculated differential current is compared to the operate level computed above. If the current
exceeds the operate level a trip is issued locally and a Transferred Current Differential Trip (TCDT)
message is sent to the remote end to force it to trip.
14.5.1.1.10 FAULT DETECTOR QUALIFICATION

The phase calculating the trip must have an active fault detector and there must be at least one
additional (local or remote) fault detector active.
14.5.1.1.11 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL ALARM

If the phase calculates a trip but it is not processed into a qualified trip due to a lack of fault detectors
the relay issues a current differential alarm to alert the user of the condition.
14.5.1.2 CLOSE INTO FAULT PROTECTION

The bias boost function described in section 14.5.1.1.7 allows the current differential protection
routines to provide the required CIF protection.
14.5.1.3 HIGH-SET TRIP PROTECTION

As described in section 14.5.1.1 the current differential routines work entirely upon half-cycle current
measurements which, by definition, cannot be completed until the half cycle is completed. In cases of
extremely high fault currents it is desirable to provide a mechanism that does not require the half-cycle
measurement. This is for two reasons; first, it provides faster tripping and, second, the fault may cause
an extended delay in the zero-crossing of the current (which is used to determine the bounds of the
half-cycle measurement). The relay includes a high set trip (HST) routine for this purpose.

July 25, 2006 14-45 973.334.3100
The HST algorithm is a two stage process. First, if a relay measures inordinately high current it sends
a message to the remote relay. The remote relay then checks it’s measured current and blocks the trip
if it is an external fault. If the remote relay does not determine it to be an external fault it will trip and
send a trip signal back to the originating relay.
14.5.1.3.1 GENERATION OF THE HST MESSAGE

As with the current differential routines the HST routines are processed for the positive half-cycle for
the phases and negative half-cycle for the ground. If the relay measures four consecutive samples
(instantaneous current measurements) that exceed the HST setpoint a HST message is sent.
As with the CCD message the HST message includes data indicating how long the delay was between
determining the current exceeded the HST setpoint and the message was actually transmitted.
14.5.1.3.2 PROCESSING RECEIVED HST MESSAGES

When the HST message is received the local currents are compared to a blocking current to avoid
tripping on through faults.
14.5.1.3.3 CALCULATING THE BLOCKING CURRENT

The HST is essentially a degenerate form of the current differential algorithm that has been tailored for
quick response. Given the HST process begins with the remote relay detecting a high current, the local
(receiving) relay must block if it also measures current equal to the HST setpoint (which would make
the differential current zero).
As with the current differential routines the bias setting is used to desensitize the element. Given the
bias setting is an RMS value and the HST routines process instantaneous values the bias setting must
be converted to an equivalent peak value. An additional 1A of desensitization is included to account
for the high currents (as the slope characteristic does for the current differential algorithm) and
limitations of the speed-optimized routine.
The blocking current is further limited to a maximum value of 7.5APEAK. The calculation of the
blocking current is thus:
⎧high_set_limit − bias ∗1.414 − 1A
block _ current = min ⎨
⎩ 7.5A
14.5.1.3.4 CALCULATING THE TRIP

When a relay receives a HST message it determines how long ago the HST message was calculated at
the remote end. This process is very similar to the nesting performed by the current differential routine
(section 14.5.1.1.4), however, as mentioned above rather than computing a differential current the local
current is compared to a blocking level.
The normal nesting routines deal only with half-cycle blocks and can thus accommodate modest
nesting errors without any impact. The HST routines work on instantaneous measurements and must
allow for some uncertainties and system errors. As such, the local current is checked over a 12-sample
window—if the local current exceeds the blocking level at any time during this window the unit will
not trip.
If there is insufficient blocking current the local end will trip and send a TCDT message to the remote
relay.

July 25, 2006 14-46 973.334.3100
14.5.1.4 OPEN CONDUCTOR (PHASE UNBALANCE) UNIT (46)

The open conductor algorithm is a multi-step algorithm that works only with the three phases. The
only potential involvement of the ground is that it can contribute a FD.
14.5.1.4.1 PREFAULT CONDITION

The system must start in a stable condition with all three phases seeing currents of at least 1.5ARMS (5A
CTs).
14.5.1.4.2 PHASE LOSS DETECTOR

A phase is considered lost when there is a phase imbalance and at least two fault detectors while
having been in a valid prefault condition within the past two cycles.
Phase imbalance is defined as at least one phase having greater than or equal to 3ARMS (5A CTs) and at
least one phase having less than 0.5ARMS (5A CTs).
14.5.1.4.3 DELAY TIMER AND ACTION

Once the phase loss is detected the phase imbalance must continue for a user specified duration in
order to satisfy the algorithm (at which point the FDs will most likely be inactive as will the prefault
condition).
The user can specify if they want the open conductor algorithm to cause a trip, an alarm, or be ignored.
14.5.1.5 ADDITIONAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
14.5.1.5.1 BACKUP PROTECTION

If enabled the relay will enter the backup protection mode when the communications channel has
failed (section 14.5.2.6.3) or the communications channel is OK but the primary guard before trip
criteria has not been satisfied (and it is enabled).
14.5.1.5.1.1 INSTANTANEOUS AND DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT ELEMENTS (50)

The overcurrent elements work on the measured RMS values of the measured currents. The
measurement must exceed the user setpoint for a time period exceeding the user specified duration for
the element to become active, there must also be an active FD in the phase calculating the trip and at
least one additional FD.
14.5.1.5.1.2 TIME OVERCURRENT ELEMENTS (51)

The relay allows for independent configuration of the phase and ground time overcurrent elements.
Each has four configuration settings: enable/disable, type of characteristic curve to use, pickup level,
and time dial setting.
The relay supports several operate characteristic curves. All curves have an instantaneous reset
characteristic—if the current drops below the pickup level the integrator is reset and the algorithm will
restart.

July 25, 2006 14-47 973.334.3100
14.5.1.5.1.2.1 FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW

The general form of the operate function is:
⎛ A ⎞
operate _ time = td ⎜ p + B⎟
⎝ M −1 ⎠
Where td is the time dial setting and M is the multiple of the pickup current.
14.5.1.5.1.2.2 MULTIPLE OF PICKUP CURRENT

The multiple of pickup current is defined as:
measured current
M =
pickup setting
The algorithm is fully specified within the range 1.5 < M < 20. Additionally there are practical
limitations due to the current measurement itself—the measurement will start to clip if the peak current
exceeds the range of the equipment.
The calculations are based upon the half-cycle equivalent RMS value measurements. The individual
half-cycle contributions to the algorithm are integrated to account for time-varying currents. When the
integrated signal exceeds the operate time the output is asserted. As previously mentioned the
integration is reset if the measured current drops below the pickup current.
14.5.1.5.1.2.3 TIME DIAL SETTING

The time dial setting for all the curves is from 0.05 to 15 with a step size of 0.05. However, the
following restrictions apply:
• The USA curves have an effective range of 0.1 to 15 (if the user specifies 0.05 it will be
rounded up to 0.1 for the calculations).
• The IEC curves have a range of 0.05 to 1. If set to a value above 1, the relay will use 1 for the
calculations.
14.5.1.5.1.2.4 CHARACTERISTIC CURVES

Time overcurrent units include seven characteristic curves:
• USA Moderately Inverse

• USA Inverse
• USA Very Inverse
• USA Extremely Inverse
• IEC Standard Type A (Inverse)
• IEC Standard Type B (Very Inverse)
• IEC Standard Type C (Extremely Inverse)

July 25, 2006 14-48 973.334.3100
14.5.1.5.1.2.4.1 USA MODERATELY INVERSE TOC CHARACTERISTIC
The relay operate characteristic is defined as:

⎛ 0.0104 ⎞
operate _ time = td ⎜ 0.02 + 0.0226 ⎟
⎝M −1 ⎠
Where td is the time dial setting and M is the multiple of the pickup current:
measured current
M =
pickup setting
The characteristic is shown graphically as follows.
100
10
Time Dial
Setting
15
Time (seconds)
10
1 7
6
5
4
3
2
0.1
1
0.5
0.1
0.01
0.1 1 10 100
Multiples of Pickup
Figure 14-29 USA Moderately Inverse TOC Characteristic

July 25, 2006 14-49 973.334.3100
14.5.1.5.1.2.4.2 USA INVERSE TOC CHARACTERISTIC
⎛ 5.95 ⎞
operate _ time = td ⎜ 2 + 0.180 ⎟
⎝ M −1 ⎠
measured current
M =
pickup setting
The characteristic is shown graphically below

3
10
100
Time Dial
Setting
10 15
Time (seconds)
10
7
6
1 5
4
3
2
1
0.1
0.5
0.1
0.01
0.1 1 10 100
Multiples of Pickup
Figure 14-30 USA Inverse TOC Characteristic

July 25, 2006 14-50 973.334.3100
14.5.1.5.1.2.4.3 USA VERY INVERSE TOC CHARACTERISTIC
⎛ 3.88 ⎞
operate _ time = td ⎜ 2 + 0.0963 ⎟
⎝ M −1 ⎠
measured current
M =
pickup setting
The characteristic is shown graphically below.

3
10
100
Time Dial
Setting
10 15
Time (seconds)
10
7
6
1 5
4
3
2
1
0.1
0.5
0.1
0.01
0.1 1 10 100
Multiples of Pickup
Figure 14-31 USA Very Inverse TOC Characteristic

July 25, 2006 14-51 973.334.3100
14.5.1.5.1.2.4.4 USA EXTREMELY INVERSE TOC CHARACTERISTIC
⎛ 5.67 ⎞
operate _ time = td ⎜ 2 + 0.0352 ⎟
⎝ M −1 ⎠
measured current
M =
pickup setting

3
10
100
Time Dial
Setting
10 15
Time (seconds)
10
7
6
1 5
4
3
2
1
0.1
0.5
0.1
0.01
0.1 1 10 100
Multiples of Pickup
Figure 14-32 USA Extremely Inverse TOC Characteristic

July 25, 2006 14-52 973.334.3100
14.5.1.5.1.2.4.5 IEC STANDARD TYPE A TOC CHARACTERISTIC

⎛ 0.14 ⎞
operate _ time = td ⎜ 0.02 ⎟
⎝M −1⎠
measured current
M =
pickup setting
100
10
Time Dial
Setting
1.0
Time (seconds)
0.9
1 0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.1
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.01
0.1 1 10 100
Multiples of Pickup
Figure 14-33 IEC Standard Type A TOC Characteristic

July 25, 2006 14-53 973.334.3100
14.5.1.5.1.2.4.6 IEC STANDARD TYPE B TOC CHARACTERISTIC
⎛ 13.5 ⎞
operate _ time = td ⎜ 1 ⎟
⎝ M −1⎠
measured current
M =
pickup setting

3
10
100
Time Dial
10 Setting
Time (seconds)
1.0
0.9
0.8
1 0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.1 0.3
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.01
0.1 1 10 100
Multiples of Pickup
Figure 14-34 IEC Standard Type B TOC Characteristic

July 25, 2006 14-54 973.334.3100
14.5.1.5.1.2.4.7 IEC STANDARD TYPE B TOC CHARACTERISTIC
⎛ 80 ⎞
operate _ time = td ⎜ 2 ⎟
⎝ M −1⎠
measured current
M =
pickup setting

3
10
100
10 Time Dial
Time (seconds)
Setting
1.0
0.9
0.8
1
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.1
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.05
0.01
0.1 1 10 100
Multiples of Pickup
Figure 14-35 IEC Standard Type C TOC Character

July 25, 2006 14-55 973.334.3100
14.5.1.5.1.3 CLOSE INTO FAULT (CIF)

The backup close into fault elements are only active during a user specified period following the
breaker closing. The measured RMS current must exceed the user setpoint for one full cycle period for
the element to become active and there must also be an active FD in the phase calculating the trip and
at least one additional FD.
Once tripped the CIF element will become inactive when the user specified time period has expired (if
the fault persists other elements should pick up).
14.5.1.5.1.4 LOSS OF LOAD (LOL)

The loss of load algorithm is a multi-step algorithm that works only with the three phases. The only
potential involvement of the ground is that it can contribute a FD. The loss of load algorithm is
automatically disabled in single-pole configuration.
14.5.1.5.1.4.1 PREFAULT CONDITION

The system must start in a stable condition with all three phases seeing currents of at least 1.5ARMS (5A
CTs).
14.5.1.5.1.4.2 LOSS DETECTOR

A phase is considered lost when there is a phase imbalance and at least two fault detectors while
having been in a valid prefault condition within the past two cycles.
Phase imbalance is defined as at least one phase having greater than or equal to 3ARMS (5A CTs) and at
least one phase having less than 0.5ARMS (5A CTs).
14.5.1.5.1.4.3 DELAY TIMER AND ACTION

Once the phase loss is detected the phase imbalance must continue for a user specified duration in
order to satisfy the algorithm (at which point the FDs will most likely be inactive as will the prefault
condition).
The user can specify if they want the open conductor algorithm to cause a trip, an alarm, or be ignored.
14.5.1.5.2 STUB BUS PROTECTION

When the bus is configured with an 89 disconnect that may leave a bus stub energized and requiring
protection the 89B contact can be fed into the relay to enable the stub bus feature. The stub bus
functions may be disabled by the user.
The stub bus function basically isolates the local and remote relays. The local relay is switched into a
modified backup mode that provides only overcurrent and time overcurrent routines. The stub bus
overcurrent routines are identical to the backup overcurrent routines (section 14.5.1.5.1.2) but allow
independent configuration of the delay and phase and ground overcurrent thresholds.
The stub bus time overcurrent (TOC) routines use the same configuration settings as the backup TOC
routines (section 14.5.1.5.1.2) but have an independent enable/disable control.

July 25, 2006 14-56 973.334.3100
14.5.1.5.3 FAULT DETECTORS
14.5.1.5.3.1 OVERCURRENT FAULT DETECTOR

When the measured current exceeds the user selected threshold the detector is tripped. The
measurement used is the floating measurement, so it does not depend upon zero crossings. The
detector is based upon the magnitude of the current and will thus trip on both positive and negative
current.
There are separate setpoints for the three phases and ground. A small amount of hysteresis is added to
ensure the detection is stable.
14.5.1.5.3.2 PEAK CHANGE FAULT DETECTOR

This routine uses the half-cycle current measurements. Each positive half-cycle measurement is
compared to the previous positive half-cycle measurement and each negative half-cycle measurement
is compared to the previous negative half-cycle measurement. Any change that exceeds the user
selected setpoint will trip the detector.
14.5.1.5.3.3 PUSLE-WIDTH FAULT DETECTOR

The pulse-width fault detector looks for half-cycles that are significantly too narrow or wide. The
detector is only active if the current is greater than approximately 1.5ARMS. Both the positive and
negative half-cycles are checked.
If the half-cycle is completed in less than 14 sample-periods or the half-cycle does not complete within
28 sample-periods the detector is tripped.
14.5.1.5.3.4 SLOPE CHANGE FAULT DETECTOR

The slope change FD processes the magnitude of the current and works on both positive and negative
half-cycles. A normal sinusoidal half-cycle will have an increasing current (positive slope) for the first
¼-cycle followed by decreasing current (a change in slope to a negative slope) in the second ¼-cycle.
Thus a single slope change is expected in a half-cycle.
The slope-change FD looks for two slope changes in a given half-cycle. It also requires the current to
be greater than approximately 1.5ARMS. If both of these conditions are met the FD is tripped.
14.5.1.5.3.5 POLARITY CHANGE FAULT DETECTOR

The polarity change FD is based upon expecting the current to continue to cross-through zero and
change polarity. The detector notes when the current reaches zero and then checks the instantaneous
current measurement four sample-periods later. There should be current of the opposite polarity
compared to that preceding the zero-cross.
This FD requires that the pre-zero-cross current be greater than approximately 1.5ARMS. If both of
these conditions are met the FD is tripped. Note that this detector will trip if the current remains at
zero or inverts phase at or near the zero crossing.
14.5.1.5.3.6 BREAKER CLOSING FAULT DETECTOR

In order to account for charging currents and other transient conditions that occur when a breaker is
closed the relay is typically desensitized for a period after the breaker is closed. This is accomplished
July 25, 2006 14-57 973.334.3100
using the bias boost as described in section 14.5.1.1.7. While this prevents the transient condition from
causing a trip some low-level fault conditions, however, may be masked by the bias boost.
When the boost is removed the normal protection algorithms will calculate a trip. A problem can arise
if the fault detectors are no longer active, as may be the case with boost durations of greater than
100ms. To work around this issue the breaker closing FD has been incorporated.
The breaker closing FD does not actually detect any fault; rather, it simulates a fault when the boost
timer expires. This allows the protection algorithms to generate a trip even if there are no active FDs
when the timer expires.
14.5.2 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS

14.5.2.1 TEST MODE
The test mode is a relay function that blocks local tripping allowing commissioning and other
diagnostic tests to be run without actually tripping breakers. Given the test mode disables breaker
tripping it should be used with extreme caution. RFL recommends that the relay trip outputs be
manually bypassed during testing when possible.
While in test mode virtually all of the relay functions continue to operate as normal—currents are
measured, messages are passed between relays, trips are calculated, and SOE and oscillography data is
recorded. The trips are blocked from being sent to the breakers by the logic in the GARD controller.
This allows all of the functions of the relay to be stimulated and tested.
When the relay is in test mode a minor alarm will be issued.
14.5.2.2 PHASE SEQUENCE REPORTING

The relay checks the relative phase sequencing of the current inputs. All measurements are made with
respect to (local) phase A current. The measurements are status indicators only, not intended as
measurements of actual phase angles. The readings are expected to be used in a steady-state condition
with nominal currents applied to the relay (a minimum of 0.5A for 5A CTs, 0.1A for 1A CTs).
The test checks each phase to see if they are at 0, 120, or 240 degrees (relative to phase A). A
measurement within about ±11° will be accepted, if the measurement is outside this range or the
currents are too low “Error” will be displayed. Given the measurements are relative to phase A, phase
A will either be 0° or “Error”.
Each relay will perform the same measurement and report the result to the remote relay. Under normal
steady-state conditions the local and remote phase A currents will be 180° out of phase and each relay
will be taking measurements with phase A defined as 0°. In order to make the display of results more
useful, the relay uses the channel delay time and relay to relay current measurements to confirm the
two ends are out of phase and flips the remote measurement by 180°.
Thus the remote phase A current will be displayed as 180° (or “Error” if the remote end did not make a
measurement or the local and remote are not out of phase). The remaining phases will be displayed as
180° (remotely measured as 0°), 300° (remotely measured as 120°), or 60° (remotely measured as
240°), or “Error”. This provides an approximation of both the local and remote phasing and can
readily identify miswires or gross system abnormalities.
July 25, 2006 14-58 973.334.3100
14.5.2.2.1 ENTERING TEST MODE
When the user commands the relay to enter test mode the relay must not be tripped and there cannot be
any fault detectors (local or remote) active. The relay will then enter test mode, block the local trip
outputs, and issue a minor alarm. It will also send a message to the remote relay to place it in test
mode (this is sent repeatedly as a configuration).
The remote relay will also verify that there are no trips or fault detectors and then enter test mode. The
remote relay will send a return message confirming it has entered test mode, block the local trip
outputs, and issue a minor alarm. The user should confirm, using the status web pages, that both the
local and remote relays have entered test mode prior to performing any testing.
14.5.2.2.2 EXITING TEST MODE
In order to exit test mode the user must turn off the test mode in the relay where it was originally set.
This local relay will then change the configuration message sent to the remote relay to indicate that it
should no longer be in test mode and the remote relay will also exit test mode.
If communications are lost while in test mode the remote relay will remain in test mode. If it is desired
to exit test mode while comms are down, the user may do so using the web pages, however, when
comms are restored the relay will again be commanded to enter test mode if the “local” relay is still
configured for test mode.
Note that the test mode is a volatile setting: it is cleared when power is removed. Thus, if power is
cycled at the remote relay the relay will power-up normally and return to test mode once it receives the
appropriate messages from the local relay. If the local relay (the one that the user initiated test mode
at) loses power it will power-up normally (not in test mode). This was done to prevent relays from
potentially powering-up (after an indeterminate period of time or even in different chassis) in test
mode.
14.5.2.3 PRIMARY GUARD BEFORE TRIP

Upon establishing communications (or reestablishing if comms had failed) the relay will require
100ms of communications with the remote relay without calculating or receiving any trips to satisfy
the GB4T criteria. While this provides a secure method of enabling protection under normal
conditions, it will prevent the relay from coming up with a faulted line.
To work around this the relay will also satisfy the GB4T criteria if a clear channel is detected. A clear
channel is defined as approximately 250ms without any detected communications errors.
14.5.2.4 MAJOR ALARM

The relay will go into major alarm when it detects a problem that prevents it from providing protection.
The alarm bit is sent out on the logic bus and is used in the system logic (in the GARD controller
module) to prevent trip signals from being issued.
14.5.2.5 MINOR ALARM

The minor alarm is a user alerting function that goes out as a bit on the logic bus. The system logic in
the GARD controller module has a timer that monitors the minor alarm signal. If this signal is
continuously active for a prolonged period (e.g. 10 seconds) they user can be notified.
The module minor alarm has no direct impact the protection functions of the relay; it is intended
strictly to alert the user to possible trouble conditions.
July 25, 2006 14-59 973.334.3100
• Current Differential Alarm

The current differential alarm is an indicator that the relay has calculated a current differential
trip; however, the trip has not been fully processed because there were not sufficient fault
detectors. See section 14.5.1.1.11 for further information.
• Loss of Load / Open Conductor

The loss of load (section 14.5.1.5.1.4) and open conductor (section 14.5.1.4) algorithms may be
configured by the user to place the module in minor alarm.
• Communications Alarm
When the communications alarm (section 14.5.2.6.2) is active the relay will be in minor alarm.
• Ping-Pong Alarm
When the ping-pong alarm (section 14.5.2.6.4) is active the relay will be in minor alarm.
• Communications Failure
When the relay is in communications failure (section 14.5.2.6.3) the relay will be in minor
alarm.
14.5.2.6 COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTIONS

All communications channels suffer from occasional bit errors and message corruption. Each message
contains a data integrity check and any messages that are corrupted are discarded. Each message is
transmitted three times and the receiver performs a two-out-of-three voting logic. Thus, even if a
single instance of a message is corrupted in the communications link the message will be correctly
received by the relay.
If the errors are infrequent the relay will simply ride through them without any degradation in
performance. More frequent errors will cause individual messages to be dropped which will result in
degraded performance. Low to modest errors rates that continue for a prolonged period of time are
generally a sign of problems with the communications channel and should be investigated. When relay
detects these prolonged periods of errors, even if the relay is able to continue to function, it alarms the
user.
If high error rates are detected the relay will go into a comms failure condition.
14.5.2.6.1 ADDRESSING
The relay implements an addressing scheme to ensure that the relay is communicating with the proper
remote relay prior to opening the communications channel. The user must set a receive (Rx) and
transmit (Tx) address in the relay.
The local Rx setting must match the Tx setting of the remote relay (and likewise in the opposite
direction).
14.5.2.6.2 COMMUNICATIONS ALARM

The relay constantly monitors the communications channel. Minor, low-level communications
problems can be accepted by the relay without any degradation in performance. Modest
communications problems may result in slightly degraded performance and severely degraded comms

July 25, 2006 14-60 973.334.3100
will result in the relay declaring a comms failure (see below), however, while the relay can work-
through minor or modest communications channel problems they should not go unreported. The relay
identifies these problems by setting a communications alarm which is displayed on a status web page.
The communications alarm also causes the module to go into minor alarm which goes out as a bit on
the logic bus. The system logic in the GARD controller module has a timer that monitors the minor
alarm signal. If this signal is continuously active for a prolonged period (e.g. 10 seconds) they user
can be notified.
Neither the communications alarm or module minor alarm has any direct impact the protection
functions of the relay in any way; they are intended strictly to alert the user.
14.5.2.6.3 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE

A communications failure is declared whenever the communications channel is determined to be
unusable. The following conditions will generate a comms failure.
• Detection of a comms hardware failure within the GARD chassis (or the bus not configured).
• Address mismatch.
• Failing six successive ping-pong tests.
• Severely degraded comms.
When the communications channel fails the relay will go into backup mode (if enabled).
14.5.2.6.4 PING-PONG AND PING-PONG ALARM

The relay constantly monitors the communications channel delay using a ping-pong measurement.
The measurement is calculated by generating a message at the local end, the remote end responds to
the message with a reply—included in the reply is the amount of time between the remote end
receiving the message and sending out the reply. The local end knows when the first message was
transmitted and when the reply was received, after compensating for the delay at the remote relay the
round-trip communications time is calculated. The reported ping-pong delay is ½ of the calculated
round-trip time.
The contributors to the ping-pong alarm include:
• Failure of one or more ping-pong tests.

• If the measured ping-pong exceeds 28ms.
• If the ping-pong measured at the local and remote relay do not match.
• If the ping-pong changes by more than 3ms.
These criteria are deliberately made sensitive and are required to remain active for a prolonged period
prior to being reported to avoid nuisance errors.
The ping-pong alarm also causes the module to go into minor alarm which goes out as a bit on the
logic bus. The system logic in the GARD controller module has a timer that monitors the minor alarm
signal. If this signal is continuously active for a prolonged period (e.g. 10 seconds) the user can be
notified.
Neither the ping-pong alarm or module minor alarm has any direct impact the protection functions of
the relay in any way; they are intended strictly to alert the user.

July 25, 2006 14-61 973.334.3100
14.5.2.7 TRANSFERRED STATUS BITS

The relays are constantly communicating with each other passing data regarding the measured
currents, addressing, ping-pong, etc. Messages are also included that communicate the status of eight
bits received from the logic bus in the chassis. The data is transferred to the remote relay and then
placed onto the logic bus in the remote chassis.
Under normal steady-state conditions the bits are updated approximately 30 times per second. During
trip conditions, however, the status bit messages may be preempted by higher priority protection
messages, resulting in lengthened transfer times.
14.5.2.8 RECLOSER BLOCKING FUNCTION

The GARD 8000 provides a recloser blocking output. The logic is shown in Figure 14-36. This logic
is implemented in the programmable logic processing of the controller module.
The recloser block function is enabled for a period of 3 seconds after the first trip signal is generated
by one of the phases. The user can select if they want to initiate a block for a 2-phase trip or 3-phase
trip condition. The trip output is held for 50ms and then released.
FORCED 3-POLE TRIP
Trip PhA IN OUT

Trip PhB
TIMER
Trip PhC
AT LEAST NUMBER =
ONE PHASE
HAVE TRIPPED ATT_DEC = 3000_0
2 or 3 PHASES
HAVE TRIPPED
RECLOSER BLOCK
IN OUT
TIMER
NUMBER =
ATT_DEC = 50_0
MULTIPHASE RECLOSE BLOCK
ALL 3 PHASES
HAVE TRIPPED
FORCED 3-POLE TRIP
Figure 14-36 Recloser Block Logic
The ‘FORCED 3-POLE TRIP signal is generated by the tripping logic and may be configured to allow
tripping when only the ground generates a trip.
14.5.3 TRIP LOGIC

The GARD 8000 Distance Relay trip logic combines all measuring elements set to produce tripping
into one main TRIP signal.

July 25, 2006 14-62 973.334.3100
14.5.3.1 THREE POLE TRIPPING LOGIC

The three pole tripping logic is implemented in the GARD controller’s logic processing and is shown
in Figure 14-37. Each of the phase and ground processing routines has independent outputs to the
logic bus. These signals are latched and then routed to front panel LED indicators. A target reset
function is implemented using the front panel pushbutton.
These individual trip signals are combined and fed into a timer which holds the output active for a
period after the trip stops being calculated. Following the trip timer the trip output will be blocked if
the relay is out of service, is in test mode (see section 14.5.2.1), or the relay is in major alarm (see
section 14.5.2.4).
quad_latch_x
Input1 Output1 HMIOUT10

HMIIN1
Reset
quad_latch_x
PH_A_TRIP
PH_B_TRIP
U26
PH_C_TRIP
U27 U28
PH_G_TRIP
IN OUT
TRIP_OUT
TIMER
NUMBER = 3
ATT_DEC = 0_100
OUT OF SERVICE
STARTUP MODE
MAJOR ALARM
Figure 14-37 Three Pole Tripping Logic
14.5.3.2 SINGLE POLE TRIPPING LOGIC

The single pole tripping logic is implemented in the GARD controller’s logic processing and is shown
in Figure 14-38. As with the three pole logic each of the phase and ground processing routines have
independent outputs to the logic bus. The generation of these per-phase trip signals is somewhat more
complicated than for the three phase relay. A single-pole relay may be configured to operate as with
single-pole, multiphase, or three-pole tripping.
As with the three pole logic the phase trip signals are latched and then routed to front panel LED
indicators. A target reset function is implemented using the front panel pushbutton.
Each phase has an independent trip output with a trip release timer which holds the output active for a
period after the trip stops being calculated. Depending upon configuration a phase may be forced to
trip even if no fault was calculated for that particular phase (as described below). Following the trip
timer each trip output will be blocked if the relay is out of service, is in startup mode, or the relay is in
major alarm.

July 25, 2006 14-63 973.334.3100
If the relay is configured for 3-pole tripping only a trip on any phase or ground will force a 3-pole trip
(any of the trip outputs may be used). If the relay is operating in backup mode the logic will
automatically operate in 3-pole tripping mode regardless of the user selection.
If the user has enable the single-pole ground tripping feature a trip calculated by ground can cause all
three poles to trip. A trip calculated by ground is delayed to allow the trip to be cleared normally.
If the trip has not been cleared when the timer expires and no phase has calculated a trip, all phases
will be forced to trip.
If two or more phases calculate a trip and the relay is configured for single-pole tripping (rather than
multiphase) all phases will be forced to rip.

RESET TARGETS
U28
Reset
IN OUT
TRIP_A
TIMER
3-POLE TRIPS
NUMBER = 3
BACKUP MODE
ATT_DEC = 0_100
PH_A_TRIP U28
PH_B_TRIP IN OUT
TRIP_B
TIMER
PH_C_TRIP NUMBER = 3
ATT_DEC = 0_100
AT LEAST
ONE PHASE U28
PH_G_TRIP HAS TRIPPED
IN OUT
TRIP_C
TIMER
U9 NUMBER = 3
ATT_DEC = 0_100
IN OUT
TIMER
SINGLE-POLE GROUND TRIP ENABLED
NUMBER =
ATT_DEC = 50_0
FORCED 3-POLE TRIP
2 or 3 PHASES
HAVE TRIPPED
SINGLE-POLE TRIPS OUT OF SERVICE

STARTUP MODE
MAJOR ALARM
Figure 14-38 Single Pole Tripping Logic

July 25, 2006 14-64 973.334.3100
14.6 SEQUENCE OF EVENTS AND OSCILLOGRAPHY
14.6.1 SOE
The relay has a sequence of events recorder (SOE) which can be configured to store information based
upon user selectable triggers. The data saved is an instantaneous “snapshot” of the conditions when the
trigger event occurred. This differs from the oscillography records which records the data over a
period of time around the trigger event.
The user can select various parameters to trigger (initiate) an SOE recording. Any change of a trigger
(becoming active or inactive) will initiate a recording. Trip outputs are automatically enabled as
triggers and cannot be disabled by the user.
14.6.2 OSCILLOGRAPHY
The relay includes an oscillography recording function that allows the conditions surrounding a trip to
be captured for later review. The recording includes the measured currents and a large amount of
status information regarding the system conditions and relay calculations.
14.6.2.1 LENGTH OF OSCILLOGRAPHIC RECORD

The user can select the length of the oscillography recordings between 10 and 180 cycles. The length
selected for each recording can impact the maximum number of recordings the relay can store due to
the finite memory available (see section 0). All of the oscillography recordings saved in the relay must
have the same configuration, therefore, if the user changes the oscillography length setting all
previously recorded oscillography records will be erased.
14.6.2.2 PRE-TRIGGER LENGTH

The user can select the amount of pre-trigger information retained in the oscillography recordings
between 0 and 180 cycles. If the length selected exceeds the user setting for the total recording length
(section 14.6.2.1) the relay will use the selected recording length setting and set the entire recording as
pre-trigger data. All of the oscillography recordings saved in the relay must have the same
configuration, therefore, if the user changes the pre-trigger length setting all previously recorded
oscillography records will be erased.

July 25, 2006 14-65 973.334.3100
14.6.2.3 NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDINGS

A maximum of approximately 2300 cycles can be recorded in the memory. The number of fault
records depends on the length selected for the recording. Maximum number of records is 64, if more
than 36 cycles are recorded per record the maximum number of records will be less than 64. Table 14-
1 shows the rough correspondence between record length and number of records.
Table 14-1 Maximum Number of Oscillography Records

Set Record Length (cycles) Approximate number of records
10 to 36 64
37 to 45 63
46 to 57 50
57 to 75 40
76 to 111 30
112 to 180 20
14.6.2.4 TRIGGER CONDITIONS

The user may configure which signals within the relay will cause an oscillography recording to be
initiated. In addition to the user selected triggers the relay sets all trips as valid oscillography triggers.
Any change of state (becoming active or inactive) of any trigger will initiate an oscillography
recording.
The selection of triggers does not impact what data is recorded in the oscillography.
14.6.2.5 RECORDED DATA

The oscillography records record 33 samples per cycle. Each sample includes all of the measured
currents (as analog measurements), all of the selectable trigger items, and a number of additional status
items (as digital measurements).
Major Alarm
A logical “1” indicates the relay has an active major alarm (see section TBD).
Minor Alarm
A logical “1” indicates the relay has an active minor alarm (see section TBD).
Curr Diff Alarms Phase, A, B, C, and Ground
A logical “1” indicates the phase in question has an active current differential alarm (see section TBD).
Breaker Open
There has been no current measured in any of the four inputs for a period of time (see section TBD).
Remote1 Fault Detector
A logical “1” indicates the remote relay has an active fault detector.

July 25, 2006 14-66 973.334.3100
Comms1 Relay Configuration Mismatch

A logical “1” indicates the remote relay configuration is incompatible with the local relay (e.g. one is
single-pole the other is three-pole).
Ping-Pong Alarm Comms1
A logical “1” indicates there is a ping-pong alarm active (see section TBD).
Address Fail Comms1
A logical “1” indicates the local and remote address settings are not consistent (see section TBD).
Comms1 Fail
A logical “1” indicates the communications channel has failed (see section TBD).
Comms1 Alarm
A logical “1” indicates the communications channel has an active alarm condition (see section TBD).
Comms1 Primary GB4T
A logical “1” indicates the primary guard before trip requirements have been satisfied (see section
TBD).
Comms1 Backup GB4T
A logical “1” indicates the backup guard before trip requirements have been satisfied (see section
TBD).
LB Input 89B
A logical “1” indicates the logic bus input to the relay representing the 89B signal is active.
LB Input Trip Enable
A logical “1” indicates the logic bus input to the relay representing the trip enable signal is active.
LB Input Tx Transferred Status #0 through #7
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding logic bus input to the relay is active.
LB Output Phase, A, B, C, and Ground Trips
A logical “1” indicates the relay has tripped the corresponding phase and is sending the trip out to the
logic bus.
LB Output Comms 1 Fail
A logical “1” indicates the relay has detected a communications failure and is sending this information
out to the logic bus.
LB Output Relay Out of Service
A logical “1” indicates the relay is out of service and is sending this information out to the logic bus.
LB Output Current Differential Alarm
A logical “1” indicates the relay has calculated a current differential alarm condition and is sending
this information out to the logic bus.

July 25, 2006 14-67 973.334.3100
LB Output LOL/OC Alarm

A logical “1” indicates the relay has calculated either a loss of load (backup mode) or open conductor
(primary mode) condition and is sending this information out to the logic bus.
LB Output Single-Pole
A logical “1” indicates the relay has been configured for single-pole mode and is sending this
information out to the logic bus (only meaningful in a single-pole relay).
LB Output Major Alarm
A logical “1” indicates the relay is in a major alarm condition and is sending this information out to the
logic bus.
LB Output Minor Alarm
A logical “1” indicates the relay is in a minor alarm condition and is sending this information out to the
logic bus.
LB Output Backup Mode
A logical “1” indicates the relay is in backup mode and is sending this information out to the logic bus.
LB Output Startup Mode
A logical “1” indicates the relay is in startup mode and is sending this information out to the logic bus.
LB Outputs Rx Transfer Status #0 through #7
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding logic bus output from the relay is active.
Phase A, B, C, and Ground Overcurrent FDs
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has detected an overcurrent fault. Note that this is tied
to an algorithm internal parameter and is not fully processed into a true fault detector. This parameter
should be reviewed in conjunction with the “aggregate FD” described below.
Phase A, B, C, and Ground Peak Change FDs
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has detected a peak change fault. Note that this is tied
Phase A, B, C, and Ground Pulse Width FDs
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has detected a pulse width fault. Note that this is tied
Phase A, B, C, and Ground Slope Change FDs
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has detected a slope change fault. Note that this is tied
Phase A, B, C, and Ground Polarity Change FDs
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has detected a polarity change fault. Note that this is
tied to an algorithm internal parameter and is not fully processed into a true fault detector. This
parameter should be reviewed in conjunction with the “aggregate FD” described below.

July 25, 2006 14-68 973.334.3100
Phase A, B, C, and Ground Breaker Closing FDs

A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has detected a breaker closing fault. Note that this is
tied to an algorithm internal parameter and is not fully processed into a true fault detector. This
parameter should be reviewed in conjunction with the “aggregate FD” described below.
Phase A, B, C, and Ground Aggregate FDs
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has an active fault detector. This is the aggregate FD
– it is the combined and processed result from all of the individual FD elements. As described in the
individual FDs above, this is the only true indication that the relay has an active fault detector. All of
the above contributors to the FD are combined and extended as required to generate the aggregate fault
detector.
Phase A, B, C, and Ground Aggregate Trips
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has tripped. This is the aggregate trip – it is the
combined and processed result from all of the individual trip elements. This is the phase-specific trip
signal that is sent to the logic bus and is used to generate the actual trip signal. All of the contributors
to the tripping process (as listed below) are combined and extended as required to generate the
aggregate trip signals.
Phase A, B, and C Open Conductor Trips
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has detected a trip condition based upon the open
conductor (primary) algorithm. Note that this is tied to an algorithm internal parameter and is not fully
processed into a true trip output. This parameter should be reviewed in conjunction with the
“aggregate trips” described above.
Phase A, B, C, and Ground Curr Diff Trips
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has detected a trip condition based upon the current
differential (primary) algorithm. Note that this is tied to an algorithm internal parameter and is not
fully processed into a true trip output. This parameter should be reviewed in conjunction with the
Phase A, B, C, and Ground HST Trips
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has detected a trip condition based upon the HST
(primary) algorithm. Note that this is tied to an algorithm internal parameter and is not fully processed
into a true trip output. This parameter should be reviewed in conjunction with the “aggregate trips”
described above.
Phase A, B, C, and Ground Breaker Open
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has determined the breaker to be open. In a single-
pole system the phases operate independently, in a three-pole system they will all be the same.
Phase A, B, C, and Ground TOC Backup Trips
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has detected a trip condition based upon the TOC
(backup) algorithm. Note that this is tied to an algorithm internal parameter and is not fully processed
described above.

July 25, 2006 14-69 973.334.3100
Phase A, B, C, and Ground Overcurrent Backup Trips

A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has detected a trip condition based upon the
overcurrent backup algorithm. Note that this is tied to an algorithm internal parameter and is not fully
processed into a true trip output. This parameter should be reviewed in conjunction with the
Phase A, B, C, and Ground LOL Backup Trips
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has detected a trip condition based upon the LOL
backup algorithm. Note that this is tied to an algorithm internal parameter and is not fully processed
described above.
Phase A, B, C, and Ground CIF Backup Trips
A logical “1” indicates the corresponding phase has detected a trip condition based upon the CIF
backup algorithm. Note that this is tied to an algorithm internal parameter and is not fully processed
described above.
Remote #1 Phase A, B, C, and Ground TCDT Received
Setting this to “Yes” will allow the receipt of a TCDT message from the remote relay to trigger an
oscillography recording.
Remote #1 Phase A, B, C, and Ground HST Received
Setting this to “Yes” will allow the receipt of a HST message from the remote relay to trigger an
oscillography recording.
14.6.2.6 VIEWING RECORDED OSCILLOGAPHIC RECORDS

All oscillography records are stored locally in the relay in a compacted format. To view the records
the user must transfer the data from the GARD 8000 system to a PC for viewing (see section TBD).
During this process the data is converted to a COMTRADE (1999) format.
Once in the PC the files may be viewed with any standard COMTRADE reader or the ZIVerCOM
Analyzer provided with the GARD 8000 System.

July 25, 2006 14-70 973.334.3100
INDEX
SECTION 15. INDEX

A
DISTANCE RELAY, 13-9
ALARM FRONT VIEW 3U, 5-4
CONFIGURATION, 7-81 INTERCONNECTED INSTALLED IN RACK OR
MAJOR, 2-10 CABINET, 4-4
MINOR, 2-10 INTERCONNECTED MOUNTED ON SHIPPING RAILS,
RELAYS, 2-10 4-4
SYSTEM, 6-44 MODULE PLACEMENT 3U, 6-2
MODULE PLACEMENT 6U, 6-3
APPLICATIONS, 2-1 REAR VIEW 3U, 5-4
REAR VIEW 6U, 5-3
ARCHITECTURE WEB PAGE CONFIGURATION 3U, 5-25
WEB PAGE CONFIGURATION STATUS 6U, 5-26
GARD 8000, 2-2
HARDWARE, 2-4 COMMISSIONING
SYSTEM, 2-5
AUDIO-TONE, 4-26
PLC, 4-41
B TELEPROTECTION, 4-13
COMMS I/O BASE MODULE AND COMMS MODULES,
BLOCK DIAGRAMS 6-37
AUDIO TONE LOGIC, CHANNEL 1 USED AS A
COMMS I/O MODULES
MODEM, 12-7
AUDIO TONE LOGIC, SIMPLE, 12-11 AVAILABLE, 6-40
AUDIO TONE, DUAL 1 2, DUAL 3 4, 12-9
COMMS MODULES
BUS
MATING CONNECTIONS, 4-10
COMMS, 2-6
CONTROL, 2-6 COMMUNICATIONS
LOGIC, 2-6 OVERVIEW DIAGRAM, 5-22
COMMUNICATIONS CHANNEL
C
AUX, 2-24
CHARACTERISTICS CONFIGURATION
LONG HAUL FIBER UNITS, 6-38 HARDWARE, 2-8

SHORT HAUL MODULE, 6-38 CONFIGURING A PC
CHASSIS WINDOWS 95/98 OR ME, 5-10
6U FRONT VIEW, 5-2 WINDOWS XP OR 2000, 5-6
CARD SLOT COLORS, 5-27 CONNECT
CONFIGURATION
ASYNC COMMS, 7-21 GARD TO PC WITH RS-232 (WINDOWS XP/2000, 5-28
ASYNC COMMS TIME SLOTS, 7-25 CONNECTIONS
AUDIO-TONE TELEPROTECTION, 7-26
DIGITAL TELEPROTECTION, 7-12 ALARM AND ALERT RELAY, 4-6
INPUT MODULE, 7-3 CHASSIS GROUND, 4-6
OUTPUT MODULE, 7-4 FIBER OPTIC, 4-6
POWER LINE CARRIER, 7-47 INPUT POWER, 4-11
TIME SLOTS, 7-18 PLC, 4-7
CONFIGURATION, 7-1 RS-499/X.21/V.35, 4-7
CONFIGURATION COMMUNICATIONS
CONNECTIONS DIAGRAM
DIGITAL INTERFACE, 7-8
G.703, 7-11 3U DISTANCE RELAY PLUS TPS, 2-9
G37.94, 7-11
LONG HAUL FIBER, 7-11 CONTROLLER CARD BACKGROUND COLOR, 6-9
RS232 ASYNC, 7-11
T1/E1, 7-11 CONTROLLER MODULE, 2-11, 6-4
CURRENT DIFF, 14-3
July 25, 2006 15-1 973.334.3100
INDEX
CONTROLS AND INDICATOR, 6-5 DISCRETE I/O BASE MODULE

CONTROLS AND INDICATORS TOP AND REAR VIEW, 6-33
AUDIO-TONE TPS DRAWING, 6-17 DISCRETE I/O BASE MODULE AND I/O MODULES
LOCATOR DRAWING DIGITAL TPS MODULE, 6-15 6-32
LOCATOR DRAWING DISPLAY WITH TPS, 6-12
INPUT UNIT, 6-32
CURRENT DIFF
DISPLAY UNIT, 2-13
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS, 14-58
ALARMS DISPLAY WITH TPS MODULE, 5-23
MAJOR, 14-59
MINOR, 14-59 DISTANCE
APPLICATIONS, 14-43
PROTECTION, 14-43 LOGIC
BACKUP PROTECTION, 14-1 TRANSIENT BLOCK, 13-84
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES, 14-48
DISTANCE RELAY, 13-1
CONFIGURATION SYSTEM OVERVIEW, 14-2
FUNCTIONS BREAKER FAILURE, 13-117
COMMUNICATIONS, 14-60 BROKEN CONDUCTOR, 13-117
MAPPING CHARACTERISTIC CURVES, 13-93
INPUT, 14-7 CLOSE-INTO-FAULT, 13-66
OUTPUT, 14-8 CONFIGURATION, 13-8
OSCILLOGRAPHY, 14-42 DCB, 13-80
MAX. NUMBER OF RECORDS, 14-66 DCUB, 13-82
VIEWIING RECORDS, 14-70 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION, 13-53
OVERVIEW, 14-1 DIRECTIONAL ELEMENTS, 13-61
PROTECTION DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT, 13-87
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS, 14-47 DIRECTIONAL UNITS, 13-108
CLOSE INTO FAULT, 14-45 FAULT LOCATOR, 13-144
HIGH SET TRIP, 14-45 FAULT RECORDS, 13-139
OPEN CONDUCTOR, 14-47 FREQUENCY UNITS, 13-115
PROTECTION FUNCTIONS, 14-1 GENERAL OVERVIEW, 13-1
REAR CONNECTIONS, 14-4 LOAD ENCHROACHMENT, 13-68
RECORDED DATA, 14-66 LOGIC
RELAY STATUS, 14-30 DISTANCE ELEMENTS, 13-64
COMMUNICATIONS, 14-36 OPEN POLE, 13-89
GENERAL, 14-31 RECLOSING, 13-125
LAST TRIP, 14-40 TRIP, 13-122
METERING, 14-39 VOLTAGE MEMORY, 13-65
PHASE, 14-34 WEAK INFEED, 13-85
SOE, 14-41 MHO, 13-53
TRANSFERRED BITS, 14-38 NON PILOT AND PILOT SCHEMES, 13-71
SETTINGS OPERATING TIMES, 13-4
BACKUP PROTECTION, 14-21 OUT-OF-STEP, 13-69
COMMUNICATIONS, 14-16 PHASE LOCATOR, 13-144
GENERAL, 14-13 POTT, 13-78
OSCILLOGRAPHY, 14-28 PUTT, 13-76
PRIMARY, 14-17 QUADRILATERAL CHARACTERISTIC, 13-58
RELAY, 14-12 RECLOSING UNIT, 13-123
SOE, 14-25 REMOTE OPEN BREAKER, 13-87
SLOPE, OPERATE LEVEL, 14-45 RESISTIVE BLINDER, 13-62
SOE AND OSCILLOGRAPHY, 14-65 SETTINGS
SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS, 3-7 BREAKER FAILURE, 13-31
CURRENT ELEMENTS, 13-22
CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION, 2-23
DFR, 13-40
DISTANCE ELEMENTS, 13-32
CURRENT LIMIT MODULE, 6-45 GENERAL, 13-16
GROUND ELEMENTS, 13-25
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE ELEMENTS, 13-27
D OSCILLOGRAPHY MASK, 13-41
RECLOSER AND SYNC CHECK, 13-45
SOE MASK, 13-49
DIMENSIONS
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS, 13-43
FOR MOUNTING, 4-3 SOE, 13-137

July 25, 2006 15-2 973.334.3100
INDEX
RECORDS, 13-132 IP ADDRESSES, 5-6

TRIP STATUS, 13-132
SPECIFICATIONS, 13-2
STANDARD AND TYPE TESTS, 13-6 J
STUB BUS, 13-66
PROTECTION, 13-68
SYNC CHECK, 13-118 JUMPER LOCATIONS
THERMAL IMAGE UNIT, 13-119
PLC ANALOG MODULE, 6-22
TIME OVERCURRENT UNITS, 13-90
PLC DIGITAL MODULE, 6-19
VOLTAGE UNITS, 13-111
SYSTEM I/O, 3U, 6-30
E
JUMPER SETTINGS
ANALOG PLC MODULE, 6-24
EFFECTIVE PAGES, XVI DIGITAL PLC MODULE, 6-20
PLC ANALOG MODULE, 6-25
ETHERNET CABLES, 5-15 TPS MODULE, 6-14
TPS MODULE, AUDIO-TONE, 6-16
ETHERNET PORT TX FILTER, 10-8
FRONT, 5-6 JUMPERS
ETHERNET PORT INPUT UNIT, 6-32
ON SYSTEM I/O MODULE (NO GPS MODULE
REAR, 5-15 INSTALLED), 6-31
F L
FIBER DATA, 3-4 LEDS, 2-14
FILE OPERATIONS, 7-85 FRONT ETHERNET PORT, 5-14

REAR ETHERNET PORT, 5-15
FSK OPERATION, 10-2 LOGIC
CURRENT DIFF
G TRIP, 14-62
GPS, 2-12 LOGIC CONFIGURATION, 8-10
LOGIC DESIGN RESERVED I/O

I HMI BIT ASSIGNMENT, 8-22
LOGIC BITS, 8-23
I/O’S SOE TRIGGERS BIT ASSIGNMENT, 8-22
REAR SYSTEM, 2-13 LOGIC TPS, 8-16
INPUTS INPUT MAPPING, 8-16

OPTION SETTINGS, 8-17
OPTO-ISOLATED, 2-20 OUTPUT MAPPING, 8-16
TIMERS, 8-17
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING, 4-1
LOGIN
INTERFACES
ADMINISTRATOR, 5-16
C37.94 SHORT HAUL FIBER, 2-19 HOW TO ACCESS, 5-24
COMMUNICATION, 2-17
FIBER, 2-20
G.703 CO-DIRECTIONAL, 2-19
RS-232 ASYNC, 2-19
RS-449, X.21 AND V.35, 2-19
T1/E1 AND E1 BNC, 2-19 M
INTERNET EXPLORER
VERSION OF, 5-5 METER CALIBRATION

July 25, 2006 15-3 973.334.3100
INDEX
REFLECTED POWER, 10-10 SPECIFICATIONS, 6-42

TX LEVEL, 10-9
PROCESSOR
MIDPLANE, 6-45
HMI, 2-12
LOGIC, 2-12
MODULES
PRODUCT INFORMATION, 1-1
DESCRIPTIONS, 6-1
GENERAL INFORMATION, 4-12
REAR PANEL
MOUNTING THE GARD UNIT, 4-2
INDIVIDUAL CHASSIS, 4-2 SYSTEM I/O, 6U, 6-27
O R
ON-OFF OPERATION, 10-5 REDUNDANCY, 2-7

CONTROL, 6-7
OUTPUT UNIT, 6-35 CONTROLS AND INDICATORS, 6-9
RELAY, 6-35 IMPLEMENTATION, 6-8
RELAY COMPONENT SIDE DRAWING, 6-35 RULES OF OPERATION, 6-7
OUTPUTS RELATED DOCUMENTATION, II

RELAY, 2-21
REVISION RECORD, XVII
SOLID STATE, 2-21
RPM TEST VALUES, 10-11
P
PASSWORDS, 5-15 SAFETY SUMMARY, IV
PDA
S
EXTERNAL, 5-23
FRONT PANEL, 5-23
SET-UP, 5-23 SCHEMATICS
SITE MAP, 5-24
AC/DC DIFFERENTIAL RELAY, 14-4
PLC, 2-23 DEFAULT LOGIC - FSK-PLC, 10-23
DEFAULT LOGIC - ON/OFF PLC, 10-21
PLC - ON/OFF LOGIC
CURRENT DIFF INPUTS, 14-9
BLOCK DIAGRAM, 10-6 CURRENT DIFF OUTPUTS, 14-10
PLC ANALOG MODULE PLC ANALOG MODULE, 10-13
STEPPED DISTANCE, 13-73
POWER AMP, 6-23
SECURITY
PLC ANALOG MODULE PANEL, 6-23
TIMER SETTINGS, 7-34
PLC MODULES SERVICE CHANNEL
ANALOG, 6-18 64 kb, 2-27
DIGITAL, 6-18 8 kb, 2-27
REMOTE, 2-26, 5-20
PLC-FSK
SETTING THE TX CARRIER FREQUENCY RANGE,
BLOCK DIAGRAM, 10-3
10-8
PORT PRIORITY, 5-5
SOE, 2-20
POWER LINE CARRIER, 10-1
SOE SYSTEM COUNTERS, 7-75
POWER SUPPLY, 2-10
SPECIFICATIONS
I/O MODULE, 6-43
COMMUNICATION INTERFACES, 3-3
POWER SUPPLY MODULE, 6-41 DISTANCE PROTECTION, 3-5
GENERAL INFORMATION, 6-41 PLC, 3-8
July 25, 2006 15-4 973.334.3100
INDEX
SYSTEM, 3-1 TERMINAL BLOCKS

SYSTEM I/O MODULES, 6-26 MAKING CONNECTIONS, 4-5
TEST POINTS
SYSTEM LABELS AND TRIGGERS, 7-64
ANALOG MODULE, 4-42
EDIT HMI BIT LABELS, 7-79
LED LOGIC ASSIGNMENTS, 7-67 TESTS
LOGIC BIT LABELS, 7-76
SOE, 7-71 AUDIOTONE MODULE, 11-39
C37.94 SHORT HAUL FIBER INTERFACE, 11-18
SYSTEM LOGIC COMMUNICATIONS MODULES, 11-10
CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL, 11-49
BUFFER, 8-9 DIGITAL INTERFACE, 11-11
CONFIGURATION, 7-91 G.703 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE, 11-23
INPUT MAPPING, 7-92 INPUT MODULE, 11-2
OPTION SETTINGS, 7-96 LONG HAUL FIBER, 11-28
OUTPUT MAPPING, 7-94 OUTPUT MODULE, 11-6
TIMER SETTINGS, 7-99 PLC MODULE, 11-44, 11-54
GATES, 8-1 T1/E1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE, 11-35
INPUT MAPPING, 8-12
INVERTER (NOT), 8-5 TESTS AND DIAGNOSTICS, 11-1
LATCH, 8-6
OPTION SETTINGS, 8-14 TPS, 2-16
OUTPUT MAPPING, 8-13
THREE INPUT AND GATE, 8-3 TPS - DEFAULT AND DISTANCE LOGIC, 8-18
THREE INPUT OR GATE, 8-4
TIMER, 8-8 INPUT MAPPING, 8-18
TIMER SETTINGS, 8-15 OPTION SETTINGS, 8-20
TOGGLE GATE, 8-7 OUTPUT MAPPING, 8-19
TRUE AND FALSE, 8-9 TIMERS, 8-21
TWO INPUT AND GATE, 8-1
TPS MODULE
TWO INPUT OR GATE, 8-3
XOR GATE, 8-4 AUDIO-TONE, 6-16
DIGITAL, 6-14
SYSTEM USER INTERFACE, 5-1
DISPLAY WITH, 6-11
OPTIONAL NO-COMMS/NO TPS, 6-11
T TRANSPORT DELAY
ON/OFF BLOCK, 10-7
TECHNICAL DATA, 3-1 TRIP TRANSPORT DELAY
TELEPROTECTION APPLICATIONS, 9-1 2F, 10-4

3F, 10-4
DIRECT TRANSFER TRIP, 9-3
DIRECTIONAL COMPARISON BLOCKING, 9-4
DIRECTIONAL COMPARSION UNBLOCKING, 9-5
U
PERMISSIVE TRANSFER TRIP, 9-2 UNPACKING, 4-1
TELEPROTECTION SYSTEM, 2-21 INDIVIDUAL CHASSIS, 4-1
INTERCONNECTED CHASSIS, 4-2
TERMINAL
DISTANCE PROTECTION, 2-22 V
TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS VENTILATION, 4-4
G.703, 4-9
RS-232 Async, 4-9 W
RS-499/X.21/V.35, 4-8
T1/E1, 4-9 WARRANTY, II
TB1, 4-7
WEB SERVER, 5-1

July 25, 2006 15-5 973.334.3100
INDEX

July 25, 2006 15-6 973.334.3100

RFL Gard 8000

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RFL Gard 8000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

GARD 8000 SYSTEM

Publication Number MC8000SYS

GARD 8000 SYS RFL Electronics Inc.

The Emulator is shipped from the factory on one CD labeled SW8KEMUL0000001.

RFL Electronics Inc.

GARD 8000 SYS RFL Electronics Inc.

GARD 8000 SYS RFL Electronics Inc.

DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS

GARD 8000 SYS RFL Electronics Inc.

THE LASER SOURCE IS A CLASS I LASER PRODUCT WHICH COMPLIES

GARD 8000 SYS RFL Electronics Inc.

Section 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION .............................................................................................................................. 1-1

Section 2. APPLICATIONS.................................................................................................................................................. 2-1

Section 3. TECHNICAL DATA ........................................................................................................................................... 3-1

Section 4. INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING...................................................................................................... 4-1

Section 5. SYSTEM USER INTERFACE ............................................................................................................................ 5-1

Section 6. MODULE DESCRIPTIONS................................................................................................................................ 6-1

Section 7. CHASSIS CONFIGURATION SETTINGS ........................................................................................................ 7-1

Section 8. SYSTEM LOGIC .................................................................................................................................................8-1

Section 9. TELEPROTECTION ........................................................................................................................................... 9-1

Section 10. POWER LINE CARRIER................................................................................................................................ 10-1

Section 11. TESTS AND DIAGNOSTICS ......................................................................................................................... 11-1

Section 12. AUDIO TONE ................................................................................................................................................. 12-1

Section 13. DISTANCE RELAY ........................................................................................................................................ 13-1

GARD 8000 SYS RFL Electronics Inc.

Section 15. INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................. 15-1

GARD 8000 SYS RFL Electronics Inc.

Figure 5-1. GARD 8000 Log-In Page ................................................................................................................................... 5-1

Figure 6-1. Module Placement In GARD 8000 3U Chassis.................................................................................................. 6-2

GARD 8000 SYS RFL Electronics Inc.

Figure 8-1. Two input AND gate .......................................................................................................................................... 8-1

Figure 9-1. Permissive Underreaching Transfer Trip............................................................................................................ 9-2

Figure 11-1. System Testing web page ............................................................................................................................... 11-1

Figure 13-1. Three Phase Operating Times......................................................................................................................... 13-4

GARD 8000 SYS RFL Electronics Inc.

GARD 8000 SYS RFL Electronics Inc.

Table 3-1. Fiber data ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-4

Table 4-1. TB1 Terminal Assignments ................................................................................................................................. 4-7

Table 5-1. Port priority.......................................................................................................................................................... 5-5

Table 6-1. GARD 8000 System Modules.............................................................................................................................. 6-1

Table 7-1. Timeslot Baud Rate............................................................................................................................................ 7-22

Table 10-1. 2F Trip Transport Delay and Channel Spacing................................................................................................ 10-4

Table 12-1. Audio Tone Logic Block Diagrams ................................................................................................................. 12-1

Table 13-1. MHO Characteristic ....................................................................................................................................... 13-54

Table 14-1 Maximum Number of Oscillography Records ............................................................................................... 14-66

GARD 8000 SYS RFL Electronics Inc.

Front Matter July 25, 2006

Section 1 March, 2006

Section 2 July 25, 2006

Section 3 May 15, 2006

Section 4 May 15, 2006

Section 5 April 28, 2006

Section 6 July 25, 2006

Section 7 March 1, 2006

Section 8 January 10, 2006

Section 9 March 1, 2006

Section 10 March 1, 2006

Section 11 July 25, 2006

Section 12 September 19, 2005

Section 13 July 25, 2006

Section 14 July 25, 2006 (New Issue)

Section 15 July 25, 2006 (New Issue)